The 2024 ATP®

Official Rulebook

Copyright © 2024 by ATP Tour, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Reproduction of this work in whole or in part without the written per-

mission of the ATP Tour, Inc., is prohibited.

Printed in the United States of America.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS............................ 7
1.01 Categories of Tournaments ....................................................................... 7
1.02 Tournament Week...................................................................................... 7
1.03 Match Schedule Plan................................................................................. 8
1.04 Finals Options............................................................................................ 8
1.05 Change of Tournament Site........................................................................ 9
1.06 Commitment to Rules/ATP Official Rulebook............................................. 9
1.07 Commitment, Membership Obligations and Bonus Pool............................ 9
1.08 Unsatisfied Player Commitment Penalties............................................... 14
1.09 Mandatory Player Meeting....................................................................... 14
1.10 Player Eligibility/Player University/Physical Exam.................................... 14
1.11 Waiver of Claims....................................................................................... 15
1.12 Waiver/Player Publicity and Promotion.................................................... 15
1.13 Stars Program ......................................................................................... 16
1.14 Special Events - Exhibitions..................................................................... 17
1.15 Promotional Fees .................................................................................... 18
1.16 Virtual Insertion......................................................................................... 18
1.17 Non-Exclusive Media Highlight Rights. ................................................... 18
1.18 Quality/Broadcast .................................................................................... 19
1.19 Seating and Attendance........................................................................... 19
1.20 Hotel Accommodations (Rooms) . ........................................................... 19
1.21 Benefits (Effective January 1, 2024)......................................................... 26

II. BRANDING.........................................................29
2.01 Identification - ATP Tour Tournaments...................................................... 29
2.02 Identification - ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments................................... 35

III. FINANCIAL........................................................39
3.01 Composition of Commitment ................................................................... 39
3.02 Currency . ................................................................................................ 39
3.03 Default of Prize Money Payments ........................................................... 39
3.04 Fee Obligation.......................................................................................... 39
3.05 Fees/Other Payments.............................................................................. 40
3.06 Insurance.................................................................................................. 40
3.07 Letter of Credit - New/Conditional Tournaments...................................... 41
3.08 Prize Money............................................................................................. 41
3.09 On-Site Prize Money................................................................................ 47
3.11 On-Site Prize Money Adjustment.............................................................. 48
3.12 Late Payment .......................................................................................... 49
3.13 Taxes-Notice of Withholdings .................................................................. 49
3.14 Withholding From Prize Money................................................................ 49
3.15 Prizes and Non-Cash Awards.................................................................. 49
3.16 Release from Financial Commitment....................................................... 50
3.17 ATP Masters 1000 Tournament Financial Information . ........................... 50
3.18 ATP Tournament 500 Financial Information.............................................. 54
3.19 ATP 250 Tournament Financial Information . ........................................... 60
3.20 ATP Masters 1000 Player Compensation & ATP Variable Bonus Pool..... 63
3.21 ATP 500 Prize Money Formula Rule........................................................ 64
3.22 ATP 250 Tournament Prize Money........................................................... 66
3.23 Challenger Tournament Prize Money....................................................... 66

3
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS.............................. 67 7.02 Entries.................................................................................................... 129
7.03 Entry Deadlines...................................................................................... 130
4.01 Nitto ATP Finals - Singles......................................................................... 67 7.04 Entry/Withdrawal Method....................................................................... 136
4.02 Nitto ATP Finals - Doubles ...................................................................... 70 7.05 Withdrawal/Late Withdrawal Penalties................................................... 141
4.03 United Cup............................................................................................... 73 7.06 One Tournament Per Week and Exception............................................ 144
4.04 Next Gen ATP Finals................................................................................ 89 7.07 Play-Up Regulation (ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments)...................... 145
7.08 The Draw................................................................................................ 146
V. PERSONNEL......................................................93 7.09 Size and Method of Draw....................................................................... 150
5.01 Tournament Director................................................................................. 93 7.10 Special Exempts (SE)............................................................................ 152
5.02 Tour Manager........................................................................................... 93 7.11 Time of Draw........................................................................................... 156
5.03 Public Relations (“PR”)............................................................................. 93 7.12 Wild Cards . ........................................................................................... 157
5.04 Doctor, Physiotherapist and Massage Therapist...................................... 94 7.13 Selection of Entries................................................................................ 159
5.05 Agents, Tier I and Tier II .......................................................................... 96 7.14 Seeds Definition .................................................................................... 164
5.06 Supervisor ............................................................................................... 96 7.15 Number of Seeds................................................................................... 165
5.07 Chair Umpire / Review Official ................................................................ 98 7.17 Qualifying Placement ............................................................................ 166
5.08 Line Umpire ........................................................................................... 101 7.18 Byes - Assignment and Placement . ...................................................... 166
5.09 Referee . ................................................................................................ 103 7.19 Remake of Draw . .................................................................................. 167
5.10 Chief of Umpires . .................................................................................. 104 7.20 Lucky Losers, Substitutions and Vacancies........................................... 168
5.11 Ball Persons............................................................................................ 105 7.21 Match Scheduling . ................................................................................ 177
5.12 ATP/GRAND SLAMS/ITF/WTA Code of Conduct for Officials................ 106 7.22 On-Court Procedures and Requirements............................................... 184
7.23 Line Umpire Requirement, Positions and Calls...................................... 206
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS............. 107 7.24 Scoring of Match.................................................................................... 208
7.25 Announcing............................................................................................. 209
6.01 Courts..................................................................................................... 107
6.02 Match and Practice Courts .................................................................... 109 VIII. THE CODE......................................................213
6.03 Balls . ..................................................................................................... 110
6.04 Crowd Movement / Spectator Seating.................................................... 112 8.01 Tournament Obligations ........................................................................ 213
6.05 Security at Tournaments . ...................................................................... 113 8.02 Tournament Standards Violations ......................................................... 213
6.06 Equipment & Supplies ........................................................................... 113 8.03 Tournament Major Offenses................................................................... 216
6.07 Temperature and Ventilation For Indoor Facilities.................................. 115 8.04 Player Code of Conduct (“Code”)........................................................... 219
6.08 Offices ................................................................................................... 115 8.05 Player Major Offenses/Procedures......................................................... 244
6.09 Communication Devices......................................................................... 115 8.06 Tennis Anti-Corruption Program (“TACP”).............................................. 248
6.10 Tournament Credentialing and Ticketing................................................ 116 8.07 Final Dispute Resolution........................................................................ 248
6.11 Player Benefits - Guest Passes/Credentials/Tickets ............................. 118
6.12 ATP Family Lounge and ATP Player Lounge.......................................... 119 IX. Pepperstone ATP RANKINGS......................... 249
6.13 Locker Room ......................................................................................... 120 9.01 Definitions............................................................................................... 249
6.14 The Gymnasium (“Gym”) . ..................................................................... 120 9.02 Eligibility................................................................................................. 249
6.15 Laundry Service..................................................................................... 121 9.03 Pepperstone ATP Rankings.................................................................... 250
6.16 Stringing Service ................................................................................... 121 9.05 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings................................... 258
6.17 Food ...................................................................................................... 122 9.06 Retiring from the Professional Tennis Circuit......................................... 258
6.18 On-Site Access / Limits to On-Site Access............................................. 123
6.19 Transportation ....................................................................................... 123 X. EXHIBITS...........................................................259
6.20 Physiotherapist/Treatment Room........................................................... 124
6.21 Automated External Defibrillator (“AED”)................................................ 125 EXHIBIT A.01 - ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps................................... 259
6.22 First Aid.................................................................................................. 125 EXHIBIT A.02 - Size Relationships - Men Only Events.................................. 259
6.23 Emergency Action Plan.......................................................................... 125 EXHIBIT A.03 - Size Relationship - Combined Events................................... 260
6.24 Anti-Doping Facilities and On-Site Personnel Assistance...................... 125 EXHIBIT A.04 - Positioning............................................................................. 261
6.25 Media Facilities Guidelines . .................................................................. 125 EXHIBIT A.05 - Exclusion Area...................................................................... 262
6.26 Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines........................................... 127 EXHIBIT A.06.1 - Acceptable & Unacceptable uses - Men Ony..................... 263
EXHIBIT A.06.2 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Men Only................... 264
VII. THE COMPETITION.........................................129 EXHIBIT A.06.3 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Men only.................... 265
EXHIBIT A.06.4 Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined.................... 266
7.01 ATP Fees................................................................................................ 129 EXHIBIT A.06.5 Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined.................... 267
4 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
EXHIBIT A.06.6 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined.................. 268 1.01 Categories of Tournaments
EXHIBIT A.07 - Website Exhibit..................................................................... 269
EXHIBIT A.08 - Scoreboards / Draw Boards.................................................. 269 In official men’s professional tennis, there are five (5) categories of events. ATP Tour
EXHIBIT A.09 - Electronic Devices................................................................. 270 tournaments and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments are governed by ATP. Unless oth-
EXHIBIT A.10 - Nets / Net Signage................................................................ 271 erwise specified, all regulations are applicable to both ATP Tour and ATP Challenger
EXHIBIT A.11 - Media Backdrop.................................................................... 272 Tour tournaments.
EXHIBIT A.12 - Court Surface Color.............................................................. 273 ATP Tour tournaments
EXHIBIT A.13.1 - Court Host Locality - Option 1 - Hard Court....................... 274
EXHIBIT A.13.1 - Court Host Locality - Option 1 - Clay Court........................ 275 ATP Tour Finals (singles & doubles)
EXHIBIT A.13.2 - Court Host Locality - Option 2 - Text.................................. 276 United Cup
EXHIBIT A.13.2 - Court Host Locality - Option 2 - Logo................................. 277 ATP Tour Masters 1000
EXHIBIT A.14 - Court Backdrops................................................................... 278 ATP Tour 500
EXHIBIT A.15 - ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark.......................................... 279 ATP Tour 250
EXHIBIT A.16 - ATP Challenger Tour Website............................................... 279 ATP Challenger Tour tournaments
EXHIBIT A.17. ATP Challenger Tour Court Backdrops................................... 280 Grand Slams
EXHIBIT B - ATP Tour Logo............................................................................ 281
EXHIBIT C - Broadcast Standards................................................................. 283 Davis Cup
EXHIBIT D - Attendance Standards............................................................... 287 ITF Men’s WTT
EXHIBIT E - Virtual Insertion.......................................................................... 289
EXHIBIT F - Lighting....................................................................................... 290 1.02 Tournament Week
EXHIBIT G - ATP Challenger Tour Logo (Print & Promotional Materials)....... 291
EXHIBIT H - ATP Challenger Tour Logo (On-Court Version).......................... 291 A. Main Draw. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament is assigned a spe-
EXHIBIT I - Rules of Tennis............................................................................ 292 cific tournament week on the calendar for scheduling of the main draws in singles and
EXHIBIT J - Prize Money .............................................................................. 326 doubles commencing on a Monday and concluding on a Sunday, except as approved
EXHIBIT K - Glossary..................................................................................... 327 by ATP. ATP Challenger Tour 75 to 125 tournaments scheduled in the weeks prior to
EXHIBIT L - Chief of Umpires......................................................................... 331 the qualifying or first week of a Grand Slam tournament shall schedule their singles
EXHIBIT M - Special Exempts - ATP 250 to ATP 500 Events........................ 333 and doubles final on a date no later than the Saturday in the assigned week, unless
EXHIBIT N - Special Exempts - ATP Challenger Tour.................................... 334 otherwise approved by ATP. Requests from other Challengers for Saturday final shall
EXHIBIT O - Consent and Agreement Form................................................. 336 be considered on a case by case basis. The deadline for applying for a Saturday final
EXHIBIT P - Privacy Notice (“HIPAA”)............................................................ 339 is four (4) months prior to the first Monday of the event or prior to the tournament
EXHIBIT Q - Player Food Service.................................................................. 343 being added to the calendar, whichever is first.
EXHIBIT R - Media Facilities Guidelines........................................................ 344
EXHIBIT S - Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines.............................. 345 ATP reserves the right to require different schedule for Challengers scheduled prior to
EXHIBIT T - Review Officials Duties and Procedures for the ELC Systems.. 346 Grand Slam tournaments and ATP Masters 1000.
EXHIBIT T.1 - Review Electronic Line Calling System (Review ELC)........... 347 Case: A tournament, scheduled and announced for a Saturday final,
EXHIBIT T.2 - Live Electronic Line Calling System (LIVE ELC)..................... 354 during the week requests to move the final to Sunday (no weather
EXHIBIT U - Anti-Doping Testing Facilities Guidelines................................... 357 issues), is this allowed?
EXHIBIT V - Retractable Roof Policy............................................................. 359
Decision: Unless weather or other unavoidable circumstances
EXHIBIT W - Writing Table For Umpire Chairs............................................... 360
cause the tournament to be extended to Sunday then no change to
EXHIBIT X - Premier Player Protocol............................................................. 363
the original approved schedule may be made.
EXHIBIT Y - Mandatory Physical.................................................................... 364
EXHIBIT Z - Clothing Logos........................................................................... 365 B. Matches – Number of Sets.
EXHIBIT AA - Sample Basic Accreditation Policy Wording............................ 368
EXHIBIT AB - ATP Fantasy Sport and Betting Sponsorship........................... 374 1) Singles. All matches, including finals, shall be the best of three (3) tie-break sets.
2) Doubles. All matches, including finals, shall be two (2) tie-break sets with a de-
INDEX.....................................................................380 ciding Match Tie-break (10 point) at one (1) set all. Games shall be decided using
the No-Ad scoring method.

C. Monday Finals. No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall extend its
tournament week for a Monday final without prior approval from ATP.

6 7
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
D. Qualifying. a) Schedule a singles exhibition; or
b) Re-schedule the doubles final in its place; or
A tournament may petition, forty-two (42) days prior to the event, for expansion of c) In the case where the doubles final has been completed or is in progress
draw size as long as there is no change in the number of direct acceptances. when it is discovered that there will not be a singles final, the tournament may
elect to have the doubles finalists play a one (1) hour exhibition.
1) ATP Tour. One (1) round per day except when weather or other unavoidable
circumstances require two (2) rounds to be played on the same day. 2) The awards ceremony shall take place immediately following the singles or dou-
bles exhibition or following the doubles final if it has been re-scheduled.
2) ATP Challenger Tour.
a) ATP Challenger 50-125. One (1) round per day except when weather or other C. Doubles.
unavoidable circumstances require two (2) rounds to be played on the same
The doubles final should be scheduled approximately two (2) hours prior to the pub-
day.
lished start time of the singles final, unless otherwise approved by ATP.
3) General. All tournaments must have a singles qualifying competition (unless
there are sufficient places available in the main draw). The singles qualifying 1) Exceptions shall be when one (1) or both of the singles finalists are also involved
competition shall be a single elimination tournament. in the doubles final.
a) All ATP Tour 250 events shall have a 16 draw qualifying. 2) Tournaments may petition ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition for
b) ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 500 qualifying will be one half (1/2) the an exemption to this provision; however, it is the responsibility of the tournament
size of the main draw; i.e. a 56 main draw would have a 28 qualifying draw for to show that there are valid reasons for justifying the exemption.
the 7 qualifying positions.
4) Location. If the qualifying competition is not held at the same site as the main 1.05 Change of Tournament Site
draw, the alternate site must have similar facilities, courts, staff, service and
equipment. The qualifying competition may not be held at a site outside the met- There shall be no change of a tournament site unless approved by ATP. A request
ropolitan area of the main draw without prior written approval of ATP. to change a tournament site must be submitted in writing by the tournament and
received by the appropriate ATP regional office no later than six (6) months prior
5) Surface. The qualifying competition shall be played on the same surface as the to the first Monday of the event. Requests submitted after the deadline will only be
main draw. In situations beyond the control of the tournament, the Supervisor considered if ATP determines there are extenuating circumstances out of the control
may approve the use of courts with a different surface. of the tournament member. Any and all actual costs incurred by ATP during the site
approval process shall be the responsibility of the tournament.
1.03 Match Schedule Plan
Each tournament shall provide ATP, at least one hundred and eighty (180) days prior 1.06 Commitment to Rules/ATP Official Rulebook
to the start of the tournament, a typed schedule that includes proposed daily starting
All ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments are subject to the jurisdiction of
times and number of courts to be used.
ATP and shall comply with, be bound by and conduct the tournament in accordance
with ATP rules and regulations.
ATP Challenger Tour tournaments should submit their match schedule plan at least
ninety (90) days prior to the start of the tournament.
The online ATP Official Rulebook is the official version of the rules.

1.04 Finals Options 1.07 Commitment, Membership Obligations and Bonus Pool
A. General
A. Player Entry and Commitment to Rules
1) When the singles and doubles finals are to be played on the same day, the dou-
bles final shall be scheduled prior to the singles final, unless otherwise approved Any player who is included in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings for singles (hereafter
by ATP or due to player conflict. referred to as “Pepperstone ATP Rankings”) or the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rank-
ings and/or commits to enter or participates in any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour
2) When possible, there should be one Awards Ceremony that follows the com- tournament consents and agrees with the following:
pletion of the singles final. It is mandatory that both singles and doubles finalist
players participate in the awards ceremony, whether ceremonies are separate or 1) To comply with and be bound by all of the provisions of the 2024 ATP Official
combined. Rulebook and ATP By-Laws (the “ATP Rules”), including, but not limited to, all
amendments to ATP Rules.
B. Singles
2) The International Tennis Integrity Agency (“ITIA”) may conduct anti-doping testing
1) If any ATP Tour tournament singles final is not played, the tournament may elect at ATP sanctioned events under the Tennis Anti-Doping Programme (the “TADP”),
to replace it as follows: the full text of which can be found at https://www.itia.tennis/. ATP Tour, Inc. (“ATP”)

8 9
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
will honor and enforce any penalties or sanctions against players resulting from D. Commitment
the TADP. The TADP shall apply to and be binding upon all players and shall
govern all ATP-sanctioned events including ATP Challenger Tour events. Players The commitment for the commitment player is, the singles event of all ATP Tour
shall submit to the jurisdiction and authority of the ITIA to manage, administer and Masters 1000 tournaments for which he is accepted, the Nitto ATP Finals (if qualified
enforce the TADP and to the jurisdiction and authority of the Anti-Doping Tribunal as a direct acceptance or designated as the alternate) and four (4) ATP Tour 500
and the Court of Arbitration for Sport to determine any charges brought under tournaments, one (1) of which must be held following the US Open. For commitment
the TADP. Players also consent to the release to ATP of their Anti-Doping results and ranking purposes, the Monte Carlo Masters 1000 will be included in the minimum
obtained by the ITIA at ATP events, including missed tests and/or filing failures. requirements for the 500 category.
3) To comply with and be bound by all of the provisions of the 2024 Tennis Anti-Cor-
E. Commitment Player Entry Exception – Top 30
ruption Program Rules, the full text of which can be found at: https://www.itia.
tennis/tacp/rules/ and Tennis Anti-Doping Programme (the "TADP"), a copy of Except as otherwise set forth herein, commitment players are automatically accepted
which is available online at https://www.itia.tennis/tadp/rules/. into the main draw of all ATP Tour 500 events in which they have entered in a proper
4) To review and agree to the terms and conditions contained in the Notice of Priva- manner.
cy Practices set forth in “Exhibit P - Privacy Notice (“HIPAA”).
F. Good Standing
5) Each calendar year all players shall, as a condition of entering or participating in
any event organized or sanctioned by ATP, deliver to ATP a signed Consent and A player is in good standing with ATP if he is in full compliance with all ATP Rules
Agreement in the form set out in “Exhibit O - Consent and Agreement Form”. (including the Tennis Anti-Corruption Program Rules and Tennis Anti-Doping Pro-
6) For entry into an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament, all players must gramme), is not suspended and has paid/complied with any debts and/or obligations
be an ATP Player Member (”Member”) or an ATP Registered Player. Wild cards to ATP (e.g., complete all Stars Program responsibilities, if applicable) or is otherwise
are exempt from this provision. confirmed to be in good standing by the ATP Chief Executive Officer (CEO).
7) All Members must, every two (2) years, submit an authorized physical examina- Penalties for not being in good standing with ATP result in a player:
tion form as shown in “Exhibit Y - Mandatory Physical” to be eligible to enter and
compete on the ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour. 1) Not being eligible to participate in the bonus program;
a) A pre-competition medical examination is mandatory and must be submitted 2) Not being eligible to participate as a main draw entry in the following ATP Year;
prior to a player participating in his first event of 2024. 3) Not being eligible to earn a year of credit toward ATP retirement program.
b) Members competing in their first ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event after
1 January 2024 shall have thirty (30) days after the Member’s first match 4) Not being eligible for the Platinum Benefits (as defined below).
to complete and submit the medical examination forms. After the thirty (30)
day period has ended the member will not be allowed to enter or compete in For the avoidance of doubt, accrued benefits that have not been paid prior to the
any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event until such time that the medical determination of a breach of the ATP Rules (including the Tennis Anti-Corruption Pro-
examination form has been submitted and accepted. gram Rules and Tennis Anti-Doping Programme) shall remain payable unless other-
c) Members submitting a medical examination form which indicates they are wise determined by ATP.
“unfit to play” will be required to sign a release/waiver form before they will be
allowed to compete in any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event. This form G. ATP Tour 500 Bonus Pool
will be provided by ATP upon request.
Only members who are in good standing meet the Platinum Benefit eligibility criteria
B. Official Means of Communication (as defined in Section 1.21) and fulfill the ATP Tour 500 commitment requirements,
shall be eligible for the ATP Tour 500 bonus pool. The order of standings will be
The PlayerZone and Tour Weekly are ATP’s official means of communicating with its based on total Pepperstone ATP Rankings points earned at the ATP Tour 500 events
player members. All players must stay informed of all information published by ATP in 2024. The 2024 ATP Tour 500 bonus pool will be a total of USD $1,340,000, with
through these official means of communication. Notification of any modifications, de- distribution to the top 5 players as follow:
letions or additions to the rules set forth in this Rulebook shall be through such means
of communication and shall become effective upon their publication. Highest ATP Tour 500* Points Total Amount (USD)

C. Commitment Player 1 $615,000

2 $310,000
A 2024 ATP commitment player is any player positioned in the Top 30 in the ATP 2023
Rankings (singles) as of November 13, 2023.

10 11
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
Highest ATP Tour 500* Points Total Amount (USD) d) Not direct acceptance. Any player who is not a direct acceptance to a man-
datory ATP Tour Masters 1000 event shall not have that event count as a
3 $205,000 missed event.
4 $130,000 e) Promotional work.
i) On-site promotional activities for withdrawn players are applicable for
5 $80,000 relief of fines, bonus pool reduction recoupment pursuant to Section
1.07.H.2, and/or suspensions but shall not provide relief for the ranking
*For the avoidance of doubt, points from the Monte Carlo Masters 1000 tournament penalty and shall count as a missed event.
will not be included in the ATP Tour 500 bonus pool point calculation. ii) On-site promotional activities are not applicable to players missing the
event due to being suspended.
The order of standings for the ATP 500 Bonus Pool will be based on total Pepper-
2) Subject to the limitations and eligibility criteria herein, players shall be eligible for
stone ATP Rankings points earned at the 500 events.
the bonus pool in this section based upon the total Pepperstone ATP Rankings
Ties shall be broken as follows: points earned at the ATP Tour Masters 1000 and Nitto ATP Finals events in 2024.
To be paid the full bonus pool amount set forth in this section a player must play
1. Most ATP Tour 500 events played; followed by all mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 events and the Nitto ATP Finals in which
2. Highest number of points earned from a single event, followed by 2nd highest such player is a main draw direct acceptance.
and so on.
ATP Tour Masters 1000 main draw direct acceptance players who fail to compete
If players have the same points breakdowns: (for any reason) in an ATP Tour Masters 1000 event shall have their bonus pool
3. The higher ranked player as per the Year-End Pepperstone ATP Singles amount reduced as follows:
Rankings wins the tie.
Number of ATP Bonus Pool Bonus Pool Bonus Pool
H. ATP Tour Masters 1000 & Nitto ATP Finals (“Finals”) Bonus Pool Tour Masters Reduction (no Reduction (1 Reduction (2
1000s Tourna- on-site promo- on-site promo- on-site promo-
General. The ATP Tour Masters 1000 and Nitto ATP Finals 2024 Bonus Pool will be ments Missed tional activities) tional activities tional activities
USD $20,000,000. The order of standings will be based on total Pepperstone ATP requirement requirements
Ranking points earned across the ATP Tour Masters 1000 and Nitto ATP Finals in fulfilled) fulfilled)
2024. The bonus pool financial distribution is to be confirmed.
1 25% 12.5% N/A
The bonus pool distribution payment to players will be made by the end of January 2 50% 37.5% 25%
2025.
3 75% 62.5% 50%
1) Conditions of Eligibility for ATP Tour Masters 1000 and Nitto ATP Finals
4 or more 100% 100% 100%
2024 Bonus Pool.
a) Platinum Benefit Eligibility Criteria. Only members who are in good stand- In no event shall a player be able to recoup an amount greater than USD $200,000
ing and meet the Platinum Benefit eligibility criteria (as defined in Section by fulfilling on-site promotional activities requirements.
1.21 below) shall be eligible for the ATP Tour Masters 1000 and Nitto ATP
3) A player who, as of December 31, 2022, earned commitment and elected to main-
Finals Bonus Pool.
tain his earned commitment reductions pursuant to the 2022 ATP Tour Official
b) Nitto ATP Finals. All players must play, if they qualify, in the Nitto ATP Fi-
Rule Book shall continue to hold such commitment reductions and be bound by
nals. Alternates must appear and fulfill the requirements of the alternate, as
the applicable provisions of the 2022 ATP Tour Official Rule Book relating to bo-
determined by ATP. A player who is otherwise qualified but does not play in
nus pool and commitment penalties (for the avoidance of doubt, such player will
the Nitto ATP Finals for a bona fide injury or other reason which constitutes
not be able to replace zero (0) point ranking penalties for missing ATP Tour Mas-
good cause in ATP's determination may receive 80% of the bonus he earned
ters 1000 tournaments for any reason except as permitted in Section 9.03).
(subject to Section 1.07.H.2) by appearing at the finals event to do promo-
tional activities, as determined by ATP. For the avoidance of doubt, if a player 4) The order of standings for the ATP Masters 1000 Bonus Pool will be based on
misses the Nitto ATP Finals and does not engage in promotional activities as the total Pepperstone ATP Rankings points earned across the ATP Tour Masters
described above, such player will not be eligible to receive any bonus, unless 1000 category and Nitto ATP Finals.
approved by ATP.
Ties shall be broken as follows:
c) Suspended player. A player who is suspended from an event shall have the
suspension count as a missed event for the bonus year in which the event is 1. Most ATP Tour 1000 events played; followed by
held. 2. The highest number of points earned from a single event, followed by the 2nd
highest and so on.

12 13
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
If players have the same points breakdowns: 1) Group 1 player membership in ATP shall be open to any individual who: (i) as of
3. The higher-ranked player, as per the Year-End Pepperstone ATP Singles the 2023 official year-end Pepperstone ATP Rankings or at any point during 2024
Rankings, wins the tie. (in each case, including pursuant to protected ranking) shall be positioned among
the top 250 players in the Pepperstone ATP Singles Rankings or among the top
1.08 Unsatisfied Player Commitment Penalties 50 players in the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, (ii) pays ATP dues and (iii)
satisfies criteria established from ATP from time to time.
A. Failure To Participate in the Nitto ATP Finals
2) Group 2 player membership in ATP shall be open to any individual who does not
1) If a player qualified for the Nitto ATP Finals as a direct acceptance or was desig- qualify for Group 1 membership and who shall had at least one (1) ranking point
nated as the alternate, fails or refuses to participate in this event, except for bona as of the 2023 official year-end Pepperstone ATP Rankings or at any point during
fide injury or other reason which constitutes good cause, the player shall not be in 2024, (ii) pays ATP dues and (iii) satisfies criteria established from ATP from time
good standing. to time.
2) All direct acceptances and the alternate must appear at the site of the event(s)
B. All Group 1 ATP player members must attend an ATP player university within one (1)
as determined by ATP and participate in the pre-tournament media conference.
year after becoming a member.
Failure to appear shall result in a penalty of five percent (5%) of total ATP prize
money earned during the ATP Tour circuit year. C. All Group 1 and 2 ATP player members must submit an authorized physical examina-
tion as specified in section 1.07.A.7).
B. Review of Penalties for Breach of Commitment
D. Any ATP player who is eligible for Group 1 membership and does not fulfill the obli-
Any player found to have committed a player commitment offense may petition the
gations in subsection B and C above shall not be entitled to the privilege of member-
Appeals Tribunal for discretionary review. This written petition shall detail the basis
ship.
for the appeal. The tribunal shall review the petition within twenty-one (21) days and,
if necessary, designate a date, time and place for a hearing. At the hearing, the player
E. All Group 1 ATP player members must complete an ATP University refresher course
shall present to the tribunal his respective positions on the facts. The tribunal may
two years after completing the ATP University as prescribed and designed by ATP.
affirm, reverse or modify the penalty initially imposed by ATP.
Any player Group 1 member who fails to complete the refresher course within the
stated time period shall not receive the benefits of membership.
1.09 Mandatory Player Meeting
Mandatory player meetings may be scheduled throughout the year as determined 1.11 Waiver of Claims
and announced in advance by ATP. These meetings are limited to and mandatory for
All players entering ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments agree, as a
all main draw singles and doubles players. Player members not entered will be sent
condition of their entry, that for themselves, their executors, administrators, heirs and
the minutes.
personal representatives, all claims of any kind, nature and description are waived,
including past, present or future claims and injuries, if any, sustained in traveling to
The penalty for non-attendance is the following:
or from, or participating in, any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament, as
against ATP, the tournaments concerned and the organizers and sponsors of the
Year-end tournaments and circuits thereon.
Pepperstone ATP Amount (USD)
Rankings 1.12 Waiver/Player Publicity and Promotion
1-10 $10,000 All players agree to the following:
11-25 $5,000
A. I grant and assign to ATP and ATP Tour tournaments and ATP Challenger Tour tour-
26-50 $2,000 naments in which I am or have been entered the right in perpetuity to record in
tangible form and use my name, performance, likeness, voice, and biography, in any
51-100 $1,000 and all media (including the right to produce, display and otherwise use motion pic-
101 + $500 tures, still pictures and live, taped or filmed television and other reproductions of me),
solely for purposes of advertising and promoting ATP Tour, ATP Tour tournaments,
ATP Challenger Tour tournaments and other events held as part of ATP. Any such
1.10 Player Eligibility/Player University/Physical Exam use of my name, performance, likeness, voice or biography shall be without sepa-
A. Pursuant to ATP Bylaws, a player shall be entitled to become an active ATP player rate compensation to me or to my heirs, devisees, executors, administrators, legal
member as follows: representatives or assignees. Nothing in this section shall permit ATP, or ATP Tour
tournaments and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments to use my name, performance,
14 15
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
likeness, voice or biography on any product, service or clothing, or in any manner that ipation in an official tournament activity shall not be conducted or promoted in a man-
constitutes an endorsement of any product, service or company. ner that would give the appearance that such player endorses a particular product,
service or company without the prior written consent of the player. In addition, Tour-
B. I agree to cooperate with the news media and to participate upon request in reason- naments must ensure that no images or footage of an official tournament activity shall
able promotional activities of ATP and ATP Tour tournaments and events in which I be used by a sponsor for a commercial purpose (i.e., giving the appearance that a
am entered, subject to my reasonable availability to participate therein. My participa- player endorses a product or service) without the prior written consent of each player.
tion in any such promotional activities or other events shall not be represented to third
parties as an endorsement by me of any product or company. F. Each player, if requested, is obligated to participate in up to two (2) sets of activi-
ties/ days for promotional purposes as arranged by ATP. Such activities/days may
C. Any use of my name, likeness, signature, photograph, depiction or video (my “Like- take place outside of an ATP Tour tournament week and/or location. Players and
ness”) on official ATP or ATP Tour branded merchandise (the “ATP Merchandise”) their agents will be consulted in advance to ensure that any such activities will not
shall be subject to my prior written approval. I agree that my response to any request substantially intrude upon the player’s schedule. Players and their agents will also
for my approval will not be unreasonably delayed. With my prior written approval be consulted with respect to the scope and substance of the activities to ensure that
as to the items of ATP Merchandise, the use of my Likeness and the compensation the player is comfortable with the proposed activities. ATP will cover all expenses
for this use, I grant and assign to ATP the right to use my Likeness on ATP or ATP incurred by a player while participating in any such activities.
Tour Merchandise, provided that use of my Likeness on any such merchandise shall
not conflict with or cause me to be in breach of any current endorsement contract to 1.14 Special Events - Exhibitions
which I am bound. In the event ATP desires to use my Likeness on ATP or ATP Tour
Merchandise, I acknowledge that I will receive a commission amount agreed upon in A. This rule shall not apply to players outside the top thirty (30) as of November 13, 2023
writing on any proceeds or revenue generated from such use. (Commitment Players).

1.13 Stars Program B. Restrictions

1) Special events are those other than Grand Slams, ATP Tour tournaments or ATP
Responsibilities
Challenger Tour tournaments. A player may not compete in a special event if it is
A. All players competing in the main draw of any ATP Tour tournament will be required, scheduled as follows:
if asked, to participate in ATP sponsored activities. a) Within the tournament weeks of any ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournament, ATP
Tour 500 tournament and the Nitto ATP Finals (singles or doubles). A player
B. Each player is obligated to provide up to two (2) hours each week as arranged by ATP who has qualified for and chooses not to play in the ATP Tour Doubles Cham-
staff, for a maximum of up to four (4) separate activities. pionship shall not be eligible for an exemption to play in any special event
during that week.
C. Each player, if requested, is obligated to conduct visits to private sponsor lounges. b) Within thirty (30) days before or after the tournament weeks of any ATP Tour
Tournaments shall instruct sponsors that no video or photos shall be taken if the Masters 1000 tournament, ATP Tour 500 tournament, the Nitto ATP Finals
player has a conflicting sponsor contract (i.e., is within the same product or service (singles or doubles), if the special event is located within:
category), however, personal photos that do not include any corporate or product i) One hundred (100) miles or one hundred sixty (160) kilometers of the
signage/identification and will not be used for a commercial purpose are allowed. same; or
Tournaments must ensure that no images or footage of any player visit shall be used ii) The same market area of the city where the tournament is located as
by the sponsor for a commercial purpose (i.e., giving the appearance the player en- determined by the ATP CEO.
dorses a product or service) without the prior written consent of the player. No players c) Within the period of any ATP Tour 250 tournament (qualifying competition and
are permitted to visit the sponsor lounge (or other location) of a company that offers main draw) if the special event is located within:
betting on tennis. i) One hundred (100) miles or one hundred sixty (160) kilometers of the
same; or
D. Each player, if requested, is obligated to conduct visits to sponsor public booths ex- ii) The same market area of the city where the tournament is located as
cept if the player has a conflicting sponsor contract (i.e., is within the same product or determined by the ATP CEO.
service category). Tournaments must ensure that no images or footage of such visits 2) Within the tournament week of any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament
shall be used by the sponsor for a commercial purpose (i.e., giving the appearance in which he is entered including the Sunday night after such tournament final,
the player endorses a product or service) without the prior written consent of the play- except as otherwise expressly permitted in the following subsection C.
er. No players are permitted to visit the public booth (or other location) of a company
that offers betting on tennis. C. A player who is entered into an ATP Tour 250 tournament may participate in a special
event on the Monday of such tournament, provided:
E. Each player, if requested, is obligated to participate in official tournament activities.
However, Tournaments must ensure, pursuant to rule 1.13 B, that any player’s partic- 1) He has the permission of the Tournament Director of the ATP Tour 250 tourna-
ment he is entered in that week; and
16 17
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
2) If he competes in a tournament during the preceding week, he agrees to complete daily of footage for any local, regional, national or international news or sports news
the same if rain or other unavoidable circumstances delay the finals until Monday; programming.
and
3) Such special event is not located within: 1.18 Quality/Broadcast
a) One hundred (100) miles or one hundred sixty (160) kilometers of the same; Each ATP Tour tournament shall comply with the Broadcast Quality Standards and
or regulation regarding Same Day Exclusivity, as per “Exhibit C”.
b) The same market area of the city where the tournament is located as deter-
mined by the ATP CEO; or
c) Such special event does not violate any of the other restrictions of this rule.
1.19 Seating and Attendance
D. A player has the right to petition the ATP CEO or his designee for an exemption to A. ATP Tour tournaments shall have the following minimum Center court seating capac-
these requirements unless otherwise specified above. ities, except as approved by ATP.

Case: May a player, who is not a Commitment Player after losing,

retiring or withdrawing from the qualifying, play in a special event Center Show Show Show
held the following week-end?
Decision: Yes. However, the player must still ask for and receive Tournament Category Court Court 1 Court 2 Court 3
a release from the Supervisor prior to participating in such special ATP Tour Masters 1000 (Combined) 12,000 5,000 2,000 1,000
event. (Also see provisions listed in section 7.06 One Tournament
ATP Tour Masters 1000 (Outdoors) 10,000 3,000 1,000
Per Week and Exception)
ATP Tour Masters 1000 (Indoors) 10,000 1,000 400
E. Violations of this section are subject to penalties described under the player Major
Offense Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of the Game. ATP Tour 500 (Outdoors) 7,000 1,000
ATP Tour 500 (Indoors) 6,000 500
1.15 Promotional Fees ATP Tour 250 (Outdoors) 3,500
A. Except as expressly permitted in subsection B below, a player shall not accept mon- ATP Tour 250 (Indoors) 2,500
ey or anything of value that is given from any source, directly or indirectly, to influence
or assure his competing in any ATP Tour tournament, or ATP Challenger Tour tourna- B. The recommended attendance criteria for each ATP Tour tournament is as follows:
ments, other than prize money unless authorized by ATP.
1) Minimum attendance for the week.
B. ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 tournaments have the option to offer fees for pro- 2) Average minimum attendance per session during the final weekend (Friday
motional services. No other ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament owner, through Sunday) of play in excess of 75% capacity for the Center court.
operator, sponsor or agent is permitted to offer, give or pay money or anything of
value, nor shall the tournament permit any other person or entity to offer, give or pay Specific recommendations and methods are specified in “Exhibit D”.
money or anything of value to a player, directly or indirectly, to influence or assure a
player’s competing in a tournament, other than prize money, unless authorized to do 1.20 Hotel Accommodations (Rooms)
so by ATP.
All ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall provide hotel accommoda-
tions, subject to player obligations, as follows:
1.16 Virtual Insertion
Each ATP Tour tournament shall comply with the rules established for virtual inser- A. Tournament Obligations - ATP Tour Tournaments.
tion. (“Exhibit E - Virtual Insertion”) 1) Each tournament shall provide one (1) complimentary double room (2 beds) for
the use of each singles player including one (1) guest, at a hotel approved by
1.17 Non-Exclusive Media Highlight Rights. ATP. The room must be occupied by the registered player who is responsible for
charges resulting from any third or more person(s) staying in the room as well as
Each ATP Tour tournament shall each year promptly (within two business days) pro- all incidental costs charged to the room. At a minimum, ATP Masters 1000 and
vide to ATP without charge existing footage of the tournament as ATP may request. ATP 500 tournaments shall provide hotel accommodations in 4 Star hotels (5 Star
Each ATP tournament hereby grants to ATP the non-exclusive right to broadcast, or hotels recommended) within thirty (30) minutes from the tournament site. ATP
permit to be broadcast, by any means, whether presently existing or hereafter creat- Standards Committee (as defined in Exhibit K) approval is required for ATP 250
ed, in perpetuity worldwide, a total each year of (i) fifteen (15) minutes of footage for tournament hotel accommodations with ratings below 4 Stars and/or greater than
ATP Highlight Show or any other programs, produced by or for ATP, which are primar- thirty (30) minutes from the tournament site. ATP tournaments are required to
ily intended to promote the ATP tennis circuit and/or ATP; and (ii) three (3) minutes
18 19
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
provide a dedicated tournament concierge and transportation desk at official tour- whichever is later.
nament hotels. At a minimum, hotel accommodations shall include complimentary ii) Lucky Loser: The top two (2) lucky losers to sign in the Lucky Loser list
breakfast with adequate breakfast options for the occupants of the player’s room each day shall receive accommodation through each night he is eligible
(as determined by ATP). ATP Tournaments are also required to provide a compli- to be inserted into the draw. If any of the top two (2) lucky losers move
mentary gym and internet service for the players at the official hotels. in, then the next player receives hospitality for that night and each night
2) Tournaments using more than one (1) hotel as the official hotel may not make thereafter when he is among the top two (2) lucky losers.
player hotel assignments based on a player’s entry into the event as a singles or iii) Doubles: Rooms for doubles players shall be available beginning two
doubles player. (2) days prior to the start of the doubles competition. For doubles players
who stay in individual rooms, hospitality shall be for a minimum of four (4)
3) Complimentary use of rooms for the tournament week is to be available for play- nights or through the night that the player plays his last match, whichever
ers as follows (accommodations begin no later than Monday). is later. A doubles player who shares a room with another main draw dou-
4) Main draw players who are no longer eligible for tournament-provided hotel bles player shall have a minimum of six (6) nights or through the night of
rooms shall receive the published tournament room rate if they extend their stay. that player’s last match, whichever is later.
iv) Doubles Alternates: Rooms for the top doubles alternate team shall
5) Main draw and qualifying players who have withdrawn on-site for medical rea- be available from the night prior to the start of the doubles competition
sons and who are examined by the on-site tournament Doctor, shall receive tour- through each night they are eligible to be inserted into the draw.
nament provided hotel rooms through the night of the examination. v) Sunday Start. Where the main draw has been approved for a Sunday
Case: A player plays and wins his first match. He then becomes ill start, Hospitality shall begin one (1) day earlier than specified. This is
and withdraws from the tournament. When does his hospitality end? applicable to both the singles and doubles main draw players.
Decision: The player who retired from a match or withdrew after
completing a match is entitled to the complete set minimum number c) ATP Tour 500 Tournaments Main Draw.
of nights per the tournament category or through the night of the i) Singles: Rooms for singles players should be available beginning on
examination, whichever is later. Friday and continuing for a minimum of six (6) nights. Accommodations
continue through the night that he plays his last match or until his six (6)
6) Players who travel to the event to complete their promotional activity requirement
night minimum has been provided, whichever is later.
shall receive full hospitality from the day of arrival through the night following the
ii) Lucky Loser: The number one (1) lucky loser to sign in the Lucky Loser
completion of their promotional obligation.
list each day shall receive accommodation through each night he is eligi-
a) ATP Tour Masters 1000 Tournaments - 96 Main Draw. ble to be inserted into the draw. If the number one (1) lucky loser moves
i) Singles: Rooms for singles players should be available beginning two in, then the next player receives hospitality for that night and each night
days prior to the start of the qualifying competition for a minimum of ten thereafter when he is the number one (1) lucky loser.
(10) nights. Accommodations continue through the night that he plays his iii) Doubles: Rooms for doubles players shall be available beginning Satur-
last match or until his ten (10) night minimum has been provided, which- day. For doubles players who stay in individual rooms, hospitality shall be
ever is later. for a minimum of two (2) nights or through the night that the player plays
ii) Lucky Loser: The top four (4) lucky losers to sign in the Lucky Loser list his last match, whichever is later. A doubles player who shares a room
each day shall receive accommodation through each night he is eligible with another main draw doubles player shall have a minimum of five (5)
to be inserted into the draw. If any of the top four (4) lucky losers move nights or through the night of that player’s last match, whichever is later.
in, then the next player receives hospitality for that night and each night iv) Doubles 500 Lucky Loser: The top lucky loser team to sign in the Lucky
thereafter when he is among the top four (4) lucky losers. Loser list each day shall receive accommodation through each night they
iii) Doubles: Rooms for doubles players shall be available beginning three are eligible to be inserted into the draw. If the top lucky loser team moves
(3) days prior to the start of the doubles competition. For doubles players in, then the next team receives hospitality for that night and each night
who stay in individual rooms, hospitality shall be for a minimum of five (5) thereafter when they are the top lucky loser.
nights or through the night that the player plays his last match, whichever v) Sunday Start. Where the main draw has been approved for a Sunday
is later. start, Hospitality shall begin one (1) day earlier than specified. This is
iv) Doubles Alternates: Rooms for the top two (2) doubles alternate applicable to both the singles and doubles main draw players.
teams shall be available from the night prior to the start of the doubles d) ATP Tour 250 Tournaments Main Draw.
competition through each night they are eligible to be inserted into the i) Singles: Rooms for singles players should be available beginning on
draw. Saturday and be available to each singles player for a minimum of five
b) ATP Tour Masters 1000 Tournaments - 56 Main Draw. (5) nights, regardless of when the player is finally accepted into the main
i) Singles: Rooms for singles players should be available beginning two draw (singles qualifiers). Accommodations continue through the night that
days prior to the start of the qualifying competition for a minimum of sev- he plays his last match or until his five (5) night minimum has been pro-
en (7) nights. Accommodations continue through the night that he plays vided, whichever is later.
his last match or until his seven (7) night minimum has been provided,
20 21
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
ii) Lucky Loser: The number one (1) lucky loser to sign the Lucky Loser list must notify the tournament of their arrival by by 2:00 PM Eastern Time, USA on
each day shall receive accommodation through each night he is eligible the Friday prior to the event. Players moving into the main draw after this deadline
to be inserted into the draw. If the number one (1) lucky loser moves must confirm arrival day/date with the tournament as soon as possible.
in, then the next player receives hospitality for that night and each night 3) Doubles-Only Players. Tournaments shall provide hospitality from Sunday. Play-
thereafter when he is the number one (1) lucky loser. ers that wish to start their hospitality later than Sunday must make such change
iii) Doubles: Rooms for doubles players shall be available beginning Satur- by 3:00 PM local time on the Saturday before the tournament starts. Players that
day. fail to make their change by the deadline will be charged at the published rate for
For doubles players who stay in individual rooms, hospitality shall be for each night they are a no show. A refusal to pay shall result in automatic loss of
a minimum of two (2) nights or through the night that the player plays his hospitality for the remainder of the tournament week.
last match, whichever is later. A doubles player who shares a room with
another main draw doubles player shall have a minimum of five (5) nights 4) Penalties for breaching obligation:
or through the night of that player’s last match, whichever is later. a) Failure to make a reservation two (2) weeks prior to a tournament shall result
iv) Doubles 250 Alternates: Rooms for the top doubles alternate team shall in a player losing his hotel accommodation privileges for that tournament.
be available from the night prior to the start of the doubles competition b) Player forfeits hotel accommodations for nights reserved but not used.
through each night they are eligible to be inserted into the draw. c) Player forfeits hotel accommodation privileges for four (4) consecutive tour-
v) Sunday Start. Where the main draw has been approved for a Sunday naments when he either:
start, Hospitality shall begin one (1) day earlier than specified. This is i) Does not pay all incidental costs charged to a room; or
applicable to both the singles and doubles main draw players. ii) Does not personally stay in the room as required; or
iii) Does not cancel reservation(s) previously made at tournament hotel(s);
e) ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 Qualifying: or
i) Hotel accomodations for players in the ATP Tour Masters 1000 quali- iv) Damages a room or hotel facilities;
fying shall be available two (2) days prior to the start of the qualifying v) Exhibits unprofessional or abusive behavior towards any hotel employee
competition for a minimum of five (5) nights (96 draw tournament) or for or guest;
a minimum of three (3) nights (56 draw tournament). Accommodations vi) Exhibits severe unprofessional behavior in or on the hotel premises and
continue through the night a player plays his last match or until his five/ not specifically covered above.
three night minimum have been provided, whichever is later. 5) Other Reservations. Players can request additional room reservations at the
ii) Hotel accommodations for players in the ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 player rate if they contact the tournament no later than two (2) weeks prior to the
singles qualifying shall be available to begin on the night before the start start of the tournament.
of qualifying competition and be available to each player through the night
of the player’s last qualifying match. 6) Qualifier Reservations. Players participating in the qualifying competition who
iii) Doubles 500 Qualifying. Rooms for doubles qualifying players shall be wish to receive a player rate at a tournament hotel must make a hotel reservation
available from the day prior to the start of the doubles qualifying competi- no later than five (5) days prior to the start of qualifying with either the hotel or the
tion and continue through the night of their last match. tournament, as specified on the tournament detail sheet. Reservation changes
iv) Successful qualifiers shall be afforded the same hotel accommodations can be made up to forty-eight (48) hours prior to the start of the reservation ex-
as those offered to main draw singles players, however, the nights used cept that a player still competing in either singles or doubles in the prior week’s
under qualifying hotel accommodations shall count toward the tourna- tournament must confirm reservations when his travel plans are finalized.
ment’s minimum number of nights required.
C. Tournament Obligations - ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
B. Player Obligations - ATP Tour Tournaments
1) Complimentary hotel accommodations are mandatory at all ATP Challenger Tour
1) Singles. Each main draw player must make a hotel reservation no later than two tournaments as described in this section. Accommodations are defined as one (1)
(2) weeks prior to the first Monday of the tournament with either the hotel or the complimentary double room (2 beds) for the use of each player. The hotel, to be
tournament, as specified on the tournament detail sheet. Reservation changes approved by ATP, shall be of a suitable international standard. At a minimum, ho-
can be made up to two (2) days prior to the first day of the reservation except tel accommodations shall include complimentary breakfast with adequate break-
that a player still competing in either singles or doubles in the prior week’s tourna- fast options for the players (as determined by ATP). The room must be occupied
ment must also confirm his reservations when travel plans are finalized. Failure to by the registered player who is responsible for all incidental costs charged to the
make or modify the reservation by the deadlines stated above shall result in the room and any charges resulting from any third or more person(s) staying in the
automatic loss of hospitality for that tournament week. room.
2) Alternates. Players that move into the main draw between the entry deadline and 2) Singles Main Draw. Complimentary hotel accommodations shall be available
all day Thursday before the event, must notify the tournament two (2) days in ad- for Main Draw Singles players from the first Saturday and for a minimum of five
vance if their arrival is later than Saturday, unless provisions specified above for (5) nights, Saturday through Wednesday, or through the night of the player’s last
players still competing apply. Players moving into the main draw after Thursday singles or doubles match, whichever is later.

22 23
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
3) Qualifying and Lucky Losers. Complimentary hotel accommodations shall be p.m. (23:59) local time at the tournament on five (5) days prior to the tournament’s
available for Qualifying and Lucky Losers singles players from Saturday through start, through the platform designated by ATP, as specified on the tournament’s
the night of the player’s last match. Qualifiers and Lucky Losers accepted into the detail sheet.
main draw shall be entitled to the same complimentary hotel accommodations as
3) Alternates. Players moving into the qualifying or main draw between the dead-
offered to main draw singles players; however, the nights used under qualifying
lines outlined in sections D.1) and D.2) hereinbefore set forth and four (4) days
hotel accommodations shall count toward the tournament’s minimum nights enti-
prior to the Tournament Monday shall make their room request no later than 11:59
tlement.
p.m. (23:59) local time at the tournament four (4) days before the Tournament
4) Doubles Main Draw. For doubles-only players who stay in individual rooms, Monday through the platform designated by ATP, as specified on the tournament’s
complimentary hotel accommodations shall be available from Sunday through detail sheet, unless provisions for players still competing hereinafter set forth ap-
the night of the player’s last match. A doubles-only player who shares a room with ply. Players moving into the qualifying or main draw after this deadline shall make
another main draw doubles-only player shall have a minimum of six (6) nights, their room request and notify the tournament of their arrival date without delay,
Sunday through Friday, or through the night of that player’s last match, whichever through the platform designated by ATP, as specified on the tournament’s detail
is later. sheet, unless provisions for players still competing hereinafter set forth apply.
5) Main draw and qualifying players who are no longer eligible for accommodations 4) Doubles-Only Players Who Gain Acceptance In The Draw Through On-Site
shall receive the published tournament room rate if they extend their stay within Entry. Players must make their hotel room request and notify the tournament by
the date range of the tournament. 3:00 p.m. (15:00) local time on Saturday at the tournament, through the platform
designated by ATP, as specified on the tournament’s detail sheet.
6) Main draw players (singles and doubles players, includes partner) who have with-
drawn on-site for medical reasons and who are examined by the tournament 5) Singles and Doubles. Players accepted both in the singles and doubles event
Doctor shall receive complimentary hotel accommodations through the night of shall comply with the room request deadline of whichever (singles or doubles)
the examination. they gain acceptance in first.
7) Tournaments using more than one (1) hotel as the official hotel may not make 6) Players Still Competing In The Previous Week’s Tournament. A player still
player hotel assignments based on a player’s entry into the event as a singles or competing in either singles or doubles in the prior week’s tournament must keep
doubles player. the tournament informed if his reservation(s) may change and confirm the final
arrival date with the tournament when his travel plans are finalized.
8) Any ATP Challenger Tour tournament which has been approved for a Saturday
start shall make complimentary hotel accommodations available one (1) day ear- 7) Cancellation Or Change of Reservation. Any player who needs to cancel or
lier than specified. At a minimum, any ATP Challenger Tour tournament which has amend his reservation to a later date must do so by 6:00 p.m. (18:00) tournament
been approved for a Tuesday start shall make complimentary hotel accommoda- local time four (4) days prior to the tournament’s start through the platform des-
tions available one (1) day later than specified. ignated by ATP, as specified on the tournament detail sheet. Players withdrawing
after the preceding sentences deadline, must cancel their reservation as soon as
9) Confirmation of Reservation. ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments shall over-
possible after the withdrawal.
see requests for complimentary hotel accommodations and confirm reservations
through a platform designated by ATP, as specified on the ATP Challenger Tour 8) Notwithstanding the provisions above, any cancellation or change of reservation
tournament’s detail sheet, to players stating the hotel name, address, telephone less than two (2) days before the start of the reservation, is subject to ATP approv-
number, the check-in date and a notice that cancellations or changes can be al.
made up to two (2) days prior to the reservation’s start date.
E. Penalties for Breaching Obligation:
10) The official hotel(s) shall be instructed to take a reasonable credit card guarantee
from players and/or support team members at the time of check-in for any inci- 1) For the avoidance of doubt, forfeiture of hotel accommodations privileges covers
dentals or room nights not covered under the ATP Challenger Tour tournament’s the player, his support team member and/or doubles partner. ATP, in its sole dis-
obligation. ATP shall not be responsible for managing and/or covering any unpaid cretion, shall determine if a player forfeits any hotel accommodations privileges.
charges. 2) Failure to make a reservation by any of the deadlines hereinbefore set forth shall
result in that player’s forfeiture of hotel accommodations for the tournament’s
D. Player Obligations - ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
week.
1) Singles Players Who Gain Acceptance In The Main Draw Through Advance Case: A player accepted into the Singles Main Draw of a Challenger
Entry. Each player must make their hotel room request no later than 11:59 p.m. Tour event did not make his hotel reservation by the deadline and
(23:59) local time at the tournament ten (10) days prior to the tournament’s start the tournament decided to withdraw his hotel accommodation privi-
through the platform designated by ATP, as specified on the tournament’s detail leges. Player signs in on-site for Doubles on Saturday. Is he entitled
sheet. to hotel accommodations as a Doubles player?
2) Doubles-Only Players Who Gain Acceptance In The Main Draw Through Ad- Decision: No, the player forfeits hotel accommodation privileges for
vance Entry. Each player must make their hotel room request no later than 11:59 the tournament week (singles and doubles).
24 25
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS
a) Failure to make a reservation change by the deadline shall result in that play- D. Criteria for Reinstating Eligibility. In the event a player fails to meet the criteria set
er’s forfeiture of hotel accommodations for nights reserved but not used. In forth above, while being in the ranking range eligible for Group 1 membership pur-
addition, ATP, on behalf of the tournament, shall have the right to charge the suant ATP By-Laws, for any of the Platinum Benefits provided by ATP due to Rule
player at the official tournament hotel’s published rate for each night he did 1.21.C.2 or Rule 1.21.C.3, he must successfully satisfy each of the elements for the
not use the room. Any refusal to pay shall result in that player’s forfeiture of 2 calendar years following such failure in order to reestablish his eligibility.
hotel accommodations for the tournament’s week and may be subject to pro-
visions under the Code of Conduct. E. Amendments to Benefits. ATP reserves the authority to continuously evaluate and
b) Failure to cancel a reservation by the set deadline, including for players who tailor the Standard Benefits and Platinum Benefits to better serve its Members. As
have withdrawn on-site at a tournament in the previous week, shall result in such, ATP retains the right to amend/introduce new benefits, modify or withdraw ex-
that player being charged at the published hotel room rate for each night he isting benefits, and/or change the eligibility criteria.
did not use the room. Any refusal to pay shall be subject to provisions under
the Code of Conduct in addition to settling the hotel charge. F. Definitions.
c) A player may be subject to the provisions under the Code of Conduct if:
i) Does not pay ‘no show’ charges, including any applicable taxes; or For purposes of this Section 1.21, the following definitions shall apply:
ii) Does not pay all incidental costs charged to a room; or 1) “Qualified Non-Covered Event” is an event that includes a Top 100 Pepperstone
iii) Does not personally stay in the room as required; or ATP Singles Ranked player and meets one of the following criteria:
iv) Damages a room or hotel facilities; or
v) Exhibits unprofessional or abusive behavior towards any hotel employee a. Its duration is 3 or more consecutive days within a 7-day period.
or guest; or b. Events operated by a single person or group of affiliated persons that contain
vi) Exhibits severe unprofessional behavior in or on the hotel premises and in the aggregate 11 or more days within a calendar year. Solely with respect
not specifically covered above. to 1.21.F.1.b, the events that occur before the 11th day shall not be deemed
a Qualified Non-Covered Event.
The payment of any monetary fines under the provisions of the Code of c. Individual events when announced are part of a schedule or series of sched-
Conduct shall apply in addition to settling any outstanding charges and/or ules of events that the overall number of days exceeds 11 days or more within
damages. a calendar year.
d) Players shall have the right to appeal any of the above fines and charges d. It includes 2 or more events that are connected through player qualification,
which must be submitted in writing to the ATP Fines Committee. entry, ranking system, or any other similar means.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Non-Covered Event shall not be deemed a Qual-
1.21 Benefits (Effective January 1, 2024) ified Non-Covered Event. In addition, events that took place in 2023 shall not be
A. Standard Benefits. All Members in good standing shall be entitled to receive certain deemed a Qualified Non-Covered Event until December 31, 2026 provided that such
standard benefits. These benefits are stated in detail on the Player Zone (“Standard events remain at or below their existing 2023 format (factors for determining format
Benefits”). include but not limited to event duration, number of participating players, and compe-
tition structure).
B. Platinum Benefits. ATP recognizes and values the significance of offering its loyal 2) “Non-Covered Events” are those events other than Grand Slams, ATP Tour tour-
and dedicated Members various additional benefits. These advantages are meant naments, ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, Laver Cup, Davis Cup, Olympic
to recognize their contributions to serving ATP's fans and stakeholders and to the Games, ITF World Tennis Tour and existing regional league events at or below
overall well-being, goodwill and success of the ATP Tour. their existing format (factors for determining format include but not limited to event
duration, number of participating players, and competition structure).
These benefits, defined as ”Platinum Benefits," encompass a range of offerings,
which include retirement programs, bonus programs, financial security plans (includ-
ing, Baseline), the privilege to actively participate, including voting, in ATP gover-
nance, and such other benefits as may be determined by ATP from time to time and
are discussed in detail on the Player Zone.

C. Eligibility for Platinum Benefits. In addition to the Standard Benefits, a Member shall
be entitled to receive Platinum Benefits if such player is 1) in good standing and 2) he
does not have any relationship or affiliation with any business, corporation, company,
partnership, association, organization, person, or entity that is not in the best inter-
ests of ATP or the sport of tennis and 3) does not participate in 1 or more Qualified
Non-Covered Events (as defined below).

26 27
I. ATP CIRCUIT REGULATIONS II. BRANDING
2.01 Identification - ATP Tour Tournaments
A. Each ATP Tour tournament shall identify itself clearly to the public as being part of
the ATP Tour and shall cooperate fully with ATP in furthering public awareness of the
ATP Tour. Participation in the ATP Tour shall not restrict the right of the tournament to
obtain individual sponsorship or to retain its usual title.

B. Trademark and Logo Identification. Each ATP Tour tournament and ATP Challeng-
er Tour tournament shall comply with the terms and conditions for the use of the ATP
Tour and the ATP Challenger Tour trademark and logo outlined in “Exhibit B and G”.

C. Except as otherwise approved by ATP, each ATP Tour tournament shall comply with
the ATP Tour Branding Application Requirements and shall assume all costs asso-
ciated with such compliance. Branded nets and microphone flags will be provided,
without cost, to all tournaments by ATP. ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Applica-
tion Requirements will be provided to each tournament by ATP.
1) ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps: Application Rules (“Exhibit A.01”)
All ATP Tour tournaments must display the appropriate ATP Tour Official Tourna-
ment Stamp (Masters 1000, 500, or 250) on all compulsory materials containing
the tournament logo, as identified in the rules below. The tournament logo is the
official identity of the tournament that includes the tournament name. When a text
alternative to the tournament logo is used, it will be regarded as the tournament
logo and the rules below will continue to apply. When a tournament logo is used
repeatedly, or if both tournament logo and tournament title are used, application
rules will apply to the largest tournament logo or title. For multiple page external
documents, the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be applied on the front
page in accordance with the rules below.
a) Size Relationship
i) Men only events (“Exhibit A.02”)
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be a minimum of 60% of
the surface area of the tournament logo or tournament title, whichever is
larger. This is subject to the minimum size rules for the ATP Tour Official
Tournament Stamps below.
ii) Combined events (“Exhibit A.03”)
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp should be presented with the
WTA logo to communicate to audiences that the tournament is part of
both tours.
• Size relationship: WTA logo
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be the same visual
size (cover the same surface area) as the WTA logo.
• Size Relationship: Tournament Logo
When the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp is used in conjunction
with the WTA logo, the Official Stamp must be at a minimum equal
size to the WTA logo or 30% of the surface area of the tournament
logo, whichever is greater. This is subject to the minimum size rules
for Official Stamps below.
iii) Minimum Size
To ensure the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps are reproduced to
best effect, the tournaments must adhere to the application rules stated
in i) and ii) above or the following minimum sizes, whichever is greater:

28 29
II. BRANDING II. BRANDING
In quality print 9mm wide ii) Communication / Administration / Presentations
In newsprint 13mm wide The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be applied to all exter-
On screen 45 pixels wide nal tournament communications. To include but not limited to: stationery,
Size Requirements memos, powerpoint presentations, documents and press releases. For
Below are the minimum size requirements for using the ATP Tour Official multiple page documents, the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp needs
Tournament Stamps on printed materials. only to be applied on the front page that contains tournament logo or
A7 9mm wide tournament name.
A6 11mm wide iii) Website / Other Digital Products (“Exhibit A.07”)
A5 14mm wide The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be displayed on all pages
A4 18mm wide of the official tournament website intended for large format display (tablet
A3 26mm wide and desktop). The official stamp must be located within the upper 20% of
A2 36mm wide the pages within the masthead area as the closest logo to the tournament
A1 51mm wide logo. The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp should be no smaller than
In non ‘A’ format communications the width of the ATP Tour Official Tourna- 45 pixels wide for websites and other digital products intended for large
ment Stamps should be no smaller than 6% of the longest side of the layout. format display. For mobile website display the official stamp must be used
b) Positioning (“Exhibit A.04”) in a way that clearly identifies the particular tournament category.
i) Proximity to the tournament logo The official stamp must also be prominently displayed on all other digital
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be placed closest to the products, including social media landing pages and apps for both mobile
tournament logo. No sponsor (with exception of the presenting sponsor), and tablet devices. Given the huge differences and ever evolving nature
federation, series logo or any other logo may be closer to the tournament of these devices and applications, the official stamp must be used in a
logo than the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp. Tournament logos way that clearly identifies the tournament as an ATP Tour event and its
cannot include any series name, federation name or any other name or respective category. See exhibit for examples.
brand mark. iv) Promotional Materials
ii) Proximity to Sponsor logos The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp needs only to be applied to the
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps are used as an endorsement front page of all promotional communications. To include but not limit-
of the quality and authenticity of a tournament and its inclusion within ed to: tournament programs, daily programs, leaflets, draw sheets, an-
the ATP Tour. The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps should never be nouncements and notices. For multiple page documents, the ATP Tour
placed alongside sponsor logos or added to sponsor logo strips. Official Tournament Stamp need only be applied on the front page that
c) Exclusion Area (“Exhibit A.05”) contains tournament logo or tournament name.
i) Exclusion Area 1: For graphics, images, text, WTA Tour and tourna- v) ATP Advertisement.
ment logos (including ‘presented by’ sponsor) Three (3) full pages of ATP Tour advertisements must be included in the
A minimum exclusion area equal to the height of the ATP type has been tournament program with two (2) of the three (3) pages within the first
established around the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps. No graph- third (1/3) of the tournament program to be used to promote and ad-
ics, images, text, WTA Tour or tournament logos must appear in this area. vertise the ATP Tour. (The three (3) pages are separate from any other
This exclusion area must be maintained. page requirements specified in an ATP Sponsorship Agreement between
ii) Exclusion Area 2: For sponsor, federation and series logos a tournament and ATP).
A minimum exclusion area equal to the width of two ATP Tour Official ATP will supply the advertisement and it shall be printed without expense
Tournament Stamps has been established around the ATP Tour Official to ATP. One (1) of the three (3) pages must be the doubles program ad as
Tournament Stamps. No sponsor, federation or series logos must appear furnished by ATP.
in this area. This exclusion area must be maintained.
d) Acceptable and unacceptable applications (“Exhibit A.06.1 to A.06.6”) Violations.
2) ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps : Compulsory Applications Violation of this section shall subject a tournament to a fine under the
Tournament Standards Violations Fines Table (as defined in Section
An ATP Tour tournament must identify itself as an ATP Tour event by applying the
8.02).
appropriate ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp, in accordance with the rules
Note: When possible, tournaments will be given notice of and the oppor-
listed in section 1) above, in the following compulsory applications:
tunity to correct any issues that would put them in a violation of the above
a) Promotion rules.
i) Advertising b) Compulsory Application: On-site
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be applied to all tourna- i) Entrance
ment advertising communications. The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be displayed at all en-
trances to the tournament that include the tournament logo or the tourna-

30 31
II. BRANDING II. BRANDING
ment title, unless otherwise approved by ATP. To include but not limited branding is allowed on the net or net posts other than that specified or
to: car parks, main stadium, press, player and VIP entrances. otherwise approved solely by ATP.
ii) Scoreboards / Drawboards (“Exhibit A.08”) Violation of this requirement (c. ii.) shall subject a tournament to a
If a scoreboard / drawboard includes the tournament logo or tournament fine under the Tournament Standards Violations Fines Table.
title then the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be displayed. Note: When possible, tournaments will be given notice of and the oppor-
iii) Singles / Doubles Leader Boards (See ATP Tournament Guidelines) tunity to correct any issues that would put them in a violation of the above
The current standings of the 2024 Pepperstone ATP Rankings and 2024 rules.
Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings must be placed prominently in • Net Example 1: Net without sponsor branding
the tournament stadium grounds. Artwork will be provided by ATP. Pre- At tournaments where the ATP Tour premier partner branding is not
ferred position is in the main welcome area. used, ATP net signage shall be displayed on the left and right sides of
iv) Vehicles the net on all match courts.
The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be applied to any vehicle • Net Example 2: Net with sponsor branding
that displays the tournament logo or the tournament title. At tournaments where the ATP Tour premier partner branding is used,
c) Compulsory Application: On-court net signage will be displayed on the left and right sides of the net on
i) The Court all match courts.
No commercial branding (sponsor, series or federation), court manufac- • Positioning of net signage (ATP or ATP Tour premier partner)
turer branding or any other mark may be placed on the surface of the o For singles matches using a doubles net, net signage must be
court, with the exception of “Host Locality” (See 3.b.) and the provisions centered between the singles stick and the net post.
outlined below unless otherwise approved by ATP. o For singles nets, net signage must be centered between the sin-
gles sideline and the net post.
Provisions for commercial branding placement: iii) ATP Supervisors / ATP Designated Chair Umpires
1. ATP approval required for printing or insertion on the court surface of The officiating uniform provided by ATP must be worn. No other commer-
any sponsor logo at any tournament (ATP Tour Masters 1000, 500, cial branding may be applied to the uniform without prior approval from
250 and Challenger Tour). ATP.
2. The sponsor logo can be inserted virtually (technology to be approved iv) ATP Physiotherapists
by ATP) or printed on the surface. The uniform provided by ATP must be worn.
3. Only 1 sponsor logo per court/tournament. v) Chair Umpire Microphones
4. Logo can be placed on all courts for all matches. An ATP Tour microphone cover must be used on the Chair Umpire’s mi-
5. On hard courts and grass courts, sponsor logo must be on the side of crophone. The appropriate ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must ap-
the double alley opposite to the chair umpire at the extension of the pear on all four sides. Microphone covers will be provided by ATP.
service line.
6. On clay the sponsor logo will replace one of the host locality signs Violations.
centered between the net and service line. Only in exceptional cases Violation of this section (with the exception of c. ii) shall subject a tourna-
ATP may approve the sponsor logo to be placed below and in addition ment to a fine under the Tournament Standards Violations Fines Table.
to the second host locality at the extension of the service line opposite Note: When possible, tournaments will be given notice of and the oppor-
to the Chair Umpire (in case by contract the tournament must display tunity to correct any issues that would put them in a violation of the above
2 host locality logos). rules.
7. The sponsor logo area must not exceed 15,000 sq. cm (100cm high d) Compulsory Application: Media & Broadcast
maximum, 300cm wide maximum and placed 40cm from the doubles i) Media Backdrop (“Exhibit A.11”)
line). It is recommended that the spnsor logo should be elongated for The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be displayed on the official
improved television visibility. tournament media backdrop in such a way that it is clearly visible during
8. The sponsor logo must be white. the actual interview, in accordance with size, positioning and exclusion
area rules.
Host locality rules to remain status quo, except in case a host locality logo/ ii) Interview Room Microphone
emblem is used. In those cases, the same rules for the sponsor logo would An ATP Tour microphone cover must be used on all player interview mi-
apply. crophones. The appropriate ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must
appear on all four sides. Microphone covers will be provided by ATP.
ii) Net (“Exhibit A.10”) iii) Broadcast
All ATP Tour tournaments must use the ATP Tour branded net on all The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be displayed on all tour-
courts, as determined and provided by ATP. Branded nets will be pro- nament broadcasts on any screen where the tournament logo is featured,
vided, without cost, to all tournaments by ATP. No commercial or other unless otherwise approved by ATP.

32 33
II. BRANDING II. BRANDING
Violations. Host country/city/region must be displayed on one line, facing the
Violation of this section shall subject a tournament to a fine under the main camera.
Tournament Standards Violations Fines Table. Maximum text height is 50cms (20”).
Note: When possible, tournaments will be given notice of and the oppor- The closest distance permitted from the baseline is 300cms (9’ 10”).
tunity to correct any issues that would put them in a violation of the above The material used for the name, on a hard court, must be of the same
rules. material and texture as the court surface to ensure safe footing for the
3) ATP Tour Branding: Optional Applications players.
c) Court Backdrops – Color (“Exhibit A.14)
An ATP Tour tournament may wish to further identify itself as an ATP Tour event
The preferred backdrop color for all ATP Tour tournaments is the closest
by applying the appropriate ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp in the following
match to PMS 281.
optional applications:
i) Lettering.
a) Court Surface Color (“Exhibit A.12”) PMS Cool Grey 5 is the preferred color used for lettering. If the tourna-
The preferred hard court surface color for all ATP Tour events is a match to ment selects color combinations other than those outlined in the previous
PMS 281, to be used inside the court lines and a match to PMS Cyan, used sentence, then such color combinations may not include shades of white,
outside the court lines. yellow or other light colors and must be approved in advance by ATP.
b) Court Host Locality (“Exhibit A.13.1 to A.13.2 ”) ii) Rotating / LED Banners.
Tournaments may feature only the name of the country, city or region (exam- Background and lettering on Rotating / LED Banners should be consis-
ple: Germany, Munich or Bavaria) on the court surface, subject to the place- tent with the color of the back walls.
ment and size restrictions set forth below. The preferred font is FS Industrie d) Court Backdrops – ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps (“Exhibit A.14”)
CD-Bold, however, tournaments may use the official logo or font of the host i) ATP Tour Men Only Events.
country, city or region; all versions other than the preferred font must receive The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp may be used in the left and right
the prior approval of ATP. The on-court logo must be consistent with the tex- corners of the backdrop, facing the main camera. If a tournament decides
ture and feel of the court surface so as not to affect play or be a safety hazard, to do so, the ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be placed in a
as further described below. non-obstructed position, away from ball persons, scoreboards or corner
i) Host Locality Option 1 camera positions. The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be 40%
a) Clay Courts/Hard Courts: of the height of the board, and placed in the top 60% of the board.
Host country/city/region must be written in upper case if using the pre- ii) Combined Events.
ferred font and all versions must be in white on one or both sides of If the WTA logo is placed on the back wall of the court then the ATP Tour
the court and is to be centered between the net post and the service Official Tournament Stamp must also be placed on the back wall in equal
line for clay courts or at the extension of the service line for hard/grass size and with equal television visibility.
courts. e) On-court Ball Persons / Linesmen
Host country/city/region can be displayed on one or two lines, facing If a tournament wishes to use the appropriate ATP Tour Official Tournament
the main camera. Stamp on the uniforms of ball persons or linesmen, the application of the ATP
Maximum text height is 40cms (16”). Tour Official Tournament Stamp must be approved in advance by ATP.
Text should be placed 40cms (16”) from the doubles line. f) Merchandise
When text is displayed on two lines, they should together be centered The ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamp may be used on tournament mer-
between the net post and the service line. chandise only in conjunction with the official Tournament logo, provided that
Line spacing should be 20cms (8”). such a use complies with the terms and conditions set forth in the ATP Rule-
Host country/city text should be elongated by 27% for improved tele- book. Specific application requirements will be provided to tournaments sep-
vision visibility. arately. Any and all applications must be approved by ATP’s retail merchan-
On a clay surface, the text must not protrude above the surface of the dise consultant, at a minimum three (3) months in advance. No approval is
court. required if merchandise is obtained from an approved ATP licensee.
The material used for the name, on a hard court, must be of the same
material and texture as the court surface to ensure safe footing for the 2.02 Identification - ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
players.
A. Challenger Tournaments. (“Exhibit A.15”)
If a host locality emblem/logo is used, the size and placement re-
strictions applicable to the on court surface commercial branding will
Each Challenger tournament shall identify itself as an ATP Challenger Tour tourna-
apply.
ment and shall use the ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark as presented in “Exhibit
ii) Host Locality Option 2 (Not for use on clay)
A.15” (the “Brand Mark”). Tournaments are prohibited from using “ATP” as part of the
Host country/city/region must be written in upper case, if using the
tournament name. The Challenger Brand Mark is mandatory.
preferred font, in white on both sides of the court, centered between
the singles sidelines.
34 35
II. BRANDING II. BRANDING
1) Size Relationship. a) Merchandise
The ATP Challenger Brand Mark must be a minimum of 60% of the surface area The Brand Mark may be used on tournament t-shirts and sweatshirts (not col-
of the tournament logo or tournament title, whichever is larger. lared shirts). The Brand Mark must not exceed 100mm (3.937”) wide. Written
approval is required from ATP if producing these items yourself. No approval
2) ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark: Compulsory Applications is required if merchandise is obtained from an approved ATP licensee.
An ATP Challenger Tour tournament must identify itself as an ATP Challenger b) On-court Ball Persons / Linesmen
Tour tournament by applying the Brand Mark in the following compulsory applica- If a tournament wishes to use the appropriate ATP Challenger Tour Brand
tions: Mark on the uniforms of ball persons or linesmen, the application of the ATP
Challenger Tour Brand Mark must be approved in advance by the ATP.
a) Website / Other Digital Products (“Exhibit A.16”)
The Brand Mark must be displayed on all pages of the tournament website B. ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments - The Court
and other digital products intended for large format display, e.g., desktop,
laptop, tablet computers, and be located within the upper 20% of the pag- No commercial branding (sponsor, series or federation) or any other mark may be
es within the masthead area as the closest logo to the tournament logo.It placed on the surface of the court, except as follows:
must not be smaller than 112 pixels wide for websites and other digital prod- 1) “Host Locality” (See 2.01 C. 3.b. and “Exhibit A.13.1 to A.13.2 “).
ucts intended for large format display. For mobile websites and other digital
products intended for small format display, e.g., mobile handsets, follow the 2) On-Court Surface Commercial Branding. ATP Challenger Tour tournaments are
2.01.C. 1) a) Size Relationship rule. allowed* to place a commercial branding on the court surface. The size and
Note: “ATP” is prohibited from use in any web address or URL. placement must be approved three (3) months in advance by ATP. (See “Exhibit
b) Program A.13.1 to A. 13.2 “)
The Brand Mark must be displayed on the cover in the top 40%. It must not *ATP reserves the right to use this Commercial branding position for an ATP Chal-
be smaller than 28mm (1.1”) wide. lenger Tour sponsor (at Regional level, i.e., multiple tournaments in the same
c) Drawsheets region and Global level, i.e., all tournaments globally). Tournaments may be
The Brand Mark must be displayed in the top 40%. It must not be smaller than approved to use this commercial location in the absence of an ATP Challenger
28mm (1.1”) wide. Tour sponsor.
d) Entrance
The Brand Mark must be displayed prominently at the main entrance to the
tournament.
e) Court Backdrops (“Exhibit A.17”)
The Brand Mark must be displayed in the left and right corners of the court
backdrops (back fences or back walls), it must not be used smaller than 60cm
(23.625”) wide. Brand Marks must be placed in a non-obstructed position.
f) Advertising
The Brand Mark must be applied to any advertising where the tournament
logo is featured.
g) On-Site
The Brand Mark must be applied to any on-site drawboards, scoreboards,
vehicles, banners, flags or signage featuring the tournament logo.
h) Media Center
The Brand Mark must be displayed on tournament media backdrops.
i) Broadcast
The Brand Mark must be displayed on any tournament broadcasts.
Violations.
Violation of this section shall subject a tournament to a fine up to $10,000 for each
violation. In cases that are flagrant and particularly injurious to the success of the
ATP Tour, the Senior Vice-President Rules & Competition may refer the matter to
the ATP Challenger Committee for further action which could include additional
fines and/or loss of sanction.
3) ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark: Optional Applications
An ATP Challenger Tour tournament may wish to identify itself as an ATP Chal-
lenger Tour event by applying the Brand Mark in the following optional applica-
tions:
36 37
II. BRANDING III. FINANCIAL
3.01 Composition of Commitment
Each tournament’s financial commitment is composed of on-site prize money and
tournament fee obligations unless otherwise approved by ATP.

3.02 Currency
All references to money are expressed in United States Dollars (USD) and Euros
(EUR), unless otherwise designated. Tournament fees, fines and other amounts pay-
able to ATP are payable in USD or EUR.

3.03 Default of Prize Money Payments

Any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament that defaults in payment of prize
money, tournament fee or any other payments due to ATP may have its membership
status (sanction status if ATP Challenger Tour tournament) changed subject to ATP
Bylaws.

3.04 Fee Obligation

A. ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments must pay to ATP as part of their total
financial commitment the following fees based on prize money level and tournament
classification, unless otherwise determined by ATP:
ATP Tour Masters 1000
• Service Fee
• Category Protection Fee
• Extra Week Fee
ATP Tour 500
• Service Fee
• Category Protection Fee
ATP Tour 250
• Service Fee
ATP Challenger Tour
• Tournament fees shall be 5% of total prize money.

B. All fees shall be due and payable as follows:

1) ATP Masters 1000 and ATP 500 Tournaments:
a) Six (6) months prior to the first day of the tournament, the Advance Fee is
due:
ATP Tour Masters 1000 $60,000/€51,000
ATP Tour 500 $50,000/€42,500
b) On the first day of the tournament, the balance of unpaid fees is due and
payable.
2) ATP 250 Tournaments:
On the first day of the tournament, the total fee is due and payable.
3) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. The full fee is due with the tournament
application.
4) Late Payments. Fee payments not received by due dates are subject to an initial
2% late fee, followed by a subsequent 2% late fee every 30 days.

38 39
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
3.05 Fees/Other Payments ees, agents, regardless of the court of jurisdiction, arising out of the negligence of
the tennis tournament, its directors or representatives.
A. All fees and monies due to ATP are to be sent by wire in USD or EUR.
7) Coverage will include volunteers, on-court officials and ball persons as “named
1) U.S. Dollar payment by wire insureds” under the policy.
Bank: Wells Fargo Bank, NA
420 Montgomery Street B. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament is responsible for determining
San Francisco, CA 94163 whether applicable worker’s compensation statutes apply to injuries sustained by
United States of America volunteers, sub-contractors, on-court officials or ball persons. In the absence of a
Swift/BIC Code: WFBIUS6S worker’s compensation coverage requirement, it is recommended that the tourna-
Account Number: 2130600027348 ment purchase excess medical insurance for the event to provide medical payments
Routing Number (Domestic Banks): 121000248 coverage to injured volunteers, on-court officials or ball persons involved in the event.
Beneficiary: ATP TOUR INC.
C. All such insurance shall provide, not less than thirty (30) days, prior written notice to
Reference: Tournament Name & Invoice Number
ATP of cancellation.
2) Euro payment by wire D. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall furnish to ATP no later
Bank: Wells Fargo Bank, NA - London than sixty (60) days prior to such tournament a certificate of insurance from such
One Plantation Place insurance carrier certifying compliance with the above requirements.
30 Fenchurch Street
London, EC3M 3BD 3.07 Letter of Credit - New/Conditional Tournaments
Swift/BIC Code: PNBPGB2L
IBAN: GB31 PNBP 1656 7121 4741 66 Unless otherwise determined by ATP, each ATP Tour tournament with conditional
Account: 21474166 membership status must submit to ATP within the time period required, an approved
Beneficiary: ATP TOUR INC. irrevocable Letter of Credit, in form and substance, satisfactory to ATP, from an ATP
Intermediary Bank: ING BELGIUM SA approved bank in the amount of the on-site prize money. Such Letter of Credit must
BBRUBEBB010 have an expiration date no earlier than one (1) month after the last scheduled day of
Reference: Tournament Name & Invoice Number ATP event.
B. Any amounts (e.g. player fines, non-member service fees, air-tickets) collected or
owed by the tournament to ATP must be remitted to ATP. 3.08 Prize Money
A. All prize money due to ATP is to be sent by wire in USD or EUR.
3.06 Insurance
1) U.S. Dollar payment by wire
A. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall obtain and maintain gen- Bank: BNP PARIBAS
eral liability insurance or the equivalent thereof, with an insurance carrier maintaining 1 boulevard des Moulins
a financial rating of “A” by AM Best and acceptable to ATP. 98000 Monaco
1) Masters 1000 events shall maintain a minimum limit of $10,000,000 USD. Swift/BIC Code: BNPAMCM1XXX
IBAN Number: MC58 3000 4091 7000 0140 0573 253
2) ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 events shall maintain limits of not less than Account Number: 00014005732
$5,000,000 USD. Beneficiary: ATP TOUR PRIZE MONEY
3) ATP Challenger Tour events offering prize money of $100,000 and above shall 201 ATP Tour Boulevard
maintain limits of not less than $€1,000,000 in coverage. Ponte Vedra Beach, FL 32082
4) ATP Challenger Tour events offering prize money less than $100,000 shall main-
Intermediary Bank: BNP PARIBAS USA – NEW YORK
tain limits of not less than $€500,000 in coverage.
787 Seventh Avenue
5) The liability insurance shall include bodily injury and property damage liability, New York, NY 10109
personal injury, participant legal liability, hired and non-owned auto and contrac- Swift/BIC Code: BNPAUS3N
tual liability coverage.
Reference: Tournament Name & Invoice Number
6) The tournament liability insurance shall name ATP Tour, Inc. (a United States
Corporation), its director and officers, employees, agents as additional named in-
sureds with respect to any claim or suits brought against ATP, its officials, employ-

40 41
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
2) Euro payment by wire qualifying and prior to his first match) shall receive first round prize money
Bank: BNP PARIBAS (second round in the case of a Bye) if the following conditions are met:
1 boulevard des Moulins i) The player must be on-site at the time of the withdrawal and must be
98000 Monaco declared unfit to compete by the tournament doctor.
Swift/BIC Code: BNPAMCM1XXX ii) Each player is limited to two (2) tournaments*, non-consecutive, in a cal-
IBAN Number: MC58 3000 4091 7000 0101 1541 076 endar year where he may receive prize money for the on-site withdrawal.
Account Number: 00010115410 * There are no limits to the number of events a player may receive prize
Beneficiary: ATP TOUR PRIZE MONEY money for the on-site withdrawal due to Covid-19 reasons as long as the
201 ATP Tour Boulevard events are not in back to back weeks.
Ponte Vedra Beach, FL 32082 iii) Players who have been out of competition due to long term injuries (30
Reference: Tournament Name & Invoice Number days or more) and withdraw on-site become eligible for the provision to
receive prize money only after they have returned to competition and
B. General competed in their first event.
1) ATP Tour iv) Players who have been out of competition, for any reason, 60 days or
more and withdraw on-site become eligible for the provision to receive
a) Prize money at all ATP Tour events shall be paid through ATP or its designat- prize money only after they have returned to competition and competed
ed agent at the conclusion of the tournament, unless otherwise approved by in their first event.
ATP. Prize money shall be distributed based on breakdowns established by b) The Lucky Loser replacing a player who has withdrawn on-site shall receive
ATP. ATP must approve any changes in prize money, including from year to qualifying prize money earned plus money earned in the main draw minus the
year. prize money paid to the withdrawing player.
b) ATP must receive the electronically completed ATP prize money excel
spreadsheet no later than the end of the business day on the Monday follow- Case: A player withdraws on-site from singles before his first singles match
ing the conclusion of the tournament. The spreadsheet must be emailed to but is still in doubles. Is he eligible for first round prize money compensation
accounting@atptour.com. if all other conditions are met?
c) Tournaments are required to wire net prize money to the designated bank Decision: Yes. The player may collect the on-site prize money if
trust account to ensure receipt by the Wednesday following the conclusion of he is still competing in the doubles of that tournament as long as he
their respective events. receives medical clearance prior to the doubles match. The doubles
2) ATP Challenger Tour match cannot be on the same day as his withdrawal or on the day of
a) Prize money at all ATP Challenger Tour events shall be paid through ATP or his scheduled singles match.
its designated agent at the conclusion of the tournament, unless otherwise Case: A player withdraws from singles before his first singles match
approved by ATP. and collects on site prize money. Can he play a special event or
b) ATP must receive 100% of the prize money as follows: another tennis event that week?
• New applicants – prize money must be deposited in ATP account six (6) Decision: No. Once a player withdraws he cannot continue or par-
weeks prior to the first day of the tournament. ticipate in any other event that week; whether he collects the on-site
• Existing Events – prize money must be deposited in ATP account four (4) prize money compensation or not.
weeks prior to the first day of the tournament. Case: A player withdraws on site and collects prize money. Is he
c) ATP must receive the electronically completed ATP prize money excel spread- allowed to do the same at the next tournament he’s entered in.
sheet no later than the end of the business day on the Monday following the Decision: No. A player is not allowed to collect prize money when
conclusion of the tournament. Spreadsheet must be emailed to accounting@ withdrawing on-site at two consecutive tournaments. A player must
atptour.com. compete in a tournament where ATP points are awarded or Davis
d) ATP reserves the right to seek assurances of a tournament’s financial viability Cup or Olympics before being allowed to collect prize money at
in the form of a letter of credit, advance payment of prize money or any other another event.
means ATP deems necessary.
Case: A player withdraws on site and receives prize money at an
3) Prize money shall be paid only for matches played. If a final cannot be played,
ATP Challenger Tour tournament. Subsequently, he withdraws
then each finalist shall be paid runner-up prize money. For purposes of this sec-
on site and receives prize money at an ATP Tour tournament. Is
tion, a match is played when it is won as a result of a retirement, default, walkover
the player allowed to withdraw on site and receive prize money at
or no show. (See “Exhibit K - Glossary” )
another ATP Challenger Tour or ATP Tour tournament?
Singles: Decision: No. Once the player has withdrawn on site and received
a) A player who withdraws prior to his first match from the singles qualifying prize money at any two, non-consecutive ATP Tour or ATP Chal-
(after the Friday 10AM freeze deadline) or from the main draw singles com- lenger Tour tournaments, he has used his 2 tournament limit for the
petition at an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event (after the start of the year and is not eligible to receive prize money for any future on-site
42 43
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
withdrawal at an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament in list. One player was on-site and eligible for compensation while the
that calendar year. other player was not on-site or otherwise ineligible to receive prize
Case: A player is out of competition for 30 days after retiring or money. Neither player was seeded with a Bye. How is it decided
withdrawing due to injury. Is he eligible to receive prize money if he what PM will the LL’s be receiving?
withdraws on-site after being out the 30 consecutive days since his Decision:
retirement/withdrawal? 1. The lucky loser who was drawn as the number 1 LL is eligible to
Decision: No: The player is only eligible for the provision to receive receive first round prize money or whatever money he earns in the
prize money for an on-site withdrawal after he has returned to com- main draw. He does not keep qualifying prize money.
petition and competed in his first event. 2. The lucky loser who was drawn as number 2 LL receives qual-
Case: A player using a protected ranking for entry withdraws on site ifying money earned plus money earned in main draw, less the
and collects prize money. Does this tournament count towards the amount paid to the withdrawing player.
total number of tournaments the player has used with his protected 3. The same principle applies if there were more than two withdraw-
ranking? ing players prior to the completion of the qualifying or the qualifiers
Decision: Yes. being placed in the draw.
Case: If a player qualifies, accepts a special exempt or accepts a Case: A seeded main draw player with a Bye withdraws on-site after
wild card and becomes a main draw player, can he receive on-site the Qualifying started, the main draw has been made and the player
prize money if otherwise eligible? is eligible to collect 2nd round prize money compensation. The order
Decision: Yes. Once he is accepted into the main draw as a quali- of play for the first day has not been released and the next seeded
fier, special exempt or wild card, he can receive on-site prize money player who did not receive a Bye moves into that position. How is
compensation if otherwise eligible. the prize money distributed?
Case: A player who is not on-site withdraws after the 10 AM, Friday Decision: The seeded player moving to the bye position will receive
deadline and comes on-site to do promotional activity or to be first round prize money if he loses and first round prize money plus
medically examined (Challengers) in order to avoid the applicable the difference between 2nd round and the round reached if he wins.
penalties. Is he eligible for first round prize money compensation? The LL inserted in the draw receives qualifying prize money earned
Decision: No. The player must be on-site at the time of the with- plus prize money earned in main draw less the 1st round prize
drawal in order to be eligible for first round prize money compensa- money.
tion under the rule. Case: Same situation as above, however the order of play for the
Case: May a player who withdraws on-site and otherwise qualifies, first day has been released.
decline the first round prize money? Decision: If a qualifier is drawn into the bye position he will receive
Decision: Yes, the player may decline to accept the money and first round prize money if he loses and first round prize money plus
then it becomes a normal on-site withdrawal. the difference between 2nd round and the round reached if he wins.
The lucky loser who was drawn into the 1st round position receives
Case: A player is an on-site withdrawal and wants to wait to decide
qualifying prize money earned plus money earned in main draw,
whether or not to accept the first round prize money if otherwise
less the 1st round money paid to the qualifier drawn into the bye
eligible. Is the player allowed to wait?
position.
Decision: No. The player must declare his intent at the time of the
Case: Two main draw players withdraw overnight after the Quali-
on-site withdrawal.
fying has finished. The Qualifiers were drawn into their respective
Case: A main draw player that would have been seeded with a bye positions in the draw. The Order of Play for the first day of main
withdraws on-site after the Qualifying started but before the main draw is released. One of the withdrawing players was seeded with
draw was done. He is eligible for compensation. Does he get 1st or a bye. The LL’s are drawn into the vacant position in the draw. The
2nd round PM compensation? second LL is drawn to replace the seeded player with the bye. How
Decision: The player receives 1st round PM compensation. Seed- is the prize money decided if the withdrawing players have received
ing is not official until the draw is made. compensation?
Case: A main draw player withdraws late after the Qualifying has Decision: The LL’s receive PM dependent on which player they
started and travels to the tournament site to perform Promotional were drawn to replace in the draw. This is a different procedure than
Activities to avoid the LW fine. Is he eligible for prize money com- the cases when the WD’s happen before the Q is finished and the
pensation? Q/LL’s inserted into the draw.
Decision: The player is not eligible for compensation as he was not Case: After the withdrawal deadline on Friday, two players/ teams
on-site when the withdrawal was done. withdraw from the Qualifying/Main Draw Doubles list. One player/
Case: During Qualifying, two players withdraw from the main draw team was on-site and eligible for compensation while the other

44 45
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
player/team was ineligible to receive prize money. How is it decided a) Neither player was in the singles main draw;
what PM the Alternates will be receiving? b) Both players used, or could have used**, their doubles ranking for entry into
Decision: the doubles draw (does not apply to wild card teams).
1. The highest ranked Alternate player/team who was accepted in c) The retiring/withdrawing player is still in the singles competition and at the
the drawn is eligible to receive first round prize money or whatever time of the medical examination is declared unfit to play in the singles of
money he/they earn in the tournament. that event or, if no longer involved in the singles competition of that event, is
2. The second ranked Alternate player/team who was accepted in forced to withdraw from the singles or doubles*** of the next tournament in
the draw will receive the prize money earned in the tournament, which he is entered.
less the amount paid to the withdrawing player/team. 3. The same i) For ATP Tour events if the retiring/withdrawing player was not in the sin-
principle applies if there were more than two withdrawing players/ gles draw of that event and is forced to withdraw from the next event in
teams eligible for substitution by Alternates in the singles qualifying/ which he is accepted in the main draw (singles or doubles).
main draw doubles. ii) For ATP Challenger events if the retiring/withdrawing player was not in
the singles draw of that event and is forced to withdraw from the following
Doubles - Prior to First Match: week’s event (single or doubles) after the withdrawal deadline.
A player/team accepted into the doubles main draw of an ATP Tour or ATP Chal- d) The retiring/withdrawing player was not involved in the singles draw of that
lenger Tour event that withdraws prior to their first match from the main draw event and:
doubles after the doubles online on-site alternate deadline (Tour events) or the i) For ATP Tour events is forced to withdraw from the next event in which he
doubles on-site entry deadline (Challengers) for medical reasons shall receive is entered (singles or doubles).
first round prize money (second round in the case of a Bye) if the following condi- ii) For ATP Challenger events is forced to withdraw from the following week’s
tions are met: event (singles or doubles***).
e) The retiring/withdrawing player had withdrawn/retired from his singles match,
a) The withdrawal was after the withdrawal deadline
which was scheduled the same day; or, if the doubles match is scheduled
b) The withdrawing player (and his partner) must be on-site at the time of the
for a following day the player is examined by the tournament Doctor and is
withdrawal and the withdrawing player must be declared unfit to compete by
declared unfit for competition in the doubles event.
the tournament doctor
c) Both players used or could have used their doubles ranking for acceptance
** Example: Player A is not in the singles draw and his doubles ranking is 20;
into the doubles draw.
his partner, Player B, is in the singles draw with a ranking of 15. Player B’s
d) Players who have been out of competition due to long term injuries (30 days
doubles ranking is 30. The cutoff for their method of entry is 60. Using player
or more) and withdraw on-site become eligible for the provision to receive
B’s doubles ranking would have kept them as a direct acceptance so they
prize money only after they have returned to competition and competed in
qualify for exception b) above.
their first event.
*** For ATP Challenger events the withdrawal for doubles must be after the with-
e) Players who have been out of competition, for any reason, 60 days or more
drawal deadline.
and withdraw on-site become eligible for the provision to receive prize money
only after they have returned to competition and competed in their first event.
f) Each player is limited to two (2) tournaments*, non-consecutive, in a calendar 4) A player who receives a “bye” and loses in the second round shall receive second
year where he may receive prize money for doubles on-site withdrawal. round loser’s prize money.
*There are no limits to the number of events a player may receive prize mon- 5) Players affected by the entries or seedings not in accordance with ATP Rules and
ey for the on-site withdrawal due to Covid-19 reasons as long as the events Regulations shall not be entitled to compensation. Such entry or seeding varianc-
are not in back to back weeks. es shall be resolved at the sole discretion of the Senior Vice President - Rules &
The alternate team replacing a team withdrawn on-site shall receive money Competition.
earned in the main draw minus the prize money paid to the withdrawing play-
6) A tournament must send to ATP any prize money not paid to a player who is de-
er/team.
faulted for improper conduct.
Doubles - After First Round:
3.09 On-Site Prize Money
Should a doubles match in an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event be uncon-
tested* or fail to be completed, the losing team shall only receive points and prize Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament is required to offer and pay as
money from the previous round unless one of the following exceptions is applica- part of its financial commitment the on-site prize money shown in “Exhibit J” plus
ble: hotel accommodations, unless otherwise determined by ATP. The minimum prize
money for ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments is $41,000/€36,900.
* A team withdrawing from the first round will not receive prize money whether
there is or is not an alternate/lucky loser team, except if the team qualifies for
compensation as defined above.

46 47
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
A. ATP Tour Tournaments 3) The Exchange Rate Adjustment rule will not apply to: new ATP Tour tournaments
who have run their event for less than 5 years, existing tournaments that relocate
Prize money and fee payments by all ATP Tour level tournaments shall be deter- to a country with different currency for the first 5 years in the new location, exist-
mined as follows: ing tournaments who previously elected to opt out of this rule and ATP Challenger
Tour events. New ATP tournaments may not opt out of this rule.
1) U.S. Tournaments: All prize money, fees etc. must be paid in USD.
2) European Region Tournaments: All prize money, fees etc. must be paid in EUR. 3.12 Late Payment
3) All Other Tournaments: All prize money, fees etc. must be paid in USD. Any Prize money payments not received by the due dates specified herein are subject to
change from USD payment must be approved by the ATP Board. an initial 2% late fee, followed by a subsequent 2% late fee every 30 days.

B. ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments

3.13 Taxes-Notice of Withholdings
Prize money and fee payments by all ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall be Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament is required to give at least ninety
determined as follows: (90) days notice to ATP of the percentage of the applicable player income tax deduc-
1) U.S. Challengers: All prize money and fees must be paid in USD. tion. No other tax deduction(s) will be permitted from the on-site prize money paid
to a player. Tournaments are responsible for any additional taxes imposed. Each
2) European Region Challengers: All prize money and fees must be paid in EUR. tournament is responsible for withholding required income taxes from each player’s
3) All Other ATP Challenger Tour Events: Prize money and fees must be paid in prize money payment and remitting such amounts to the applicable taxing authorities
USD. on a timely basis.

3.11 On-Site Prize Money Adjustment 3.14 Withholding From Prize Money
A. Exchange Rate Adjustment Rule A. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall withhold from prize money
only a player’s applicable income tax deduction, non-member service fee, fines, ad-
There will be no prize money adjustment for tournaments in the U.S. and tourna- vances and other ATP designated expenses.
ments in ATP’s European Group, except for those in non-euro based countries. For
all other tournaments, the on-site prize money will be increased or decreased from B. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall document the player in-
approved prize money levels when there are significant exchange rate changes be- come tax deduction, if any, and provide players on-site with a withholding income tax
tween USD or EUR / local currency. The amount of the prize money adjustment shall receipt.
be determined as follows:
C. When a fine is deducted from a player’s prize money paid in a currency other than
1) As of March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31 of each year, ATP will the assessed currency, the exchange rate used (on the day the fine is deducted) by
compare the current market exchange (ratio of local currency to USD or EUR) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament for the payment of prize money shall
with the 5-year average of the same currency exchange rate for each non-U.S./ be applicable to the payment of the fine.
non-European group and calculate the change between the current rate and av-
erage rate as a percentage of the average rate. Prize money amounts for tour-
3.15 Prizes and Non-Cash Awards
naments in countries where more than a 10% change occurs will be adjusted by
one-half of the percentage change subject to a maximum adjustment of 15%. A. In addition to on-site prize money, each ATP Tour tournament may give to each sin-
The calculations will apply to tournaments in the following year on the dates as gles and doubles winner during the on-site awards presentation one (1) non-cash
follows: award or prize plus a trophy. Non-cash awards or prizes valued over $5,000 must be
approved by the ATP CEO no later than forty-two (42) days prior to the tournament
a) March 31 calculation-tournaments that begin from January 1 through March and can be offered for results in that tournament only.
31
b) June 30 calculation-tournaments that begin from April 1 through June 30 B. All non-cash awards or prizes must be the product of, or service provided by, a prin-
c) September 30 calculation-tournaments that begin from July 1 through Sep- cipal tournament sponsor.
tember 30
d) December 31 calculation-tournaments that begin from October 1 through De- C. Pre-existing tournament sponsorship agreements made before 1993 for non-cash
cember 31 awards or prizes are exempt until the expiration of such agreements. The tournament
2) Pepperstone ATP Rankings points will be based on approved prize money levels must notify the appropriate ATP Regional Office of such non-cash awards or prizes
prior to any adjustment pursuant to this section. This section will not apply to forty-two (42) days prior to the tournament.
tournaments in countries where currencies are not actively traded.

48 49
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
D. Tournaments may not pay travel expenses without special written permission from calculation of individual tournament information and the matching of the information
ATP. to a particular tournament. The M1000 PM Committee Auditor will be required to
execute and deliver to the M1000 PM Committee a statement of confidentiality and
3.16 Release from Financial Commitment non-disclosure prohibiting the M1000 PM Committee Auditor from making any such
disclosure.
A. Each ATP Tour tournament is required to pay its financial commitment for each cal-
endar year tournament. “M1000 Independent Auditor” means a highly qualified independent certified public
accounting firm selected by each 1000 tournament member and approved by ATP to
B. No refund shall be made for any sums paid whether or not the event is actually held, perform a full scope independent audit of the M1000 Tournament Income Statement
unless ATP in its sole discretion determines that extraordinary circumstances exist and perform certain other agreed upon procedures and to provide results of such
justifying such action. procedures to the M1000 PM Committee Auditor.

3.17 ATP Masters 1000 Tournament Financial Information “M1000 Independent Member” means the independent member of the M1000 PM
Committee appointed by the ATP Board of Directors by the affirmative vote of a super
A. Each Masters 1000 tournament member is required to annually submit to the M1000 majority vote of the Board to serve on the M1000 PM Committee for a 3-year term.
PM Committee Auditor an independently audited tournament income statement The Independent Member will serve as Chair of M1000 PM Committee. The Indepen-
and related footnotes, along with other information as requested by the M1000 PM dent Member is subject to removal at any time by the ATP Board of Directors by the
Committee and the M1000 PM Committee Auditor. This income statement must be affirmative vote of a super majority vote of the Board.
a complete and accurate determination of actual net income and net income be-
fore income taxes. In connection with the foregoing, each Masters 1000 tournament “M1000 Player Auditor” means an independent certified public accountant and/or
member shall provide its full cooperation to the M1000 PM Committee Auditor, who financial advisor selected by the player member(s) of the M1000 PM Committee and
will examine and verify the accuracy of such information. approved by the M1000 PM Committee in accordance with Section C below, who
meets the appropriate level of expertise and experience to evaluate the accuracy of
B. The following terms shall have the meanings set forth below: the M1000 Submissions. The M1000 Player Auditor will act as advisor to the player
member(s) of M1000 PM Committee. The M1000 Player Auditor may also review
“M1000 Prize Money Committee (M1000 PM Committee)” means the committee items and information related to the application of the Masters 1000 Player Compen-
appointed by the ATP Board of Directors and authorized to act in accordance with sation Rule to the extent requested by the player member(s) of the M1000 PM Com-
this rule, which shall be comprised of the ATP Chairman or his designee, an M1000 mittee and shall provide comfort to such member(s) as to the accuracy of the M1000
Independent Member (as defined below) and an equal number of tournament and Submissions to confirm the reasonableness of the M1000 PM Committee Auditor’s
player representatives, with only one (1) tournament representative and one (1) play- evaluation thereof. M1000 Player Auditor will be instructed not to provide to any party,
er representative serving on such M1000 PM Committee being designated by the including the M1000 PM Committee, any of its members, ATP or its staff, except for
class of ATP Board Directors that appointed such representatives with the right to the ATP Chairman, CEO and CFO, individual tournament information or any informa-
vote on any M1000 PM Committee matters, regardless of the number of tournament tion that could reasonably lead to the calculation of individual tournament information
and player representatives appointed to serve on the M1000 PM Committee. The and the matching of the information to a particular tournament. The M1000 Player
player representative and the tournament representative designated with the right to Auditor will be required to execute and deliver to the M1000 PM Committee a state-
vote on M1000 PM Committee matters shall be collectively referred to herein as the ment of confidentiality and non-disclosure prohibiting the M1000 Player Auditor from
“M1000 Voting Members”. If appointed voting member is unable to attend meeting, making any such disclosure.
provided that proper notice has taken place for such meeting, voting member is al-
lowed to grant his/her vote by proxy to another committee member. “Related Party” means a person or company that has control, joint control or signif-
icant influence over the tournament or a tournament entity, either by ownership, by
“M1000 PM Committee Auditor” means an independent accounting firm appointed agreement, or by power to manage, govern or influence the tournament’s finances
by the M1000 PM Committee to (i) receive and evaluate each tournament member’s and/or operations. Also, a person or company is considered to be a related party to
M1000 Submissions and tournament financials, (ii) perform agreed upon procedures the tournament if the tournament has control, joint control or significant influence over
regarding financial information included in each M1000 Submission, and (iii) prepare the person or company, either by ownership, by agreement, or by power to manage,
reports to be provided to the M1000 PM Committee and to the ATP Board of Directors govern or influence the person or company’s finances and/or operations.
in accordance with this rule summarizing the M1000 Submissions. The M1000 PM
Committee Auditor will also act as advisor to the M1000 PM Committee on finan- “M1000 Submission” means the prescribed, mandatory annual financial informa-
cial and accounting related matters and GAAP reporting issues and questions. The tion report required to be submitted to the M1000 PM Committee Auditor by each
M1000 PM Committee Auditor will be instructed not to provide to any party, including Masters 1000 tournament member (or its M1000 Independent Auditor) hereunder,
the M1000 PM Committee, any of its members, the ATP Board of Directors, ATP or which, for the avoidance of doubt, shall include a M1000 Tournament Income State-
its staff, except for the M1000 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman, CEO and CFO, in- ment and further information reasonably requested by the M1000 PM Committee Au-
dividual tournament information or any information that could reasonably lead to the ditor similar in detail to the previous Tournament Financial Review process, but also

50 51
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
including full disclosure and armslength fair valuation of related party transactions for funding available to enable to the M1000 PM Committee to administer, implement
both income and expenses and owner transactions. M1000 Submission must recon- and enforce this rule in accordance with the terms herein.
cile (with a schedule and explanation of any reconciling differences provided) to the
audited M1000 Tournament Income Statement. M1000 Submission may also include D. Each Masters 1000 tournament member is required to provide a complete and ac-
any other information reasonably requested by the curate M1000 Submission annually to the M1000 PM Committee Auditor no later
than 120 days following the conclusion of tournament’s fiscal year-end. Each M1000
M1000 PM Committee. The M1000 Submission must be completed in full as deter- Submission must be certified by the applicable tournament member as complete and
mined by the M1000 PM Committee Auditor to be considered in compliance with this accurate and in compliance with this rule in all material respects.
rule.
E. Each year, the M1000 PM Committee Auditor will perform agreed upon audit proce-
“M1000 Tournament Income Statement” means the independently audited income dures (as directed by the M1000 PM Committee) of each tournament member M1000
statement which includes all revenues, costs and expenses and provides both net Submission, and report to the M1000 PM Committee any issues that it may identify
income and net income before income taxes related to the tournament. Such M1000 as a result of these procedures for which the M1000 PM Committee Auditor is unable
Tournament Income Statement will be reported in accordance with Generally Ac- to resolve with the respective tournament. Once this process is complete, the M1000
cepted Accounting Principles in the United States (“US GAAP”), the International PM Committee Auditor will provide the results of its procedures and the supporting
Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) for small and medium size businesses or the audit work papers to the M1000 Player Auditor. Such information will be provided
applicable General Accepted Accounting Principles (“local GAAP”) in the country in to the M1000 Player Auditor without identifying individual tournament names. The
which the tournament operates. These reporting standards must be consistently ap- M1000 Player Auditor will undertake a review of the provided information and results.
plied over a period of five years at least. Each M1000 Tournament Income Statement After completing this review, if the M1000 Player Auditor has any outstanding issues
shall include all revenues, costs and expenses related to the tournament’s event or questions, the M1000 Player Auditor will work with the M1000 PM Committee
operations regardless of which entity affiliated with the tournament event receives, Auditor to resolve such issues and questions. In the event that the M1000 PM Com-
or accounts for, such revenues, costs or expenses or which jurisdiction such items mittee Auditor and the M1000 Player Auditor are unable to resolve any such issues
are reported. All such amounts shall be reported in the tournament’s domestic report- or questions, the M1000 PM Committee Auditor and the M1000 Player Auditor will
ing currency. The M1000 PM Committee has the authority to create additional rules inform the M1000 PM Committee and may jointly conduct an on-site audit at the
for such reporting. Consistent with local GAAP, US GAAP and IFRS, tournaments offices of the relevant tournament or Related Party to review and evaluate the books
will report estimated revenues, costs and expenses where final amounts are not and records of such tournament or Related Party that are reasonably necessary to
determinable by the deadline for completing the M1000 Submission. Subsequent resolve such issue or question; provided, that any such joint on-site audit must be
adjustments of these estimates to actual will be included in the M1000 Tournament conducted during regular business hours. If after any joint on-site audit, the M1000
Income Statement in the subsequent M1000 Submission when such final amounts PM Committee Auditor and the M1000 Player Auditor are still unable to resolve any
are known. such issues or questions (or in the event the M1000 PM Committee Auditor and
the M1000 Player Auditor elect not to conduct an on-site audit and such issues or
C. The M1000 PM Committee will administer, implement and enforce this rule, includ- questions remain), the M1000 PM Committee Auditor and the M1000 Player Auditor
ing, but not limited to (i) determining procedures for audits for purposes of financial will inform the M1000 PM Committee and the M1000 PM Committee will evaluate
disclosures in accordance with the terms of this rule; (ii) determining the process of the information presented and make a determination on the issue(s) or question(s),
receiving financial information from tournament members and audits with respect to and then issue a determination as to whether the unresolved issue(s) or question(s)
such information (iii) evaluating and resolving questions and issues that may arise is due to an act or omission of a tournament member. In the event that the M1000
in respect of any audit, M1000 Submission or violation of this rule; (iv) enforcing this Voting Members are unable to unanimously agree on such determination, then the
rule pursuant to Section G below; and (v) implementing any other aspect of this rule. M1000 Independent Member will make such determination in his or her sole discre-
All actions, approvals and determinations of the M1000 PM Committee shall require tion. If it is determined that the unresolved issue(s) or questions(s) are due to an act
a unanimous vote of the M1000 Voting Members, unless otherwise expressly provid- or omission of a tournament member, then the M1000 PM Committee will determine
ed in this rule (including as set forth in Sections D, E, F and G). The ATP Chairman the implications for the purpose of the prize money formula calculation and/or that
shall have no right to vote on M1000 PM Committee matters; provided, however, that tournament may be subject to a fine pursuant to Section G below.
in the event that the M1000 Voting Members are unable to unanimously agree on
the appointment of the M1000 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman acting reasonably F. Any tournament member that (i) fails to provide a M1000 Submission to the M1000
shall have the right to vote on whether approval of the proposed M1000 Player Au- PM Committee Auditor as required under this rule (including with respect to the tim-
ditor should be granted. If any such vote by the ATP Chairman occurs and the ATP ing, accuracy and/ or completeness thereof), (ii) submits a report or document that
Chairman votes against the approval of any proposed M1000 Player Auditor, then contains a material misstatement or omits material information, (iii) does not fully
the ATP Chairman will provide a brief description of his or her reason for such deci- cooperate with the M1000 PM Committee Auditor and M1000 Player Auditor as re-
sion to the M1000 PM Committee. The M1000 PM Committee will meet regularly as quired hereunder, or (iv) otherwise fails to comply with this rule, may request from
deemed necessary by the M1000 PM Committee to properly administer, implement the M1000 PM Committee a 10 day extension in order to comply with its submission
and enforce this rule. The ATP Board of Directors will make reasonable and adequate failure. Following any such extension the tournament in each case, may be subject to
a fine in a maximum amount of $250,000. This maximum fine amount will increase by
52 53
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
100% for each consecutive year submission failure by a tournament. The M1000 PM representatives, with only one (1) tournament representative and one (1) player rep-
Committee shall evaluate the circumstances that led to the failure of such tournament resentative serving on such 500 PM Committee being designated by the class of ATP
member to comply with the terms of this rule and assess an appropriate fine taking Board Directors that appointed such representatives with the right to vote on any 500
into consideration the guidelines set forth in Section G below or as otherwise provid- PM Committee matters, regardless of the number of tournament and player repre-
ed by the ATP Board of Directors from time to time. For clarity, any such guidelines sentatives appointed to serve on the 500 PM Committee. The player representative
will be for guidance purposes only and the M1000 PM Committee will have the right and the tournament representative designated with the right to vote on 500 PM Com-
to determine an appropriate fine in its sole discretion. In the event that the M1000 mittee matters shall be collectively referred to herein as the “500 Voting Members”.
Voting Members are unable to unanimously agree on a fine, the M1000 Independent If appointed voting member is unable to attend meeting, provided that proper notice
Member will make such determination in his or her sole discretion taking into account has taken place for such meeting, voting member is allowed to grant his/her vote by
the circumstances that led to the failure of the tournament member to comply with proxy to another committee member.
the terms of this rule. All fines assessed under this rule will be contributed to player
programs as determined by the Player Board Representatives. “500 PM Committee Auditor” means an independent accounting firm appointed
by the 500 PM Committee to (i) receive and evaluate each tournament member’s
G. The following guidelines are fines that may be imposed for violations of this rule (sub- 500 Submissions and tournament financials, (ii) perform agreed upon procedures
ject to the discretion of M1000 PM Committee as set forth in this rule): regarding financial information included in each 500 Submission, and (iii) prepare
reports to be provided to the 500 PM Committee and to the ATP Board of Directors
Violation Fine* in accordance with this rule summarizing the 500 Submissions. The 500 PM Com-
mittee Auditor will also act as advisor to the 500 PM Committee on financial and
Failure to meet 120-day deadline $20,000 accounting related matters and GAAP reporting issues and questions. The 500 PM
to provide a M1000 Submission in Committee Auditor will be instructed not to provide to any party, including the 500 PM
accordance with this rule Committee, any of its members, the ATP Board of Directors, ATP or its staff, except
Prolonged failure to meet 120-day $60,000 for the 500 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman, CEO and CFO (or their respective rea-
deadline to provide a M1000 Submis- sonably appointed designees), individual tournament information or any information
sion in accordance with this rule (over that could reasonably lead to the calculation of individual tournament information and
a month late) the matching of the information to a particular tournament. The 500 PM Committee
Auditor will be required to execute and deliver to the 500 PM Committee a statement
M1000 Submission contains a materi- $60,000 (up to a maximum of of confidentiality and non-disclosure prohibiting the 500 PM Committee Auditor from
al misstatement or material omission $250,000) making any such disclosure. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the 500 PM Committee
of information Auditor, the 500 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman, CEO and CFO (or their respec-
Willful non-compliance with this rule Up to a maximum of $250,000 tive reasonably appointed designees) may share individual tournament information
(e.g., failure to provide a M1000 or documentation across the 500 category tournament members in an anonymized
Submission) fashion.
* Specific amounts should depend on the severity of the violation and issue(s) pre-
sented. “500 Independent Auditor” means a highly qualified independent certified public
accounting firm selected by each 500 tournament member and approved by ATP to
perform a full scope independent audit of the 500 Tournament Income Statement and
3.18 ATP Tournament 500 Financial Information perform certain other agreed upon procedures and to provide results of such proce-
A. Each ATP 500 tournament member is required to annually submit to the 500 PM dures to the 500 PM Committee Auditor.
Committee Auditor an independently audited tournament income statement and re-
lated footnotes, along with other information as requested by the 500 PM Committee “500 Independent Member” means the independent member of the 500 PM Com-
and the 500 PM Committee Auditor . This income statement must be a complete and mittee appointed by the ATP Board of Directors by the affirmative vote of a super
accurate determination of actual net income and net income before income taxes. majority vote of the Board to serve on the 500 PM Committee for a 3-year term. The
In connection with the foregoing, each 500 tournament member shall provide its full Independent Member is subject to removal at any time by the ATP Board of Directors
cooperation to the 500 PM Committee Auditor, who will examine and verify the accu- by the affirmative vote of a super majority vote of the Board.
racy of such information.
“500 Player Auditor” means an independent certified public accountant and/or fi-
B. The following terms shall have the meanings set forth below: nancial advisor selected by the player member(s) of the 500 PM Committee and
approved by the 500 PM Committee in accordance with Section C below, who meets
“500 Prize Money Committee (500 PM Committee)” means the committee ap- the appropriate level of expertise and experience to evaluate the accuracy of the 500
pointed by the ATP Board of Directors and authorized to act in accordance with this Submissions. The 500 Player Auditor will act as advisor to the player member(s) of
rule, which shall be comprised of the ATP Chairman or his designee, a 500 Inde- 500 PM Committee. The 500 Player Auditor may also review items and information
pendent Member (as defined below) and an equal number of tournament and player related to the application of the 500 Prize Money Formula Rule to the extent request-
54 55
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
ed by the player member(s) of the 500 PM Committee and shall provide comfort to not limited to, hotel accommodations; player transportation, player food, meals
such member(s) as to the accuracy of the 500 Submissions to confirm the reason- and beverages; lounge for players; internet access for players; and gifting and
ableness of the 500 PM Committee Auditor’s evaluation thereof. 500 Player Auditor on-court supplies for players.
will be instructed not to provide to any party, including the 500 PM Committee, any
of its members, ATP or its staff, except for the ATP Chairman, CEO and CFO (or (c) De Minimus barter transactions are defined as individual transactions with val-
their respective reasonably appointed designees), individual tournament information uations under $20,000 for 500 tournaments. De Minimus transactions are not
or any information that could reasonably lead to the calculation of individual tourna- required to be reported individually in the 500 Submission as long as the total
ment information and the matching of the information to a particular tournament. The of such individual transactions is 5% or less of Gross Revenues. In the event
500 Player Auditor will be required to execute and deliver to the 500 PM Committee such total exceeds 5% of Gross Revenues, tournaments must individually report
a statement of confidentiality and non-disclosure prohibiting the 500 Player Auditor the highest valued barter transactions included in the total such that the total
from making any such disclosure. excluding those transactions is 5% or less of Gross Revenues. A summary writ-
ten description of each De Minimus transaction is required to be included in the
“Gross Revenues” means the total amount of gross revenues related to a tourna- Submission.
ment determined on the basis of local GAAP, US GAAP or the IFRS (depending on
the applicable accounting rules in the country in which the tournament operates), in “500 Submission” means the prescribed, mandatory annual financial information
each case, as in effect on such date of determination and consistently applied, which re- port required to be submitted to the 500 PM Committee Auditor by each 500 tour-
shall include all revenues related to the tournament’s operations regardless of which nament member (or its 500 Independent Auditor) hereunder, which, for the avoidance
entity affiliated with the tournament receives, or accounts for, such revenues or in of doubt, shall include a 500 Tournament Income Statement and further information
which jurisdiction such revenues are reported. All such revenues shall be reported reasonably requested by the 500 PM Committee Auditor similar in detail to the pre-
in the tournament’s domestic reporting currency. For men’s and women’s combined vious Tournament Financial Review process, but also including full disclosure and
tournaments, total Gross Revenues should be broken out by tournament and cate- arms- length fair valuation of related party transactions for both income and expens-
gorized by those identifiable only to the men’s tournament, those identifiable only to es and owner transactions. 500 Submission must reconcile (with a schedule and
the women’s tournament, and all other revenues. The 500 PM Committee has the explanation of any reconciling differences provided) to the audited 500 Tournament
power to create additional rules for reporting Gross Revenues. Consistent with local Income Statement. 500 Submission may also include any other information reason-
GAAP, US GAAP and IFRS, tournaments will report estimated revenues for those ably requested by the 500 PM Committee. The 500 Submission must be completed in
revenue sources where final revenue amounts are not determinable by the deadline full as determined by the 500 PM Committee Auditor to be considered in compliance
for completing the 500 Submission. Subsequent adjustments of these estimates to with this rule.
actual will be included in Gross Revenues in the subsequent 500 Submission when
such final revenue amounts are known. “500 Tournament Income Statement” means the independently audited income
statement which includes all revenues, costs and expenses and provides both net
“Barter” a description of each Barter transaction must be included as part of each income and net income before income taxes related to the tournament. Such 500
500 Submission. Barter transactions as defined below for each revenue category Tournament Income Statement will be reported in accordance with local GAAP, US
are required to be included in Gross Revenues. Barter for this purpose is non-cash GAAP, the IFRS for small and medium size businesses, in each case consistently
transactions (for example advertising) where value is exchanged (for example, when applied. Each 500 Tournament Income Statement shall include all revenues, costs
cars are provided as part of a car sponsor deal the value of the cars provided must and expenses related to the tournament’s event operations regardless of which entity
be included in sponsor revenues. Another example is tickets given to a local club or affiliated with the tournament event receives, or accounts for, such revenues, costs
charity for no consideration would not be valued or included in ticketing revenues). or expenses or which jurisdiction such items are reported. All such amounts shall be
Barter valuations should be in accordance with local GAAP, US GAAP or IFRS appli- reported in the tournament’s domestic reporting currency. The 500 PM Committee
cable to each tournament. The 500 PM Committee will work with the 500 PM Com- has the authority to create additional rules for such reporting. Consistent with both
mittee Auditor and include a comprehensive definition of barter transactions and their GAAP, the IFRS for small and medium size businesses, or Local GAAP, tournaments
valuation for Gross Revenue purposes and include such comprehensive definition as will report estimated revenues, costs and expenses where final amounts are not
part of the 500 Submission. determinable by the deadline for completing the 500 Submission. Subsequent ad-
justments of these estimates to actual will be included in the 500 Tournament Income
The following Barter transactions are excluded from Gross Revenues: Statement in the subsequent 500 Submission when such final amounts are known.

(a) Media commitments for promotional time or space that are not for resale and are C. The 500 PM Committee will administer, implement and enforce this rule, Iing, but not
used solely (i) to promote the tournament, (ii) to promote the ATP or any related limited to (i) determining procedures for audits for purposes of financial disclosures
event or activity of the tournament that generates Gross Revenues, (iii) to pro- in accordance with the terms of this rule; (ii) determining the process of receiving
mote charitable or not for profit organizations or agencies that are unrelated to the financial information from tournament members and audits with respect to such infor-
tournament or tournament affiliates, or (iv) for public service announcements. mation (iii) evaluating and resolving questions and issues that may arise in respect
(b) Any barter transaction that is both used to satisfy tournament standards and is of any audit, 500 Submission or violation of this rule; (iv) enforcing this rule pursuant
for the direct benefit of the players. Such direct player benefits include, but are to Section G below; and (v) implementing any other aspect of this rule. All actions,

56 57
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
approvals and determinations of the 500 PM Committee shall require a unanimous Independent Member will make such determination in his or her sole discretion. If it is
vote of the 500 Voting Members, unless otherwise expressly provided in this rule determined that the unresolved issue(s) or questions(s) are due to an act or omission
(including as set forth in Sections D, E, F and G). The ATP Chairman shall have no of a tournament member, then the 500 PM Committee will determine the implications
right to vote on 500 PM Committee matters; provided, however, that in the event for the purpose of the prize money formula calculation and/or that tournament may
that the 500 Voting Members are unable to unanimously agree on the appointment be subject to a fine pursuant to Section G below.
of the 500 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman acting reasonably shall have the right
to vote on whether approval of the proposed 500 Player Auditor should be granted. F. Any tournament member that (i) fails to provide a 500 Submission to the 500 PM
If any such vote by the ATP Chairman occurs and the ATP Chairman votes against Committee Auditor as required under this rule (including with respect to the tim-
the approval of any proposed 500 Player Auditor, then the ATP Chairman will provide ing, accuracy and/ or completeness thereof), (ii) submits a report or document that
a brief description of his or her reason for such decision to the 500 PM Committee. contains a material misstatement or omits material information, (iii) does not fully
The 500 PM Committee will meet regularly as deemed necessary by the 500 PM cooperate with the 500 PM Committee Auditor and 500 Player Auditor as required
Committee to properly administer, implement and enforce this rule. The ATP Board of hereunder, or (iv) otherwise fails to comply with this rule, may request from the 500
Directors will make reasonable and adequate funding available to enable to the 500 PM Committee a 10 day extension in order to comply with its submission failure. Fol-
PM Committee to administer, implement and enforce this rule in accordance with the lowing any such extension the tournament in each case, may be subject to a fine in a
terms herein. maximum amount of $250,000. This maximum fine amount will increase by 100% for
each consecutive year submission failure by a tournament. The 500 PM Committee
D. Each 500 tournament member is required to provide a complete and accurate 500 shall evaluate the circumstances that led to the failure of such tournament member
Submission annually to the 500 PM Committee Auditor no later than 120 days fol- to comply with the terms of this rule and assess an appropriate fine taking into con-
lowing the conclusion of its tournament for such year. Independently audited financial sideration the guidelines set forth in Section G below or as otherwise provided by the
information is to be provided no later than 120 days following the conclusion of tour- ATP Board of Directors from time to time. For clarity, any such guidelines will be for
nament’s fiscal year-end. Each 500 Submission must be certified by the applicable guidance purposes only and the 500 PM Committee will have the right to determine
tournament member as complete and accurate and in compliance with this rule in all an appropriate fine in its sole discretion. In the event that the 500 Voting Members are
material respects. unable to unanimously agree on a fine, the 500 Independent Member will make such
determination in his or her sole discretion taking into account the circumstances that
E. Each year, the 500 PM Committee Auditor will perform agreed upon audit procedures led to the failure of the tournament member to comply with the terms of this rule. All
(as directed by the 500 PM Committee) of each tournament member 500 Submis- fines assessed under this rule will be contributed to player programs as determined
sion, and report to the 500 PM Committee any issues that it may identify as a result by the Player Board Representatives.
of these procedures for which the 500 PM Committee Auditor is unable to resolve
with the respective tournament. Once this process is complete, the 500 PM Commit- G. The following guidelines are fines that may be imposed for violations of this rule (sub-
tee Auditor will provide the results of its procedures and the supporting audit work ject to the discretion of 500 PM Committee as set forth in this rule):
papers to the 500 Player Auditor. Such information will be provided to the 500 Play-
er Auditor without identifying individual tournament names. The 500 Player Auditor Violation Fine*
will undertake a review of the provided information and results. After completing this
review, if the 500 Player Auditor has any outstanding issues or questions, the 500 Failure to meet 120-day deadline to $10,000
Player Auditor will work with the 500 PM Committee Auditor to resolve such issues provide a 500 Submission in accor-
and questions. In the event that the 500 PM Committee Auditor and the 500 Player dance with this rule
Auditor are unable to resolve any such issues or questions, the 500 PM Committee Prolonged failure to meet 120-day $30,000
Auditor and the 500 Player Auditor will inform the 500 PM Committee and may jointly deadline to provide a 500 Submission
conduct an on-site audit at the offices of the relevant tournament or Related Party in accordance with this rule (over a
to review and evaluate the books and records of such tournament or Related Party month late)
that are reason- ably necessary to resolve such issue or question; provided, that any
such joint on-site audit must be conducted during regular business hours. If after any 500 Submission contains a material $30,000 (up to a maximum of
joint on-site audit, the 500 PM Committee Auditor and the 500 Player Auditor are still misstatement or material omission of $250,000)
unable to resolve any such issues or questions (or in the event the 500 PM Com- information
mittee Auditor and the 500 Player Auditor elect not to conduct an on-site audit and Willful non-compliance with this Up to a maximum of $250,000
such issues or questions remain), the 500 PM Committee Auditor and the 500 Player rule (e.g., failure to provide a 500
Auditor will inform the 500 PM Committee and the 500 PM Committee will evaluate Submission)
the information presented and make a determination on the issue(s) or question(s), * Specific amounts should depend on the severity of the violation and issue(s) pre-
and then issue a determination as to whether the unresolved issue(s) or question(s) sented.
is due to an act or omission of a tournament member. In the event that the 500 Vot-
ing Members are unable to unanimously agree on such determination, then the 500

58 59
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
3.19 ATP 250 Tournament Financial Information in detail to the prior Tournament Financial review process and any other information
required or reasonably requested by the 250 PM Committee. The 250 Submission
A. Each 250 category tournament member is required to annually provide to the 250 PM must be completed in full as determined by the 250 PM Committee Auditor to be
Committee Auditor (as defined below) a complete and accurate determination and considered in compliance with this rule.
calculation of its actual tournament Gross Revenues (as defined below), costs, ex-
penses and net income and all other financial information and supporting documen- C. The 250 PM Committee will administer, implement and enforce this rule, including,
tation relating thereto, in each case, as requested by the 250 PM Committee Auditor but not limited to (i) determining procedures for audits for purposes of financial dis-
and in accordance with the terms of this rule. In connection with the foregoing, each closures in accordance with the terms of this rule; (ii) determining the process of
250 category tournament member shall provide its full cooperation to the 250 PM receiving financial information from tournament members and audits with respect to
Committee Auditor, who will examine and verify the accuracy of such information. such information; (iii) evaluating and resolving questions and issues that may arise
in respect of any audit, 250 Submission or violation of this rule; (iv) enforcing this
B. The following terms shall have the meanings set forth below: rule pursuant to Section H below; and (v) implementing any other aspect of this rule.
All actions, approvals and determinations of the 250 PM Committee shall require a
“250 Prize Money Committee (250 PM Committee)” means the committee ap- unanimous vote of the 250 Voting Members, unless otherwise expressly provided in
pointed by the ATP Board of Directors and authorized to act in accordance with this this rule (including as set forth in Sections D, E, F, G and H below). The ATP Chair-
rule, which shall be comprised of the ATP Chairman or his designee, an Independent man shall have no right to vote on 250 PM Committee matters; provided, however,
Member (as defined below) and an equal number of tournament and player repre- that in the event that the 250 Voting Members are unable to unanimously agree on
sentatives, with only one (1) tournament representative and one (1) player repre- the appointment of the 250 Player Auditor, the ATP Chairman acting reasonably shall
sentative serving on such 250 PM Committee, being designated by the class of ATP have the right to vote on whether approval of the proposed 250 Player Auditor should
Board Directors that appointed such representatives, with the right to vote on any 250 be granted. If any such vote by the ATP Chairman votes against the approval of any
PM Committee matters, regardless of the number of tournament and player repre- proposed 250 Player Auditor, then the ATP Chairman will provide a brief description
sentatives appointed to serve on the 250 PM Committee. The player representative of his or her reason for such decision to the 250 PM Committee. The 250 PM Com-
and the tournament representative designated with the right to vote on 250 PM Com- mittee will meet regularly as deemed necessary by the 250 PM Committee to proper-
mittee matters shall be collectively referred to herein as the “250 Voting Members”. ly administer, implement and enforce this rule. The ATP Board of Directors will make
reasonable and adequate funding available to enable to the 250 PM Committee to
“250 PM Committee Auditor” means an independent accounting firm appointed administer, implement and enforce this rule in accordance with the terms herein.
by the 250 PM Committee to (i) receive and evaluate each tournament member’s
250 Submissions and projected tournament financials, (ii) perform agreed upon pro- D. Each 250 category tournament member is required to provide a complete and ac-
cedures regarding financial information included in each 250 Submission, and (iii) curate 250 Submission annually to the 250 PM Committee Auditor no later than 120
prepare reports to be provided to the 250 PM Committee and to the ATP Board of Di- days following the conclusion of its tournament for such year. Each 250 Submission
rectors in accordance with this rule summarizing the 250 Submissions. The 250 PM must be certified by the applicable tournament member as complete and accurate
Committee Auditor will also act as advisor to the 250 PM Committee on financial and and in compliance with this rule in all material respects. The financial information
accounting related matters and Gross Revenue, costs, expenses and net income included in each 250 Submission shall be construed and prepared in accordance
reporting issues and questions. with GAAP or IFRS, unless a different basis is legally mandated by the country in
which the tournament operates. In such case, differences between any such other
“Independent Member” means the independent member of the 250 PM Committee basis and GAAP or IFRS, as applicable, must be identified and resolved by such
appointed by the ATP Board of Directors, by the affirmative vote of a super majority tournament member as part of its 250 Submission. Upon appointment by the 250 PM
of the Board, to serve on the 250 PM Committee for a 3-year term. The Independent Committee, each of the 250 PM Committee Auditor and the 250 Player Auditor will
Member is subject to removal at any time by the ATP Board of Directors by the same be instructed not to disclose any individual tournament information or documentation
vote required for appointment. that it receives to any party, including the 250 PM Committee, any of its members,
the ATP Board of Directors, ATP or its staff, except for the ATP Chairman, CEO and
“250 Player Auditor” means an independent certified public accountant and/or fi-
CFO (or their respective reasonably appointed designees). The 250 PM Committee
nancial advisor selected by the player member(s) of the 250 PM Committee and
Auditor and 250 Player Auditor will be required to execute and deliver to the 250 PM
approved by the 250 PM Committee in accordance with Section C below, who meets
Committee a statement of confidentiality and non-disclosure prohibiting either the
the appropriate level of expertise and experience to evaluate the accuracy of the 250
250 PM Committee Auditor or 250 Player Auditor from making any such disclosure.
Submissions. The 250 Player Auditor will act as advisor to the player member(s) of
250 PM Committee. E. Each year, the 250 PM Committee Auditor will perform an agreed upon desk-based
procedures audit (as directed by the 250 PM Committee) of each tournament’s Gross
“250 Submission” means the prescribed, mandatory annual financial information
Revenues included in the 250 Submission and report to the 250 PM Committee any
report required to be submitted hereunder to the 250 PM Committee Auditor by each
issues that it may identify as a result of these procedures for which the 250 PM Com-
250 category tournament which, for the avoidance of doubt, shall include a determi-
mittee Auditor is unable to resolve with the respective tournament. Once this process
nation and calculation of Gross Revenues, costs, expenses and net income, similar
is complete, the 250 PM Committee Auditor will provide the results of its procedures
60 61
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
and the supporting audit work papers to the 250 Player Auditor. The 250 Player Au- Violation Fine* 250
ditor will undertake a review of the provided information and results. After completing
this review, if the 250 Player Auditor has any outstanding issues or questions, the 250 Failure to meet 120-day deadline to $5,000
Player Auditor will work with the 250 PM Committee Auditor to resolve such issues provide a 250 Submission in accor-
and questions. In the event that the 250 PM Committee Auditor and the 250 Player dance with this rule
Auditor are unable to resolve any such issues or questions, the 250 Committee Au- Prolonged failure to meet 120-day $15,000
ditor and the 250 Player Auditor will inform the 250 PM Committee and may jointly deadline to provide a 250 Submission
conduct an on-site audit at the offices of the relevant tournament or Related Party to in accordance with this rule (over a
review and evaluate the books and records of such tournament or Related Party that month late)
are reasonably necessary to resolve such issue or question; provided, that any such
joint on-site audit must be conducted during regular business hours and no more 250 Submission contains a material $15,000 (up to a maximum of
than three (3) joint on-site audits may be conducted during any consecutive twelve misstatement or material omission of $250,000)
(12) month period. If after any joint on-site audit, the 250 PM Committee Auditor and information
the 250 Player Auditor are still unable to resolve any such issues or questions (or in Willful non-compliance with this Up to a maximum of $250,000
the event the 250 PM Committee Auditor and the 250 Player Auditor elect not to con- rule (e.g., failure to provide a 250
duct an on-site audit and such issues or questions remain), the 250 PM Committee Submission)
Auditor and the 250 Player Auditor will inform the 250 PM Committee and the 250 PM
Committee will evaluate the information presented and then issue a determination as *Specific amounts should depend on the severity of the violation and issue(s)
to whether the unresolved issue(s) or question(s) is due to an act or omission of a presented.
tournament member. In the event that the 250 Voting Members are unable to unan-
imously agree on such determination, then the 250 Independent Member will make 3.20 ATP Masters 1000 Player Compensation & ATP Variable
such determination in his or her sole discretion. Bonus Pool
F. Any tournament member that (i) fails to provide a 250 Submission to the 250 PM A. On-site prize money for 2023 was the amount approved by the ATP Board for each
Committee Auditor as required under this rule (including with respect to the tim- tournament. The yearly aggregated on-site prize money for all Masters 1000 tourna-
ing, accuracy and/ or completeness thereof), (ii) submits a report or document that ments (Base Prize Money or “BPM”) increases by 2.5% annually beginning in 2023.
contains a material misstatement or omits material information, (iii) does not fully The 2.5% annual increase in BPM will be divided as determined by the tournaments.
cooperate with the 250 PM Committee Auditor and 250 Player Auditor as required
hereunder, or (iv) otherwise fails to comply with this rule, may request from the 250 B. VBP (as defined below) is an additional annual amount that will vary with the calcula-
PM Committee a 10 day extension in order to comply with its submission failure. Fol- tion for each year and the amounts are not cumulative (don’t carry over year to year).
lowing any such extension the tournament in each case, may be subject to a fine in a VBP is calculated using current year ANI, as defined below, compared to the BPM of
maximum amount of $250,000. This maximum fine amount will increase by 100% for the then current year. 50% of any excess of ANI over BPM will be contributed to VBP
each consecutive year submission failure by a tournament. The 250 PM Committee and paid to players based on participation and performances at the Masters 1000
shall evaluate the circumstances that led to the failure of such tournament member and ATP Finals tournaments during the respective calendar year. The M1000 PM
to comply with the terms of this rule and assess an appropriate fine taking into con- Committee Auditor will be responsible for making these calculations and reporting
sideration the guidelines set forth in Section G below or as otherwise provided by the such results to the M1000 PM Committee for approval by the end of September each
ATP Board of Directors from time to time. For clarity, any such guidelines will be for year. Any VBP contribution approved for payment will be shared as determined by
guidance purposes only and the 250 PM Committee will have the right to determine the tournaments and will be paid to ATP for distribution to players at the end of each
an appropriate fine in its sole discretion. In the event that the 250 Voting Members are respective calendar year in conjunction with the payment of the ATP Fixed Bonus
unable to unanimously agree on a fine, the 250 Independent Member will make such Pool. Allocation to players of both ATP Fixed Bonus Pool and Variable Bonus Pool as
determination in his or her sole discretion taking into account the circumstances that determined by the ATP Board.
led to the failure of the tournament member to comply with the terms of this rule. All
fines assessed under this rule will be contributed to player programs as determined C. The following terms used in this Rule shall have the meanings set forth below:
by the Player Board Representatives.
Tournament Financial Information Rule for Masters 1000 Tournaments (“1000s
G. The following guidelines set forth fines that may be imposed for violations of this rule Audit Rule”) – The ATP rule which, among other provisions, specifies the required
(subject to the discretion of 250 Committee as set forth in this rule): annual independently audited reporting by each Masters 1000 tournament of its rev-
enues, costs and expenses, net income, net income before taxes and other financial
information, and specifies the audit procedures to be applied to submitted informa-
tion. Definitions within the 1000s Audit Rule are incorporated herein by reference.
Implementation of this Masters 1000 Player Compensation Rule will be the responsi-
bility of the M1000 PM Committee (as defined in the 1000s Audit Rule).

62 63
III. FINANCIAL III. FINANCIAL
Aggregated Net Income (“ANI’) - Total of annual audited net income before income Defined Revenues (“DR”) - Defined revenues are the basis for the AGP calculations
taxes for each of the Masters 1000 tournaments as calculated by M1000 PM Com- and include the following four broad revenue categories as long as the 2-year aver-
mittee Auditor and approved by the M1000 PM Committee. Level 1 data revenues age of these revenues exceed 92% of average gross revenues as reported to the 500
and any fines assessed under the Tournament Financial Information Rule for Masters PM Committee Auditor:
1000 Tournaments will be excluded from each tournament’s audited net income. For 1. Sponsorships
combined men/women tournaments, ANI will be determined with a direct allocation
method where revenues and expenses/costs directly attributable to men or women 2. Ticketing and on-site hospitality
will be allocated 100% to men or women. Remaining revenues and expenses will 3. Media and television revenues
be allocated equally. The resulting men’s net income before income taxes will be
included in ANI. 4. Government funding and/or government subsidies

Other Revenues (“OR”) - OR includes all tournament revenues not otherwise in-
VBP - 50% of the excess of current year ANI over current year BPM.
cluded in DR.

3.21 ATP 500 Prize Money Formula Rule Revenues within each of these categories must include all amounts earned in con-
nection with each category. For example, if a sponsor agreement, in addition to spon-
The formula within this rule will be used to determine increases in on-site prize mon-
sor signage and benefits, provides for on-site parking or event merchandise, total
ey for the 500 category tournaments (as this category is currently composed) for the
sponsor payments must be included within this category and not allocated to another
years 2023 through 2037. In the event Net Income before taxes equals aggregated
revenue category. Similarly, if food and beverage and/or parking are included in a
on-site prize money then this formula and the related reporting rule will be replaced
ticketing/hospitality package, the total package proceeds will be included in the tick-
with a 50/50 prize money formula similar to the Masters 1000’s Prize Money Formula
eting/hospitality category as DR and not allocated to another revenue category.
Rule. In the event this category is materially changed during this period, the 500 PM
Committee will determine what effect such material changes have on applying this
Consistent with the 500 Audit Rule, where applicable, Gross Revenues and DR
rule for the remainder of the term. The formula will be based on a 2-year Average
include tournament revenues received by related parties. A person/company is con-
Growth Percentage (“AGP”) in Defined Revenues (“DR”) for all tournaments in the
sidered to be a Related Party to the tournament if that person/company has con-
category. The 500 PM Committee Auditor will calculate AGP and submit such calcu-
trol, joint control or significant influence over the tournament or a tournament entity,
lations to the 500 PM Committee for review and approval. Such AGP will be applied
either via ownership, via agreement, or via power to manage/govern/influence the
to current year category total on-site prize money as follows:
tournament’s finances and/or operations. Also, a person/company is considered to
be a Related Party to the tournament if the tournament has control, joint control or
AGP up to 2.5% On-site prize money increases by 2.5%
significant influence over the person/company, either via ownership, via agreement,
AGP over 2.5% to 6% On-site prize money increases by AGP or via power to manage/govern/influence the person/company’s finances and/or op-
erations.
AGP over 6% On-site prize money increases by AGP times 1.167
If two-year average DR are less than 92% of average gross revenues, the next larg-
The resulting overall on-site prize money increase will be allocated equally to each of est revenue category as determined by the 500 Committee Auditor and approved by
the thirteen 500 tournaments, regardless of their current on-site prize money level. the 500 Committee will be added to DR so that the 92% minimum is achieved.

Definitions: For purposes of DR, barter transactions for each category are required to be includ-
ed.
Tournament Financial Information Rule for 500 Tournaments (“500 Audit Rule”)
– The ATP rule which, among other provisions, specifies the required annual inde- ATP payments to tournaments for rebates and prize money subsidy are not included
pendently audited reporting by each 500 tournament of its revenues, costs and ex- in DR or OR. Data distribution revenues shall be included in OR and subject to re-
penses, net income, net income before taxes and other financial information, and classification within DR as provided above.
specifies the audit procedures to be applied to submitted information. Definitions
within the 500s Audit Rule are incorporated herein by reference. Implementation of For purposes of DR, the following will also apply:
this 500 Prize Money Formula Rule will be the responsibility of the 500 PM Commit- ● For men’s and women’s combined tournaments, direct men only revenues
tee (as defined in the 500 Audit Rule). will be included in DR at 100%. Direct women only revenues will be ex-
cluded.
Average Growth Percentage (“AGP”) - AGP is the 2-year average growth in the
most recent actual years DR as reported to and calculated by the 500 PM Committee ● A 70% factor will be applied to combined tournaments revenues which are
Auditor. The annual period for purposes of AGP will be the 12-month periods ending not directly men or women tournament revenues.
in April each year immediately following the Barcelona tournament.
64 65
III. FINANCIAL IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
● Exchange rates to USD for formula calculation purposes and for equal
prize money allocation among tournaments will be based on a 2-year av-
4.01 Nitto ATP Finals - Singles
erage exchange rate. A. Competition Format
● Complimentary tickets where no value is received will not be included in
revenues. Complimentary tickets provided to Related Parties will be val- The tournament shall be a singles round robin format with eight (8) players. There
ued and included in DR. shall be two (2) groups of four (4) players each with eight (8) seeds to be determined
by the Pepperstone ATP Rankings on the Monday after the last ATP Tour tournament
● Taxes and fees required to be paid on tickets sales will be excluded from of the calendar year. All matches shall be the best of three (3) tie-break sets, includ-
revenues. ing the final. The round robin shall determine the four (4) players for the semifinals
with the format thereafter being a single elimination competition.
Insurance proceeds which replace lost revenues will be included as revenues in the
category for which the proceeds relate. B. Entries
Agreed Upon Procedures as defined in the 500 Audit Rule will only be applied to DR 1) Selection List. The selection list for the event shall be:
of the 500s tournaments. Remaining OR as reported under the 500 Audit Rule will a) The top seven (7) players in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings as of the Mon-
be subject only to overall fluctuation reviews and resulting inquiries by the 500 PM day after the last ATP Tour tournament of the calendar year, followed by
Committee and 500 Player Auditor necessary to understand significant changes. b) Up to two (2) Grand Slam winners of that year, in order of their positions, po-
sitioned between eight (8) and twenty (20) in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings
3.22 ATP 250 Tournament Prize Money as of that Monday; followed by
c) Players positioned eight (8) and below in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings as
On-site prize money for 2023 was the amount approved by the ATP Board for each of that Monday.
tournament.
2) Direct Acceptances. The top eight (8) players in the selection list shall qualify
for the event as direct acceptances. Participation is mandatory, and all qualified
On site prize money for the 250 category tournaments increases annually by 2.5% for
players shall be entered. All direct acceptances must be at the tournament site
the period 2023 through 2030. Such 2.5% annual increases in on site prize money
to attend the official pre-tournament media conference and must be available for
will be calculated using the total of on-site prize money for all 250 tournaments and
play through the completion of the round robin competition and the knock-out
then divided equally among the tournaments.
competition if eligible.

3.23 Challenger Tournament Prize Money 3) Withdrawal. Any withdrawal, before the official pre-tournament media confer-
ence starts, shall be replaced by the next highest positioned player on the selec-
On site prize money for the Challenger Tour tournaments will increase annually by tion list, who shall be qualified as a direct acceptance.
2.5% per each tournament category.
4) Alternate(s).
a) The next highest positioned player on the selection list (who is not a direct
acceptance at the time of the official pre-tournament media conference) shall
be designated as the alternate and shall replace any player who subsequent-
ly withdraws. The alternate must appear at the official pre-tournament media
conference and remain available through the start of the last scheduled round
robin match.
b) Additional alternates may be selected by ATP to fill the draw, based on the
selection list, upon terms satisfactory to ATP. Participation of such additional
alternates is not mandatory.
c) The alternate(s) is eligible to play in the single elimination competition and to
receive points and prize money if he qualifies.
d) If the alternate(s) does not play in the draw, then a fee shall be paid to the
alternate(s). If the alternate(s) is inserted for the second or third round rob-
in match, then he shall receive the alternate fee plus any prize money and
points won. If the alternate(s) replaces a player that does not compete in his
first round robin match, the alternate(s) becomes a direct acceptance and
does not receive the alternate fee.

66 67
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
C. Failure To Participate in the Nitto ATP Finals to head-to-head results with the winner of their match advancing to the
semi-finals.
1) If a player, qualified for the Nitto ATP Finals as a direct acceptance or designated
Comment 2: 1 player has 3 wins and the other 3 players have 1 win and
as the alternate, fails or refuses to participate in this event, except for bona fide
they all have played 3 matches. The tie-break for % of sets won has 1
injury or other reason which constitutes good cause, the player shall not be in
player with a better % than the other two. This player advances to the
good standing.
semi-final round.
2) All direct acceptances and the alternate must appear at the site of the event(s) as Comment 3: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins.
determined by ATP and participate in the pre-tournament media conference. The player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, they
are ordered by their % of sets won. This produces a 1, 2 & 3 order and
Failure to appear shall result in a penalty of five percent (5%) of total ATP prize
the players finishing 1 and 2 move to the semi-final round and the player
money earned during the ATP circuit year.
finishing 3 in % of sets won is eliminated. The player with the best % of
Please also see 1.07 H. 2) b). sets won is the winner of the group.
Comment 4: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
D. Order of Play player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, 1 player’s
sets won-loss is 5-2 for 71.43%; the other 2 players both have a 4-3 re-
Round Robin cord in sets for 57.14%. In this case there is 1 superior player (71.43%)
1) The field shall be divided into two (2) groups of four (4) players each. The and the remaining 2 players are tied; it now reverts to the head to head
top-seeded player shall be placed in Group “A” and the second-seeded player result of the 2 remaining players with the winning player advancing as
shall be placed in Group “B”. Players seeded three (3) and four (4), five (5) and six group runner-up.
(6), and seven (7) and eight (8), shall then be drawn in pairs with the first drawn Comment 5: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
placed into Group “A.” player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, 2 have set
won-loss records of 5-3 (62.5%) while the other player is 4-3 (57.14%).
2) Each player shall play every other player in his group to determine the top two (2) In this case we have 1 inferior player (57.14%) and he is eliminated. The
players in each group. remaining two players both advance to the semi-finals with the winner of
3) The final standings of each group shall be determined by the first of the following their head-to-head match advancing as the group winner.
methods that apply: Comment 6: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, all have
a) Greatest number of wins. played 3 matches and all 3 have set won-loss records of 5-4 (55.56%).
b) Greatest number of matches played. In this case we move to % of games won. The % of games won breaks
Comment: 2-1 won-loss record beats a 2-0 won-loss record; a 1-2 record down like this: 44-40 for 52.38%, 45-43 for 51.14% and 44-43 for 50.57%.
beats a 1-0 record. This produces a 1, 2 and 3 order of the group and the number 1 player in
c) Head-to-head results if only two (2) players are tied. % of games won is the group winner while the player finishing 2nd in %
d) If three (3) players are tied, then: of games won advances to the semi-finals as the group runner-up. The
i) If three (3) players each have one (1) win, a player having played less player with the 3rd best % of games won is eliminated.
than all three (3) matches is automatically eliminated and the player ad-
4) In applying the tie-breaking procedures, a conduct default or retirement shall
vancing to the single elimination competition is the winner of the match-
count as a straight-set win or loss. However, games won or lost in matches with
up of the two (2) players tied with 1-2 records; or
the defaulting or retiring player shall not be counted in the application of subsec-
ii) Highest percentage of sets won; or
tion 3.d. (iii) above. A player who retires during the round robin because of illness
iii) Highest percentage of games won; a player completing less than all three
or injury may continue in the competition if it is approved by the tournament Doc-
(3) matches is automatically eliminated and the player advancing to the
tor.
single elimination competition is the winner of the match-up of the two (2)
remaining players; or Comment: This prevents a scenario where a player knows he only needs to win
iv) The player positions on the Pepperstone ATP Rankings as of the Monday 1 set to qualify for the semi-finals from retiring once he has won a set.
after the last ATP Tour tournament of the calendar year. 5) Any player who is defaulted pursuant to the ATP Code during the round robin
v) If (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) produce one (1) superior player (first place), or one competition shall be defaulted from all other matches in the Championship and
(1) inferior player (third place), and the two (2) remaining players are tied, ATP default provisions shall apply, except for the following circumstances:
the tie between those two (2) players shall be broken by head-to-head
record. a) The loss of physical condition; or
Comment 1: 1 player has 3 wins and the other 3 players have 1 win. Of b) Dress and Equipment.
the 3 players with 1 win, 1 player has only played in 2 matches while the 6) Any player who withdraws from any round robin match after the first round shall
other 2 players have played 3 matches. The player who has only played not be eligible for the single elimination competition.
2 matches is eliminated and then the 2 remaining players revert back

68 69
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
E. Single Elimination Competition be replaced by the next highest positioned team on the selection list, who shall be
qualified as a direct acceptance.
1) The winner of each group shall be placed in separate semi-final brackets. The
runner-up of each group shall be placed in the semi-final bracket with the winner 4) Alternate(s).
of the opposite group. a) On the Monday following the last ATP Tour tournament of the year, the next
2) The event shall be completed with a single elimination competition for the semi-fi- highest positioned team shall be asked to confirm its status as the alternate
nals and final. team. Alternate team(s) may be selected by ATP to fill the draw upon terms
satisfactory to ATP. Any withdrawal after the official pre-tournament media
3) There shall be no playoff for the third and fourth place positions. conference through the start of the last scheduled round robin match shall be
filled with the alternate team(s). The alternate team must appear at the official
F. Prize Money and Points pre-tournament media conference and remain available through the start of
the last scheduled round robin match.
Final standings at the end of the tournament shall determine the prize money and
b) Additional alternate teams may be selected by ATP to fill the draw, based on
Pepperstone ATP Rankings points earned.
the selection list, upon terms satisfactory to ATP. Participation of such addi-
tional alternate teams is not mandatory.
4.02 Nitto ATP Finals - Doubles c) The alternate team(s) is eligible to play in the single elimination competition
and to receive points and prize money if they qualify.
A. Competition Format
d) If the alternate team(s) does not play in the draw, then a fee shall be paid to
the alternate team(s). If the alternate team(s) is inserted for the second or
The tournament shall be a doubles round robin format with eight (8) teams. There
third round robin match, then they shall receive the alternate fee plus any
shall be two (2) groups of four (4) teams each with eight (8) seeds to be determined
prize money and points won. If the alternate team(s) replaces a team that
by the 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings on the Monday after the last
does not compete in their first round robin match, the alternate team(s) be-
ATP Tour tournament of the calendar year. All matches shall be two (2) tie-break sets
comes a direct acceptance and does not receive the alternate fee.
with a deciding Match Tie-break (10 point) at one (1) set all. The round robin shall
determine the four (4) teams for the semi-finals with the format thereafter being a C. Order of Play
single elimination competition.
Round Robin
B. Entries
1) The field shall be divided into two (2) groups of four (4) teams each. The
1) Selection List. The selection list for the event shall be: top-seeded team shall be placed in Group “A” and the second-seeded team shall
a) The top 7 teams in the 2024 Pepeprstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings as of be placed in Group “B”. Teams seeded three and four, five and six, and seven
the Monday after the last ATP Tour tournament of the calendar year; followed and eight, shall then be drawn in pairs with the first drawn placed into Group “A”.
by 2) Each team shall play every other team in their group to determine the top two (2)
b) Up to two (2) Grand Slam winners of that year, in order of their positions, teams in each group.
positioned between eight (8) and twenty (20) in the 2024 Pepperstone ATP
Doubles Team Rankings as of that Monday; followed by 3) The final standings of each group shall be determined by the first of the following
c) Teams positioned eight (8) and below in the 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles methods that apply:
Team Rankings as of that Monday. a) Greatest number of wins.
2) Direct Acceptances. The top eight (8) teams in the selection list shall qualify b) Greatest number of matches played.
for the event as direct acceptances. Participation is mandatory, and all qualified Comment: 2-1 won-loss record beats a 2-0 won-loss record; a 1-2 record
teams shall be entered. All direct acceptances must be at the tournament site to beats a 1-0 record.
attend the official pre-tournament media conference and must be available for c) Head-to-head results if only two (2) teams are tied.
play through the completion of the round robin competition and the knock-out d) If three (3) teams are tied, then:
competition if eligible. i) If three (3) teams each have one (1) win, a team having played less than
all three (3) matches is automatically eliminated and the team advancing
A player who qualifies as a direct acceptance on two (2) or more teams may
to the single elimination competition is the winner of the match-up of the
choose the team with which he participates. Any player with whom he does not
two (2) teams tied with 1-2 records; or
choose to participate is ineligible to be a direct acceptance unless such player
ii) Highest percentage of sets won; (Winning the MTB counts as one (1) set
qualifies with another partner.
won); or
3) Withdrawal. All eligible teams shall be entered by ATP; however, teams may iii) Highest percentage of games won. (Winning the MTB counts as one (1)
withdraw through the Monday following the last ATP Tour tournament of the year. game won); a team completing less than all three (3) matches is automat-
Any withdrawal, before the official pre-tournament media conference starts, shall ically eliminated and the team advancing to the single elimination com-
petition is the winner of the match-up of the two (2) remaining teams; or
70 71
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
iv) The team positions on the 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rank- 5) Any team who is defaulted pursuant to ATP Code during the round robin com-
ings as of the Monday after the last ATP Tour tournament of the calendar petition shall be defaulted from all other matches in the Championship and ATP
year. default provisions shall apply, except for the following circumstances:
v) If (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) produce one (1) superior team (first place), or one (1) a) The loss of physical condition; or
inferior team (third place), and the two (2) remaining teams are tied, the b) Dress and Equipment.
tie between those two (2) teams shall be broken by head-to-head record 6) Any team who withdraws from any round robin match after the first round shall not
Comment 1: 1 team has 3 wins and the other 3 teams have 1 win. Of the be eligible for the single elimination competition.
3 teams with 1 win, 1 team has only played in 2 matches while the other 2
teams have played 3 matches. The team who has only played 2 matches D. Single Elimination Competition
is eliminated and then the 2 remaining teams revert back to head-to-head
results with the winner of their match advancing to the semi-finals. 1) The winner of each group shall be placed in separate semi-final brackets. The
Comment 2: 1 team has 3 wins and the other 3 teams have 1 win and runner-up of each group shall be placed in the semi-final bracket with the winner
they all have played 3 matches. The tie-break for % of sets won has of the opposite group.
1 team with a better % than the other two. This team advances to the 2) The event shall be completed with a single elimination competition for the semi-fi-
semi-final round. nals and final.
Comment 3: 3 teams have 2 wins and the other team has 0 wins. The
team with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 teams with 2 wins, they are or- 3) There shall be no playoff for the third and fourth-place positions.
dered by their % of sets won. This produces a 1, 2 & 3 order and the
E. Prize Money and Points
teams finishing 1 and 2 move to the semi-final round and the team finish-
ing 3 in % of sets won is eliminated. The team with the best % of sets won
Final standings at the end of the tournament shall determine the prize-money and
is the winner of the group.
Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings points earned.
Comment 4: 3 teams have 2 wins and the other team has 0 wins. The
team with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 teams with 2 wins, 1 team’s sets
won-loss is 5-2 for 71.43%; the other 2 teams both have a 4-3 record in 4.03 United Cup
sets for 57.14%. In this case there is 1 superior team (71.43%) and the
remaining 2 teams are tied; it now reverts to the head to head result of the The United Cup is an annual country vs country mixed team competition. Eighteen
2 remaining teams with the winning team advancing as group runner-up. (18) countries will participate, with a minimum of two ATP and two WTA players per
Comment 5: 3 teams have 2 wins and the other team has 0 wins. The country.
team with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 teams with 2 wins, 2 have set A. Round Robin Competition
won-loss records of 5-3 (62.5%) while the other team is 4-3 (57.14%). In
this case we have 1 inferior team (57.14%) and this team is eliminated. 1) The United Cup is a competition for eighteen (18) teams, each team composed of
The remaining two teams both advance to the semi-finals with the winner a minimum of two (2) ATP and two (2) WTA players and a maximum of three (3)
of their head-to-head match advancing as the group winner. ATP/WTA players from the same country. The team criteria shall be:
Comment 6: 3 teams have 2 wins and the other team has 0 wins. The a) The two (2) highest ranked singles ATP/WTA players; then
team with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 teams with 2 wins, all have played b) Teams may include a 3rd ATP and WTA player, whose entry will be accepted
3 matches and all 3 have set won-loss records of 5-4 (55.56%). In this based on being the highest of singles ranking (up to maximum 500) or dou-
case we move to % of games won. The % of games won breaks down bles ranking (up to maximum 250).
like this: 44-40 for 52.38%, 45-43 for 51.14% and 44-43 for 50.57%. This c) A junior player, meeting the criteria stated below, may be included as a coun-
produces a 1, 2 and 3 order of the group and the number 1 team in try’s 3rd respective Tour player.
% of games won is the group winner while the team finishing 2nd in % The junior player must,
of games won advances to the semi-finals as the group runner-up. The i) Be born in 2005 or later, and
team with the 3rd best % of games won is eliminated. ii) Be ranked 500 or better in Singles rankings as of the Rankings Deadline,
4) In applying the tie-breaking procedures, a conduct default or retirement shall or
count as a straight-set win or loss. However, games won or lost in matches with iii) Be ranked 50 or better in the ITF Junior World Rankings as of the Rank-
the defaulting or retiring team shall not be counted in the application of subsection ings Deadline
3.d. (iii) above. A team who retires during the round robin because of illness or iv) Have entered the event
injury may continue in the competition if it is approved by the tournament Doctor. Only one (1) junior player may be included per gender, per team (maximum 1
Comment: this prevents a scenario where a team knows he only needs to win 1 male, 1 female)
set to qualify for the semi-finals from retiring once he has won a set. d) All players except an approved junior player must have an ATP Ranking (sin-
gles or doubles).

72 73
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
2) A player’s nationality as of the entry date shall be used to determine team entry. countries that qualify using the 16 October 2023 ATP/WTA Ranking must con-
All player nationality determinations are subject to ATP approval. firm their acceptance to the competition by this deadline.
3) The competition shall be a Round Robin format with six (6) groups of three (3) b) At Second Qualification Date:
teams each. All singles matches shall be the best of three (3) tie-break sets. All The Second Qualification Date is designed to account for results and chang-
mixed doubles matches shall be two (2) tie-break sets with a deciding Match Tie- es in ranking within the Top ATP and WTA eligible singles players since the
Break (10 point) at one (1) set all. Entry Deadline. The next highest ranked ATP and WTA eligible and entered
players not already accepted into the competition determine the remaining 1
4) Each team shall play each other in its group to determine the top team in each x ATP and 1 x WTA qualifying teams, as long as the teams meet the minimum
group. Group winners will advance to the Quarterfinals. One Quarterfinal spot in number of players required.
each city will be awarded to the best runner up in that City. Winners will advance
to the Semi-Finals, to be hosted in the Finals City. Note: Players will only be eligible to qualify at second qualification date if they
B. Player Nationality / Change of Nationality have entered at the entry deadline.

A player’s nationality as of the entry date shall be used to determine team entry. All 3) Qualification. In order to qualify for the competition, a team that has accepted
player nationality determinations are subject to ATP/WTA approval. entry must comply with the following requirements:
1) Nationality. A player’s nationality on the date of that country’s acceptance to the At this entry deadline, the Top 5 WTA qualified countries, Top 5 ATP qualified coun-
United Cup shall determine the player’s eligibility to compete for that country. tries and Top 6 combined entry countries (inclusive of host country as Direct in or by
2) Change of Nationality. wildcard) will be admitted to the competition, with the final two remaining entrants
to be admitted to the competition on Monday 20 November 2023, 12 noon Florida
a) A player may only represent one (1) country in the United Cup during their
time (Tuesday, 21 November 4 am Sydney time) based on the 20 November 2023
career, unless
rankings.
a. The player change their nationality in the ATP/WTA database AND
b. Any of the following apply: Players must enter the event to be eligible (i.e., no automatic entries)
i. The player competed under such nationality in the BJK Cup, Davis
Cup, or Olympic Tennis Event, or a) The team is composed of the two (2) highest positioned and eligible players
ii. The player competed under such nationality in professional tennis based on the ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles) as of 17 October 2023 (ATP/WTA
tournaments during the Tour Year immediately preceding the United Ranking (Singles) as of 20 November for the two teams qualifying at the sec-
Cup, ond qualification deadline).
iii. ATP/WTA determines the full circumstances of the player’s situation b) A third player may be named, if eligible, at the time of the deadline. The No.
demonstrate the player has a sufficient, genuine connection to the 3 players will be chosen based on their highest ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles
nation that the player wishes to represent, or or Doubles) as of 17 October 2023 (ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles or Doubles)
iv. In exceptional circumstances as determined by ATP/WTA. as of 20 November for the two teams qualifying at the second qualification
b) All requests to change a player’s nationality are subject to ATP/WTA approv- deadline).
al. c) In the case of illness, injury or unforeseen circumstances, and the team num-
ber falls below two (2) members, the Supervisor and the Steering Commit-
C. Teams Qualifications tee may allow the team Captain to nominate a substitute player during the
1) Entry. The teams shall be selected and entered in the following manner: competition, although the team may continue with only one (1) member per
gender.
a) A team shall be entered based upon the ATP/WTA Ranking (singles) of the
d) The Steering Committee may use discretion if a team includes a Top 20 ATP/
country’s Number 1 singles player.
WTA player and does not wholly meet the qualification criteria pertaining to
b) All players must confirm in writing they will be playing the event to confirm
the ATP or WTA second player.
entry.
4) Ties – Team Entry
c) There shall be one (1) wild card allocated for the host country in case their
team does not otherwise qualify. If no Wild Card is necessary, then that posi- The 6 Highest ranked ATP and 6 highest ranked WTA players determine the first 12
tion shall revert to an additional Direct Acceptance. teams. If players of the same nationality qualify a team in both ATP and WTA or with-
in either ATP or WTA Top 6, the next ranked players outside of the Top 6 will qualify
If the Wild Card is needed for the host country, then the Wild Card team will their country until 12 teams are qualified (6 from ATP top ranked players and 6 from
be placed randomly into one of the six (6) groups. WTA top ranked players).
2) Entry – Deadline and Acceptance
a) For the top singles spot to determine team entry, entry is based on the ATP/
a) Entry deadline. Tuesday 17 October 2023, 5pm Florida Time (Wednesday WTA Ranking (Singles):
18 October 2023, 8am Sydney Time). The top fifteen (15) Direct Acceptance i) If tied a current singles ranking beats a Protected Ranking/Special Rank-
ing.
74 75
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
ii) If tied between two current rankings or two Protected Rankings/Special 7) Late Withdrawals / Substitutions
Rankings, the ranking of the highest number 2 players will break the tie. a) Number 1 player withdraws after the deadline, 17 October 2023.
If still tied, we move on to the number 3 player, etc. i) The team remains in the competition as long as there is a minimum of two
The final 6 teams will be determined by the highest combined ranking of the Top (2) ATP/WTA Ranked players on the team, which must have an ATP/WTA
ATP and Top WTA ranked players who have not yet qualified their country. Where Ranking (Singles), unless otherwise approved by ATP/WTA or, an Alter-
a combined ranking is equal between two teams, the team with the highest ranked nate is inserted as approved by ATP/WTA. This can include a replace-
singles player (ATP or WTA) will take priority. If still equal, the team with the highest ment player. The team must also have at least 1 ATP or WTA member
ranked second singles player will take priority. of the team ranked 250 or better in singles to remain in the competition.
Number 1 and 2 players to be reclassified if required (e.g. #2 becomes #1
5) Ties – Individual Entry and the replacement player becomes the new #2).
a) For spots 1-2 where entry is based on the ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles). ii) The next highest ranked singles player from that country may be added to
i) If tied. the team, unless otherwise approved by ATP/WTA. Non-entered substi-
• A current ranking beats a Protected Ranking/Special Ranking. tute/alternate players may only be considered if the team does not have
• If still tied, the most total points from the Grand Slams, mandatory a minimum of 2 entered players meeting the criteria.
ATP Tour Masters 1000, WTA 1000 tournaments and Nitto ATP Fi- b) The number 2 singles player withdraws prior to 10:00 am local time in Syd-
nals/WTA Finals main draws, and if still tied, then, ney, the day prior to the start of the competition.
• If still tied, the fewest events played, counting all missed Grand i) The next highest singles ranked player from that country may be added
Slams, ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments/WTA 1000 events they to the team, unless otherwise approved by the ATP/WTA. That player
could have played (as described under A. above) as if played, and if may either be a player not already accepted to a Week 1 Tour event, or a
still tied, then, player who by approval of ATP/WTA may be able to withdraw from main
• If still tied, coin toss draw and qualifying of a week 1 without penalty (For ATP, Challenger Tour
b) For spot 3 where entry is based on the best-of ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles or only. For WTA 125, only if for main draw withdrawal before the main draw
Doubles). is made.), prior to the start of the qualifying event without penalty.
i) If tied. c) All substitutions are subject to ATP/WTA approval.
• If best-of ranking is the same, the player with the highest ATP/WTA d) If through the withdrawal of the number 1 player or the numbers 1 and 2 play-
Singles Ranking wins the tie. Ties between singles rankings are bro- ers between the deadline (17 October 2023) and 10:00 am local time in Perth/
ken as per point a) above. Sydney, the day prior to the start of competition, a team may be withdrawn
• If both ATP/WTA Doubles Rankings are the same, the player with the and replaced by an alternate team if they do not have at least one member of
highest ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles) wins the tie. Ties between dou- the team ranked 250 or better in singles.
bles rankings are broken as per the ATP/WTA tie breaking rules. 8) Alternate Team Selection
• A current ranking beats a Protected Ranking/Special Ranking. a) The Alternate Team will be the first team out of the final selection.
• If still tied, coin toss b) If needed, the individual players may be granted a release from any other
6) Withdrawal of entry ATP/WTA Tour Qualifying event they are entered in during the period of the
a) The deadline for withdrawal of entry for a player / team shall be as follows: United Cup Competition, pending ATP/WTA approval, or from any ATP Chal-
i) For those players/teams confirming entry on the entry deadline, any with- lenger Tour event.
drawal after 5:00pm Eastern US on Tuesday, 17 October 2023 will be c) The Alternate Team may be selected for participation until 10:00 am local time
considered as a Late Withdrawal. in Perth/Sydney, the day prior to the start of competition.
ii) WTA - A player’s withdrawal from United Cup is subject to all applicable 9) Withdrawals after Start of the Competition
withdrawal requirements and penalties in Section IV of the WTA Rules. a) Any team that through withdrawals of team members has only one (1) player
b) Violation of this Section shall be penalized consistent with the Player Code of from each Tour remaining may continue in the competition as long as those
Conduct. Late Withdrawal Fines shall apply and be based upon the player’s players have an ATP/WTA Ranking, unless otherwise approved by ATP/WTA.
ranking at the date of acceptance. Any player withdrawing after accepting This player must play singles and be available for the mixed doubles.
entry shall not be permitted to participate in any other event, including exhi- b) If a team does not have at least one (1) eligible ATP and one (1) WTA play-
bitions, during the United Cup Competition. Any players accepted as the #3 er, the team will lose by Walkover and no matches will be played, unless if
player, may withdraw from the team without penalty to play another event approved by the Steering Committee the team may remain in competition
during United Cup if she/he withdraws prior to the applicable entry deadlines and the matches for the missing player are lost by Walkover. No points are
for that tournament. awarded for Walkovers.
c) Players have the right to an Appeal of the Late Withdrawal Fine which must c) A team may add an alternate player after the competition has begun as long
be submitted to the ATP Appeals Tribunal/WTA, which consideration is limited as the player is not violating ATP/WTA rules for “No Play after Withdrawal” or
to the fine only. “One Tournament per Week”, or as approved by ATP/WTA. In no case may

76 77
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
a player compete in two events offering ATP/WTA Ranking points which are Group B
held in the same ranking week. #2 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following
10) Seeding bands –
• Seeded countries 7 – 12
Seeding for the event will be based off the combined regular ranking (no protect- • Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in
ed ranking/special ranking) of the top ATP and top WTA ranked player regardless the competition
of their qualification into the event. As per the entry order priority rule, where a Group C
combined ranking is equal between two teams, the team with the highest ranked #3 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following
singles player (ATP or WTA) will become the higher seed. If still equal, the team bands –
with the highest ranked second singles player will be the higher seed. • Seeded countries 7 – 12
• Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in
D. Competition Format the competition
Host Cities Group D
#4 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following
Sydney and Perth will host Countries for the Group Stages and Quarterfinals. Syd- bands –
ney will host the Semi Finals and Final. • Seeded countries 7 – 12
• Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in
At the Official Draw, Sydney and Perth will be drawn as host of one of 2 combina- the competition
tions of seeds – Group E
#5 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following
• #1 (Group A), #3 (Group C), and #5 (Group E)
bands –
• #2 (Group B), #4 (Group D), and #6 (Group F)
• Seeded countries 7 – 12
• Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in
Which City hosts which combination of seeds to be determined at the Official Draw.
the competition
Group F
1) Round Robin – The Groups #6 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following
bands –
The Draw-Teams 1-18
• Seeded countries 7 – 12
a) The official draw for the placement of teams 1-18 shall take place, on Monday • Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in
23 October 2023. the competition
b) The teams shall be positioned from 1 to 18 in accordance with the best com- 2) Daily Order of Play - The Tie
bined ATP/WTA Ranking (Singles) as of 23 October 2023, of the number 1
players of each team accepted at the 17 October 2023 deadline. Two team a) A tie consists of two (2) singles matches and one (1) mixed doubles match.
positions 1 ATP Qualified position and 1 WTA position will be reserved. The b) Each team Captain shall submit to the ATP/WTA Supervisor, in writing, the
final two remaining entrants to be admitted to the competition on Monday 20 name of the two (2) singles players and the mixed doubles team selected to
November 2023 based on the November 20 rankings. compete in the Tie. The singles players shall be the top two (2) ranked ATP/
c) The top six (6) teams shall be placed in separate groups. WTA players (including protected ranking/special ranking) as of the date of
d) The next six (6) teams in rank order (7-12) shall be drawn at random into the the entry deadline unless there is a medically supported substitution.
six (6) groups. c) The deadline to submit the names of the competing players (singles/doubles)
e) The next six (6) teams (13-18) shall be drawn at random for each of the six is 3:00pm local time, the day prior to the scheduled Tie.
(6) groups. d) For each Tie, the highest-positioned (hereafter, number ones) singles play-
f) The final two (2) teams selected at the second deadline shall be drawn at ers named from each team shall compete against each other. The order of
random for each of the two (2) incomplete groups. matches shall be as follows unless otherwise decided by the Steering Com-
mittee:
Groups will be assigned as follows: i) Number 1 ATP/WTA Singles followed by
Group A ii) Number 1 ATP/WTA Singles followed by
#1 seeded country, plus one randomly selected team from each of the following iii) Mixed Doubles
bands – Note: “Not Before” times may be assigned as determined by the organizers
• Seeded countries 7 – 12 in consultation with the ATP Supervisor.
• Seeded countries 13 – 18 inclusive of the final 2 countries to be included in e) Upon the completion of the mixed doubles match, the winner of the tie shall
the competition be the team that wins at least two (2) of the three (3) matches.

78 79
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
f)The mixed doubles match must be played regardless of the results of the two Semi-Finals, to be hosted in the Finals City.
singles matches. * 6) Determination of Best Runner up Quarterfinal spot
*For the Final, if the tie is decided following the singles matches, the mixed
doubles match will not be played (unless mutually agreed by both Countries), a) Number of ties won
and the money will be split evenly amongst the members of both teams. b) Number of Ties Played
3) Format and Competition Comment: 2-1 win-loss beats 2-0 win-loss. A 1-2 win-loss beats a 1-1 or 1-0
record. A team winning by walkover shall have the tie count in its results as a
a) Groups tie played. The team causing the walkover shall not have the tie counted as a
There will be six Groups comprising of three countries in each group. Each tie played.
city will host three groups (nine countries) for the Group stages, which will c) In a tie between three (3) teams, the following shall apply:
con- sist of round robin ties where each country will play both other countries i) If teams have the same number of wins, then the team having played
in their group. fewer total matches (singles & mixed doubles) will be eliminated and, if
4) Determination of Group Winners still tied then,
a) Number of ties won Comment: 5-1 win-loss beats 5-0 win-loss.
b) Number of Ties Played ii) The team with the most match wins (singles & doubles), if still tied then,
Comment: 2-1 win-loss beats 2-0 win-loss. A 1-2 win-loss beats a 1-1 or 1-0 iii) The team with the highest percentage of matches won, if still tied then,
record. A team winning by walkover shall have the tie count in its results as a iv) The team that has the highest percentage of sets won, if still tied then,
tie played. The team causing the walkover shall not have the tie counted as a v) The team with the highest percentage of games won,
tie played. d) If ii), iii), iv) or v) produce one superior team (first place), then the tie is broken,
c) In a tie between three (3) teams, the following shall apply: or
i) If three (3) teams have the same number of wins, then the team having Notes: In all tie-break situations, the following shall apply.
played fewer total matches (singles & mixed doubles) will be eliminated • Unplayed matches shall be scored as completed for purposes of matches
and the winner of the head-to-head matchup between the two remaining played.
teams advance, if still tied then, • Defaulted and retired singles or doubles matches shall be scored as complet-
Comment: 5-1 win-loss beats 5-0 win-loss. ed for purposes of matches played and will count as a straight set win or loss.
ii) The team with the most match wins (singles & doubles), if still tied then, However, games won or lost in matches with defaulting or retiring player shall
iii) The team with the highest percentage of matches won, if still tied then, not be counted for percentage of games won.
iv) The team that has the highest percentage of sets won, if still tied then, • Teams advancing from a tie via a team walkover (i.e. no alternate) will count
v) The team with the highest percentage of games won, as a tie won but this does not count towards total matches won, percentage
d) If ii), iii), iv) or v) produce one superior team (first place), then the tie is broken, of sets or percentage of games won.
or • Any team that withdraws from any round robin tie after the first-round robin tie
e) If ii), iii), iv) or v) produce one inferior team then that team is eliminated and shall not be eligible for the Quarterfinals.
the winner of the match between the two (2) remaining teams is the winner of 6) Quarter finals
the group. a) The eight (8) teams advancing to the knock-out rounds shall be placed in the
Notes: In all tie-break situations, the following shall apply. draw as follows:
• Unplayed matches shall be scored as completed for purposes of matches Sydney:
played. • The winner of Group 1 will play the best runner-up* from the remaining groups
• Defaulted and retired singles or doubles matches shall be scored as complet- from the city
ed for purposes of matches played and will count as a straight set win or loss. • The winner of Group 3 will play the winner of Group 5*
However, games won or lost in matches with defaulting or retiring player shall Perth:
not be counted for percentage of games won. • The winner of Group 2 will play the best runner-up* from the remaining groups
• Teams advancing from a tie via a team walkover (i.e. no alternate) will count from the city
as a tie won but this does not count towards total matches won, percentage • The winner of Group 4 will play the winner of Group 6*
of sets or percentage of games won. *No runner-up teams will play versus the winner of their groups before the Final
• Any team that withdraws from any round robin tie after the first-round robin tie of the competition.
shall not be eligible for the Quarterfinals.
• The Match Tie-Break (doubles) counts as a set won and for games won To avoid that the runner-up teams in the quarter finals will swap position with the
counts as 1-0 winner of the lowest ranked group in the specific city.
5) Quarterfinals 7) Semi-Finals
Group winners will advance to the Quarterfinals. One Quarterfinal spot in each The four winners of the quarterfinals will qualify for the Semi Finals in Sydney.
city will be awarded to the best runner up in that City. Winners will advance to the

80 81
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
8) The Final G. Team Captain / Team Coaches
• Final – Winner Semi Final 1 v Winner Semi Final 2 1) Designation of Captain

a) The Champion Team shall be decided by the result of a straight knock-out a) The number one player on each team (the highest ATP/WTA singles ranked
competition player) is by default the Team Captain, however each team can elect anoth-
er player or person as Team Captain, provided such person is of the same
E. Protected Ranking/Special Ranking* nationality as the team they are representing. The No 1 player has the overall
authority on the position of team captain. If the No 1 player decides to appoint
The following applies to any player with a Protected Ranking (“PR”)/Special Ranking a team captain instead of fulfilling the role, the chosen person must be either
(“SR”) that has been used in any manner during the competition or to qualify a coun- an ATP / WTA player, former player or coach. Exceptions to this are subject
try for entry. to approval by the Event Steering Committee. The Team Captain must be
1) The PR must be valid at the entry deadline and remain valid through to the start confirmed and submitted to the ATP/WTA no later than December 1.
of the competition. The Team Captain is responsible for attending all meetings, submitting the
team’s line up and acting as the official representative for the team.
2) Can be used for team entry. Coaching is allowed, and the Team Captain will have the option to sit on the
3) Will count for position in the singles lineup. court throughout matches.
.
4) Will count for Ranking points. b) The Captain must be communicated to ATP/WTA no later than December 1,
5) Will not count for team seeding. 2023.
c) In the event the Captain is not on-site or not available, the number one (1)
6) For WTA players - Will count as Special Ranking used for the player(s). player shall assume the role of Captain or designate a non-playing team
7) For ATP players - Will not count as Protected Ranking used for the player(s). member as Captain.
d) The Captain must be on-site for the duration of that team’s participation in the
8) May only be used at one (1) United Cup event.
competition. The Captain shall be subject to all provisions of the Player Code
F. Schedule of Play of Conduct, including those pertaining to Dress and Equipment.
2) Duties of the Captain. The duties of the Captain are as follows:
The following is the schedule of play unless otherwise determined by the Tournament a) Designate the team’s lineup, after consultation with the team members;
Committee and Supervisor: b) Act as official representative for their respective team;
1) The eighteen (18) teams shall play Round Robin matches over the first days to c) Attend all team meetings; and
determine the six (6) winners of the Round Robin groups and the two best runner d) The designated Captain may sit on court during the match and may coach
ups (one for each city) qualifying for the Quarterfinals. during changeovers, set-breaks and during play as long as it does not inter-
rupt play.
2) Following the draw, the daily ties (country v country) for the round robin sessions e) The Captain may speak to the Chair Umpire, however only the Player may
will be scheduled and announced. initiate Challenges to line calls.
3) All players and Captains must be available for play on the first day of the event. 3) Individual Coaches*

4) Once the Captain has named the two (2) players competing in the singles, the a) Each player may have his personal coach be the designated coach for his
pairings for the Tie shall be made automatic as determined by the ATP/WTA matches.
Ranking. *Individual coaches with multiple players can coach their players even if they are
competing for different countries. If a coach has one player on each competing
5) Protected Ranking/Special Ranking (singles) will be used for a player’s position team, then the coach may only be on court for one country in that tie. This does
on the team but cannot be used for team seeding. not apply if the individual coach is also the Captain of a team. A Captain may only
6) A travel day for the Quarterfinal winners from Perth will take place on the 7th day sit on court and coach for the team he is captaining.
(Thursday) of the Tournament. 4) Duties of the Coach. The duties of the coach are as follows:
7) The Semi-Finals will be held on the 9th day of the tournament. a) During each match the player involved may use his personal coach to assist
8) The Final will be held on the 10th day of the tournament. him during the match.
b) The coach will sit in the designated area assigned for the coach of that match.
9) The ATP/WTA Supervisors reserve the right to change the schedule of play, alter c) The coach may sit on court during the match and may coach during change-
starting times and make other changes deemed necessary for the smooth run- overs, set-breaks and during play as long as it does not interrupt play.
ning of the competition. d) Official team members/coaches may also communicate with the player during
changeovers and set-breaks.
82 83
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
e) All team members, Captain and coaches, when courtside, must sit in the area 2) ATP Physiotherapist/WTA Primary Health Care Provider (PHCP)
designated for the teams participating in that Tie. a) Each venue will have an ATP Physiotherapist(s)/WTA PHCP(s) assigned to
f) The coach must adhere to the ATP Code of Conduct, including logo restric- the event.
tions on attire. b) Only the ATP Physiotherapist/WTA PHCP will be allowed on court during the
5) Player Designations match.
a) Each team Captain shall submit to the ATP/WTA Supervisor, in writing, the I. Code of Conduct
name of the two (2) singles players and the mixed doubles team selected
to compete in the Tie. The singles players shall be the top ATP/WTA ranked 1) Players. All players are subject to the ATP/WTA Code of Conduct.
players (including protected ranking/special ranking) as of the date of the en- a) Dress and Equipment.
try deadline, unless there is a medically supported substitution, or otherwise i) All team members must dress in similar attire that identifies them with the
approved by the Supervisor. country they are representing.
b) Change may be allowed for medical conditions or for unforeseen circum- ii) Team attire must be submitted to and approved by ATP/WTA in advance
stances approved by the ATP/ WTA Supervisor. of the event.
c) The team Captains must give in writing the names of the two (2) singles play- 2) Team Captain / Coaches. All Team Captains and Coaches are subject to the pro-
ers and the mixed doubles team to the Supervisor no later than 3:00pm on visions specified in the ATP/WTA Code of Conduct regarding Dress and Equip-
the day prior to the scheduled Tie. The mixed doubles team may be chosen ment and conduct on-site during the event.
from any ATP/WTA players named to the team.
For the Tournament Final, the team Captain must give in writing the names During matches, official functions and media appearances, all Team Captains
of the two (2) singles players and the mixed doubles team to the Supervisor shall wear tournament provided unbranded clothing (polo shirt / jacket/ hat) with
within fifteen minutes after the completion of the second tie determining the the United Cup logo provided by the event whilst sat on the team bench and
teams for the upcoming Final. performing all captains’ duties both on and off court; for example but not limited to
d) Following the conclusion of the second singles match, any change in the official functions, walk-ons, ceremonies, photo opportunities, media appearances
mixed doubles team must be communicated to the ATP/WTA Supervisor, in etc.
writing, within 10 minutes of the conclusion of the fourth singles match. The Captains with ongoing personal clothing sponsorship, will be permitted to wear
Supervisors shall notify the opposing Captain and all other relevant staff once a different shirt to the unbranded United Cup polo shirt, provided it is in the team
both Captains have submitted their doubles teams. colour or similar and is approved prior to the event.
e) There shall be a maximum of twenty-five (25) minutes between the end of the
last singles match and the start of the mixed doubles match if one or more of Captains wearing a personal shirt they will still be expected to wear the United
the doubles players competed in the last singles match. If none of the players Cup unbranded jacket for official functions, walk-ons, ceremonies, photo opportu-
designated for the mixed doubles has competed in the last singles match, nities, media appearances etc.
the mixed doubles shall be scheduled as “followed by” with the exact time If captains have other ongoing personal sponsorships (patch deals etc.) and wish
determined by the Supervisor. Fifteen minutes is recommended following the to wear a shirt complying with the above provision during the event with sponsor
conclusion of the last singles match, however mixed doubles players who logos on the shirt, all such sponsor logos must comply with ATP/WTA tour sizing
competed in the last singles match can elect to start after fifteen (15) minutes guidelines and must be approved prior to the event.
or after twenty-five (25) minutes.
f) The Captain must name the mixed doubles team one hour before the start of Coaches / other team members – if they are wearing shirts with sponsor logos in
the day’s play if his team has no singles matches on that day (rain or other accordance with ATP/WTA tour sizing rules, they may sit on the team benches.
cause of delay). Those not complying with this requirement will need to sit in the allocated team
g) The team Captain may, whenever necessary, replace a singles player in the area in the stands.
case of illness, injury or unforeseen circumstances approved by the ATP/WTA In addition, any violation occurring during the match shall be penalized with a
Supervisor. “Coaches Warning”. The first violation results in a Warning and a second violation
i) A player who withdraws from the singles shall be eligible for mixed dou- during the match will result in the coach being removed from the court for the
bles on that same day. remainder of that Tie.
h) In the event of a conduct default, the Supervisor may decide to remove the
3) Fines. Any fines issued during the Tie will be levied against the individual.
offending player(s) for the remainder of the tie or event.
H. Medical J. Prize Money (All figures in U.S. dollars)
1) Tournament Doctor Total Prize Money: USD$10,000,000 (USD$5,000,000 each for ATP and WTA)
a) An official Tournament Doctor is required to be present at all times during play
and a reasonable time before play begins.
b) The tournament doctor shall be available for court calls as necessary.
84 85
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
Per Individual Wins: No. 2 Player
#1 Singles Doubles Win 21-30 $50,000
Win (per player) 31-50 $30,000
Final Win $251,000 $47,255* 51-100 $20,000
Semi-Final Win $132,000 $24,750 101-250 $15,000
Quarterfinal Win $69,500 $13,000 251+ $10,000
Group Win $38,325 $7,200
No. 3 Player
*If the Tie is decided following the singles matches, the doubles match may not be
Singles Ranking $/player
played, and the money will be split evenly amongst the members of both teams.
1-30 $30,000
Per Team Wins:
31-100 $15,000
Team WIns
101-250 $7,500
Final Win $23,155
251+ $6,000
Semi-Final Win $13,650
Quarterfinal Win $8,025 Ranking as of 16 October 2023 or 20 November 2023, for the teams accepted at the
second qualification date.
Group Tie Win $5,000
Participation Fee Notes
All players on the team (whether the player plays a match or not) earn the same • Players may only receive a participation fee in one category. Players will receive
amount for a team win. a fee for singles or mixed doubles, whichever was used for their entry.
ParticipationFee: • Participation fee for any team substitutions following the 17 October 2023 entry
order shall be based upon the entry ranking team order and player ranking.
No. 1 Player
• A number 1 singles player will receive 100% of the participation fee if they com-
Singles Ranking $/player
pete in all Group stage singles matches. Pro-Rata schedule for players number
1-10 $200,000 1 competing in less than all Group stage singles matches is listed below includ-
11-20 $100,000 ing Pro-Rata schedule for mixed doubles matches participated in.

21-30 $60,000 • Players number 2-3 will receive 100% participation fee regardless of whether
they compete in any of the Group state matches.
31-50 $40,000
51-100 $30,000 2024 Participation Fee Pro-Rata Schedule
101-250 $25,000 For #1 Play- Promotional % Per Singles Per Doubles
er Match % Match %
251+ $20,000
40% 30% 15%

No. 2 Player • Max of 30% per tie

• Playing Singles and Doubles in same tie = 30%
Singles Ranking $/player • Applies to Group stage matches and ties only
1-10 $200,000 • This applies to all #1 players including players competing with Protected
Ranking (PR)/Special Ranking
11-20 $100,000
• Promotional % = minimum participation fee
*15 % maximum per all mixed doubles matches, regardless of if a player plays 1 or
2 mixed doubles during the group stage. Players competing in singles and mixed
doubles in a Tie will receive the Promotional fee plus 30 % per the singles match.

86 87
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
A #1 Player only playing 2 mixed doubles during the group stage will receive 40 % ing the singles match to obtain a few quotes to give to media, if requested.N.
Promotional + 15 % total for both mixed doubles matches (55 % overall). Examples Jurisdiction Governing the competition
in the table below.
N. Jurisdiction Governing the competition
Group Tie 1 Group Tie 2
1) The Competition is sanctioned and recognized by ATP Tour, Inc. and WTA Tour.
Scenario Singles Doubles Singles Doubles Fee Collected
2) All players who enter and compete in the competition agree to be subject to the
A x x 100% Rules and Regulations of the ATP/WTA, including, but not limited to, the Code
B x x 85% of Conduct, the Tennis Anti-Corruption Program and the Tennis Anti-Doping Pro-
gram.
C x x 70%
3) The ATP/WTA Supervisor, in consultation with the SVP, Rules & Competition and
D x 70% WTA Senior Vice President Competition & On-Site Operations, shall determine
E x x 55% and resolve all questions not considered in these Rules and Regulations.

F x 55%
4.04 Next Gen ATP Finals
G 40%
A. Competition Format

K. ATP/WTA Ranking Points The tournament shall be a round robin format with eight (8) players. There shall be
Singles two (2) groups of four (4) players each with eight (8) seeds to be determined by their
position on the most recent Pepperstone ATP Singles Rankings. All matches shall be
Opponent’s 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-50 51-100 101-250 251+ the best of five (5) tie-break sets. Each set shall be the first to four (4) games with
Ranking on Mon- a margin of two (2) with a tie-break played at three (3) games all. Games shall be
day, December
25, 2023
decided using the No-Ad scoring method. The round robin shall determine the four
(4) players for the semi-finals with the format thereafter being a single elimination
Final Win 180 140 120 90 60 40 35 competition.
Semifinal Win 130 105 90 60 40 35 25
B. Entries
Quarterfinal- 80 65 55 40 35 25 20
Win 1) Age Eligibility. All players must be 21 years or under throughout the 2024 calen-
Group Win 55 45 40 35 25 20 15 dar year.
Max Points 500 400 345 260 185 140 110 2) Selection List. The selection list for the event shall be:
Maximum 500 points for undefeated player a) The top seven (7) players in the Pepperstone ATP Race to Jeddah standings
as of Monday (20 November) following the Nitto ATP Finals event; followed
WTA Only: WTA player who wins all 5 matches to receive 500 points. WTA player by
who wins 4 of 5 matches to receive a minimum of 325 points or points per the table b) One (1) Wild Card designated by the ATP. The Wild Card selection must meet
above whichever is higher. the age restriction as specified in B. 1) above.
3) Direct Acceptances. The top seven (7) players in the selection list shall
L. Walkovers qualify for the event as direct acceptances. Participation is mandatory, and all
1) No points are awarded if no matches of the tie are played qualified players shall be entered. The exception to this is that any player(s)
who are qualified for the Nitto ATP Finals as a Direct Acceptance or as a des-
2) An individual match in the tie is won by a Walkover, points are awarded based ignated Alternate are excluded from mandatory participation. All direct accep-
upon the lowest ranking category (251+). tances must be at the tournament site to attend the official pre-tournament
media events scheduled Sunday night and Monday and must be available for
M. Media / STARS Obligations play through the completion of the round robin competition and the knock-out
1) All teams are requested to arrive in Australia on time for any pre-event media / competition if eligible.
STARS commitments, to be arranged. 4) Withdrawal. Any withdrawal, before the official pre-tournament media confer-
ence starts, shall be replaced by the next highest positioned player on the selec-
2) Normal post-match interview protocol will be followed with the exception being
tion list, who shall be qualified as a direct acceptance.
a player competing in the 4th singles match who is also competing in the mixed
doubles may postpone his media commitment until after the mixed doubles
match. However, the ATP/WTA PR Manager may approach the player follow-
88 89
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS
5) Alternate(s). vancing to the single elimination competition is the winner of the match-
a) Alternate(s) (who are not a direct acceptance at the time of the official up of the two (2) players tied with 1-2 records; or
pre-tournament media conference) shall be designated as determined by ii) Highest percentage of sets won; or
ATP. The alternate shall replace any player who subsequently withdraws. iii) Highest percentage of games won; or
The alternate must appear at the official pre-tournament media conference iv) The player positions on the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings.
and remain available through the start of the last scheduled round robin v) If (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) produce one (1) superior player (first place), or one
match. Participation of the Alternate is not mandatory. (1) inferior player (third place), and the two (2) remaining players are tied,
b) Additional alternates may be selected by ATP to fill the draw, based upon the tie between those two (2) players shall be broken by head-to-head
terms satisfactory to ATP. Participation of such additional alternates is not record.
mandatory. Comment 1: 1 player has 3 wins and the other 3 players have 1 win. Of
c) The alternate(s) is eligible to play in the single elimination competition and to the 3 players with 1 win, 1 player has only played in 2 matches while the
receive prize money if he qualifies. other 2 players have played 3 matches. The player who has only played 2
d) If the alternate(s) does not play in the draw, then a fee shall be paid to the matches is eliminated and then the 2 remaining players revert to head-to-
alternate(s). If the alternate(s) is inserted for the second or third round robin head results with the winner of their match advancing to the semi-finals.
match, then he shall receive the alternate fee plus any prize money won. If Comment 2: 1 player has 3 wins and the other 3 players have 1 win and
the alternate(s) replaces a player that does not compete in his first round rob- they all have played 3 matches. The tie-break for % of sets won has 1
in match, the alternate(s) becomes a direct acceptance and does not receive player with a better % than the other two. This player advances to the
the alternate fee. semi-final round.
Comment 3: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins.
C. Appearance at Event The player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, they
are ordered by their % of sets won. This produces a 1, 2 & 3 order and
All direct acceptances and the alternate must appear at the site of the event(s) as the players finishing 1 and 2 move to the semi-final round and the player
determined by ATP and participate in the pre-tournament media events scheduled on finishing 3 in % of sets won is eliminated. The player with the best % of
Sunday night and Monday. sets won is the winner of the group.
Comment 4: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
D. Failure to Participate
player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, 1 player’s
sets won-loss is 5-2 for 71.43%; the other 2 players both have a 4-3 re-
If a player, qualified for the Next Gen ATP Finals as a direct acceptance fails or re-
cord in sets for 57.14%. In this case there is 1 superior player (71.43%)
fuses to participate in this event, except for bona fide injury or other reason which
and the remaining 2 players are tied; it now reverts to the head to head
constitutes good cause, the player shall receive a fine in the amount of $25,000.
result of the 2 remaining players with the winning player advancing as
group runner-up.
E. Order of Play
Comment 5: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
Round Robin player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, 2 have set
won-loss records of 5-3 (62.5%) while the other player is 4-3 (57.14%).
1) The field shall be divided into two (2) groups of four (4) players each. The
In this case, we have 1 inferior player (57.14%) and he is eliminated. The
top-seeded player shall be placed in Group “A” and the second-seeded player
remaining two players both advance to the semi-finals with the winner of
shall be placed in Group “B”. Players seeded three (3) and four (4), five (5) and six
their head-to-head match advancing as the group winner.
(6), and seven (7) and eight (8), shall then be drawn in pairs with the first drawn
Comment 6: 3 players have 2 wins and the other player has 0 wins. The
placed into Group “A.”
player with 0 wins is eliminated. Of the 3 players with 2 wins, all have
2) Each player shall play every other player in his group to determine the top two (2) played 3 matches and all 3 have set won-loss records of 5-4 (55.56%).
players in each group. In this case, we move to % of games won. The % of games won breaks
3) The final standings of each group shall be determined by the first of the following down like this: 44-40 for 52.38%, 45-43 for 51.14% and 44-43 for 50.57%.
methods that apply: This produces a 1, 2 and 3 order of the group and the number 1 player in
% of games won is the group winner while the player finishing 2nd in %
a) Greatest number of wins. of games won advances to the semi-finals as the group runner-up. The
b) Greatest number of matches played. player with the 3rd best % of games won is eliminated.
Comment: 2-1 won-loss record beats a 2-0 won-loss record; a 1-2 record e) In applying the tie-breaking procedures, a conduct default or retirement shall
beats a 1-0 record. count as a straight-set win or loss. However, games won or lost in matches
c) Head-to-head results if only two (2) players are tied. with the defaulting or retiring player shall not be counted in the percentage
d) If three (3) players are tied, then: of games won. A player who retires during the round robin because of illness
i) If three (3) players each have one (1) win, a player having played less or injury may continue in the competition if it is approved by the tournament
than all three (3) matches is automatically eliminated and the player ad- Doctor.
90 91
IV. WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS V. PERSONNEL
Comment: This prevents a scenario where a player knows he only needs to 5.01 Tournament Director
win 1 set to qualify for the semi-finals from retiring once he has won a set.
f) Any player who is defaulted pursuant to the ATP Code during the round robin A. Appointment
competition shall be defaulted from all other matches in the Championship 1) A tournament may change the Tournament Director named in the tournament
and ATP default provisions shall apply, except for the following circumstanc- application by submitting the proposed change to the ATP Board for approval.
es:
i) The loss of physical condition; or 2) The ATP Board may require a tournament to change the Tournament Director
ii) Dress and Equipment. upon a finding that such Tournament Director has failed to or refused to comply
g) Any player who withdraws from any round robin match after the first round with any provision of ATP’s rules and regulations.
shall not be eligible for the single elimination competition.
B. Responsibilities
F. Single Elimination Competition
Each Tournament Director shall:
1) The winner of each group shall be placed in separate semi-final brackets. The 1) Act in cooperation with ATP staff on-site.
runner-up of each group shall be placed in the semi-final bracket with the winner
2) Be responsible for tournament compliance with all rules and regulations.
of the opposite group.
3) Not go on court during a match (including warm-up) or otherwise become in-
2) The event shall be completed with a single elimination competition for the semi-
volved in any Code of Conduct matter.
finals and final.
NOTE: Tournament Directors are prohibited from playing in their own event (Tour
G. Prize Money
Policy).
Final standings at the end of the tournament shall determine the prize money earned.
5.02 Tour Manager
A. Appointment
ATP shall provide a Tour Manager for each ATP Tour tournament.

B. Responsibilities
1) The Tour Manager shall be present for all sign-ins.
2) The Tour Manager shall be present at the making of all draws.
3) The Tour Manager shall act as the player representative for all aspects of the
tournament, including as a member of the scheduling committee.

5.03 Public Relations (“PR”)

A. Appointment
1) ATP will provide a PR representative for each ATP Tour tournament to coordinate
advance publicity, help organize facilities and provide media assistance on-site.

B. Responsibilities
1) The PR representative shall liaise with journalists, players and sponsors.
2) The PR representative shall organize and supervise post-match press confer-
ences.
3) The PR representative shall coordinate exclusive interviews.
4) The PR representative shall provide statistical and biographical information to
journalists.
5) The PR representative shall disseminate information to international journalists.
6) The PR representative shall suggest story lines to journalists.
92 93
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
5.04 Doctor, Physiotherapist and Massage Therapist B. ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
A. ATP Tour Tournaments 1) Tournament Doctor. Each ATP Challenger Tour tournament is required to have
an English-speaking tournament Doctor at the site from one (1) hour prior to the
1) Tournament Doctor. start of play through its conclusion on each day. If the ATP Challenger Tour tour-
Beginning with the qualifying competition, it is the responsibility of each ATP Tour nament cannot provide a doctor on-site during all hours of play, a doctor shall be
tournament to provide on-site during the entire tournament an English-speaking available during all hours of play on each day:
Doctor who specializes in sports medicine, unless otherwise approved by ATP’s a) On call and able to respond immediately for consultation from the tournament
Medical Services Committee. Each tournament shall send the name and address medical team by telephone on each day for urgent medical situations that
of the tournament Doctor (or all Doctors, if more than one) to the appropriate arise; and
ATP regional coordinator ninety (90) days in advance of the tournament. The b) Through a schedule of daily on-site visits (minimum 1 hour during normal
tournament doctor shall be responsible for the medical care and treatment of the business hours or as required by the ATP Supervisor) by the tournament
players at all times during the event and shall have no other official duties while at doctor established at the start of the tournament and posted in the player
the tournament site. ATP tournaments shall provide for the Tournament Doctor, a treatment room to allow for in-person consultations with player as needed
private space in the vicinity of the ATP Physiotherapist area. Please refer to the throughout the tournament and within the allocated time frame for each day;
Standards and Best Practices section on ATP Tournament Centre. and
Thirty (30) days prior to the start of the tournament, a physician schedule is re- c) To see a player in-practice (physician’s office) if a player, for reasons outside
quired outlining the schedule of physicians for the tournament (days and hours). his own control, requires a doctor’s consultation outside the daily allocated
No more than 2-3 physicians should be used. Tournament physicians are re- time frame for the doctor’s on-site visit.
quired to arrive on-site ninety (90) minutes prior to the start of play each day and
remain onsite until the last match concludes, and all players have been checked Each tournament shall send the name and address of the tournament Doctor to
and cleared for not requiring physician services. Tournament physicians must ATP’s Medical Services Committee forty-two (42) days in advance of the tourna-
present themselves to the ATP physiotherapist upon arrival to the site the first day ment.
for debriefing and orientation of ATP Medical Services Policies and Procedures. Case: A player requests to see the doctor for an in-practice consul-
All on-site tournament doctor treatments are provided to players free of charge. tation outside the doctor’s scheduled on-site visit time slot for that
2) Physiotherapist. day. He claims that he has an early match that day (non-urgent rea-
son) and will likely not be on-site later in the day during the doctor’s
ATP shall provide a Physiotherapist for all tournaments except that ATP may re- on-site visit.
quire assistance from a tournament to provide a Physiotherapist for the qualifying
Decision: The request is denied. The player can organize trans-
competition.
portation to the site and consult with the doctor during the doctor’s
Combined Events. Each combined tournament must provide one (1) ATP Phys- on-site visit.
iotherapist with single room hotel accommodations. Complimentary room shall 2) Physiotherapist. Each ATP Challenger Tour tournament must provide an En-
be in the player hotel or another hotel approved by ATP Medical Services. glish-speaking Physiotherapist(s) as shown below. All Physiotherapy treatments
3) Massage Therapist. are provided to players free of charge.
It is the responsibility of each ATP Tour tournament to provide a Massage Ther- a) Challenger 125 and 175 events
apist in the following amounts: (i) 96-draw: 5, (ii) 56-draw: 4, (iii) 48-draw: 3, and i) Two (2) Physiotherapists designated and paid for by ATP.
(iv) 32/28-draw: 2. Tournaments should provide a separate ventilated room for ii) The tournament may apply to have a local physiotherapist in lieu of the
tournament massage therapists. In exceptional circumstances massage thera- 2nd ATP Physiotherapist. If approved, the local physiotherapist would
pists may be located in the ATP treatment room, provided there are no other work Saturday through Thursday. All fees and expenses for the local
options, and the room size is sufficient to accommodate the increased number of Physiotherapist will be paid by the tournament.
tables and therapists. Please refer to the Standards and Best Practices section b) Challenger 100 events
on ATP Tournament Centre. i) One (1) Physiotherapist designated and all fees/expenses paid by ATP.
ii) One (1) Physiotherapist nominated by the tournament and approved by
4) ATP Mental Health and Wellbeing ATP. This Physiotherapist is to be scheduled to work Saturday through
ATP shall provide a player Mental Health and Wellbeing specialist at select ATP Thursday with all fees/expenses paid by the tournament.
Masters 1000 tournaments. Tournaments shall provide for the ATP Mental Health c) Challenger 50 and 75 events
and Wellbeing specialist a private space per the specifications in the Standards i) Two (2) Physiotherapists designated by the tournament and approved by
and Best Practices Section on ATP Tournament Centre. ATP.
ii) The tournament is responsible for all fees and expenses.
iii) One Physiotherapist to work Saturday through Thursday and one physio-
therapist to work Sunday through Sunday.
94 95
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
d) Education module. All non-ATP Physiotherapists must have successfully B. Fees and Expenses
completed the ATP Medical Services education online program prior to work-
ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
ing at ATP Challengers.
ATP shall pay the fees and travel expenses of the supervisors hired by ATP.
3) Massage Therapist. A minimum of one (1) Massage Therapist must be provided Each tournament must provide each Supervisor with single room hotel accommo-
at each Challenger. Please refer to the Standards and Best Practices section on dations, meals and laundry. Complimentary rooms shall be in the player hotel or
ATP Tournament Centre. another hotel approved by ATP or the Supervisor.
● At Challenger 50 and 75 events, the second Physiotheraplist may work as
the Massage Therapist. C. General
a) For Challenger 125 and 175 events, the service shall be provided to the play- The Supervisor at each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament is pro-
ers, while remaining in the event, free of charge. vided by ATP. Whenever the Supervisor is not available, the Supervisor shall
b) For all other Challenger Tour events, a fee may be charged with a recom- designate an approved Referee or ATP Official to assume all duties and respon-
mended maximum fee of $25/€25 for a 30-minute massage. sibilities. (All references to Supervisor includes “or his designee.”)

5.05 Agents, Tier I and Tier II D. Responsibilities

A list of Tier I and Tier II Agents will be established and revised on a yearly basis In all ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments the Supervisor shall:
following the conclusion of the Nitto ATP Tour Finals. The criteria for becoming a Tier 1) Act as ATP’s representative, speaking with the full authority of ATP during the
I or II Agent is defined below. tournament.
A. Tier I 2) Act as final on-site authority ensuring that the tournament is conducted fairly in
accordance with ATP’s Rules and Regulations as to all matters arising that re-
1) Minimum of five (5) years of service, beginning with the first year’s representation quire immediate resolution at the tournament site including the evaluation of tour-
of an ATP player, and nament compliance with Facilities and On-Site Condition requirements.
2) Agent’s Player must be active, and 3) Issue player conduct fines as necessary and appropriate.
3) Number of Singles Players representing 4) Direct, supervise, instruct and evaluate the Referee, Chief of Umpires and all on-
a) Ranking 1-10 = 1 player, or court officials, including the authority to:
b) Ranking 11-50 = 2 players, or a) Make the assignment of all Chair Umpires and approve all Line Umpires and
c) Ranking 11-100 = 4 players, or net judge for tournament matches.
b) Remove a Chair Umpire and/or remove, rotate or replace any Line Umpire or
4) Number of Doubles Players representing net judge when necessary to improve the officiating of a match.
a) Ranking 1-20 = 4 5) Make all draws for the qualifying and main draw competitions.
b) If agent does not represent four (4) doubles players, each doubles player
ranked in the top 20 shall count as ½ player towards meeting the singles 6) When weather or other conditions threaten the immediate safety of the players,
criteria. spectators, officials or any other persons on the tournament site, the Supervisor
may suspend or postpone the match(es) until such time that in his opinion the
B. Tier II threat to safety is no longer evident.

Agents that do not meet the criteria to be in Tier I may apply for consideration as a 7) Decide if a court is fit for play or decide if a match should be moved to another
Tier II Agent. There are no benefits associated with Tier II classification. court. The Supervisor may, if necessary to eliminate the possibility of a player
having to play two singles matches in one day, or if necessary to complete the
event, move a match to another court, indoors or outdoors, regardless of surface.
5.06 Supervisor
8) Serve as the Chairman of the scheduling committee and make the final decision
A. Assignment & Designation on all scheduling matters if the committee is not in agreement. Ensure that the
1) ATP Tour Tournaments daily order of play is posted on the bulletin board and at the official hotel.

An ATP Supervisor shall be provided by ATP for each ATP Tour tournament. 9) Designate a highly visible place in the general player area as the official bulletin
board.
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
10) Designate a visible timepiece at a fixed location as the “Official Clock” of the tour-
ATP shall provide a Supervisor for each ATP Challenger Tour tournament. nament.

96 97
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
11) Designate a specific area from which matches shall be called and determine B. Fees and Expenses
when a match is to be called.
12) Maintain a continuous dialogue during the week with the Tournament Director ATP shall pay the fees and travel expenses of the designated Chair Umpires and
and submit a report to ATP evaluating the tournament, including attendance, and review officials (if any) hired by ATP.
officials. The Tournament Director shall receive a copy of the report prior to the 1) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments.
Supervisor’s departure.
Each tournament must provide each designated Chair Umpire and Review Offi-
13) Decide with the Tournament Director the designation of the lowest tier of seats cial (if any) with single room hotel accommodations, meals and laundry. Compli-
that surround the playing area of the courts at each tournament. mentary rooms shall be in the player hotel or another hotel approved by ATP or
the Supervisor.
E. Clothing - ATP Tour
Each ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall pay a fair and reasonable fee and
The officiating uniform provided by ATP must be worn. No other commercial branding travel expense to each Chair Umpire hired by the tournament.
may be applied to the uniform without prior approval from ATP.
C. General
5.07 Chair Umpire / Review Official Chair umpires are assigned matches by the ATP Supervisor and are responsible to
A. Assignment and Designation Process ensure those matches are conducted according to the rules of ATP in order to present
a professional tournament.
1) ATP Tour Tournaments. Officials required to support the tournament are as fol-
lows: D. Responsibilities
ATP shall hire designated Chair Umpires as follows: 1) Enforce all ATP Rules and Regulations and on-court procedures to ensure accu-
racy, fairness and safety. Ensure that the players and all on-court officials observe
Main Draw Size (Singles) Total # of chair Umpires the rules.
96 9 2) The following pertain to the rules for continuous play: Have a stopwatch in his
56 7 possession which shall be used to time the warm-up, the time between points,
the time permitted on changeovers, the time permitted during the set break and
48 5
all other specified time periods designated under the provisions of any rule or
32 4 regulation.
28 4 3) Dress uniformly with other Chair Umpires as prescribed by the Supervisor.
NOTE: In the event the tournament elects to employ the services of an electronic 4) If appropriate, conduct a pre-match meeting with all of the on-court officials for
line calling system, ATP will hire a Review Official in addition to the Chair Umpires the match to specify court assignments and the procedures to be used for making
as stated above. calls, hand signals, rotation of court assignments, etc.
Each tournament is required to provide supplemental Chair Umpires approved 5) Ascertain prior to matches from the Supervisor or the Chief of Umpires that the
by ATP for the qualifying competition as well as for some main draw matches tournament has made appropriate arrangements for the safe escorting of players
not covered by the designated Chair Umpires hired by ATP. Supplemental Chair to and from the court before and after the match.
Umpires must have international certification of Gold, Silver or Bronze.
6) Immediately before the start of the match meet with the players to:
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. Tournaments must hire Chair Umpires as a) Verify the correct pronunciation of the player’s names.
specified below: b) State any pertinent information (rule changes, new procedures, etc. for the
a) Chair Umpires. Each tournament shall have a minimum of four (4) designat- players.
ed Chair Umpires for the entire week as selected and coordinated by ATP. 7) Flip a coin in the presence of both players or teams to determine choice of serve
Under special circumstances, ATP may require additional Chair Umpire(s) to and side at the beginning of the match prior to the warm-up. If play is suspended
be hired by the tournament. before the match begins, the winner of the toss may choose again before the
b) Supplemental Chair Umpires. Each tournament shall provide supplemental match commences.
Chair Umpires approved by ATP for matches not covered by the designated
8) Determine if each player is dressed in accordance with the dress provisions of
Chair Umpires. Supplemental Chair Umpires must have certification of Gold,
ATP rules. Corrective action taking more than fifteen (15) minutes shall result in
Silver, Bronze or White.
a default in consultation with the Supervisor. An appropriate re-warm-up may be
authorized.

98 99
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
9) Determine all Questions of Fact arising during the match (including the permitted match. If required by the Supervisor, in addition to the brief summary of the vi-
five (5) minute warm-up). olation made on the Point Penalty Card, the Chair Umpire shall write a detailed
statement of the incident. All reports shall be signed, dated and delivered to the
10) Make the first determination of all Questions of Tennis Law arising during the
Supervisor.
match, subject to the right of a player to appeal to the Supervisor.
22) Chair umpire responsibilities to include primary responsibility to call nets or
11) Announce the score after each point in accordance with On-Court Procedures.
throughs, unless otherwise assigned.
Announcements as a minimum must be in English. If two (2) languages must be
used, announce in the local language first, then English. Conversations between 23) Chair umpires must promptly and accurately score matches using the handheld
the Chair Umpire and a player can be in any language. However, if the language or other method provided by ATP. In addition, Chair Umpires agree not to, and
used is not English, then the Chair Umpire must be prepared to advise the other shall not authorize or assist any third party to, disseminate, transmit, publish or
player of the nature of the discussion. release any match related data or information to or for any third party without the
express written consent of ATP. Further, each Chair Umpire agrees that any and
12) Repeat the calls of a Line Umpire or net judge if the call is made in a weak voice
all work or data he/she collects or creates in connection with any match shall con-
or there is a close call that must be confirmed to remove any doubt from the minds
stitute a “work made for hire” and any and all rights attributable to such work shall
of the players.
be retained by, or if necessary automatically assigned to, ATP and its members.
13) Be responsible for any ball mark inspection on clay courts. A ball mark inspection
must be made in accordance with the approved on-court procedures. E. Clothing - ATP Tour
14) Overrule a Line Umpire only in the case of a clear mistake by the Line Umpire and The officiating uniform provided by ATP must be worn. No other commercial branding
only if the overrule is made promptly after the mistake is made. All overrules must may be applied to the uniform without prior approval from ATP.
be made in accordance with the approved on-court procedures. Obvious foot
faults must be called by the Chair Umpire consistent with the procedures used for
handling “clear mistakes”. 5.08 Line Umpire
15) Remove, rotate or replace any Line Umpire or net judge whenever, in the opinion A. Assignment and Designation Process
of the Chair Umpire, it will improve the officiating of a match. 1) ATP Masters 1000 Tournaments
16) Exercise his best efforts to control the crowd. Spectator involvement is encour- Officials required to support the tournament are as follows:
aged as long as the Chair Umpire does not determine such involvement to be
deliberately distracting. Whenever the spectators are impeding the progress of Unless otherwise approved by ATP, the following are required: a minimum of sev-
the match, the Chair Umpire should address them respectfully and request their en (7) Line Umpires must be provided per main draw match and qualifying match.
cooperation. The tournament announcer and security personnel may be used to 2) ATP 500 and 250 Tournaments
assist the Chair Umpire after consultation with the Supervisor.
Officials required to support the tournament are as follows:
17) Be responsible for the direction of the ball persons during the match so that they
assist but do not disturb the players. Unless otherwise approved by ATP, the following are required: A minimum of sev-
en (7) Line Umpires must be provided per main draw match. A minimum of five
18) Be responsible for having the appropriate number of balls on-court for the match, (5) Line Umpires per qualifying match must be provided.
for all changes of balls and for determining if a ball is fit for play. The appropriate
number of ball containers should be opened and inspected sufficiently in advance 3) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
of each ball change so as to avoid any delay of the match at the time of a ball Tournaments must hire officials as specified below:
change.
For Challenger 50 and 75 events on clay court, a minimum of three (3) Line
19) Complete a scorecard in accordance with the approved on-court procedures. Fol- Umpires shall be provided for every qualifying match and also every main draw
lowing the completion of a match, the scorecards or printouts are to be finalized match up until the quarterfinal. From the quarterfinals on, a minimum of five (5)
and distributed to appropriate ATP tournament and/or media personnel. Maintain Line Umpires shall be provided.
the ATP Point Penalty Card in accordance with the approved on-court proce-
dures. For Challenger 50 and 75 events on hard, grass or indoor synthetic court, a
minimum of five (5) line umpires shall be provided for every qualifying and main
20) Determine if a court continues to be fit for play. If a change in condition occurs draw match.
during a match that the Chair Umpire considers sufficient to make the court unfit
for play or if weather conditions require stoppage of play, he should stop play and For Challenger 100 and 125 events, regardless of court surface, a minimum of
immediately notify the Supervisor. five (5) Line Umpires shall be provided for every qualifying and every main draw
match up until the quarter-finals. From the quarter-finals on, a minimum of seven
21) Following the conclusion of the match, complete and give to the Supervisor, the (7) Line Umpires shall be provided.
Post Match Review form including all actions taken under the Code during the

100 101
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
For Challenger 175 events, a minimum of five (5) Line Umpires shall be provided 15) Remain silent if the Chair Umpire overrules a call. Direct player inquiries to the
for every qualifying match. A minimum of seven (7) line umpires shall be provided Chair Umpire.
for every main draw match. 16) If directed by the Chair Umpire to identify a mark, and the Line Umpire is sure
B. General of the location of the mark, the Line Umpire should walk directly to the mark and
point to it in a manner that is clear to the Chair Umpire. The Line Umpire should
Line umpires are assigned by the Chief of Umpires and are responsible for calling then return to his position without comment.
their assigned lines according to ATP rules under the direct on-court supervision of 17) Promptly yield to the Chair Umpire when unsighted on a call.
the Chair Umpire.
18) If the Line Umpire sees that he or she may hinder a player’s stroke, make a rea-
C. Clothing sonable effort to get out of the way, but in so doing, make as little movement as
possible.
Clothing provided by the tournament for Line Umpires shall not be solid white, yellow 19) When there are Code Violations by players not witnessed by the Chair Umpire,
or other colors that may interfere with the vision of the players, unless otherwise ap- inform the Chair Umpire immediately or as soon as is reasonable prior to the start
proved by ATP. It is recommended that dark-colored clothing be avoided for outdoor of the next point, without disrupting a point or the match. The Line Umpire should
tournaments played in high temperatures. Clothing should not be identical to clothing quickly approach the Chair Umpire and report the facts of the violation.
provided to the ball persons.
5.09 Referee
D. Responsibilities
A. Assignment and Designation Process
1) Carry out all duties in accordance with the approved procedures of ATP.
2) Not catch balls or hold towels for a player. 1) ATP Tour Tournaments

3) Not leave the court without permission of the Chair Umpire. Each tournament is required to hire a certified Referee approved by ATP.

4) Dress uniformly with other Line Umpires as prescribed by the tournament and/or 2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
ATP. Each tournament is required to hire a certified Referee approved by ATP.
5) Sit erect with both feet on the ground with arms resting on his or her legs.
B. Waiver of Obligation – Referee
6) Concentrate on the assigned line; conversation with spectators or others is to be
avoided. A tournament may petition ATP to waive the Referee requirement. Waivers shall not
be granted to:
7) Be accountable to the Chair Umpire only and have no discussions with the play-
ers. A player’s questions must always be referred to the Chair Umpire. However, 1) Challenger 125 and 175 events
a Line Umpire may answer a reasonably precise question if it relates to a call,
2) Any new Challenger tournament
especially foot faults, unless that call has been overruled.
3) Tournaments played on two (2) separate sites, including qualifying
8) Move away from the on-court chair if necessary to get the best view possible of
the assigned line. 4) Back-to-back tournaments (for a minimum of the overlapping week-end)
9) Make all calls as quickly as possible, maintaining consistency and accuracy. On Furthermore, the following elements shall be used to determine whether or not a
very close calls a fraction of a second’s hesitation is recommended to make sure waiver will be considered:
that the call is correct.
1) 2-court event
10) Never call a ball “Out” until it actually hits out or it hits a permanent fixture.
2) Venue size
11) Make “Out,” “Fault,” “Net” and “Foot Fault” calls loudly and crisply followed by the
appropriate hand signal. Foot faults are never called until the serve is struck. 3) Recommendation of the supervisor from previous year that a waiver, if approved,
will not jeopardize the quality of the service.
12) Do not make a call for a “good” ball. However, whenever there is a close call on a
good ball, the “good” ball hand signals should be given quickly to confirm the call. Where a waiver is granted, tournament shall provide a suitable assistant to the super-
13) When there is an erroneous call, immediately call “Correction” so that the Chair visor.
Umpire and the players are aware of the error. Then, make the corrected call.
14) Do not give an opinion on a call that is not his or her responsibility.

102 103
V. PERSONNEL V. PERSONNEL
hotel or another hotel approved by ATP or the Supervisor.
C. Fees and Expenses
1) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments Each tournament shall pay a fair and reasonable fee and travel expense to the Chief
of Umpires hired by the tournament.
Each tournament must provide each Referee with single room hotel accommo-
dations, meals and laundry. Complimentary rooms shall be in the player hotel or C. General
another hotel approved by ATP or the Supervisor.
Each tournament shall pay a fair and reasonable fee and travel expense to each The Chief of Umpires is approved by ATP, hired by the tournament and is responsible
designated and approved Referee hired by the tournament. for having sufficient quality Line Umpires assigned to each match.

D. General D. Responsibilities
1) Recruit a sufficient number of competent officials for the tournament. Be prepared
The Referee is hired by the tournament to advise in planning the event and shall to respond to or make recommendations to the Fulltime Official who is coordinat-
assist the Supervisor while being available to serve on the scheduling committee. ing assignments and designations of all necessary and required Chair Umpires.
E. Responsibilities 2) Conduct the necessary pre-tournament training of officials including review of all
appropriate ATP Rules and Regulations.
Advise, assist and cooperate with the Supervisor as appropriate and necessary when 3) Prepare a list of officials, which shall include the mailing address and national
carrying out any assigned duties or responsibilities. Assigned duties may include; or local certifications, if any, of all officials used during the tournament. A copy of
1) Organizing the facilities, equipment and staff, to support play beginning with the such list shall be delivered to the Referee and to the Supervisor.
qualifying competition. 4) Be on-site at all times during play. The Chief of Umpires may not be a chair or Line
2) Confirming the conditions of play, (i.e.), make and number of tennis balls, types of Umpire unless authorized by the Supervisor.
beverages including electrolyte, how matches are to be called, etc. 5) Schedule the on-court assignments of Line Umpires for each day of the tourna-
3) Ensure that each court is equipped as follows: ment, subject to the approval of the Supervisor. Line umpires for the quarterfinals,
semi-finals and finals must have worked a minimum of two (2) days prior to the
a) Umpire’s chair.
quarterfinals and have the Supervisor’s specific approval.
b) Line umpire chairs.
c) Player’s chairs.
d) On-court beverages. 5.11 Ball Persons
f) Writing Tables and electrical outlet for the Electronic Scoring Device. Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament must provide ball persons for all
g) Microphones (if applicable) main draw and qualifying competition matches. Ball persons should be on-site and
available at a reasonable time prior to the first match of the day and there shall be ball
4) Designate a highly visible place in the general player’s area as the “Official Bulle- persons available until the conclusion of play each day.
tin Board” and notify all players of its designation and location.
5) Make appropriate arrangements for the safe escorting of players to and from the A. Number.
court before and after the match.
At ATP Tour events, six (6) ball persons are recommended per court. At Challenger
6) Be on-site at all times during the playing of matches in the tournament. The Ref- Tour events a minimum number of four (4) ball persons is required per court, although
eree may not be a Chair Umpire or Chief of Umpires. it is recommended to provide six (6).

5.10 Chief of Umpires B. Clothing

A. Assignment and Designation Process Clothing provided by the tournament for ball persons shall not be solid white, yellow
or other colors that may interfere with the vision of the players, unless otherwise ap-
ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments are required to hire a certified Chief proved by ATP. It is recommended that dark-colored clothing be avoided for outdoor
of Umpires approved by ATP, unless otherwise determined by ATP. tournaments played in high temperatures. Clothing should not be identical to clothing
provided to the Line Umpires.
B. Fees and Expenses
1) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
Each tournament must provide each Chief of Umpires with single room hotel ac-
commodations, meals and laundry. Complimentary rooms shall be in the player
104 105
V. PERSONNEL VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
5.12 ATP/GRAND SLAMS/ITF/WTA Code of Conduct for Officials 6.01 Courts
A. The ATP, the Grand Slam Tournaments, the ITF and the WTA as members of the Joint A. Court Surface
Certification Programme require a high standard of professionalism from all Certified
1) Outdoor court surfaces shall be classified as either a) hard; b) clay; or c) grass.
Officials (National, Green, White, Bronze, Silver and Gold) and all other Officials,
(together, “Officials”) working at ATP, Grand Slam, ITF and WTA events. All Officials 2) Indoor surfaces shall be Indoor Hard and shall be constructed using an acrylic or
are automatically bound by, and must comply with, this Code of Conduct for Officials similar surface paint applied on a hard or semi-hard base.
(“Code”). The ATP, Grand Slam Board, ITF and WTA shall continue to have jurisdic-
3) Any court surface or change in a tournament’s court surface must be approved by
tion over a retired Official under the Code and, as applicable, ATP, Grand Slam, ITF
ATP.
and WTA Tournament Regulations and Codes of Conduct in respect of matters taking
place prior to his/her retirement. 4) A change in a tournament’s court surface will not be considered for approval
without a written petition by the tournament.
The full text of the Code of Conduct for Officials can be found at the following website:
https://www.itftennis.com/en/about-us/governance/rules-and-regulations/ B. Size, Position and Color of Courts
1) The Court shall conform to the specifications of the Rules of Tennis. ATP reserves
the right to restrict the color of an indoor synthetic court as well as outdoor surfac-
es. The lines of the court shall be white.
2) Courts shall be laid out with the long axis north and south; however, geographic
considerations may modify this orientation in order to minimize the adverse effect
of serving into the sun.
3) Courts shall not be less than 60 feet (18.29 m.) wide and 120 feet (36.58 m.) long.
Center courts should be 66 feet (20.11 m.) x 132 feet (40.23 m.).

C. Preparation of Surface

Clay, composition and loose surface courts shall be swept and lines cleaned before
the start of all matches and properly maintained.

D. Lighting
1) Minimum Number of Lighted Courts – Outdoor events
a) ATP Tour Masters 1000. Center Court, two (2) other show courts plus one (1)
practice court.
b) ATP Tour 500. Center Court plus one (1) other show court plus one (1) prac-
tice court based on match schedule plan.
c) ATP Tour 250. No minimum requirement.
2) Intensity
a) ATP Tour Tournaments. Lighting must be evenly distributed on the court
with a minimum recommended intensity of 100 foot-candles (1076 LUX), av-
eraged over 15 readings on court.
The recommended minimum lighting for televised events broadcasting in
high definition is an average of 185 foot candles (approximately 2,000 lux).
The light should be distributed across the court evenly with a consistent color
temperature.
b) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. Lighting must be evenly distributed on
the court with a minimum recommended intensity of 70 foot-candles (750
LUX), averaged over 15 readings on court.
3) High/low ratio. A ratio of the highest to lowest readings should be no greater than
1x2.0 but the recommended ratio is 1x1.5.

106 107
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
4) Light poles. Light poles should be positioned so that they are evenly distributed 1) Size. Each shot clock panel’s minimum recommended size is 2 x 2 feet (0.6 x 0.6
around the court and it is recommended that light pole heights for other than show meters). The recommended maximum size is 3 x 2 feet (0.91 x 0.6 meters).
courts be no lower than forty (40) feet (12.19 m.) or no lower than other non-show
2) Number and Placement. Each court shall have, as a minimum, two (2) timing
court lights at the facility, e.g., if others are sixty (60) feet (18.29 m.), then new
panels. The placement of the shot clock panels shall be on the back wall or corner
lights should be sixty (60) feet (18.29 m.) high.
of the court and located one (1) each on the left far and right far side from the
5) The Supervisor has the authority to suspend play on any court if the intensity of umpire chair. The placement shall ensure that the shot clock is in clear view of the
illumination, in his judgment, is insufficient for professional tennis. players and the Chair Umpire.

E. Back Fences, Back Walls, Banners, Signs and Seats 3) Additional Positions. Beyond the two (2) clock placements specified in 2)
above, at the tournament’s option they may show the shot clock timing in other
1) The back fences, back walls, net, net posts, Line Umpire boxes and other fixtures locations on or around the court and spectator areas.
on a court shall not have any white, gray, yellow or other light colors that can
interfere with the vision of the players as determined by the Supervisor. H. Electronic Review.
2) Background and lettering on rotating / LED banners should be consistent with the 1) With the exception of clay court events, all ATP Tour tournaments are required to
color of the back walls. If placed in front of back walls, rotating / LED banners can provide an ATP approved electronic review system.
change between games. The ATP may approve the use of entertainment images
Note: ATP approved electronic review systems is permitted for use at clay court
/ changes after every point if not disturbing play. If placed in front of side walls,
events in 2024 on a voluntary basis.
rotating / LED banners can change only after the completion of any point in prog-
ress. ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 500 tournaments are recommend- 2) The system must, at a minimum, be available for use on the Stadium/Centre
ed to install LED banners around their center court (both backwall and sidewall Court.
boards). 3) Masters 1000 and ATP 500. The system must be available from the first day of
Each ATP Tournament must comply with the following in order to use electronic qualifying* through the end of the event on all show courts.
perimeter boards (LEDs): 4) ATP 250 Events. If qualifying and main draw matches are scheduled on the same
a) The company and methodology used to produce electronically inserted sig- day and on the same court(s), then the electronic review must be used for all
nage must meet quality and technical standards and be pre-approved by ATP. matches on that court(s).
b) Electronically inserted signage may be used across the whole court perimeter.
5) The tournament must comply with all of the provisions specified in “Exhibits T -
c) Electronically inserted signage may be altered only between points and oper-
ator must insure through synchronisation with the umpire’s tablet and a view and U”.
of the court, that such changes do not happen during play.
*If qualifying matches are played on courts where an electronic review system is
d) Only static logos may be inserted during play. Animations or videos may be
installed, then the electronic review system must be used from the first day of quali-
inserted between points so long as static logos are featured as soon as play-
fying.
ers are ready to serve/receive.
e) Electronically inserted signage must be compliant with colour restrictions and
brightness of the LED boards at the supervisor’s discretion. 6.02 Match and Practice Courts
3) Spectator seating shall not have any white, gray, yellow or other light colors that A. Each tournament must provide match and practice courts as follows:
can interfere with the vision of the players. Light colored seats shall be covered to
comply with this rule. ATP Tour Masters 1000 9 match courts
96-draw (Combined) 8 practice courts (on-site)
F. Ceiling Height.
ATP Tour Masters 1000 6 match courts
1) ATP Events. Indoor or covered show courts shall have a minimum top height of 96-draw (Outdoors) 4 practice courts (on-site)
forty (40) feet (12.19 m.) except as otherwise approved by ATP.
ATP Tour Masters 1000 8 match courts
2) Challenger Events. Indoor or covered show courts shall have a minimum top 56-draw 8 practice courts (on-site)
height of thirty (30) feet (9.14 m. except as otherwise approved by ATP. (Outdoors and Combined)

G. On-Court Timing Devices. ATP Tour Masters 1000 3 match courts

56-draw (Indoors) 4 practice courts (minimum 1 on-site)
It is mandatory for all ATP Tour events (250-500-1000-United Cup-Nitto ATP Finals) ATP Tour 500 5 match courts
to provide electronic timing devices (“shot clocks”) on each match court from the first (Outdoors and Combined) 4 practice courts (minimum 3 on-site)
day of qualifying through the finals.

108 109
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
ATP Tour 500 (Outdoors) 3 match courts should be opened just prior to the match or ball change. In case of a suspended or
4 practice courts (minimum 3 on-site) postponed match, the match balls shall not be used in the warm-up, they shall only
be used when play resumes. Each tournament must provide approved tennis balls in
ATP Tour 500 (Indoors) 2 match courts accordance to the following:
4 practice courts (minimum 1 on-site)
1) ATP Tour Tournaments: Six (6) balls for each main draw and qualifying match to
ATP Tour 250 (Outdoors) 3 match courts be changed after seven (7) and nine (9) games throughout the tournament.
1 practice court for every 16 players in
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments: Six (6) balls, for each main draw and qual-
singles draw (minimum 2)
ifying match to be changed after seven (7) and nine (9) games for all matches.
ATP Tour 250 (Indoors) 2 match courts This will be mandatory for Challenger 50 and 75 events from 1 May 2024.
1 practice court for every 16 players in
singles draw (minimum 2) B. Lost Balls. Play must be continuous even if a ball needs to be replaced.
ATP Challenger Tour 3 match courts 1) ATP Tour Tournaments: If a ball is lost or becomes unplayable, then another
(Outdoors)* 1 practice court for every 16 players in shall be added as soon as it is reasonably possible. During the warm-up or within
singles draw (minimum 2) two (2) games (before first point is begun in the third game or if the first point has
ATP Challenger Tour (Indoors) 2 match courts to be replayed for any reason) after a change of ball, a new ball shall be used as
1 practice court for every 16 players in a replacement; otherwise a ball of like wear shall be supplied.
singles draw (minimum 2**) 3) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments: If a ball is lost or becomes unplayable and
All courts must be the same surface, color, speed and conditions. there are fewer than three (3) balls remaining, then another ball must be added
immediately for use in play. During the warm-up or within two (2) games (before
For combined events, the minimum number of match/practice courts must be first point is begun in the third game or if the first point has to be replayed for any
available exclusively to ATP. reason) after a change of balls, a new ball shall be used as a replacement; other-
* Minimum number of match/practice courts will be reviewed and approved on a wise a ball of like wear shall be supplied.
case by case basis. Factors considered when determining minimum number of
C. Practice Balls
courts include, but are not limited to, daylight hours, night sessions, number of
lighted courts meeting or exceeding minimum requirement. 1) ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP 500 Tournaments: Each main draw player is
** Existing indoor events where meeting the minimum requirement is not possible entitled to twelve (12) new balls per day for practice, free of charge, two (2) day
may appeal for a waiver. prior to the start of qualifying until that player is eliminated. Once eliminated, he
shall be entitled to six (6) new balls per day for practice. Tournaments should
B. All match and practice courts must be the same surface, speed and conditions as provide tennis ball baskets upon request. Players must return practice balls.
the main draw and must be available for practice from 9:00 A.M. on Friday prior to 2) ATP 250 Tournaments: Each main draw player is entitled to nine (9) new balls
the start of the tournament until the conclusion of the tournament. For outdoor tour- per day for practice, free of charge, two (2) day prior to the start of qualifying
naments the practice courts must be available for practice at a minimum of two (2) until that player is eliminated. Once eliminated, he shall be entitled to six (6) new
complete days prior to the start of the tournament. balls per day for practice. Tournaments should provide tennis ball baskets upon
request. Players must return practice balls.
For ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, practice courts to be available from 12:00
Noon on the Saturday preceding the start of the tournament (Friday, in case of Sun- 3) ATP Qualifying Competition: Players listed in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings
day to Saturday schedule). (singles/doubles) who are practicing for qualifying competition are enti- tled to six
(6) new balls per day for practice, free of charge, two (2) days prior to the start
C. Courts must be set up to provide normal support, including a practice desk, balls, of the qualifying competition until that player is eliminated. Players must return
drinks (bottled water), fruit, sawdust and towels. practice balls.
4) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments: Each main draw and qualifying player is
6.03 Balls entitled to three (3) new balls per day for practice (six (6) balls for Challenger 125
and 175 events), free of charge, from 12 Noon two (2) days prior to the start of the
Tennis balls used at ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments must be ap- event until that player is eliminated. Once eliminated, he shall be entitled to six (6)
proved by ATP a minimum of ninety (90) days prior to the start of the tournament. used balls per day for practice. Players must return practice balls
A. Changes and Number. .

Ball changes and the number of balls used per match shall be the same for all main D. Ball Logo. Tournaments may add an additional logo to the tournament ball under the
draw matches throughout the tournament unless authorized by the Supervisor. Balls following conditions.
110 111
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
1) The logo is no larger than the logo of the ball manufacturer, and 2) In cases where there is no clear break in the seating configuration, the Tourna-
ment Director and the Supervisor shall determine the most logical designation.
2) The logo is positioned on the side of the ball opposite the ball manufacturer logo.
Ball Change Error
6.05 Security at Tournaments
Case: A player serves a first service fault. He starts to serve the
second serve and the Chair Umpire realizes that there should be A. Each tournament has the responsibility to provide adequate security at the tourna-
new balls in play. ment site. Players have the responsibility to report any threat or unusual occurrence
Decision: The Chair Umpire should wait to change balls until that to the Tournament Director, Supervisor or Senior Vice President - Rules & Competi-
player or team is scheduled to serve (Rules of Tennis, “Rule 27”), tion when at a tournament.
unless a let is called resulting in the first point being replayed.
B. The continual use of laptop computers or other handheld electronic devices with-
New Balls to Wrong Player(s)
in the confines (spectator area) of the tournament match courts shall be prohibited
Case: The wrong player or team was given new balls with which to and each tournament shall take reasonable steps to enforce such prohibition. The
serve. exception to this provision is properly credentialed media, tournament vendors and
Decision: If the error is discovered after the first point, then the tournament staff when used in the performance of their duties.
team/player continues to serve with the new balls. The team/player
who should serve with new balls receives new balls to serve the
next game. Once a point has been played in the second game, the
6.06 Equipment & Supplies
ball change sequence shall remain as altered. In no case shall new A. Placement /Approval
balls be replaced by the old balls after a service game has started.
Re-Warm-Up, Balls The Supervisor must approve the placement of items or equipment on any court. The
Case: At the end of a game there is a twenty (20) minute rain Supervisor may remove or have removed any item (including advertising) that may
delay. A ball change was also to occur after that game. When play affect the safety of a player, official or ballperson.
is resumed, new balls will be in play. What balls are used for the
re-warm-up? B. Chairs
Decision: New balls should be used for the re-warm-up. At the end 1) Chair Umpire
of the warm-up, these balls will be taken away and replaced with
a) The sitting platform of the chair for the Chair Umpire must be between six (6)
new balls to resume the match.
feet (1.83 m.) and eight (8) feet (2.44 m.) high. The seating area should be
Broken Ball approximately two (2) feet (.61 m.) wide. The chair shall be centered along
Case: A ball in play breaks (no compression). the extension of the net approximately three (3) feet (.914 m.) from the net
Decision: Replay the point. post if the court configuration will accommodate such placement.
Soft Ball b) The Chair Umpire’s and on-court announcer’s, if any, microphone must have
Case: After the point has been completed, the player claims that the an “on-off” switch.
point should be replayed because the ball is soft and unplayable. c) Umbrellas are required if the sun is a factor.
Decision: The point stands as played. A “soft” ball is not cause for d) Each chair must have a writing platform as specified in “Exhibit W” or as oth-
replaying a point even if the Chair Umpire decides that the ball must erwise approved by ATP.
be replaced. e) At all outdoor events, the positioning of the umpire’s chair shall be on the
West side of the court on all courts except for competition court that had the
Case: During a rally, player A catches the ball and wants the point
umpire’s chair on the East side of the court in 2000 due to infrastructure or
re-played, claiming that the ball is “soft” and unfit for play.
other agreed unusual requirements.
Decision: Player A loses the point. A “soft” ball is not cause for 2) Line Umpire
replaying a point. The ball, however, may be taken out of play.
a) Each tournament shall provide chairs for service and base Line Umpires lo-
6.04 Crowd Movement / Spectator Seating cated on an extension of their respective lines along the side fence not closer
than twelve (12) feet (3.66 m.) from the doubles sideline. Chairs for sideline
A. Regulation and center service Line Umpires should be located next to the back of the
court at least twenty-one (21) feet (6.40 m.) behind the baseline. Service and
Each ATP Tour tournament shall allow spectators seated above the lowest tier of baseline umpire chairs should not be elevated above the surface of the court.
seats that surround the playing area of the courts to move to and from their seats at The seating area must be a minimum of two (2) feet (.61 m.)
any time during play. b) In outdoor events whenever the sun is a factor, Line Umpire chairs shall be
1) The Tournament Director and the Supervisor will make the designation of the positioned so that Line Umpires are not facing the sun unless otherwise ap-
lowest tier at each tournament.
112 113
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
proved by ATP. When the sun is not a factor, the chairs should be positioned umpire position or the corner of the courts. Each player/team should have their own
on the opposite side of the court from the Chair Umpire. bin/basket where they can place their towels. There should be identification to clearly
3) Net Judge show each player’s allocated bin/basket. There should be four (4) of these at each
end and each side of the court for a total of eight (8) on the court. This would be ap-
a) A sponsorship box, which surrounds the net judge chair, may not extend past
plicale for singles and doubles.
the net post into the court.
b) An approved electronic net device can replace the net judge.
I. Beverages.
4) Player
1) Players. Each tournament shall provide, in sealed containers, electrolyte re-
a) Each tournament shall provide chairs for the players located on each side
placement drinks, non-carbonated bottled water and other beverages for players
of the Chair Umpire. As a guide, the front portion of the player chair/bench
on-court, in the player’s lounges and on the practice courts.
should be no closer to the court than the back support/leg of the umpire’s
chair. 2) Officials. Each tournament shall provide bottled water and other beverages for
b) Umbrellas are required if the sun is a factor. Officials on match courts and in the official’s off-court area.
C. Measuring Devices
6.07 Temperature and Ventilation For Indoor Facilities
Each tournament shall provide a measuring stick, tape measure or other measuring
Indoor facilities must provide normal and standard heating, cooling and ventilation.
device for the measuring of the net height and location of the singles sticks.
The Supervisor may suspend play if, in his judgment, the conditions of play are unac-
ceptable for professional tennis.
D. Net
1) The net band shall be cloth, canvas or vinyl, and the net shall extend to the 6.08 Offices
ground, unless otherwise approved by the on-site Supervisor.
Each tournament shall provide suitable workspace/office for ATP staff and officials.
2) Each tournament shall have spare nets available.
3) There can be no commercial or manufacturer identification on the net except as 6.09 Communication Devices
approved by ATP.
Each tournament must provide communication devices to the Referee, Chief of Um-
Note: Each ATP Tour tournament will be provided with Official ATP Tour nets for a pires, and Physiotherapist(s) except if otherwise approved by ATP. In addition, the
minimum of four (4) years (number of nets provided will vary depending on tourna- following equipment is required to be on-site:
ment category). These nets should be used for the tournament matches and practice
during the tournament week only. Each tournament is responsible for properly storing A. Copy machine
the Official ATP Tour nets. Should damage caused by misuse, poor maintenance
or modification lead to the need to replace the net, the costs for the new net will be A copy machine should be provided in, or near, the Supervisor’s office. Copy ma-
tournament responsibility. chine should be available on the morning prior to the start of the qualifying competi-
tion.
E. Net Posts and Net Post Signage. The net posts shall conform to the specifications
in the Rules of Tennis, unless otherwise approved by ATP. No signage of any type B. Printer
may be placed on the net posts or net except as determined solely by ATP.
A printer shall be provided in the office of the Supervisor. Printer should be available
F. Sawdust. Each tournament shall provide sawdust for players on match and practice on the morning prior to the start of the qualifying competition and be available through
courts. the last match of the tournament.

G. Scoreboards. Each tournament must provide scoreboards for all courts to be placed C. Internet
at the corner or side of the courts. Placement and color of scoreboards shall not
interfere with a player’s vision. Always-on high speed Internet connection is to be provided in the offices of the ATP
Supervisor, ATP Tour Manager, ATP Physiotherapist, ATP scoring system specialist
H. Towels. Each tournament shall provide towels for players on match and practice and ATP PR unless otherwise approved by ATP. The required minimum upload and
courts and in the player’s locker room. Towels should be pre-washed and of sufficient download speeds allocated to ATP staff are 0.6 megabits per second (Mbs) for up-
size for the intended use. loads and 5 Mbs for downloads.

Each court shall be equipped with bins/baskets for the players to leave their towels Tournaments are recommended to use web filtering technology to restrict access to
during the match. This area should be located at the closest point for the player to be internet gambling sites in all areas where tournament provided access is provided.
able to use their towel without delay. The two designated areas are near the baseline
114 115
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
D. Live Scoring 4) Policies regarding access to amenities (food, transportation, etc.) for players after
they have been eliminated from the event shall be applied equally to both quali-
Each Tournament shall be responsible for the set up and maintenance of a network fying and main draw players.
based on specifications provided by ATP, to support live scoring services for each 5) In all cases, priority shall be given to players still competing in the event with re-
match* of the event and subject to 6.09 E, will assist ATP in its efforts to produce spect to access to facilities and amenities.
and host the live score data generated from each match. Each tournament hereby
consents to ATP’s non-exclusive use of such live score data and each Tournament 6) Player Support Team members must be in the company of a player who is accept-
shall not allow or authorize the dissemination, transmission, publication or release ed into the event.
from the grounds of the Tournament of any live match score or related statistical 7) ATP staff members and ATP Media staff members working on-site at an event
data, including without limitation the live score data from the network, by a third party shall be provided with a credential with appropriate access upon proper applica-
until :30 seconds after the actual occurrence of the incident of match play or action tion.
that leads to such live score update (e.g., a point being scored), such delay shall not
be applicable to the live audio and/ or visual broadcast or streaming by any method 8) All others must have applied in advance and been approved for a credential by
or means (i.e., moving pictures and/or sound/audio reporting of the actual on-court the tournament.
action) and purposes related to such broadcast, of any match (subject to “Exhibit C” 9) Special provisions for Combined Events.
– Broadcast Standards set forth herein). Further, each Tournament shall notify ATP
in advance of any third party to whom the Tournament has granted access for the a) Tour Guests. One credential for each “official” guest of ATP, provided that
purpose of accessing the live score data. such requests are reasonable, and access is limited as appropriate for secu-
rity.
*Tournaments using an alternate venue for main draw matches due to weather or b) Tour Sponsor. One (1) credential for a “Tour” sponsor.
other unforeseen circumstances are encouraged but not required to provide services c) Alumni. Tournaments may provide alumni players credentials at their discre-
to support live scoring. Tournaments are not required to provide live scoring support tion.
for qualifying matches played at an alternate venue. d) Tournament Members. Each tournament shall provide ATP Tournament Di-
rectors with on-site access.
E. Live Streaming C. Applicability. Tournaments must ensure that they have one single accreditation sys-
tem and policy in place to cover all third party credentials (including, without limita-
Each Challenger tournament shall be responsible for providing and bearing the cost tion, credentials for players, player support team members, ATP staff members, sup-
of a secure adequate office space within reasonable distance of the streamed com- pliers, contractors, media representatives (e.g. photographers, TV crew members,
petition courts. In addition, power, including but not limited to an uninterruptible power journalists and commentators), Tournament employees and spectators provided with
supply (UPS), shall be made available at no cost to the streaming production partner accreditation).
both in the office space and by the camera positions.
D. Accreditation Policy. Tournaments must base their accreditation policy on the stan-
6.10 Tournament Credentialing and Ticketing dard “ATP Accreditation Policy” as specified in “Exhibit AC” to create their “Tourna-
ment Accreditation Policy”.
A. ATP Membership Card. A 2024 ATP Membership Card shall be honored at all ATP
Tour and ATP Challenger Tour events and will permit the holder entry to the tourna- E. Application. All persons applying for credentials must have applied in advance and
ment office (or such other location as directed by a Tournament or ATP) in order to been approved by the Tournament for a credential for the relevant Tournament. Once
receive the appropriate credential. approved, all persons must sign an “Accreditation Acceptance Form” as provided by
the tournament. Tournaments must ensure that the Accreditation Acceptance Form
B. General. The following general rules apply with respect to credentialing: is available in hard copy at the Tournament site, as well as online for those persons
1) Players must be accepted into the event to be eligible for a credential. applying for credentials through an online system.

2) Issued player credential badges shall not distinguish between qualifying players F. Proof of Identity. As part of the accreditation process, Tournaments must require
and main draw players (for example: qualifying players should not be issued a “Q” proof of identity for all persons prior to issuing credentials; this must be through photo
badge while main draw players are issued a “P” badge; all players must be issued identification such as passport, national ID card or driving license and may be provid-
the same category/type of badge). ed in hard copy at the Tournament site or via upload when completing the Accredita-
3) Policies regarding access to practice facilities and locker room for players after tion Acceptance Form online.
they have been eliminated from the event shall be applied equally to both quali-
fying and main draw players. G. Tournament Credentials. All persons who have successfully applied for accred-
itation and have signed the Accreditation Acceptance Form shall be issued with a
physical credential pass by the Tournament. Tournaments must ensure that such
pass must include, without limitation: (i) photo identification (as per Section F above);
116 117
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
(ii) the name of the accreditee; (iii) a summary of the material points contained in in designated areas and other benefits as determined by individual tournaments and
the Tournament Accreditation Policy (including, as a minimum and without limitation, shall be valid as long as the player remains at the tournament. Player guest passes/
that, unless approved in advance in writing by the ATP, the accreditee may not: (a) credentials shall not allow access to the player locker room or the Physiotherapist
continually collect, disseminate, transmit, publish or release from the grounds of the room. All other access is at the sole discretion of the tournament. Passes/credentials
Tournament any match scores or related statistical data during match play (from can be revoked at any time based on recommendation of the Supervisor to the Tour-
the commencement of a match through its conclusion) for any commercial, betting nament Director.
or gambling purpose; and (b) film, photograph, broadcast, stream, publish, transmit
and/or otherwise offer to the public (or assist any third party in offering to the public), Credentials provided to the player may not be exchanged, directly or indirectly, for
on a live or on a delayed basis, in whole or in part, and whether on a free basis or money, benefit or anything of value. Violation of this section shall subject the player
subject to payment, any sound recording, photograph, video footage, motion picture, to the penalties set forth under the Player Major Offense – Aggravated Behavior.
film and/or other audio-visual content captured by any means whatsoever inside the
Tournament site (except as is allowed in the Tournament Accreditation Policy)); (iv) a Receipt by any person of guest passes/credentials or any other benefits or special
web address where the Tournament Accreditation Policy can be found; (v) an Stan- accommodations are expressly subject to the “Limits to On-Site Access” set forth in
dardized Accreditation Policy Proposal acknowledgement agreeing to abide by the the Rulebook.
rules of the Tennis Anti-Corruption Program and for players, the Tennis Anti-Doping
Program (as amended from time to time); and (vi) an acknowledgement that the ac- Combined Events.
creditation may be revoked at any time.
A. Players. Players shall receive two (2) tickets per day while they are still competing.
H. Ticketing. Tournaments must take reasonable steps to enforce the material points For ticketed matches, a player box with a minimum of six (6) seats shall be provided
of the ATP Accreditation Policy as would apply to ticket holders. Tournaments must for that players’ match only. The boxes should be equally located at opposite ends of
ensure that appropriate wording is contained on all tickets provided to ticket holders the court.
including, without limitation: (i) a summary, or clear notice directing to a webpage,
with the material points contained in the Tournament Accreditation Policy as they B. Staff. Each Tournament must provide the ATP and WTA each three (3) seats close to
apply to ticket holders (including, as a minimum and without limitation, that, unless the entrance of and with easy access to the court during all matches for the following
approved in advance in writing by the ATP, the ticket holder may not: (a) continually ATP/WTA staff members: (i) Supervisor; (ii) Physiotherapist / PHCP; and (iii) Tour
collect, disseminate, transmit, publish or release from the grounds of the Tournament Manager / PR representative.
any match scores or related statistical data during match play (from the commence-
ment of a match through its conclusion) for any commercial, betting or gambling pur- 6.12 ATP Family Lounge and ATP Player Lounge
pose; and (b) film, photograph, broadcast, stream, publish, transmit and/or otherwise
offer to the public (or assist any third party in offering to the public), on a live or on a General. The ATP Family Lounge and ATP Player Lounge (each as defined below)
delayed basis, in whole or in part, and whether on a free basis or subject to payment, should be secure with only persons with proper access allowed to enter.
any sound recording, photograph, video footage, motion picture, film and/or other
audio-visual content captured by any means whatsoever inside the Tournament site Tournaments are recommended to use web filtering technology to restrict access to
(except as is allowed in the Tournament Accreditation Policy)); (ii) a web address internet gambling sites in all areas where tournament provided access is provided.
where the Tournament Accreditation Policy can be found; and (iii) a notice that the
Receipt by any person of guest passes/credentials or any other benefits or special
continual use of laptop computers or other handheld electronic devices within the
accommodations are expressly subject to the “Limits to On-Site Access” set forth in
spectator area of the Tournament match courts shall be prohibited.
the Rulebook.
I. Laptops and Communication Devices.The continual use of laptop computers or
ATP Family Lounge. ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall provide
other handheld electronic devices within the confines (spectator area) of the tourna-
a suitable space appropriately equipped for the players, their PST members and their
ment match courts shall be prohibited and each tournament shall take reasonable
properly credentialed guests (“ATP Family Lounge”). Tier 1 Player agents will not
steps to enforce such prohibition. The exception to this provision is properly cre-
count towards the number of PST members allowed and will be granted access to
dentialed media, tournament vendors and tournament staff when used in the perfor-
the ATP Family Lounge.
mance of their duties.
ATP Masters 1000 Family Lounge. ATP Masters 1000 tournaments shall provide (i)
6.11 Player Benefits - Guest Passes/Credentials/Tickets complimentary snacks and drinks for players and two (2) PST members per player,
and (ii) offer high-speed internet, high-quality coffee, snacks, drinks, juice, smoothie
A player entered in ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall be issued
stations, TVs, and games.
a reasonable number (a minimum of two) guest passes/credentials for his use while
competing in the event. Guest passes / credentials shall be issued only after the play-
ATP 500 Family Lounge. ATP 500 tournaments shall provide complimentary high-
er guest has provided proof of identity (photo I.D.) and has completed and signed the
speed internet, high-quality coffee, snacks, drinks, juice, and smoothie stations.
player guest form. These guest passes/credentials include access to the site, seating
118 119
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
ATP 250 Family Lounge. ATP 250 tournaments shall provide for players and two (2) In addition to the on-site required gym, all ATP Tour tournaments shall provide a sep-
PST members per player complimentary internet, coffee, snacks, and smoothies. arate on-site area for player warm-up, light sprints, and movement drills.

ATP Masters 1000 Tournaments Player Lounge. In addition to the ATP Family B. ATP Challenger Tour events. A fully equipped gym (as specified in the Standards
Lounge, ATP Masters 1000 tournaments shall also provide a separate quiet room and Best Practices section on ATP Tournament Centre), of adequate size must be
(“ATP Tour Player Lounge”) with access for the players and one (1) PST member per provided free of charge on-site, off-site at a reasonable distance from the tournament
player. site/official hotel or at the official tournament hotel with the following exception:

6.13 Locker Room Challenger 50 events may petition ATP to waive the fully equipped gym requirement
if they are not reasonably able to provide it.
A. General. Each tournament shall provide players with a suitably equipped and secure
locker room. The entrance to the locker room shall be monitored and only properly Each Challenger tournament regardless of category must provide an area on-site to
credentialed persons shall be allowed to enter. Only those persons with access ap- be used for warm up/cool down, with equipment for this purpose as specified in the
proval and properly credentialed tournament staff, who in the performance of their Standards and Best Practices section on ATP Tournament Centre if fully equipped
duties justify access to the locker room, shall be authorized to enter the locker room. gym is not available on-site
ATP Tour Tournaments are required to provide shower gel and shampoo in the player
locker rooms free of charge. 6.15 Laundry Service
ATP Masters 1000, 500 and 250 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide a A. ATP Masters 1000 and ATP 500 Tournaments. A complimentary laundry service of
small seating area for players inside the locker room with a minimum size require- a high standard must be made available to the players, coaches and ATP/tournament
ment as determined by ATP dependent on the size of the facility. personnel starting two (2) days prior to the start of qualifying throughout the length of
the event, while still competing or working at the event.
B. It is recommended that tournaments located where extreme weather conditions
exist provide a submersion bath (ice bath) in or near the shower area. For combined B. ATP 250 Tournaments. A complimentary wash and fold laundry service of a good
events, if a submersion bath is provided, it must be provided in both male and female quality must be made available to the players starting two (2) days prior to the start
locker/shower areas. of qualifying throughout the length of the event, while still competing.

C. Lockers 6.16 Stringing Service

a) A lockable locker must be available for use by each player.
A. General. A stringing service of a high professional standard must be made available
b) If the locker requires a separate lock, then this must be provided to each
to the players starting two (2) days prior to the start of qualifying throughout the length
player upon arrival.
of the event. The machines used for stringing must be an electronic model of the
c) If the lockers do not have the ability to be locked; or cannot be locked in a
same brand selected by each tournament.
manner that provides reasonable safety, then:
i) The tournament must provide separate lock boxes where a player may
B. Days / Hours of Service.
secure his valuables; or
ii) Another method whereas a player may secure his valuables with reason- 1) At a minimum, stringing service must be available beginning the day prior to the
able expectations of safety must be provided. start of the qualifying competition and continue through the last day of the compe-
d) For ATP Masters 1000 and 500 tournaments, personal lockers should be able tition, including any carry-over days due to weather or other unavoidable circum-
to fit a racket bag inside. stances.

6.14 The Gymnasium (“Gym”) 2) At a minimum, must be on-site two (2) hours prior to the starting time for the first
scheduled match of the day. Must be available continually throughout the day and
All ATP Tour events are required to provide a gym as follows:
until the completion of play for that day. For combined events, and recommended
for non-combined events, stringing service must be available until thirty (30) min-
A. All ATP Tour events. A fully equipped gym of adequate size must be provided, free
utes after the conclusion of the last match.
of charge, on-site as specified in the Standards and Best Practices section on ATP
Tournament Centre. 3) If play is scheduled at an approved alternate site, then access to the stringing
service must be provided at such alternate site from the start of play until play has
In addition to the on-site required gym, ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments shall been completed at that site.
provide: (i) an additional professional quality level gym (off-site location acceptable
in order to provide the requested quality) and (ii) a separate on-site area for player
warm-up, light sprints, and movement drills.

120 121
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
C. Fees. B. Safety
1) ATP Tour Events. The recommended maximum fee per racquet is $20 USD / 1) All bottled water and electrolyte drinks must be served in unopened sealed con-
€20 and is the responsibility of the stringing service to collect from the player. tainers.
2) ATP Challenger Tour Events. The recommended maximum fee per racquet is 2) All food and beverages must be properly stored and maintained at an appropriate
$12 USD / €12 and is the responsibility of the stringing service to collect from the temperature, which complies with local health regulations.
player.
C. Combined Events
6.17 Food 1) Working Staff. Food is to be provided free of charge to all working staff. Visiting
staff are not included.
General. Each tournament must provide a variety of suitable and of high-quality food
for the competitors on-site or, as approved by ATP, within reasonable distance of
the tournament venue. Food service for ATP 250 and Challenger Tour tournaments 6.18 On-Site Access / Limits to On-Site Access
should begin no later than the day before the start of the qualifying and continue until The ATP CEO, or his designee, may, in his sole discretion, instruct any ATP Tour or
the completion of the tournament. ATP Challenger Tour tournament to prohibit any person from obtaining access to any
areas at a tournament site that are not generally open or available to all members of
Type of food offered shall be subject to local health and safety regulations.
the public or from utilizing tournament transportation. The ATP CEO, or his designee
may so act for any reason, including without limitation, any concern that the ATP
After a player permanently leaves the event, guest passes/credentials and asso-
CEO, or his designee may have, in his sole discretion, that such person may pose
ciated benefits shall be automatically revoked for PST members, unless otherwise
any issue with respect to security, reputation, integrity, misconduct, or competition.
decided by the tournament.

Please refer to "Exhibit Q" and to the Standards and Best Practices section on ATP 6.19 Transportation
Tournament Centre for minimum Player Food Service Guidelines.
General. Each tournament must provide scheduled transportation for players (main
draw and qualifying), credentialed Player Support Team (“PST”) members, officials
ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP 500 Tournaments*. Each tournament shall pro-
and ATP staff that ensures players arrive on-site at least “on the hour”. Transportation
vide complimentary food service available for each player and two (2) PST members
vehicles shall be clean, safe, and of a good quality. Child seats shall be available
for the same number of days as the player’s hospitality through direct allocation on
upon request.
the individual credential or allowance on the player credential. Tournaments are en-
couraged to provide complimentary food for additional PST members.
ATP Tour Tournaments. The scheduled transportation must meet ATP quality stan-
dards and be available from 7AM local time (with advanced booking required for
The complimentary food service shall offer fresh, high-quality hot and cold food op-
the 7AM local time) through to one hour after the last match/practice session. As a
tions with a combination of made to order and buffet food, variety of proteins including
guideline, airport transportation should be available, at a minimum, between 7AM
vegan protein (tofu or tempeh), carbs, salads, fruit and smoothies.
and 10PM local time. PST airport transportation will depend on availability if arriving
ATP 250 Tournaments*. Each tournament shall provide complimentary food service separately from the player. Airport and hotel-site-hotel transportation shall begin two
available for each player and two (2) PST members. (2) days prior to the start of the qualifying competition through the morning following
the final day of the tournament.
*ATP Tour events are required to provide complimentary adequate breakfast for the
occupants of the players’ room at the hotel. Combined Events and Challenger 175. Each Tournament shall provide airport
transportation beginning two (2) days before the Qualifying Sign-In Deadline (provid-
Challenger 125 and 175 Tournaments. Challenger 125 and 175 events shall pro- ed that 24-hour notice is given to the Tournament) until the morning following the final
vide a minimum of one (1) complimentary meal per day (lunch or dinner in addition day of the Tournament to:
to breakfast at the hotel) to each player from the starting day of the draw in which
he is accepted until the day of the player’s last match in the tournament (singles or • All Qualifying and Main Draw players;
doubles).
• PST members when traveling with a player; and
A. Hours of Service.
• ATP and WTA staff working at the Tournament.
At a minimum, from one (1) hour prior to the start of play through a period after the
completion of the last match.

122 123
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
6.20 Physiotherapist/Treatment Room 6.21 Automated External Defibrillator (“AED”)
ATP Tour & ATP Challenger Tour An Automated External Defibrillator (“AED”) must be provided in the Physiotherapist/
treatment room. In addition, AEDs must be located around the site so that an AED is
A. General. Each tournament must provide a Physiotherapist/treatment room for play- within 2-3 minutes from all areas of play.
ers and physiotherapists centrally located to the courts and the locker room. If the
Physiotherapist/treatment room is located in an area separate from the locker room, For ATP Challenger Tour events it is mandatory for an AED to be located in the Phys-
proper security at the entry point must be provided. Only those persons with ap- iotherapist/treatment room and it is highly recommended that a sufficient number of
proved access and properly credentialed tournament staff, who in the performance AEDs are located around the site so that an AED is 2-3 minutes from all areas of play
of their duties justify access to the locker room, shall be authorized to enter the Phys-
iotherapist/treatment room. The room must be private and equipped with ice and ice 6.22 First Aid
chests/coolers, towels and electricity. This room must be fully functional by 8:00 am
the day prior to the start of qualifying. (For ATP Masters 1000 events three (3) days Each tournament must provide a First Aid Team present at all times on the tourna-
before qualifying starts). Please refer to the Standards and Best Practices section on ment site for public emergencies. The First Aid Team must be separate from the
ATP Tournament Centre for full medical facility guidelines. medical team responsible for the care and treatment of the players.

B. High/Low Treatment/Massage Table. 6.23 Emergency Action Plan

1) ATP Tour. Two (2) high/low tables for a 28 or 32 draw event and additional high/ Each ATP Tour Tournament shall submit an emergency action plan to the ATP Medi-
low tables for larger draws, as determined by ATP Medical Services. cal Services for review at least sixty (60) days prior to the start of the tournament.
2) ATP Challenger Tour. Challenger 125 and 175 events are required to have two
(2) electric or hydraulic high/low treatment tables in the physiotherapist’s room, 6.24 Anti-Doping Facilities and On-Site Personnel Assistance
whereas Challenger 100 events are required to have one (1) electric or hydraulic
high/low table in the physiotherapist room with a recommendation to have two (2) A. On-Site Testing Facility
electric or hydraulic high/low tables. A minimum of one (1), but preferably two (2) 1) Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament, when requested, is obligat-
high/low table(s) is recommended for all other Challenger levels. ed to provide at its own cost the following facilities:
C. Recovery Equipment and Facilities. a) A lockable private room with bathroom and an adjacent waiting room; or, at
the discretion of the Anti-Doping Personnel,
1) ATP Masters 1000 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide: (i) high-quality b) An alternative on-site location with a suitable trailer.
(selected in consultation with ATP Medical Services) recovery modalities (e.g., 2) In addition, the tournament is required to provide at its own cost appropriate furni-
compression devices and ice bath). ture, bottled water, fruit and television or court monitoring systems for the testing
2) ATP 500 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide: (i) high-quality dedicated facility as well as staff assistance for site set-up and facility maintenance during
ice bath and recovery modalities (selected in consultation with ATP Medical Ser- the tournament.
vices).
B. Volunteer Observers Provided by Tournament.
3) ATP 250 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide: (i) high-quality ice bath,
selected in consultation with ATP Medical Services. Each tournament must provide at its own cost male staff members and/or volunteers
Please refer to the Standards and Best Practices section on ATP Tournament who can assist the Official Anti-Doping Personnel and Supervisor with the observa-
Centre for full recovery and equipment facilities guidelines. tion of players selected for testing. The Official Anti-Doping Personnel shall notify a
tournament of the number of personnel required no later than three (3) weeks prior to
D. Private Physiotheraplist Facilities. the start of an event.
1) ATP Masters 1000 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide separate area See “Exhibit U” for full Anti-Doping Facilities Guidelines.
with treatment tables (recommendation – 4 for 48-draw; 5 for 56-draw; 6 for 64-
draw; and 9 for 96-draw).
6.25 Media Facilities Guidelines
2) ATP 500 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide separate area with treat-
ment tables (recommendation – 3 for 32-draw and 4 for 48-draw). A. General

3) ATP 250 Tournaments. Each tournament shall provide separate private physio- All ATP Tour tournaments and the Nitto ATP Finals should provide adequate media
therapist area with appropriate number of treatment tables. facilities. All media areas shall be gambling free zones and any and all persons cre-
dentialed for this area, if found to be gambling on tennis or passing insider informa-
tion to third parties for use in connection with gambling, shall have their credentials
124 125
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS
revoked. Media credentials must contain a provision whereby the media member E. TV Studios. ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournament shall provide the following number
acknowledges and agrees that, except as allowed pursuant to Rule 6.09 E, he/she of TV studios: (i) 96-draw – 3, and (ii) 56-draw and 48-draw: 2.
will not disseminate, transmit, publish or release from the grounds of the Tournament
any live match score or related live statistical data until :30 seconds after the actual F. Stars Program. ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments must provide a dedicated per-
occurrence of the incident of match play or action that leads to such live score update son to help implement the Stars Program.
(e.g., a point being scored), and that such use shall be solely for news reporting and
editorial use.
6.26 Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines
B. Media Work Room The use of an approved electronic system for reviewing line calls and/or overrules is
1) Location. The media work room should be located as near as possible to the authorized for use at ATP events.
player locker room (and for ATP Masters 1000 and ATP 500 tournaments near
the ATP Family Lounge). See “Exhibit T - Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines” and “Exhibit T1 - ELC
Review Official Protocol” for full Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines and Pro-
2) Security. Media work room must be secured with access provided only to properly tocol.
credentialed media, players and other tournament and ATP Staff when in the
performance of their duties.
3) Specifications. Requirements / recommendations for the media work room can
be found in “Exhibit R - Media Facilities Guidelines”.

C. Player Interview Rooms

1) Location. Should be located near both the player locker room and the media
work room.
2) Specifications.
a) Must be “smoke free”.
b) Sound proof
c) Interview room must be secured with access provided only to properly cre-
dentialed media, players and other tournament and ATP Staff when in the
performance of their duties.
d) Interview backdrop shall comply with all branding requirements of ATP.
e) Space to be provided for journalists, photographers and television personnel.
3) Small Interview Rooms. ATP Masters 1000 and ATP 500 tournaments shall pro-
vide the following number of small private interview rooms: (i) 96-draw: 3, and (ii)
56-draw and 48-draw: 2.
4) Transcripts. ATP Masters 1000 and ATP 500 tournaments shall provide tran-
scripts for all interviews.

D. Mixed Zone
1) Location. The Mixed Zone shall be in a suitable location, as determined by ATP,
on the player route as close as possible to the player locker room and media work
room.
2) Branding. The Mixed Zone shall be branded as stated under the rules for Media
Backdrop (“Exhibit A.11”).

Tournaments are recommended to use web filtering technology to restrict access to

internet gambling sites in all areas where tournament provided access is provided.

See “EXHIBIT R” for full Media Facilities Guidelines.

126 127
VI. FACILITIES & ON-SITE CONDITIONS VII. THE COMPETITION
7.01 ATP Fees
A. Entry Fees
1) ATP Tour Tournaments. There are no entry fees.
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. There are no entry fees.

B. Service Fee
1) Players who are included in the main draw or qualifying (singles or doubles) of
any ATP Tour tournament and who are not members in good standing with ATP
must pay the following service fee to ATP:

ATP Tour Masters 1000 Main Draw $400/€400 event Qualifying $100/€100
United Cup $350
ATP Tour 500 Main Draw $300/€300 event Qualifying $100/€100
ATP Tour 250 Main Draw $200/€200 event Qualifying $100/€100

2) The Tour Manager will identify players who must pay a service fee that will be
withheld from on-site prize money. Players who by virtue of their ranking position
are not eligible for an ATP player membership may use these payments as a
credit toward future membership fees. Service fees paid to ATP may only be
applied against membership dues in the calendar year in which they were paid.

C. Membership Fees
Membership fees are defined in the ATP By-Laws.

7.02 Entries
A. Gender / Age Limitation

ATP will use the age of a player on the first (1st) day of the qualifying competition.
Male players age sixteen (16) or older are not limited in the number of tournaments
they may enter. Players under the age of sixteen (16) are subject to the following
entry restrictions in ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments (includes entry as
a wildcard):
1) Male players under the age of fourteen (14) shall not be eligible for entry into any
ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament.
2) Male players aged fourteen (14) shall be eligible for entry into a maximum of
eight (8) ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments.
3) Male players aged fifteen (15) shall be eligible for entry into a maximum of twelve
(12) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments.
4) Transgender Athlete Participation. A trans male (FTM) athlete who has re-
ceived a medical exception for treatment with testosterone* for diagnosed Gen-
der Identity Disorder or gender dysphoria and/or Transsexualism, for purposes
of competition may compete on the ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour. A trans
male (FTM) athlete who is not taking testosterone related to gender transition
may also participate in ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour events.
*Must have a valid TUE from the Tennis Anti-Doping Program.

128 129
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
7.03 Entry Deadlines NOTE: For ATP Tour qualifying tournaments, withdrawals occurring after 10 AM
Eastern Time USA and prior to the draw* will be filled from that night’s alternate
A. Main Draw/Qualifying Singles sign-in. Vacancies occurring after the release of the qualifying draw, will be filled
from the next day’s on-site alternate list. Players must personally sign-in to be
The deadline for entries and withdrawals for the singles main draw is as follows: eligible as an on-site alternate.
1) ATP Tour Tournaments. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, twenty-eight (28) days * For events in a time zone where the qualifying draw is made prior to 10 AM Friday,
prior to the Monday of the tournament week (or the first tournament week in the Eastern USA, vacancies occurring after the Qualifying Alternate sign-in deadline
case of tournaments scheduled for more than one (1) week). A player on the alter- but prior to the qualifying draw shall be filled from that night’s alternate sign-in.
nate list for the singles main draw may withdraw at any time prior to such time that
May I Accept a Wild Card after Withdrawing from an ATP Tour
he is moved into the main draw as a direct acceptance because of withdrawals of
Qualifying?
other players. A player who moves in from the alternate list will be considered a
Direct Acceptance from Thursday, 10 AM Eastern Time, USA. Case: A player was still competing in a Challenger on the day
before Qs started at an ATP Tour event. He wanted to withdraw
2) ATP Tour Qualifying. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, twenty-one (21) days prior from the Qs due to “still competing” and then take a wild card into a
to the first Monday of the tournament week. A player on the Alternate List for the Challenger event. Is this allowed?
singles qualifying may withdraw at any time prior to such time that he is moved Decision: Yes. The rule states that he may withdraw without
into the qualifying as a Direct Acceptance from Thursday, 10 AM Eastern Time, penalty from the qualifying if he is still competing on the day prior
USA. A player directly accepted into the qualifying competition may withdraw, to the commencement of the qualifying. By withdrawing due to“still
without penalty, if he is moved into the main draw, or accepts a wild card into an competing”, he is allowed to accept a wild card.
ATP Tour 250 or ATP Tour 500 tournament, or if he is still competing in an ATP
Case: Can a player who is still competing the previous week on
Tour, ATP Challenger Tour, or ITF Men’s WTT tournament at any time on the day
Thursday or Friday (on the same continent*), or on Wednesday (on
prior to the commencement of qualifying or two days prior if competing on another
a different continent*) be signed in over the phone as a Qualifying
continent. Once a player has lost his match in the preceding week’s tournament,
Alternate for the following week’s event (Saturday Qualifying start)?
he must confirm to the Supervisor or Player Relations staff no later than one (1)
hour following the completion of the match if he will compete in the following Decision: Yes, a player who is still competing the previous week on
week’s Qualifying or will withdraw with “still competing”, except for those players Thursday or Friday (on the same continent*), or on Wednesday (on
who have decided to remain on the qualifying list as outlined below. a different continent*) can be signed in by the Supervisor over the
phone if he has lost before the Qualifying Alternate sign-in dead-
If a player is still competing past the qualifying sign in deadline, he may choose to line. Players who lose after the release of the qualifying draw must
remain on the qualifying list of the following week’s tournament if the player can personally sign-in on-site the next day to be eligible as an on-site
reasonably travel and arrive on time to compete at the qualifying event as deter- alternate.
mined by the supervisor. For the avoidance of doubt, the Supervisor should use *Continents are: Europe, Asia, Antarctica, Australia, Africa, North
great discretion when making such determination. Unless clearly impossible to America (including Central America) and South America.
arrive on-time for the next week’s tournament, players should be given the benefit
Case: If a player is competing in an event (including Davis Cup)
of the doubt. If he chooses to remain on the qualifying list and loses at the current
that finishes on the day of the Qualifying Alternate sign-in for the fol-
event after the qualifying draw is made (and did not withdraw himself before the
lowing week’s event, can he be signed in as a Qualifying Alternate,
qualifying alternate sign in deadline) he is committed to play the qualifying and
even though he may be competing past the Qualifying Alternate
will be subject to applicable late withdrawal penalties if he withdraws. Players
sign-in deadline?
who are still competing past 9:00 p.m. local time and who cannot reasonably
attend the following week’s event due to the location of the current event where Decision: Yes. Since the event finishes on the day of the Qualifying
they are still competing or who choose not to remain on the qualifying list will be sign-in deadline, the player may be signed in as a Qualifying Alter-
automatically withdrawn from the qualifying at this time. Players who withdraw nate for the following week’s event.
or are withdrawn due to “still competing” will be allowed to accept a wild card or From Q to Main Draw of another event
enter doubles into any ATP Tour 250, ATP Tour 500, ATP Challenger Tour or ITF Case: May a player who is a direct acceptance to an ATP Tour
Men’s WTT tournament, including qualifying. If a withdrawal occurs prior to 10 qualifying event be withdrawn to move into the main draw of an ATP
AM, Eastern Time, USA, on Friday, the qualifying vacancy shall be filled by the Tour 250 or ATP Tour 500 event as a Direct Acceptance or Wild
next player on the qualifying alternate list. This player is not required to sign in. If Card which is held in the same week?
a withdrawal occurs after 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, on Friday, the qualifying va- Decision: Yes, as long as the first ball of the qualifying at the tour-
cancy will be filled from the on-site sign-in list, using the most recent Pepperstone nament where he is in the qualifying draw has not been struck.
ATP Rankings list. Main draw vacancies will be filled from the main draw alternate
Case: May a player withdraw BDA from the main draw alternate list
list, not the qualifying acceptance list.
of an ATP Tour Event and remain on and/or play the Qualifying of
the same event?

130 131
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: Yes, unless he would have moved into the main draw of NOTE: In order to preserve his eligibility on the Acceptance List, the player must
that event, had he not withdrawn. A player may not turn down this email the ATP Supervisor directly prior to 6PM local time on the day before quali-
main draw position to play the qualifying of that event. fying starts (email listed on detail sheet) and personally inform the Supervisor that
Case: May a player who is accepted to play qualifying in an ATP he wishes to preserve his position on the Acceptance List and the player must
Challenger Tour Tournament, ATP Tour 250 or ATP Tour 500 be leave a contact number. The player should ask for confirmation that the Super-
withdrawn to move into the main draw singles of an ATP Tour 250 or visor has received the email in a timely manner. A player can only preserve his
ATP Tour 500 event as a Direct Acceptance or as a Wild Card which eligibility on one list.
is held the same week? 4) ATP Challenger Tour Qualifying.
Decision: Yes, as long as the first ball of the qualifying at the tour-
nament where he is in the qualifying draw has not been struck. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, on Wednesday, nineteen (19) days prior to the first
Monday of the tournament week for ATP Challenger Tour. A player on the Alter-
Withdrawing from Qualifying to play Main Draw Doubles at
nate List for the singles qualifying may withdraw at any time prior to such time that
another event.
he is moved into the qualifying as a Direct Acceptance because of withdrawals
Case: May a player who is direct acceptance in the singles qualify- of other players. A player who moves in from the alternate list will be considered
ing event of an ATP Challenger, ATP Tour 250 or ATP Tour 500 enter a Direct Acceptance from Thursday, 10 AM Eastern Time, USA. A player directly
through the Advance Entry system and become a direct acceptance accepted into the qualifying competition may withdraw, without penalty, if he is
into the main draw doubles of another ATP Tour 250 or ATP Tour moved into the main draw, or accepts a wild card into a Challenger, ATP Tour
500 event which is held the same week? 250 or ATP Tour 500 tournament, or if he is still competing in an ATP Tour, ATP
Decision: No. Once a player enters and is accepted into the Challenger Tour, or ITF Men’s WTT tournament at any time on the day prior to the
Qualifying of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour Tournament, he is commencement of qualifying or two days prior if competing on another continent.
committed to that tournament unless he moves into the main draw Once a player has lost his match in the preceding week’s tournament, he must
singles of another ATP Tour event. However, a player who com- confirm to the Supervisor or Player Relations staff no later than one (1) hour
petes and loses in the singles qualifying competition may enter the following the completion of the match if he will compete in the following week’s
doubles event of any tournament, provided he has lost prior to the Qualifying or will withdraw with “still competing”, except for those players who
respective tournament’s on-site doubles sign-in deadline. have decided to remain on the qualifying list as outlined below.
Withdrawing from Qualifying to play Main Draw Doubles at the
If a player is still competing past the qualifying sign in deadline, he may choose to
same event.
remain on the qualifying list of the following week’s tournament if the player can
Case: May a player who is included in the singles qualifying event reasonably travel and arrive on time to compete at the qualifying event as deter-
of an ATP Challenger Tour Tournament, ATP Tour 250 or ATP Tour mined by the supervisor. For the avoidance of doubt, the Supervisor should use
500 and is forced to withdraw, be allowed to come back and play great discretion when making such determination. Unless clearly impossible to
doubles at the same event? arrive on-time for the next week’s tournament, players should be given the benefit
Decision: Yes of the doubt. If he chooses to remain on the qualifying list and loses at the current
3) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, twenty-one event after the qualifying draw is made (and did not withdraw himself before the
(21) days prior to the Monday of the tournament week. A player on the Alternate qualifying alternate sign in deadline) he is committed to play the qualifying and
List for the singles main draw may withdraw at any time prior to such time that he will be subject to applicable late withdrawal penalties if he withdraws. Players
is moved into the main draw as a direct acceptance because of withdrawals of who are still competing past 9:00 p.m. local time and who cannot reasonably
other players. A player who moves in from the alternate list will be considered a attend the following week’s event due to the location of the current event where
Direct Acceptance from Thursday, 10 AM Eastern Time, USA. they are still competing or who choose not to remain on the qualifying list will be
automatically withdrawn from the qualifying at this time. Players who withdraw
If a withdrawal/vacancy occurs after the withdrawal deadline and prior to the start
or are withdrawn due to “still competing” will be allowed to accept a wild card or
of Qualifying, the vacancy will be filled in ranking order from the original main draw
enter doubles into any ATP Tour 250, ATP Tour 500, ATP Challenger Tour or ITF
Acceptance List by players who have preserved their position on the list. Players
Men’s WTT tournament, including qualifying. If a withdrawal occurs prior to 10
from the main draw alternate list who are directly accepted into the qualifying, are
AM, Eastern Time, USA, on Friday, the qualifying vacancy shall be filled by the
considered to have preserved their eligibility. A player can only preserve his eligi-
next player on the qualifying alternate list. This player is not required to sign in. If
bility on one list. If there are no alternates from the original main draw acceptance
a withdrawal occurs after 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, on Friday, the qualifying va-
list who have preserved eligibility, the vacancy will be filled by the highest ranked
cancy will be filled from the on-site sign-in list, using the most recent Pepperstone
player from the qualifying or alternate list using the Pepperstone ATP Rankings,
ATP Rankings list. Main draw vacancies will be filled from the main draw alternate
and then Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for seeding.
list, not the qualifying acceptance list.
After the start of the qualifying, any vacancy will come from the Lucky Loser/ Al-
NOTE: For the purposes of this rule, the Continents are: Europe, Asia, Antarctica,
ternate list. The Alternates will be placed below the players who lost in qualifying
Australia, Africa, North America (including Central America) and South America.
and shall be ordered based upon their position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings,
and then the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for seeding.
132 133
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Time. The ATP Challenger Alternate Sign-in shall begin no later than 4 p.m. and made within this defined time period, then the next player on the accep-
close at 6 p.m. local time on the day prior to the start of the qualifying competition. tance list shall be moved into the main draw.
There shall also be an Alternate sign-in on the day of first round qualifying play, b) The tournament shall pay prize money equal to that paid first-round losers
this deadline is one-half hour prior to the first scheduled qualifying match. This to each player who would have been a direct acceptance if not for the late
is a new sign-in and any player who is on-site with a Pepperstone ATP Ranking substitution. This payment shall not apply in the case where the player gained
(singles/doubles) is eligible to sign-in. entry into a main draw singles, at any event, by other means.
Case: Can a player who is a direct acceptance in the qualifying of a B. Main Draw Doubles
Challenger tournament, preserve his eligibility at another Challenger
tournament? 1) ATP Tour Tournaments
Decision: No. A player is considered to have preserved his eligi- a) Advance Entry. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, fourteen (14) days prior to the
bility only at the tournament where he is a Direct Acceptance into Monday of the tournament week (or the first tournament week in the case of
qualifying. He cannot withdraw and preserve eligibility at another tournaments scheduled for more than one (1) week). A team on the alternate
event unless the withdrawal was for “still competing”. However, he list for the doubles main draw may withdraw at any time prior to such time
can withdraw and preserve his eligibility at the same event where he that they are moved into the main draw as a direct acceptance because of
was a Direct Acceptance into qualifying. withdrawals of other teams.
5) If a tournament date, site or surface is changed; it is the player’s responsibility to b) Withdrawal Deadline. The deadline for a team to withdraw from the ad-
withdraw from the event on or before the new entry/withdrawal deadline if he does vanced entry list closes at 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, on the Friday prior to
not wish to play. the tournament week.
c) On-site Entry. The period for online on-site entries opens at 12:01 am, East-
6) Late Entries. ern Time, USA on the Friday prior to the tournament week and closes at 3:00
Any player who submits an entry after the deadline may only be accepted into the pm Eastern Time, USA on the Friday prior to the tournament week. The online
singles main draw as a wild card, qualifier, or as a special exempt (if eligible). sign-in is blind and no preliminary lists will be produced. Players entering
multiple events in the same week must do so with the same partner and shall
7) Emergency Situations. designate tournaments by priority. The on-site entry process will populate an
ATP Tour 250 Events Alternate List for vacancies occurring after the tournament withdrawal dead-
a) Tournaments shall qualify for one (1) emergency substitution if the following line and prior to the doubles draw being made.
conditions exist: 2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
i) Two (2) of the tournament’s top four (4) ranked players on the original a) Advance Entry. 12 Noon, Eastern Time, USA, seven (7) days prior to the
acceptance list withdraw; and Monday of the tournament week unless otherwise authorized by ATP. Play-
ii) One (1) of the withdrawals involves the first highest or second seeded ers entering multiple events in the same week must do so with the same
highest ranked player; and partner and shall designate tournaments by priority.
iii) The substitute player (1) meets a minimum of one (1) of the following b) Withdrawal Deadline. The deadline for a team to withdraw from the ad-
criteria: vanced entry list closes at 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, on the Friday prior to
1. A former top 20 player on the Pepperstone ATP rankings within the the tournament week.
previous 5 years from the tournament date. c) On-site Entry. The on-site sign-in deadline for doubles shall be 12 Noon local
2. Past tournament champion. time on the Saturday prior to the first day of the tournament unless otherwise
3. A current player ranked in the top 5 on the current ITF International authorized by ATP. The number of places available through the on-site entry
Junior Ranking. is specified in the Composition of Draws (7.08 D. 3)) plus any spots made
4. A current player ranked in the top 2 of the host country official Nation- available through withdrawals occurring after the advance doubles entry
al Junior Ranking. deadline. Teams who did not enter through the on-site sign-in and teams
where one member of the team is eligible to re-pair following the withdrawal
Substitute players meeting any of the criteria listed above must be ranked of his partner are eligible* to sign the daily alternate sign-in and are placed
500 or better in the most recent Pepperstone ATP Singles Ranking. below those teams on the alternate list who did enter through the on-site sign-
in method.
The withdrawals and substitution must occur within the period beginning *To be eligible, alternate teams who did not enter through the on-site protocol
on the Monday prior to the start of the event week and ending at 10 AM, must sign-in on the first day of the doubles competition.
Eastern Time, USA, on the Friday before the event week, or if the second 3) The doubles sign-in record shall be available for player sign-in at a reason-
withdrawal occurs between 9:00 AM and 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA on able time prior to the sign-in deadline.
the Friday before the event the deadline for naming a qualified substitute
shall be extended by one (1) hour. During this one hour period all lists will
be held awaiting a final cut-off for the affected event. If no substitution is

134 135
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
C. Qualifying Doubles • Players who break into the Top 350 and are aged 20 & under will be eligible to
receive up to 8 CH 100 & 125 Opportunities in a calendar year.
1) ATP Tour 500
• Players who break into the Top 250 and are aged 20 & under will be eligible to
The size of the draw is four (4) with two (2) seeds. The composition of the doubles receive up to 1 ATP 250 Main Draw Singles & 2 ATP 250 Qualifying opportunities
qualifying draw will be the first three (3) teams from the entry list plus one (1) wild each week with three ATP level events on the calendar in addition to their Chal-
card team. All matches will be played as two tie-break sets, no-ad scoring with a lenger opportunities.
match tie-break at one set all. Qualifying matches are to be held on the Saturday
/ Sunday prior to the start of main draw, as determined by the Supervisor and Tour Draw spots will be reserved and will drop to the next highest-ranked player should
Manager. Teams shall receive hospitality. Rooms for doubles qualifying players they not be utilized
shall be available beginning on Saturday and continue through the night of their
last match. Junior Accelerator Spots (JAS)
Points. The qualifying team shall receive 45 ranking points. The team losing in
Junior Accelerator Spots are awarded at the Challenger level to the Junior players
the final round of qualifying shall receive 25 ranking points*.
who are ranked 1-20 in the year-end ITF Junior Rankings, Singles Junior Grand Slam
*Teams receiving a first round Bye and subsequently losing in the final round Champions, and Finalists.
receive no points.
• Challengers 50 and 75 - Junior Accelerator Spot can be awarded to up to two (2)
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
players in every Main Draw (eligible Junior players ranked 1-10 and Junior Grand
There is no doubles qualifying at ATP Challenger tour events. Slam Champions) and to up to two (2) players in every Qualifying (eligible Junior
players ranked 11-20 and Singles Junior Grand Slam Finalists) of Challenger 50 and
D. Entry Deadline Extensions 75 tournaments.

ATP may extend the deadline for entries and/or withdrawals when unforeseen cir- Each Junior player ranked 1-10 and Junior Grand Slam Champion shall be eligible
cumstances arise. for up to eight (8) total Main Draw opportunities, with a maximum of four (4) uses per
six (6) months. Each player ranked 11-20 and Junior Grand Slam Finalist shall be
7.04 Entry/Withdrawal Method eligible for up to eight (8) total Qualifying opportunities, with a maximum of four (4)
uses per six (6) months.
A player may enter a Grand Slam, ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament
through a written entry form or other alternatives available to ATP player members. • All Challengers – Players who are eligible for the Challenger Junior Accelerator
For entry into an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour main draw or qualifying singles Spots (i.e. ranked 1-20) can be promoted via Promotion System from Qualifying to
and doubles, the player must be an ATP Player Member or an ATP Registered Player. Main Draw at any Challenger tournament (i.e. up to 2 spots reserved per tournament)
Wild Cards are exempt from this provision. if they are directly accepted into the Qualifying with their ATP Ranking at the entry
deadline, subject to availability.
ATP Tour 250 Main Draw Singles Late Entry (LE) Spot:
Any Junior Accelerator Spot or Promotions from Qualifying to Main draw will be de-
A Late Entry spot is a reserved position (one) in each ATP 250 tournament. Only termined at the relevant Challenger Main Draw or Qualifying Entry Deadline.
players with a ranking better than the original tournament entry list cut are allowed to
enter. The entry deadline for this spot is Thursday, 10 AM Eastern Time, USA prior to College Accelerator Spots (CAS)
the Monday of the tournament week. At this deadline, the position will be filled by the
highest ranked player who entered using the Pepperstone ATP Rankings (Singles) College Accelerator Spots are awarded at the Challenger level to the College players
used for tournament entries twenty-eight (28) days prior to the Monday of the tourna- who are ranked 1-20 in the season-end Intercollegiate Tennis Association (ITA) Col-
ment week. If there are no entries for the LE spot by the deadline, then the position legiate Tennis Rankings, as well as individual NCAA Division I Tennis Championships
in the main draw goes to the next eligible player on the entry list. quarterfinalists.

ATP Next Gen Programme • Challengers 50 and 75 - College Accelerator Spots can be awarded to up to two
(2) players in every Main Draw (eligible College players ranked 1-10 and individual
Players born in 2004 or later will be eligible for the Programme in 2024. Players who NCAA DI Champion) and to up to two (2) players in every Qualifying (eligible College
begin the season aged 20&U and turn 21 in 2024 will not be considered for the Pro- players ranked 11-20 and individual NCAA DI quarterfinalists) of Challenger 50 and
gramme. Starting from 01 January 2024, playing opportunities for players aged 20 75 tournaments.
& under who break into the Top 250 & 350 of the Pepperstone ATP Rankings will be
reserved as follows: Players who have finished College education – defined as any player who has ob-
tained a College degree or who has stopped college education for the pursuit of full-

136 137
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
time competition on the professional tennis circuit – shall be eligible for the following 2) Once a player enters he is subject to all the withdrawal provisions.
opportunities: 3) Withdrawals, retirements or defaults during an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour
i) Players ranked 1-10 in the season-end singles ITA Collegiate Tennis Ranking and tournament must be made through the Supervisor.
NCAA Division I Champion shall be eligible for up to eight (8) Accelerator Spots
over twelve (12) months at Challenger Main Draw, with a maximum of four (4) B. Main Draw - Doubles
uses per six (6) months, starting July 1, 2023. 1) Advance Entry – ATP Tour Only
ii) Players ranked 11-20 in the season-end singles ITA Collegiate Tennis Ranking a) No team shall be considered entered or withdrawn from an ATP Tour tourna-
and NCAA Division I quarter-finalists shall be eligible for up to eight (8) Accelera- ment* unless their written entry or written withdrawal is received on or before
tor Spots over twelve (12) months at Challenger Tour Qualifying, with a maximum the entry or withdrawal deadline by a player relations staff member or ATP
of four (4) uses per six (6) months, starting July 1, 2023. Supervisor. A team must have entered in order to be moved into the main
draw as a direct acceptance because of the withdrawals of other players.
Players who remain in College education – defined as any player who is scheduled b) Once a team enters they are subject to all the withdrawal provisions.
to return to College in the following semester - shall be eligible for the following op-
portunities: *The top 13 teams from the final 2023 ATP Doubles Team Rankings shall
i) Players ranked 1-10 in the season-end singles ITA Collegiate Tennis Ranking and receive automatic Direct Acceptance into the first 5 Masters 1000 events in
NCAA Division I Champion shall be eligible for up to six (6) Accelerator Spots at the 2024 season (if not included as a Direct Acceptance on their own merit).
Challenger Main Draw over six (6) months, starting July 1 2023, through to the To qualify for automatic acceptance a team must have competed as a team
last week of Challenger events in the season. in 11 ATP Tour or Grand Slam events during the 2023 season. A player can
only be eligible on one team.
ii) Players ranked 11-20 in the season-end singles ITA Collegiate Tennis Ranking
and NCAA Division I quarter-finalists shall be eligible for up to six (6) Accelerator For each of the remaining four (4) Masters 1000 events, the top 13 teams in
Spots at Challenger Qualifying over six months, starting July 1, 2023, through to the Team Race at the advanced entry deadline for that event, shall receive
the last week of Challenger events in December. automatic Direct Acceptance into that Masters 1000 event (if not included as
a Direct Acceptance on their own merit). A player can only be eligible on one
• All Challengers – Players who are eligible for the Challenger College Accelerator team.
Spots (ranked 1-20) can be promoted via Promotion System from Qualifying to Main To qualify for automatic acceptance into the first 5 Masters 1000 events a
Draw at any Challenger tournament (up to 2 spots reserved per tournament) if they team must have competed together as a team in each week of the 2024
are directly accepted into the Qualifying with their ATP Ranking at the entry deadline, season where both players were playing doubles in that week. The exception
subject to availability. would be when they were both involved in the singles of different events.
To qualify for automatic acceptance into the final 4 Masters 1000 events, a
Any College Accelerator Spot or Promotions from Qualifying to Main draw will be
team must compete together as a team in each week of the 2024 season
determined at the relevant Challenger Main Draw or Qualifying Entry Deadline.
where both players were playing doubles in that week. The exception would
be when they were both involved in the singles of different events.
A. Main Draw - Singles
1) No player shall be considered entered or withdrawn from an *ATP Tour Masters 2) On-Site Entry - ATP Tour - See 7.03 B. 1) c)
1000, ATP Tour 500**, ATP Tour 250 or ATP Challenger Tour tournament unless
On-Site Entry - ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
his written entry or written withdrawal is received on or before the entry or with-
drawal deadline by a player relations staff member, ATP Supervisor or through the a) No team shall be accepted for on-site entry into the doubles event unless one
PlayerZone. A player must have entered in order to be moved into the main draw player of the team personally signs the on-site entry list unless subsection d)
as a direct acceptance because of the withdrawals of other players. For each ATP applies.
Tour Masters 1000 tournament, players with a Pepperstone ATP Rankings posi- b) If neither player of the team is able to sign the list then such team may enter
tion that qualifies them as a direct acceptance or alternate, shall be automatically the doubles event by submitting a written entry to ATP or by personally con-
entered by ATP. tacting the Tour Manager or Supervisor at the tournament he wants to play.
c) Written entries submitted by a player(s) who is not on-site and who has not
* For the mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments, this section is applicable been able to talk to the Tour Manager or Supervisor, must be received by the
for withdrawals only as entries are automatic. If a withdrawal is made prior to the on-site Supervisor prior to the deadline.
Acceptance List being published, any player directly accepted as a result of that d) The Tour Manager or Supervisor may sign-in and enter doubles teams.
withdrawal will be considered a Direct Acceptance once the list is published. e) Each member of a team wishing to enter the doubles event must be either an
** Commitment players are automatically accepted into the main draw of all ATP ATP Player Member or an ATP Registered Player.
Tour 500 events in which they have entered in a proper manner.

138 139
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Emailed Doubles Entry sor is satisfied that the players were not at fault, may he sign them
in?
Case: The Supervisor/Referee is sent a doubles entry via email.
The email was not seen by the Supervisor/Referee until after the Decision: No.
entry deadline. The date/time of the email show that it was received D. Sign-in Protocol:
prior to the deadline. Is this a valid entry?
Decision: No. To be considered as a valid entry the official at the All sign-ins (doubles, qualifying, alternates, lucky losers) must be done by phone
site of the doubles event (Supervisor, Referee or Tour Manager) via text messaging. Each entry must be received and viewed by the on-site su-
must have actually viewed the email. The same decision would be pervisor, or the designate listed on the official detail sheet, prior to the deadline.
made on undelivered faxes or an entry left on voice mail. The player is responsible for having his entry confirmed by the supervisor or the
Note: Proper procedure for any emailed or faxed entries would be designate listed on the official detail sheet.
to ask for a confirmation from the person who the entry was sent.
Barring confirmation, you should make personal contact prior to the 7.05 Withdrawal/Late Withdrawal Penalties
entry deadline.
The following shall result when a player withdraws after the deadline from the singles
C. Qualifying main draw of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament:

Players may be entered in the main draw (singles or doubles) as qualifiers based on A. A player shall be subject to the sanctions provided in the Player Code of Conduct.
their success in the respective qualifying competition.
B. If the withdrawal is from the singles main draw of an ATP Tour tournament, the player
1) Challenger. The ATP Challenger Alternate Sign-in shall begin no later than 4 shall be required to fulfill his obligations under the ATP Stars Program.
p.m. and close at 6 p.m. local time on the day prior to the start of the qualifying
competition. There shall also be an Alternate sign-in on the day of first round C. If the withdrawal occurs after 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, on Friday before the tourna-
qualifying play, this deadline is one-half hour prior to the start of play on the day ment week or, in the case of doubles, after the on-site entry deadline, then the with-
of the qualifying competition. drawal shall be considered a late withdrawal and shall also result in a late withdrawal
2) ATP Tour. fine, unless the injury on-site examination provisions or player promotional activity
provisions apply as stated under repeal of penalties. In addition, in the case of a 96-
a) Direct acceptances to ATP Tour qualifying are not required to sign-in. draw tournament, if the withdrawal occurs after the qualifying or main draw is made,
b) The ATP Tour Qualifying Alternate sign-in shall begin no later than 4 p.m. whichever comes first, the player shall receive a late withdrawal fine, unless the injury
and close at 6 p.m. local time on the night prior to the start of the qualifying on-site examination or player promotional activity provisions apply. Players included
competition (Friday night for a qualifying commencing on Saturday). in the draw that fail to appear on-site shall be classified as a late withdrawal.
3) Challenger & ATP Tour. There shall also be an Alternate sign-in on the day of
Whom To Fine?
first round qualifying play, this deadline is one-half hour prior to the first scheduled
qualifying match. This is a new sign-in and any player who is on-site and with a Case: Player A and player B agree to play doubles together in a
Pepperstone ATP Ranking (singles or doubles) is eligible to sign-in. tournament, so player B signs the team in to play. On Monday,
player A withdraws from singles and consequently from doubles.
Can I Play Both? As player A does not come on-site for promotional activities, he is
Case: A player is playing a doubles match on the Friday night aware that he will get a withdrawal penalty for singles. What penal-
before a Saturday start to Qualifying that will not finish before 9 p.m. ties apply to the doubles team?
local time at the following week’s tournament. The next tournament Decision: Player A gets a fine for doubles while player B does not
is 2-3 hours traveling time and because the doubles semi-finals is as he is on-site.
scheduled for Saturday night, it is feasible for the player to drive
between the two locations so that he could compete in the qualifying D. No Play After Withdrawal
singles and still play the doubles semi-final should he win on Friday
night. Can he remain a direct acceptance? 1) If a player withdraws after the entry/withdrawal deadline from the singles or dou-
bles event of a Grand Slam, ATP Tour, ATP Challenger Tour or the qualifying
Decision: Yes. The Saturday night doubles match (which cannot
competition of an ATP Tour/Challenger Tour tournament for any reason, he may
be a result of special scheduling) makes this possible for the player.
not play in any other tournament or special event during that tournament week.
Appropriate penalties apply if the player does not appear for his
qualifying match or his doubles semi-final match, if he wins Friday 2) If the withdrawal was for medical reasons then the player may enter and compete
night. in the doubles event of the same tournament provided he is determined by the
Players Miss Sign-In Supervisor, upon written medical advice, to be physically capable to compete on
Case: Players cannot be at the Lucky Loser/Alternate sign-in on a professional level of play.
time because of circumstances beyond their control. If the Supervi-

140 141
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
3) No player may continue playing in an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tourna- this tournament count towards the total tournaments at which the
ment in singles or doubles after giving notice of withdrawal from a tournament player can use his PR?
scheduled in a future week on account of injury, illness or other medical reason. Decision: No, this tournament will not count towards the player’s
Players, however, may continue playing in that event if the withdrawal from the total of tournaments.
future event was for non-medical reasons. Case: A player withdraws from an ATP Tour tournament prior to the
4) ATP TOUR: The exception to No Play after Withdrawal is the withdrawal of a Friday, 10 AM deadline with injury. He is allowed to play doubles in
team accepted into the main draw of an ATP Tour tournament through the ad- the same event provided he is determined to be physically capable
vance entry method due to one or both team members being accepted into the to compete. Since he is coming on-site to play doubles, does he
main draw singles of another ATP Tour, ATP Tour Qualifying or ATP Challenger have to do promotional activity?
Tour tournament. In this case, both players may enter a doubles competition, Decision: No, however, he is required to complete his Stars re-
together or separately, through the on-site entry method. quirements if requested by ATP staff.
ATP CHALLENGER TOUR: The exception to No Play after Withdrawal is Case: May a player withdraw BDA from the main draw alternate list
the withdrawal of a team accepted into the main draw of an ATP Challenger of an ATP Tour or Challenger event and play the Qualifying of the
Tour tournament through the advance entry method due to one or both team same event?
members being accepted into the main draw singles of another ATP Tour, Decision: Yes, unless he would have moved into the main draw of
ATP Tour Qualifying, ATP Challenger Tour tournament, ATP Challenger Tour that event, had he not withdrawn. A player may not turn down this
Qualifying or ITF WTT M25 or M15 main draw or qualifying tournament. In this main draw position to play the qualifying of that event. He may,
case, both players may enter a doubles competition, together or separately, however, play the Qualifying of a different event.
through the on-site entry method. Challenger Cancels, Where can I Play?
5) A violation of this section shall also be punishable by the provisions set forth in the Case: A player enters and is main draw of a Challenger on the
Code of Conduct. original Acceptance List. The Challenger cancels. The deadline
has now passed for entering another Challenger or 250 tournament
Case: A player is a Direct Acceptance in a Grand Slam or Masters during the same week. What are the player’s options for competing
1000 96-draw tournament and withdraws. Can he play an ATP that week?
Challenger during the 2nd week of that tournament.
Decision: The player may sign in as an Alternate at any ATP Tour
Decision: Yes as long as the withdrawal was prior to the start of or ATP Challenger Tour qualifying event the same week. Or he may
qualifying. accept, if offered, a Wild Card at any Challenger or ATP Tour event.
Case: A player is an alternate on an ATP Tour Qualifying list and He may not be inserted directly into the draw or placed on another
gets in and is inserted in the draw which is done before the official Acceptance List.
withdrawal deadline due to the difference in time zones. Is he al- Options if Tournament Changes Surface after the Entry Dead-
lowed to withdraw once he is in the draw and play somewhere else? line
Decision: When the player gets in the draw, he is automatically Case: Can a player withdraw from the main draw and play else-
withdrawn from any other qualifying event where he was an alter- where during the same week if a tournament changes its surface
nate. He will be allowed to withdraw (up until the Thursday, 10 AM after the Acceptance List has come out?
commitment deadline) from the event where he got in and not be
Decision: The player may sign in for Qualifying at any event that
penalized. However, he will only be allowed to play doubles at the
week or he may accept, if offered, a Wild Card at any Challenger or
same event.
ATP Tour event. He may not be inserted directly into the draw or
Case: May a player withdraw from a tournament where he is a Di- placed on another Acceptance List.
rect Acceptance in singles or doubles (with his regular or protected
Case: A doubles team enters 4 Challenger tournaments in the
ranking) and then accept a wild card into the same tournament?
same week through phone or email. The team is accepted and
Decision: Yes, provided the withdrawal is prior to the withdrawal appears on two draws at the same time as well as the alternate lists
deadline, a player may withdraw from a tournament and then accept of the other 2 tournaments. Is the team allowed to withdraw from
a wild card into the same tournament. For doubles, the wild card one of the events it is accepted into and play at the other one?
must be with his original partner. He cannot accept a wild card
Decision: No. The team is in violation of the One Tournament Per
nor play in any other tournament or event in the same week as the
Week and No Play After Withdrawal rules and will be withdrawn
tournament he withdrew from. (Tour Policy)
from all tournaments that week.
Case: A player accepted in an ATP Tour, ATP Challenger Tour main
Case: A player moves from the Alternate list into a Challenger Sin-
draw or ATP Tour Qualifying list using a PR withdraws prior to the
gles Main Draw at the 10 AM deadline on Friday before the event
withdrawal deadline and accepts a WC into the same event. Does
and later appears in the draw. Not knowing that he is in the main
draw of a tournament already, the player requests and receives a
142 143
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Main Draw wild card at another Challenger tournament the same 7.07 Play-Up Regulation (ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments)
week and appears in the draw. Is the player allowed to withdraw
from one of the events and compete at the other one? A. Restrictions - Challengers 75-125
Decision: No. The player is in violation of the One Tournament 1) Players positioned 1-10 in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings twenty-one (21) days
Per Week and No Play After Withdrawal rules and will be withdrawn prior to the first Monday of the ATP Challenger Tour tournament are prohibit-
from both tournaments that week. ed from entering, accepting a wild card and/or competing in an ATP Challenger
Tour tournament. Players who would have been, had they and all other players
E. Withdrawals from the qualifying competition at ATP Tour/Challenger Tour tourna-
entered, a direct acceptance on the original acceptance list for a Grand Slam
ments will be without penalty if one of the following occurs:
are prohibited from entering, accepting a wild card and/or competing in an ATP
1) Player is accepted into the main draw of ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 Challenger Tour tournament in the first week of the Grand Slam tournament.
or ATP Tour 250 tournament, or in the case of an ATP Challenger Tour qualifying 2) Players positioned 11-50 (excluding Entry Protection ranking) in the Pepperstone
withdrawal, the main draw of another ATP Challenger Tour singles event. ATP Rankings twenty-one (21) days prior to the first Monday of the ATP Challeng-
2) Player is still competing in an ATP Tour, ATP Challenger Tour, or ITF Men’s WTT er Tour tournament are prohibited from entering (with the exception of Challenger
tournament at any time on the day prior to the commencement of qualifying. 175 category) but may receive an ATP-approved wild card in order to compete
in the Challenger tournament. The Challenger Supervisor will make wild card
3) The first two (2) withdrawals are excused, thereafter, each withdrawal is subject
determinations consistent with the limitations outlined below. Players positioned
to a fine in accordance with article 8.03 B., Fines.
11-50 are also prohibited from entering, accepting a wild card or competing in a
Challenger 75 tournament.
7.06 One Tournament Per Week and Exception
3) ATP Challenger Tour tournaments scheduled the same week as an ATP Tour tour-
A. Regulation: nament may offer wild cards to players positioned 11-50 in the Pepperstone ATP
Rankings who have received approval from the ATP on-site Supervisor according
A player may only enter and compete in one Grand Slam, ATP Tour, ATP Challenger to the following breakdown:
Tour or special event during that tournament week. Once a player enters and is
accepted into the main draw of singles, doubles, or the qualifying competition, he is ATP Challenger 125 up to (2) two wild cards
committed to that tournament for the week, unless released by the Senior Vice Presi- ATP Challenger 100 up to (1) one wild card
dent - Rules & Competition or Supervisor. A player who loses in the singles qualifying
ATP Challenger 75 no wild card
competition may enter the doubles event of any tournament.
4) ATP Challenger Tour tournaments not scheduled in the same week as ATP Tour
Case: May a team who enters and loses doubles qualifying at an
tournaments, or scheduled during the 2nd week of a Grand Slam, ATP Tour Mas-
ATP 500 event on Saturday enter doubles in a Challenger for the
ters 1000 96-draw tournaments may offer wild cards to players positioned 11-50
same week.
in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings who have received approval from the ATP on-
Decision: No. This would violate the provisions of the One Tourna- site Supervisor according to the following breakdown:
ment Per Week rule.

B. Exception: ATP Challenger 125 up to (3) three wild cards

ATP Challenger 100 up to (3) three wild cards
A player who has lost in a tournament may enter the qualifying for a tournament
ATP Challenger 75 no wild card
scheduled for the next week*. The Supervisor may authorize a player who is still
competing in the main draw of a tournament in singles and/or doubles to enter the NOTE: These restrictions apply only to singles draws.
qualifying for the next week’s ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments provid-
ed that no special scheduling by either tournament shall be required. In the event of B. Restrictions - Challenger 50
a conflict, he shall be withdrawn from such qualifying so as to compete in the singles Players positioned 1-150 in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings twenty-one (21) days
and/or doubles of the main draw tournament in which he is competing. In addition, if prior to the first Monday of the ATP Challenger Tour tournament are prohibited
the player does not appear for play as scheduled, there shall be an automatic fine. from entering Challenger 50 events. ATP Challenger 50 tournaments may offer
an ATP-approved wild card to players ranked 51-150 in the Pepperstone ATP
*This does not apply to events in the same week as a Grand Slam qualifying event. Rankings at the entry deadline who have received approval from the ATP on-site
Players accepted into the qualifying of a Grand Slam event will not be allowed to Supervisor according to the following breakdown:
compete in any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger event (qualifying or main draw) held in
the same week. 51-100 1 wild card limited to a player of the same
nationality as the event
101-150 1 wild card - no nationality restriction
144 145
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Case: A player ranked between 11-50 asks for a wild card into an b) ATP Tour 500 Tournaments:
ATP Challenger 100 and is denied by the tournament. The player
then signs in for the qualifying. Is he allowed to play qualifying? Total Direct Wild Special
Decision: He is allowed to play only if the tournament grants him Accepted Acceptances Qualifiers Cards Exempts
a wild card into the qualifying. The WC, however, will not count 32 23-25 4 3-4* 0-1
against the maximum allowed number of 11-50 players for the
tournament. 48 36-38 6 4-5* 0-1
Case: A player ranked 11-50 at the time of the entry deadline asks 56 42-44 7 5-6* 0-1
for a wild card into an ATP Challenger 100 and is denied by the *Applies only for an A+ player from the region
tournament. The players ranking then drops below 50 and he signs c) ATP Tour 250 Tournaments:
in for the qualifying. Is he allowed to play qualifying?
Total Direct Wild Special
Decision: Yes. Since his ranking dropped below 50, he is allowed
to sign in and play qualifying and does not need a wild card. Accepted Acceptances Qualifiers Cards Exempts
Case: May a player who was ranked in the 11-50 range at the time 28 19-21 4 3 0-2
of the entry deadline into an ATP Challenger 75 event, but whose
32 23-25 4 3 0-2
ranking falls below this at the time of the qualifying sign-in, be
accepted into the event as a main draw or qualifying wild card or 48 38-40 4 4 0-2
sign-in for the qualifying event? 56 45-47 4 5 0-2
Decision: No. The rule under 7.07 A 2) states that these players are NOTE: All ATP Tour 250 tournaments shall have a 16 draw qualifying regard-
prohibited from entering, accepting a wild card or competing in an less of the size of the main draw.
ATP Challenger 75 tournament.
C. Composition of Draws - Challenger Tour Tournaments (unless otherwise ap-
7.08 The Draw proved by ATP)
1) Main Draw 32 Players
A. Minimum Draw Size
a) 21/19 Direct Acceptances based on Pepperstone ATP Ranking
1) The singles draw size for ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments shall be:
b) 3 Wild Cards
ATP Tour Masters 1000 96 Draw c) 6 Qualifying Positions
ATP Tour Masters 1000 / Outdoors 56 Draw d) 0-2 Special Exempts
ATP Tour Masters 1000 / Indoors 48 Draw e) 0-2 JAS/CAS
2) With the exception of the Nitto ATP Finals, the minimum singles draw size for all 2) Qualifying is a 24-player event for 6 positions in the main draw
other ATP Tour tournaments is as follows:
a) 18 Direct Acceptances based on most recent Pepperstone ATP Ranking.
ATP Tour 500 / Outdoors 32 Draw b) 4 Wild Cards
ATP Tour 500 / Indoors 32 Draw c) 0-2 JAS/CAS
ATP Tour 250 / Indoors & Outdoors 28 Draw* 3) Vacancies
* ATP Tour tournaments may petition ATP for an increased size of the main draw.
a) Any main draw vacancies occurring after the withdrawal deadline and prior
The deadline for submitting the petition is six (6) months prior to Monday of the
to the start of Qualifying will be filled in ranking order from the original main
tournament week.
draw acceptance list by players who have preserved their position on the
3) Doubles draw sizes may be found under “Composition of Draws”. list. Players from the main draw alternate list who are directly accepted into
qualifying are considered to have preserved their eligibility. A player can only
B. Composition of Draws - ATP Tournaments preserve his eligibility on one list. If there are no alternates from the original
main draw acceptance list who have preserved eligibility, the vacancy will be
1) Main Draw Singles: The singles main draw shall be composed as follows:
filled by the highest ranked player from the qualifying or alternate list using
a) ATP Tour Masters 1000 Tournaments: the Pepperstone ATP Rankings, and then Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rank-
ings, used for seeding.
Total Direct Wild Special
Accepted Acceptances Qualifiers Cards Exempts After the start of the qualifying, any vacancy will come from the Lucky Loser/
Alternate list. The Alternates will be placed below the players who lost in
48 38-39 6 3 0-1 qualifying and shall be ordered based upon their position in the Pepperstone
56 44-45 7 4 0-1 ATP Rankings, and then the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for
seeding.
96 78-79 12 5 0-1
146 147
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
NOTE: In order to preserve his eligibility on the Acceptance List, the player any player who is on-site and with a Pepperstone ATP Ranking (singles or doubles)
must email the ATP Supervisor directly prior to 6 PM local time on the day is eligible to sign-in. Once the qualifying competition has begun, only those players
before qualifying starts (email listed on detail sheet) and personally inform who ultimately qualify and lucky losers may be accepted into the main draw. The
the Supervisor that he wishes to preserve his position on the Acceptance qualifying competition commences when the first ball of the first qualifying match is
List and the player must leave a contact number. The player should ask for struck.
confirmation that the Supervisor has received the email in a timely manner. A
player can only preserve his eligibility on one list. ATP Challenger Tour. The on-site alternate sign-in shall begin no later than 4 p.m.
and close at 6 p.m. local time on the night prior to the start of the qualifying com-
D. Composition of Draws - Doubles: The doubles main draw shall be composed as
petition. There shall also be an Alternate sign-in on the day of first round qualifying
follows:
play, this deadline is one-half hour prior to the first scheduled qualifying match. This
1) ATP Tour 250/500 Tournaments: Direct Acceptances is a new sign-in and any player who is on-site and with a Pepperstone ATP Ranking
(singles or doubles) is eligible to sign-in. Qualifying vacancies occurring after the
Singles Doubles Direct Acceptances Wild withdrawal deadline - 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA on Friday shall be filled from the
Draw Size Draw Size Advance Entry Cards on-site alternate sign-in using the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings.

28/32 16 14* 2 Any main draw vacancies occurring after the withdrawal deadline and prior to the
start of Qualifying will be filled in ranking order from the original main draw accep-
48 16 14* 2 tance list by players who have preserved their position on the list. Players from
56 24 22* 2 the main draw alternate list who are directly accepted into qualifying are consid-
*For ATP 500 - 1 from Qualifying ered to have preserved their eligibility. A player can only preserve his eligibility on
2) ATP Masters 1000 Tournaments: Direct Acceptances one list. If there are no alternates from the original main draw acceptance list who
have preserved their eligibility, the vacancy will be filled by the highest ranked
player from the qualifying or alternate list using the Pepperstone ATP Rankings,
Singles Doubles Direct Acceptances Wild
and then the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for seeding.
Draw Size Draw Size Advance Entry Cards
Once the qualifying competition has begun, only those players who ultimately
96 32 29 3 qualify, lucky losers and eligible alternates may be accepted into the main draw.
56* 28 25 3 The qualifying competition commences when the first ball of the first qualifying
match is struck. The Alternates will be placed below the players who lost in qual-
48* 24 22 2 ifying and shall be ordered based upon their position in the Pepperstone ATP
*Optional Draw Size for ATP Masters 1000 56 & 48 Draw Singles Rankings, and then the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for seeding.
NOTE: For ATP Challenger Tour qualifying tournaments, withdrawals occurring
Singles Doubles Direct Acceptances Wild after 10 AM Eastern Time USA and prior to the draw* will be filled from that night’s
Draw Size Draw Size Advance Entry Cards alternate sign-in. Vacancies occurring after the release of the qualifying draw, will
be filled from the next day’s on-site alternate list. Players must personally sign-in
56 32 29 3 to be eligible as an on-site alternate.
48 28 25 3 * For events in a time zone where the qualifying draw is made prior to 10 AM Fri-
day, Eastern Time USA, vacancies occurring after the Qualifying Alternate sign-in
3) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments deadline but prior to the qualifying draw shall be filled from that night’s alternate
sign-in.
1) Singles. ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 500 qualifying draw size will be
Total Direct Acceptances Wild
one-half (1/2) the size of the main draw. The qualifying size for all ATP Tour 250
Accepted Advance Entry On-Site Cards tournaments shall be 16 with 4 qualifiers. The singles qualifying shall be com-
16 10 4 2 posed as follows:
a) ATP Tour Tournaments - Qualifying:
E. Qualifying
Total Accepted Direct Acceptances Wild Cards
ATP Tour: The Alternate Sign In for ATP Tour singles qualifying shall begin no later 16 13 3
than 4 p.m. and close at 6 p.m. local time on the night prior to the start of the qualify-
ing competition (Friday night when qualifying commences on Saturday). There shall 16* 14 2
also be an Alternate sign-in on the day of first round qualifying play, this deadline is 24 20 4
one-half hour prior to the first scheduled qualifying match. This is a new sign-in and
148 149
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
28 24 4 or main draw, and unsuccessful participants in this event are eligible to be
considered for entry into the qualifying competition.
48 43 5 2) Doubles - ATP Tour 500
* Denotes ATP Tour 250 Qualifying
b) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments - Qualifying: There shall be a four-draw event with one team qualifying.
Total Accepted Direct Acceptances Wild Cards Correct When Left Out of Draw
Case: After the qualifying draw has been made, it is discovered that
24 20 4 player A, who was properly entered, has been left out of the draw.
2) Doubles Competition. The doubles qualifying shall be composed as follows: What is the procedure to correct this mistake?
ATP Tour 500 Tournaments Qualifying: Decision:
Total Accepted Direct Acceptances Wild Cards 1. If player A is unseeded, replace the last direct acceptance in the
qualifying draw with player A in the draw. Follow this procedure if
4 3 1 play has begun unless the last direct acceptance has begun his first
match. If the last direct acceptance has started his first match then
7.09 Size and Method of Draw no correction is to be made and player A is left out of the draw.
A. Main Draw 2. If player A is seeded, then if he is one of the top four (4) seeds he
replaces seed four (4) and then seed four (4) replaces seed eight
1) Singles
(8). Seed eight (8) then replaces the last direct acceptance. If player
a) 28 Competitors. A draw sheet with 32 places shall be used. After the seeds A is to be seeded 5-8, then he shall replace seed eight (8) and
and byes are placed, the remaining players, including the qualifiers, shall be then seed eight (8) replaces the last direct acceptance. The same
drawn and placed in the vacant spaces in the draw, beginning at the top of principle is followed for larger qualifying draws where you have a
the draw. greater number of seeds. If play has begun, then the Supervisor
b) 32 or 64 Competitors. A draw sheet of 32 or 64 places shall be used. After shall evaluate the impact upon the draw and correct when possible.
the seeds are placed, the remaining players, including the qualifiers, shall be If the last direct acceptance has begun play, then no corrections are
drawn and placed in the vacant spaces in the draw, beginning at the top of possible.
the draw. Correcting an Error in Seeding
c) 48 or 56 Competitors. A draw sheet with 64 places shall be used. After the Case: After the event has begun, it is discovered that a tie between
seeds and byes are placed, the remaining players, including the qualifiers, 2 seeded players or teams was not broken correctly. What action
shall be drawn and placed in the vacant spaces in the draw, beginning at the may be taken?
top of the draw.
Decision: If the players or teams involved in the error have not
d) 96 Competitors. A draw sheet with 128 places shall be used. After the seeds
played their first match, then the error in seeding may be corrected
and byes are placed, the remaining players, including the qualifiers, shall be
by switching the positions of the affected players or teams.
drawn and placed in the vacant spaces in the draw, beginning at the top of
the draw. Don’t Have Eight Seeds
2) Doubles Case: In a qualifying draw, there are only seven (7) players listed
in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or the Pepperstone ATP Doubles
a) The draw shall be for 16, 24 or 32 teams. Rankings. Since there will not be an eighth seed, how are seeds 5-7
b) Placing of seeds and byes and the drawing of the remaining teams, including placed in the Draw?
qualifiers, shall be in accordance with the same principles used in the singles
Decision: Draw seeds 5, 6 and 7 for placement in sections 2,3 and
main draw.
4.
B. Qualifying Draw Main Draw Seed for a Qualifier
Case: May a player who gains a place in the main draw by qualify-
The qualifying draw shall be made in sections, and the winner of each section shall ing be seeded in the main draw?
be given a place in the main draw, as determined by lot.
Decision: Yes. However, if the main draw is made prior to the com-
1) Singles pletion of the qualifying, then the original seedings are final.
a) If four (4) qualifiers are required, there shall be four (4) sections; six (6) quali- Who to Seed in singles Qualifying
fiers, six (6) sections; and so on. The draw shall be seeded and the selection Case: Seven (7) players listed in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings
of seeds shall be based on the most recent available and complete Pepper- sign in for the singles qualifying. Two (2) other players listed in the
stone ATP Rankings list. Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings sign-in along with fifteen (15)
b) There shall be no pre-qualifying event; however, a tournament may conduct other players. How many and which players will be seeded?
a separate or local event to determine wild cards in the qualifying competition
150 151
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: Eight (8) players. The seven (7) singles players and the EXCEPTION 2: A player who has entered and been accepted into the qualify-
highest-positioned doubles player. ing draw of an ATP Tour 500 tournament and has been withdrawn because he
Player Pulled from ATP Tour 250 and 500 Qualifying is still competing in an ATP Tour event, will be added to the last position on the
Case: An ATP Tour 500 and an ATP Tour 250 or a different ATP special exempt list of an ATP Tour 250 tournament located in the same region
Tour 250 or 500 event are being held the same week. Can a player (as determined by ATP) if specific conditions are met. These conditions are:
inside the original cut of the ATP Tour 250 or 500 qualifying list be i) He is qualified for a Special Exempt spot in the ATP Tour 500 event.
withdrawn in order to be moved into the main draw of the ATP Tour ii) Due to other qualified player(s) for the Special Exempt into the ATP Tour
250 or 500 or a different ATP Tour 500 or 250 event or accept a wild 500 event there is no Special Exempt available.
card? iii) The player’s ranking would have qualified him for the main draw of the
Decision: Yes. 250 event, had he entered there instead of the 500 qualifying.
B. Number of Special Exempts
7.10 Special Exempts (SE)
ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 500 tournaments shall have one (1) special
A. Eligibility
exempt. ATP Tour 250 and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall have two (2).
Players may receive a special exempt into the main draw of the following week’s
C. Selection of Special Exempt
tournament if they meet the criteria and apply for it in a timely manner.
1) If there are not sufficient special exempt places in the draw for applicants, the
1) A player is eligible to receive a special exempt into the singles main draw of the
players shall be selected according to their position on the most recent Pep-
following week’s tournament, subject to the provisions of this section, if he is un-
perstone ATP Rankings list issued prior to the tournament or by their protected
able to compete in that qualifying competition because he is still competing on the
ranking, except:
date the qualifying competition begins in another qualified event, and his current
ranking as of the date of the entry deadline would not have otherwise qualified a) If he is a direct acceptance using his protected ranking, then he is not eligible
him as a direct acceptance on the original acceptance list if he had entered. In for a special exempt place, or
addition, a player who is still playing a match at 9 p.m. local time at the qualifying b) If he would have been a direct acceptance had he entered using his protected
site, is eligible to receive a special exempt only if he wins that match. ranking, then the protected ranking cannot be used to determine his position
on the special exempt list.
a) A Qualified event for special exempt to an ATP Tour Masters 1000 tourna-
2) ATP Tour. If the special exempt places are not needed before the beginning of
ment is the singles event of another ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 or
the qualifying competition, the special exempt places shall be filled by additional
Grand Slam tournament.
direct acceptances selected from the original acceptance list. Thus a player may
b) A Qualified event for special exempt to an ATP Tour 500 tournament is the
be pulled out of the qualifying before the first ball is hit and replaced by an alter-
singles event of another ATP Tour 500, ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour
nate list player.
250* or Grand Slam tournament.
*The 250 event must be located in the same region as the 500 event, as 3) ATP Challenger Tour. If the special exempt place is not needed prior to the 10
determined by ATP and specified in “Exhibit M”. AM withdrawal deadline, the special exempt place shall be filled by an additional
c) A Qualified event for special exempt to an ATP Tour 250 tournament is the direct acceptance selected from the original acceptance list. If the special exempt
singles event of any ATP Tour 250, ATP Tour 500, ATP Tour Masters 1000 or place has not been determined at the deadline, and then following the 10 AM-
Grand Slam tournament. withdrawal deadline it is determined that the Special Exempt is not needed, the
d) A Qualified event for special exempt to an ATP Challenger Tour tournament additional direct acceptance shall be filled from the next player who has properly
is the singles event of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament within preserved his eligibility on the original acceptance list for that event.
the same geographic region, unless there are no Challengers in the same
region the following week. If there are no Challengers in the same region the D. Special Exempt Process
following week, then a qualified event would include all ATP Challenger Tour 1) A list of possible eligible players is compiled by the player relations department by
events scheduled in the following week, regardless of region. (Definition of Wednesday/Thursday of the current week for the next week’s tournaments.
Regions can be found in “Exhibit M”).
EXCEPTION 1: A player who has entered and been accepted into the quali- 2) The list of eligible players is supplied to the supervisors where the players are
fying draw of an ATP Tour tournament and has been withdrawn because he is competing. The supervisors need to contact each player to inquire if the player
still competing in a Challenger or Tour event in the same region, will be add- is interested in the special exempt position and then contact player relations im-
ed to the last position on the special exempt list of an ATP Challenger Tour mediately following the player’s decision to remove himself from consideration for
tournament scheduled for the next week, even though he would have been a any tournament for which he is eligible.
direct acceptance, had he entered the Challenger. 3) If the player is interested in an event, player relations coordinates with the super-
Note: EXCEPTION does not apply if player was Top 50 twenty one (21) days visors at both events until the SE positions are filled.
prior to the first Monday of the Challenger.
152 153
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
4) If the main draw is to be made before a potential special exempt player plays on Potential Special Exempt Playing at Midnight On the Night Prior
Friday, then such place(s) shall be drawn in the same manner as qualifier, i.e., to the Start of Qualifying
four qualifiers (“Q”) and one or two “SE” depending on whether there are one or Case: Same situation as above, except that the player’s match is
two possibilities. Each of the five or six slots are marked “Q/SE.” As soon as the still in progress after midnight. Does this make the player eligible
“SE” match results are known, either the “SE” or the next direct acceptance (if the for a special exempt based on the fact that he was still competing
SE lost) is randomly drawn and inserted into the draw. on the date the qualifying competition begins in another qualified
NOTE: The deadline for a player to declare his intent to accept a Special Exempt, event?
if eligible, is no later than one hour following the completion of the match that Decision: No. For the purpose of the rule, competing on the date
qualified him for a Special Exempt. Once he has declared his intent to the Super- the qualifying competition begins shall be defined as: “Starting or re-
visor or Player Relations staff, he must accept the Special exempt, if eligible, or suming a match as part of that day’s (normally Saturday) scheduled
be subject to the applicable withdrawal/late withdrawal penalties. program”. If the player wins the match, he is eligible to be consid-
ered for a special exempt position.
5) If, on the day prior to the start of qualifying, a player does not finish his match by
Special Exempt Awarded if Player Is in Semis?
nine (9) p.m. local time at the qualifying site and subsequently loses his match,
then he is not eligible to be signed in for qualifying or for a special exempt; how- Case: A tournament has a Saturday final and a player asks for a
ever, he may receive a wild card from the tournament if it is known before the special exempt after he wins his quarterfinal match on Thursday. Is
qualifying draw that he has lost and that no special scheduling shall be required. he eligible?
Decision: No. The player must be scheduled to play on Saturday
6) A player who does not appear after accepting a special exempt shall be treated when the “qualifying begins”.
as an entered player and shall receive appropriate penalties.
Case: A player is a potential special exempt for one or more
Potential Special Exempt Playing at 9 p.m. Friday Challenger tournaments. Can he also preserve his eligibility on an
Case: A player is competing in the singles event of a “qualified original acceptance list?
event” on the night before the next week’s qualifying. If the player Decision: Yes. A player who is a possible special exempt may also
wins, he will be eligible for a special exempt. His singles match, preserve his eligibility on an original acceptance list, however the
however, will not be completed by 9 p.m. local time at the qualifying player may only preserve his eligibility on one list.
site for the next week’s tournament. How does this affect the “com- NOTE: If he preserves his eligibility on an original acceptance list
position of draws” at the next week’s tournament? and gets in that main draw before he has completed his match for
Decision: The special exempt slot in the main draw shall be left the special exempt spot, he would be removed as a possible special
available pending the result of the player’s match. The qualifying exempt. Conversely, if he wins his match and thus becomes the
draw should be made as required at 9 p.m. unless it is prudent to special exempt before he is accepted in the main draw from the
wait up to an hour for the match result. If the player vying for the original acceptance list, his name would be removed from eligibil-
special exempt loses, then the unused special exempt place shall ity on the original acceptance list. He is obligated to compete at
be filled by the next player on the original acceptance list*. If the whichever tournament he gets in the main draw first. Before he is
next player on the original acceptance list is in the qualifying draw, accepted in the main draw from the original acceptance list, his
then he shall be withdrawn and moves into the main draw. The name would be removed from eligibility on the original acceptance
vacancy created in the qualifying draw shall be filled from the quali- list. He is obligated to compete at whichever tournament he gets in
fying alternate list. the main draw first.
*For ATP Challenger Tour events, the vacancy is filled from the next Case: A player has won a position as a Special Exempt but he is
player on the Acceptance List who properly preserved his eligibility also next on the Acceptance List. After the draw is made, but prior
at that event. to the start of the qualifying competition, there is a late withdraw-
Potential Special Exempt Loses: After 9 p.m. al and the player gets in due to the withdrawal. Does his status
Case: A potential special exempt player loses his match at 9:15 change from SE to Direct Acceptance, thus allowing the Special Ex-
p.m. on the night prior to the start of the qualifying competition and empt to go to the next player who earned the Special Exempt spot?
he calls the qualifying sign-in site requesting that he be given a Decision: Yes, since the player ultimately got in because he was
wild card into the singles qualifying competition. May a wild card be next on the list, this frees up the Special Exempt for the next player
given to him for the next week’s tournament if the qualifying draw who earned it. If there are no Special Exempts, the list drops by the
has not been made? applicable number of spots.
Decision: Yes. The wild card belongs to the tournament, which may Am I kept on the Special Exempt List?
give it to this player as long as the draw has not been made and Case: A player expresses an interest in a Special Exempt spot prior
no special scheduling is required because of the travel plans of the to the match that will qualify him for the position and becomes a
player. possible Special Exempt. He does not contact the Supervisor or

154 155
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Player Relations staff member to accept the Special Exempt within except for substitution. Doubles main draw matches shall not begin until all dou-
one hour after the completion of the match that qualifies him. Is he bles qualifying matches are completed unless approved by the Supervisor.
kept on the list of possible Special Exempts?
Decision: No. If the player does not contact the Supervisor or B. Qualifying
Player Relations staff member no later than one hour following the 1) Singles – ATP Tour. The qualifying competition draw shall be made and the order
completion of the match that qualified him, to accept the Special Ex- of play announced as soon as possible but no earlier than 6:00 pm local time on
empt spot, he will be taken off the list of possible Special Exempts. the day prior to the start of the qualifying.
Must I Appear for Play After Accepting a Special Exempt?
2) Singles – ATP Challenger Tour. The qualifying competition draw shall be made
Case: A player is listed as a possible Special Exempt and the
and the order of play announced as soon as possible but no earlier than 6:00 pm
Supervisor confirms with him that he is interested in the spot. There
local time on the day prior to the start of the qualifying competition.
are other Special Exempt players ahead of him on the list of possi-
ble Special Exempts whose matches are scheduled after his. No 3) Doubles - ATP Tour 500. The qualifying competition draw shall be made and the
later than one hour after the match that qualifies him as a Special order of play announced as soon as possible following the sign-in deadline unless
Exempt, he informs the Supervisor or Player Relations staff member otherwise determined by ATP.
that he accepts the Special Exempt spot. If the remaining possible
Special Exempt players ahead of him on the list lose their match- 7.12 Wild Cards
es, thus earning him the Special Exempt spot, must he accept the
Special Exempt? A. Regulations
Decision: Yes. Because he had accepted the Special Exempt spot 1) Singles.
within one hour after the match that qualified him, he is obligated to
a) Wild cards are players included in the main draw at the sole discretion of the
accept the position and shall be treated as an entered player and be
tournament. Wild cards must be named at the time the draw is made. Wild
subject to the appropriate penalties if he does not appear for play.
cards may be seeded. Tournaments may not receive compensation and play-
Case: Can a player with no ranking receive a Special Exempt if ers may not offer compensation in exchange for the awarding of a wild card.
otherwise eligible? b) A wild card is no longer eligible as an alternate at that event.
Decision: No. A player must have a singles ranking or a singles i) A main draw wild card may not be re-classified as a direct acceptance,
protected ranking in order to be considered for a Special Exempt. due to withdrawals, once the acceptance list is finalized (when the first
Case: May a player who has entered and been accepted into an chip of the main draw has been drawn).
ATP Tour Qualifying draw starting on Sunday be considered for a ii) A qualifying wild card is eligible to be moved into the main draw as a direct
possible Challenger Special Exempt position for the following week? acceptance, due to withdrawals, up to the start of the qualifying event.
Decision: Yes, however the player must decide on Friday within an c) Once a qualifying competition has commenced (first ball of the first qualifying
hour after winning his match whether he will accept the Challenger match is struck), an entered player may not be offered nor the player accept
SE or stay on the ATP Qualifying list. Should the player decide to a wild card into any tournament that week.
accept an available Challenger SE position, he will be withdrawn d) A tournament may not offer a wild card or accept the entry from any player
from the ATP Qualifying with “still competing”. who has either accepted a wild card or been committed by an entry method
to another tournament in the same week.
7.11 Time of Draw 2) Singles – ATP Tour 500
A. Main Draw An additional Wild Card is awarded to the tournament with the following restric-
tions.
1) Singles. The tournament shall publicly make the singles draw no earlier than 10
AM Eastern Time, USA, on Friday prior to the Monday of the tournament week a) The Wild Card must be named no later than 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA on
and no later than 10 p.m. local time two (2) days before the first day’s play, unless the Friday before the event week; and
the tournament receives prior written permission from ATP. The time and place b) The player must be an A+ player as designated by that event’s region.
of the draw shall be determined by the tournament. For events approved for a c) If the tournament does not use the additional Wild Card by the deadline then
Sunday start, the draw shall be made no earlier than 10 AM Friday, Eastern time the position in the main draw goes to the next eligible player on the entry list.
USA and no later than 12 noon local time the day prior to the start of the event. 3) Doubles.
2) Doubles. The draw for doubles is to be made as soon as possible after the on- A tournament may not enter players as a wild card team without the consent of
site entry deadline unless otherwise approved by the Supervisor. If the draw for both players. A wild card may be offered to any team that is not a direct accep-
a tournament is played over eight (8) or more days, then the draw is to be made tance on the original acceptance list after entries have closed. A wild card may
by midnight of the second day. Once the draw is finalized there can be no change be offered to one player on an entered team if it is conditioned on his playing with
a specific player. Wild cards must be named at the time the draw is made. Wild

156 157
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
cards may be seeded. Tournaments may not receive compensation and players draw of any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament and be
may not offer compensation in exchange for the awarding of a wild card. withdrawn from that qualifying event. The vacancy created in the
qualifying shall be filled by an eligible alternate.
B. Limitation Unused Wild Cards
1) Singles. Players may accept up to five (5) main draw singles wild cards into ATP Case: A tournament elects not to use all of its main draw singles
Tour tournaments during any ATP Circuit Year. Wild cards shall only count toward wild cards. How are these spots filled?
the annual limit if the player would have been a direct acceptance on the original Decision: If the qualifying has not begun, the next player on the
acceptance list. Additional exceptions are outlined below. acceptance list is moved into the main draw. If qualifying has begun,
a lucky loser is to be inserted into the main draw.
a) Players who cannot participate in ATP Tour tournaments and ATP Challenger
Tour tournaments for six (6) months because of a physical injury may petition
ATP for one additional wild card.
7.13 Selection of Entries
b) In the event that a player’s position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings is A. Singles Main Draw
insufficient to make him a direct acceptance on the forty-two (42) day accep-
tance list, then he shall be released from his commitment to that tournament, 1) Direct Acceptances. Direct acceptances are players accepted directly in the
unless offered a wild card to the contract tournament within twenty-four (24) draw by virtue of their position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or by their pro-
hours of the entry deadline. Such wild card accepted by a player shall not tected ranking position (singles). The list to be used for ATP Tour tournaments
count in the player’s annual limitation of five (5) wild cards in singles. shall be dated approximately forty-two (42) days prior to the Monday of the (first)
c) Any player who becomes thirty-five (35) years of age by December 31 of an tournament week and twenty-one (21) days prior to the Monday of the tourna-
ATP circuit year shall be exempt from the wild card limitation if he is: ment week for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments.
i) A former singles Champion of a Grand Slam; or 2) Qualifiers. Qualifiers are players who are included in the main draw as a result
ii) A former singles Champion of the ATP World Championships, Tennis of their success in a qualifying competition. If the main draw is made prior to the
Masters Cup or Nitto ATP Finals; or completion of a qualifying competition, it shall include as many qualifying places
iii) A former No. 1 ranked player in the ATP Rankings prior to January 2000; as there are sections in the qualifying draw. Each of these qualifying places shall
or be positioned in the main draw in accordance with standard drawing procedures.
iv) A former No. 1 player in the year-end ATP Rankings. Determination as to which qualifier goes into which qualifying place shall be by
d) Players may petition ATP for exceptions to these limitations. drawing after the qualifying competition ends.
2) Doubles. There shall be no limitations of doubles wild cards for players.
3) Special Exempts (SE). Players may receive a special exempt into the main draw
Two Chances of the following week’s tournament if they meet the criteria and apply for it in a
Case: Can a player who loses in the qualifying receive a wild card timely manner. If the main draw is to be made before a potential special exempt
into the main draw? player plays on Friday, then such place(s) shall be drawn in the same manner
Decision: No. as qualifier, i.e., four qualifiers (“Q”) and one or two “SE” depending on whether
Wild Card After ATP Tour Qualifying Withdrawal there are one or two possibilities. Each of the five or six slots are marked “Q/SE.”
Case: A player withdraws from the qualifying of an ATP Tour As soon as the “SE” match results are known, either the “SE” or the next direct
tournament on Friday at any time because he is still competing in acceptance (if the SE lost) is randomly drawn and inserted into the draw.
an ATP Challenger Tour tournament. The player is offered a wild NOTE: Once a player has become eligible for Special Exempt consideration, he
card in another ATP Challenger Tour event to be held the following must confirm to the Supervisor or Player Relations staff no later than one (1) hour
week. May the player accept the wild card or do the provisions of following the completion of the match that qualified him for a Special Exempt, that
“No Play After Late Withdrawal” apply? he is applying for the Special Exempt position.
Decision: The player is allowed to accept the wild card. Because
4) Wild Cards. Wild cards are players included in the main draw at the sole dis-
the player was competing in a qualified event on the Friday, he
cretion of the tournament.* Wild cards must be named at the time the draw is
is allowed to withdraw from the ATP Tour qualifying event without
made. Wild cards may be seeded. Tournaments may not receive compensation
penalty and therefore it is not considered as a “Late Withdrawal”.
and Players may not offer compensation in exchange for the awarding of a wild
Wild Card Pulled from Challenger Qualifying card.
Case: After a Challenger qualifying draw has been made but before
that challenger qualifying competition has officially begun, may a * See 7.12 A. 2) for restrictions pertaining to ATP Tour 500 additional Wild Card.
player who is included in that qualifying draw be offered and accept May I Accept a Challenger Wild Card after Losing in an ATP
a wild card into that or another tournament’s main draw? Tour Qualifying?
Decision: Yes. As long as the qualifying competition has not begun Case: Can a Tournament Director at a Challenger, which is held in
(first ball is struck), a player may accept a wild card into the main the same week as an ATP event, request permission to offer a main

158 159
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
draw wild card to a player who has lost in the qualifying of the ATP day before the start of the qualifying. Thereafter, the deadline is one half (1/2)
Tour event? hour before the first scheduled match each day an Alternate may be required.
Decision: No. A player may only compete in one tournament per 2) Direct acceptances – ATP Challenger Tour (50-125).
week.
a) Qualifying Sign-In. Players who personally sign-in for the qualifying event
May I Play Grand Slam Qualifying After Losing in an ATP Tour shall be accepted based upon their position on the most recent Pepperstone
tournament? ATP Ranking followed by the most recent Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rank-
Case: Can a player lose in the main draw of an ATP event, which is ing.
held the week before a Grand Slam tournament, and be eligible to
compete in the qualifying for the Grand Slam event that is held that The sign-in shall also include those players coming from other events who
same week? are eligible to be signed-in by the ATP Supervisor or Tournament Referee.
Decision: Yes, as long as he meets the entry deadline set by the Case: A player enters an event using his current ranking. After the
Grand Slam event. The player is not violating the one tournament deadline, he realizes he did not get in with his current ranking and
per week rule because the main draws for the two events are in informs the Supervisor that he wants to use his protected ranking.
different weeks. May he do this?
May I Accept a Wild Card after Withdrawing from an ATP Tour Decision: No, the intent to use a protected ranking must be de-
Qualifying? clared at the time of entry and cannot be declared after the deadline
Case: A player was still competing in a Challenger on the day for the event.
before Qs started at an ATP Tour event. He wanted to withdraw b) On-Site Alternate Sign-In. There shall be an on-site alternate sign-in on the
from the Qs due to “still competing” and then take a wild card into a day of the start of qualifying. The sign-in deadline is one half (1/2) hour before
Challenger event. Is this allowed? the first scheduled qualifying match.
Decision: Yes. The rule states that he may withdraw without
penalty from the qualifying if he is still competing on the day prior Priority for the on-site alternate sign-in is based upon the most recent Pep-
to the commencement of the qualifying. By withdrawing due to“still perstone ATP Ranking and then players using their most recent Pepperstone
competing”, he is allowed to accept a wild card. ATP Doubles Ranking.
May I Sign In for Doubles after Withdrawing from an ATP Tour 3) Any vacancy created by the withdrawal of a seed (for any reason), after the qual-
Qualifying? ifying draw has been made but prior to the release of the order of play for the first
Case: A player was still competing on the day before Qs started at day of the qualifying event, shall be filled by the next highest positioned player
an ATP Tour event. He wanted to withdraw from the Qs due to “still or team in the qualifying draw eligible to be seeded. The position vacated by that
competing” and then sign in for doubles at the same or other event. next highest positioned player or team shall then be filled by the next eligible
Is this allowed? player or team on the qualifying draw alternate list.
Decision: Yes. The rule states that he may withdraw without pen- Can I Sign In
alty from the qualifying if he is still competing on the day prior to the Case: An ATP Tour tournament with an advanced entry qualifying
commencement of the qualifying. The “without penalty” would re- holds an Alternate Sign In on Friday night. If a player does not sign-
lieve him from the “No Play After Withdrawal” provisions of the rules. in on Friday night, may he sign-in on the Saturday morning Alternate
sign-in sheet?
B. Singles Qualifying Decision: Yes. Following the sign-in occurring prior to the qualifying
1) Direct acceptances – ATP Tour. Direct acceptances are players accepted di- draw being made, the Alternate sign-in on the day of first round play
rectly in the draw by virtue of their position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or is a new list and any player who is on-site and with a Pepperstone
by their protected ranking position (singles). The list to be used for ATP Tour tour- ATP Ranking (singles or doubles) is eligible to sign-in.
naments shall be dated approximately twenty-one (21) days prior to the Monday Unranked Players as Alternates
of the tournament week. Case: The tournament has used their wild card allocation. Are play-
a) If there are still places available for direct acceptances in the qualifying draw, ers without a ranking eligible to sign in as alternates?
the next players selected shall be those with the highest position on the most Decision: No. Unranked players are only allowed into the draw as a
recent Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings list. wild card selection.
b) There shall be an alternate sign-in list comprised of players that sign in who Fill by Random or Alternative Method
are not selected as direct acceptances. In the event that direct acceptance Case: After concluding the qualifying sign-in, there are not a suf-
players are not present for first-round qualifying matches or if players are ficient number of players listed in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings
moved into the main draw from the qualifying (before the first ball is hit), play- (singles/doubles) to fill the draw. If there are still additional vacan-
ers shall be selected from the alternate sign-in list in the order described in cies, may the Tournament Director fill the remaining spots with
sections 1), and 2) above. Alternate sign-in deadline is 6:00 pm local time the players according to the local system?
160 161
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: No. Unranked players are only allowed into the draw as a Only One Doubles Player Has Ranking
wild card selection. Case: A doubles team has one player who is listed in the Pepper-
Case: A player asks to be signed-in to the doubles qualifying which stone ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Ranking and one
begins on Saturday. He is in another tournament and is playing the player who is not. Can the team be in the doubles draw?
doubles final scheduled for Saturday. He asks that he be signed-in Decision: Since one player does not have a ranking, the only way
if he gets a bye for Saturday, as he would not be able to play the into the draw is via a wild card.
qualifying on Saturday. NOTE: The rationale for this is that all players, except Wild Cards,
Decision: The entry for doubles qualifying cannot be accepted. The must be an ATP member or a registered player. Since one player of
player could sign-in for main draw doubles, but not for qualifying. the team does not have a ranking, he is not eligible to register and
therefore the only way into the draw is via Wild Card.
C. Doubles Main Draw - ATP Tour. Direct acceptances for ATP Tour events shall be in
the following order: Use of Both Rankings
Case: A player has a protected singles ranking of 201, true singles
1) Teams composed of players in either the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or the Pep- ranking of 458, protected doubles ranking of 320 and true doubles
perstone ATP Doubles Rankings. The combined positions of the two players us- ranking of 408. Can the player use his protected singles ranking to
ing best Pepperstone ATP Rankings (singles or doubles) shall be added together enter doubles when he has already used it to enter the singles of
and the total used to determine the direct acceptances. The most recent Pepper- that tournament or does he have to use his ‘true’ singles ranking or
stone ATP Rankings and/or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings list, including a his protected doubles ranking?
protected ranking, shall be used. Decision: The protected singles ranking CAN be used for entry into
Ties are broken as follows (including protected rankings): the doubles. It would not count against his allowed total for singles
events but would count against his doubles allotment.
a) Team using two (2) doubles rankings.
b) Team using one (1) doubles ranking. D. Doubles Main Draw – ATP Challenger Tour
c) Team using two (2) singles rankings. Challenger 50-125
Note: For ties between teams with the same composition: Direct acceptances for ATP Challenger events shall be in the following order:
i) For teams using two (2) Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, the fewest
number of doubles tournaments played and then the team with the high- 1) Teams composed of players in either the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or the Pep-
est number of points. perstone ATP Doubles Rankings. The combined positions of the two players (us-
aa) If one (1) team is using a protected ranking, then they are placed ing best Pepperstone ATP Rankings - singles or doubles) shall be added together
below the team using two (2) actual rankings; and the total used to determine the direct acceptances. The most recent Pepper-
bb) If both teams have one (1) or two (2) members using a protected stone ATP Rankings and/or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings list, including a
ranking, then the team with the strongest individual Pepperstone ATP protected ranking, shall be used.
Doubles Ranking, including protected ranking, will receive priority; Ties are broken as follows (including protected rankings):
ii) For teams using one (1) singles & one (1) doubles - the team with the
strongest individual Pepperstone ATP Doubles Ranking will receive prior- a) Team using two (2) doubles rankings.
ity; b) Team using one (1) doubles ranking.
iii) For teams using two (2) Pepperstone ATP Rankings, the team with the c) Team using two (2) singles rankings.
strongest individual Pepperstone ATP ranking. Note: For ties between teams with the same composition:
iv) If none of the above break the tie, then the order shall be determined by i) For teams using two (2) Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, the fewest
a draw. number of doubles tournaments played and then the team with the high-
Case: A player enters an event using his current ranking. After the est number of points.
deadline, he realizes he did not get in with his current ranking and ii) If one (1) team is using a protected ranking, then they are placed below
informs the Supervisor that he wants to use his protected ranking. the team using two (2) actual rankings;
May he do this? iii) If both teams have one (1) or two (2) members using a protected, then the
team with the strongest individual Pepperstone ATP Doubles Ranking,
Decision: No, the intent to use a protected ranking must be de-
including protected ranking, will receive priority;
clared at the time of entry and cannot be declared after the deadline
iv) For teams using two (2) Pepperstone ATP Rankings, the team with the
for the event.
strongest individual Pepperstone ATP Doubles Ranking will receive prior-
2) If the doubles draw cannot be filled by teams where both members are listed ity.
in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, the v) For teams using two (2) Pepperstone ATP Rankings, the team with the
remaining places shall be filled with byes. strongest individual Pepperstone ATP Ranking will receive priority.
vi) If none of the above break the tie, then the order shall be determined by
a draw.
162 163
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
E. Seeds - ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour 7.15 Number of Seeds
The number of seeds shall be as follows:
Seeded teams will be determined by using the combined Pepperstone ATP Doubles
Rankings of the two players (protected ranking not included). Ties shall be broken as
follows: Singles Doubles
4 competitors - 2 seeds (singles Q)* 4 teams - 2 seeds (Qualifying)
1) The team with the fewest events played is positioned higher.
16 competitors - 8 seeds (singles Q) 16 teams - 4 seeds
2) The team with the highest number of points is positioned higher.
24 competitors - 12 seeds (singles Q) 24 teams - 8 seeds
3) A coin flip or draw if a tie remains.
28 competitors - 14 seeds (singles (Q) 32 teams - 8 seeds
F. Qualifiers
48 competitors - 24 seeds (singles Q)
Qualifiers are teams who are included in the main draw as a result of their success in 32 compeitiors - 8 Seeds
a qualifying competition. If the main draw is made prior to the completion of a qualify- 28 competitors - 8 seeds
ing competition, it shall include as many qualifying places as there are sections in the
qualifying draw. Each of these qualifying places shall be positioned in the main draw 48 competitors - 16 seeds
in accordance with standard drawing procedures. Determination as to which qualifier 56 competitors - 16 seeds
goes into which qualifying place shall be by drawing after the qualifying competition
ends. 96 competitors - 32 seeds

G. Wild Cards. Wild cards are players included in the main draw at the sole discretion of *ATP Challenger Tour Qualifying only
the tournament. Wild cards must be named at the time the draw is made. Wild cards
may be seeded. Tournaments may not receive compensation and players may not
7.16 Placement of Seeds - Main Draw
offer compensation in exchange for the awarding of a wild card.
The procedures for placing seeds in the main draw are as follows:
7.14 Seeds Definition A. Place seed 1 on line 1 and seed 2 on line 32 (32 draw), line 64 (64 draw) or line 128
Seeds are players who are given preferential positions in the draw based on the (96 draw); and
Pepperstone ATP Rankings. The selection and arrangement of seeds shall be based
upon the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings list (the protected ranking is not B. To determine the location of the remaining seeds, draw in groups according to the
considered). Each tournament shall have a seeded draw and there shall be only one following chart:
seeding list. Seeding shall not be official until the final draw is made. For doubles,
seeded teams will be determined by using the combined Pepperstone ATP Doubles 16 Draw 32 Draw 64 Draw 96 Draw
Rankings of the two players (entry protection not included). Seeds 4 Seeds 8 Seeds 16 Seeds 32 Seeds
3-4
Any vacancy created by the withdrawal of a seed, after the draw has been made but First Drawn 5 9 17 33
prior to the release of the order of play for the first day of main draw, shall be filled Second Drawn 12 24 48 96
according to the procedures described under vacancies. 5-8
Protected Ranking is for Entry, Not Seeding First Drawn 8 16 32
Case: May a player’s protected ranking be used for seeding purpos- Second Drawn 16 32 64
es? Third Drawn 17 33 65
Decision: No. The protected ranking position can be used for: 1) Fourth Drawn 25 49 97
entry into the qualifying competition and main draw, or 2) special 9-12
exempt position. It may not be used for: 1) seeding, or 2) lucky loser First Drawn 9 17
order. Second Drawn 25 49
Third Drawn 40 80
Fourth Drawn 56 112
13 - 16
First Drawn 8 16
Second Drawn 24 48

164 165
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Third Drawn 41 81 round loser’s prize money but only first round loser’s points for the Pepperstone
ATP Rankings, if applicable.
Fourth Drawn 57 113
17 - 24 B. Doubles Main Draw
First Drawn 9
Second Drawn 24 1) If there is a 16 or 32 main draw, no byes shall be awarded.
Third Drawn 41 2) If there is a 24 main draw, each seeded team shall be awarded a bye.
Fourth Drawn 56
3) Any team that received a “bye” and loses in the second round shall receive sec-
Fifth Drawn 73
ond round loser’s prize money but only first round loser’s points for the Pepper-
Sixth Drawn 88
stone ATP Doubles Rankings, if applicable.
Seventh Drawn 105
Eighth Drawn 120 C. Qualifying Draw
25 - 32
First Drawn 8 If there are not enough competitors to fill the qualifying draw, then after the seeds are
Second Drawn 25 placed in the draw, the required number of byes shall be awarded as follows:
Third Drawn 40
1) Priority shall be to the highest seeds.
Fourth Drawn 57
Fifth Drawn 72 2) Remaining byes shall be drawn by groups of two (2) going into one (1) section
Sixth Drawn 89 (e.g., if there are 10 byes, eight go to seeds and the remaining two are drawn
Seventh Drawn 104 into one section; if there are 11 byes, nine and 10 are drawn into one section and
Eighth Drawn 121 the 11th is randomly drawn into one of the other three (for a 32 draw qualifying
competition) remaining qualifying sections).
7.17 Qualifying Placement
7.19 Remake of Draw
A. Singles
A. Singles
1) There will be one section, having two (2) seeds, for each qualifying position in the
main draw. The first seed shall be placed at the top of the first section. The second If two (2) or more of the top eight (8) seeds withdraw more than twenty-four (24)
seed shall be placed at the top of the second section and so on until all sections hours before the start of the singles tournament, the tournament may choose either
have one (1) seed on the top line of each section. The remaining seeds shall be to remake the draw or let the draw stand. If a wild card withdraws after the original
placed together and drawn with the first drawn placed on the last line of the first draw and the draw is to be remade, the vacancy created may be filled at the tourna-
section, second drawn placed on the last line of the second section and continued ment’s option by a substitute wild card. If the tournament elects not to use a substitute
in this manner until each of the sections have two seeds. wild card, the vacancy shall be treated as any other vacancy.
2) The names of the remaining players shall be drawn and placed in the vacant
spaces not occupied by the seeds or byes beginning at the top of the draw. B. Doubles

B. Doubles Prior to the draw being finalized (not sooner than when it is published but not later
than when the first ball of the doubles tournament is struck as determined by the
Two teams shall be seeded in a four-draw event with the seeds being placed on Supervisor), use the following procedure: If one-fourth or more of the seeded teams
lines 1 and 4. withdraw, or a minimum of two (2) seeded teams in a 16-team draw withdraw, the
Tournament Director has the option to have the draw remade if approved by the
7.18 Byes - Assignment and Placement Supervisor. If the draw is remade, the original pairings may not be changed except
where vacancies occur.
A. Singles Main Draw
Case: A draw has to be remade. How is the remake of the draw
1) If there is a 32 main draw, no byes shall be awarded unless there are an insuffi- done?
cient number of direct acceptances. Decision: There are 2 methods for remaking a draw: (1) Retaining
2) If there is a 28 main draw, the top four (4) seeds shall be awarded a bye. the original order of the chips drawn and (2) Starting from the begin-
ning and redrawing the chips.
3) If there is a 48 or 96 main draw, each seed shall be awarded a bye.
Retaining the original order of the chips drawn is the preferred meth-
4) If there is a 56 main draw, the top eight (8) seeds shall be awarded a bye. Any od and is used in all cases except when the cause of the remake
player who received a “bye” and loses in the second round shall receive second had to do with an issue with the chips, such as a loss of a chip; a

166 167
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
chip being accidently thrown back into the bowl and drawn a second deadline as appropriate. Such list shall not be available for sign-in on the preced-
time, etc. ing day. All lucky loser sign-in deadlines must be placed on each day’s schedule
In the instance of remaking the draw retaining the original order of of play.
the chips, the following procedure is followed: 3) The sign-in for doubles lucky losers or alternates shall follow the same proce-
1) The Chip List (order of the names of players and/or teams) is regen- dures as the sign-in for singles lucky losers or alternates. One member of a lucky
erated loser team may sign in for the team. If there is no qualifying competition, substi-
2) The draw is populated using the list of chips drawn in the original tutions shall come from the alternate list of teams not accepted directly into the
order main draw through the on-site sign-in procedure. In either case, only substitutions
3) No other action is taken of the originally paired teams are permitted. If two (2) or more positions become
In the instance when the draw is remade by starting from the begin- available at the same time during the preceding period, the positions to be occu-
ning and redrawing the chips., the following procedure is followed: pied shall be determined by drawing.
1) The Chip List (order of the names of players and/or teams) is regen- a) There shall be one Lucky Loser / alternate sign-in sheet that will have all
erated. eligible Lucky Loser / alternate* teams listed.
2) The Chips are redrawn according to the procedures outlined in the b) The system of merit for alternates is based on the same method as used in
ATP Rulebook 7.09 the system of merit for entry.
Where does the “No Match” go? c) The system of merit for Lucky Losers is based on the same method as used
Case: At an ATP Tour Qualifying, the draw is made and the OP to determine seeding.
is published on Friday night. Overnight, 3 withdrawals occur. The 4) Vacancies in ATP Tour 500 Doubles main draw will be filled by the following meth-
players who withdrew were on Line 2, Line 11 and Line 13. The next od:
morning, only 2 players sign in for the on-site alternate list leaving a
“No Match” spot for the draw. How is it determined on which line the a) Team losing in the final round of qualifying shall be the number 1 lucky loser;
“No Match” is placed? and
b) The two teams losing in the first round of the doubles qualifying shall be
Decision: By random draw.
numbers two (2) and three (3) based upon their ranking as used in the deter-
mination of seeds; and then
7.20 Lucky Losers, Substitutions and Vacancies
c) All teams who signed in for the on-site alternate entry list and were not ac-
A. Lucky Loser Selection cepted or could not participate in the qualifying and shall be ordered based
upon their rank on the acceptance list.
32/16Q Draw events shall use the same protocol as secified for ATP Tour events in d) Teams who did not enter through the online on-site alternate sign-in are eligi-
section 7.20 A. 1) below. ble* to sign the daily alternate sign-in and are placed below those teams on
the alternate list as defined in a), b) and c) above.
A player may be entered in the main draw of a tournament if he meets the criteria e) One player from each team must sign the daily lucky loser / alternate sign-in
outlined for a lucky loser. sheet to be eligible to fill a vacancy.
* To be eligible, alternate teams who did not enter through the online protocol
1) Lucky losers are players who have lost in the final round of the qualifying event
must sign-in on the first day of the doubles competition.
or, if more lucky losers are required, those players who have lost in the previous
5) Vacancies in ATP Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 250 Doubles main draws occurring
qualifying round(s). Lucky Losers shall be selected based on the computer rank-
after the withdrawal deadline but prior to the draw being made will be filled by the
ings as follows: If there are no vacancies when the qualifying event has been
next team on the on-site alternate list.
completed, then the order of the Lucky Loser list shall be selected on the basis of
their position on the Pepperstone ATP Rankings (singles or doubles) list used for 6) Vacancies in ATP Masters 1000 and ATP Tour 250 Doubles main draws occurring
determination of qualifying seeding (protected ranking is not considered). If there after the draw has been made will be filled by the first of the following methods:
is a vacancy in the main draw when qualifying is completed then the order of the a) Teams who were not accepted into the main draw through the on-site alter-
two (2) highest ranked players shall be randomly drawn, thereafter the order shall nate sign-in list; then
follow the players’ rankings, unless there are two (2) or more withdrawals at the b) Teams who did not enter through the online on-site alternate sign-in and
time the Qualifying competition is finished in which case the size of the random teams where one member of the team is eligible to re-pair following the with-
draw will be the number of withdrawals plus one (1). In the case where players drawal of his partner are eligible* to sign the daily alternate sign-in and are
from the previous round are included in the draw they will be placed behind all placed below those teams on the alternate list who did enter through online
players who have lost in the final round of qualifying. Only those accepted into the on-site alternate sign-in method.
qualifying competition may sign in as lucky losers. * To be eligible, alternate teams who did not enter through the online protocol
2) The lucky loser list shall be posted each day at least one (1) hour before the sign- must sign-in on the first day of the doubles competition.
in deadline, which shall be one-half (1/2) hour before the first scheduled match
of the day. If rain or other disruptions occur, then the Supervisor can change the
168 169
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
7) Teams may remain on the alternate list for multiple events in the same week, faulted team. 7.20 B 2) b) states that to be eligible for substitution, a
however, they may only sign-in at one of those events on any given day. lucky loser (alternate) must “be ready to play within five (5) minutes
after the announcement of a default for punctuality”.
8) Vacancies in Challenger Doubles main draw will be filled from the on-site alter-
nate list using the same protocol as used for entries. Teams who did not enter ATP POLICY: Alternates (Lucky Losers) are to be ready when
through the on-site sign-in and teams where one member of the team is eligible called upon to fill a vacancy. By signing the daily alternate (Lucky
to re-pair following the withdrawal of his partner are eligible* to sign the daily Loser) list they are declaring that they are on-site and ready to play,
alternate sign-in and are placed below those teams on the alternate list who did if needed. While every effort will be made by ATP staff to locate
enter through the on-site sign-in method. the alternate/LL teams it is the alternate/lucky loser teams/players
responsibility to keep ATP staff informed of their whereabouts and
* To be eligible, alternate teams who did not enter through the on-site protocol to remove their names if they leave the site or otherwise become
must sign-in on the first day of the doubles competition. unavailable for substitution.
Advance Entry Qualifying
Case: A team submits an advance entry for a 250 tournament with
one of the players using a protected ranking. They are among 6 Case: How are vacancies handled for ATP Tour qualifying events if
teams not ranked high enough to be selected. The other 5 teams there are no eligible players remaining on the Advanced Entry list
are using their best of rankings. Where is the team using the pro- and there are not enough players who signed the Friday On Site
tected ranking placed on the alternate list if they are the next team Alternate list to fill the draw?
in based on that ranking or the 4th highest team using their best of Decision: If there are no eligible players remaining on the Ad-
ranking? vanced Entry list and there are not enough players who signed the
Decision: The team using the protected ranking is placed at the Friday On Site Alternate list to fill the draw then Byes should be
top of the alternate list. Protected ranking is used for entry into a awarded to the seeded players by ranking order. Any additional
tournament either directly or as an alternate (either an advanced vacancies occurring after the draw will be filled from the “day of”
entry or as an on-site entry). Alternate sign-in list.
Who is inserted as the doubles alternate? ATP 500 Doubles Qualifying
Case 1: After the sign-in deadline for doubles alternate has closed, Case: How are vacancies handled for ATP Tour 500 doubles quali-
there are 7 teams signed-in. At 16:55 a team scheduled to play at fying if there are not enough teams who entered the Qualifying Entry
17:00 withdraws due to injury of one of the players. The #1 team list or through the On-line On-site entry method to fill the draw?
on the alternate list is inserted into the draw. The match is called at Decision: If there are not enough teams who signed the Qualifying
17:00. It is discovered that the inserted team is at the hotel and at Alternate list to fill the draw then Byes should be awarded to the
17:15 the alternate is defaulted for punctuality. What should be done seeded teams by ranking order. Any additional doubles Qualifying
now? vacancies occurring after the draw will be filled from the “day of”
Decision: If an eligible alternate team cannot be found who is ready Alternate sign-in list.
to go on court by 17:20, then a walkover is awarded. 7.20 B 2) b) B. Lucky Loser/Alternate Substitution
states that to be eligible for substitution, a lucky loser (alternate)
must “be ready to play within five (5) minutes after the announce- 1) A lucky loser/alternate shall be inserted in the appropriate position as a substitu-
ment of a default for punctuality”. tion for any player who withdraws or is withdrawn before the first ball of his first
ATP POLICY: While every effort must be made to locate an eligible, match is struck.
signed-in alternate team, the 15 minute punctuality rule must be en- NOTE: A player winning a match by walkover is considered to have played a
forced to protect the opponent who is ready to play. It is incumbent match.
upon the teams signed-in as alternates to be available, reachable
and ready to go when the match is called or within 5 minutes of the 2) In order to be eligible for substitution, a lucky loser/alternate must:
announcement of a punctuality default. In the instance of one player a) Sign the lucky loser/alternate sign-in record at least one-half (1/2) hour prior
on court in singles, his partner must be available, reachable and to the first scheduled match of each day; and
ready to go, the team would be inserted and the match rescheduled. b) Be ready to play within five (5) minutes after the announcement of a default
This policy extends to Lucky Losers also. for punctuality.
Case 2: A doubles match is called at 11:00 AM and one of the c) If the eligible lucky loser/alternate is not available to play, he shall be placed
teams cannot be found. At 11:15 AM a punctuality default is award- at the bottom of the lucky loser/alternate priority list for that day correspond-
ed. How is the vacancy filled? ing to the qualifying round in which he lost. If the eligible player is playing in
Decision: The highest ranked doubles team from the alternate list the doubles event at the time he is called as a lucky loser/alternate in singles,
who are eligible to be inserted in the draw and are ready to play the singles match may be rescheduled so he can fill the lucky loser/alternate
within the five (5) minute allotted time period will replace the de- position, provided the Supervisor determines that the rescheduling does not

170 171
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: The vacancy should be filled from Monday’s lucky loser
cause an unreasonable disruption of the schedule or does not cause the win-
list. However, since no one signed the lucky loser list on Monday,
ner to play a second match that day; otherwise the next available lucky loser/
the vacancy shall be filled from the Tuesday lucky loser list, if any
alternate shall be selected to fill such vacancy.
eligible players sign in. If no one signs on Tuesday, then a walkover
shall be awarded.
Alternate Sign-In Procedures
Who Goes In?
Case: The two (2) players ahead on an alternate list do not sign in
1/2 hour before the singles qualifying matches are to begin. One (1) Case: A player withdraws from the singles event on Tuesday. His
of the players arrives on-site just before it is known that an alternate singles match was not scheduled until Wednesday. There was
is going to be needed. Who gets in? a singles lucky loser sign-in on Tuesday. The last singles match
scheduled for Tuesday has not gone on court. Is the vacancy filled
Decision: Neither of the two (2) players. In order to be eligible for
from Tuesday or Wednesday’s lucky loser sign-in?
substitution, an alternate must sign in before the deadline and must
be ready to play within five (5) minutes of being called. Decision: Tuesday’s sign-in.
Doubles Alternate at two tournaments? C. Vacancies - Doubles
Case: A team signs in for doubles at two tournaments the same
week. They do not get into the main draw, but are the #1 alternate ATP Tour
at both events. The team signs the Alternate list at tournament A
1) A team shall constitute a doubles entry. If either of the players of a team cannot
on Monday and Tuesday and then wants to sign the Alternate list at
play, that doubles entry is subject to withdrawal and substitution.
tournament B on Wednesday. Are they permitted to do this?
Decision: Yes, however, a team is only eligible to be signed in on 2) If the withdrawal is from the advance acceptance list and prior to 10 AM (EST)on
one “live” list per day. the Friday before the event, then the next team on the alternate list is moved into
Eligible for Lucky Loser - ATP Tour the main draw.*
Case: May a player or team sign the lucky loser sign-in sheet if they *Exception - If a player has to withdraw based on a medical reason or other
are not accepted into the qualifying competition? unavoidable circumstances after the entry deadline, but prior to 10 AM (EST) on
Decision: No. To be eligible as a lucky loser, a player or team must the Friday before the event, his partner may enter again and re-pair with another
have played and lost in the qualifying event. player who has not already been accepted into the doubles event, and this new
Extending Closing Times team may be considered for acceptance based on its position in the entry list in-
cluding any entry protection position (the re-pairing team must have a combined
Case: The first-round singles matches are scheduled to start at 10
entry ranking better than the first alternate team to remain as a Direct Accep-
a.m. A steady rain is falling at 9 a.m. and it is decided to postpone
tance).
the start of play until 11 a.m. should the lucky loser sign-in be
extended? ● If the new combined entry ranking is worse than the first alternate team,
Decision: Yes. Extend the deadline to 10:30 a.m. the new team will lose their Direct Acceptance position and be placed on
Case: The lucky loser Sign-in closed at 10:30. A player arrives at the Alternate List as per their new combined entry ranking.
10:45 to sign in saying that: ● If a team is re-pairing on the Alternate List, and the new combined entry
1. The Referee told me that the deadline would be at 11:00; or ranking is BETTER than the alternates above them, they will keep their
2. Somebody on the phone said the deadline was 11:00; or original position on the list and NOT move up on the Alternate list.
3. Tournament transportation was 45 minutes late. ● If a team is re-pairing on the Alternate List, and the new combined entry
Decision: ranking is WORSE than the alternates below them, they WILL move down
1. Allow the player to sign in. Information given by the Referee (if on the Alternate List.
verified) must be honored. The re-pairing team entry must be received prior to the withdrawal deadline by a
2. Sign-in not allowed. Players receiving information over the phone player relations staff member or the ATP Supervisor. If the entry is not received
do so at their own risk unless they speak directly to the Supervisor by the deadline, the team will be withdrawn and the list will drop to the next active
or Referee. team, which will be considered committed at that point.
3. Sign-in not allowed. The player is responsible for arriving on time.
Players are allowed to use the re-pair option up to 4 times per a calendar year.
Which Lucky Loser to Insert?
Case: On Monday before the last singles match has gone on court, 3) If the withdrawal is from the advance acceptance list and occurs after the 10 AM
a player whose first-round singles match is scheduled for Tuesday is (EST) deadline on the Friday before the event then an additional on-site entry
forced to withdraw because of injury. No one signed the lucky loser position is created for each withdrawal.
list on Monday. How is the vacancy resolved?

172 173
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
a) For both 2 and 3 above, the partner of the withdrawing player may enter dou- sign-in deadline but before the draw, his partner may enter again with another
bles or sign in for the singles qualifying of the same or another event through player who has not already been accepted into the main draw doubles event. This
the on-site entry method; or new team may be considered for acceptance based on its position in the entry list
b) If the withdrawal was due to one or both players being accepted into the main including any entry protection position.
draw singles of another ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event, then both Remake of the Draw
players may enter the doubles of that event through the appropriate on-site Case: On Monday morning, two (2) of the four (4) seeded teams
entry procedure. withdraw from a 16-draw doubles event. The doubles competition
4) If a player from a team that is a direct acceptance withdraws based on a medical has not yet begun. May the draw be remade?
reason or other unavoidable circumstances after the on-site sign-in deadline, his Decision: Yes. However, it is the option of the tournament.
partner may enter as an on-site alternate with another player who has not already
been accepted into the main draw doubles event. This new team may be consid- D. Prior to Qualifying Competition
ered for acceptance based on its position in the on-site entry list including any
entry protection position, as specified in 7.20 A. 6) b). 1) ATP Tour Singles. After the main draw is made and prior to the commencement
of the qualifying competition, all vacancies created by the withdrawal of unseeded
Can I Sign In For Q’s after Withdrawing from Doubles? players including wild card withdrawals, shall be filled by the next highest posi-
Case: A player is withdrawing from a Doubles Advanced Entry list tioned player(s) on the original acceptance list. If the vacancy was created by the
where he is a direct acceptance. Can he sign in for the singles withdrawal of a seed, then the procedures for replacing seeds are followed and
qualifying of another ATP or Challenger tournament that same week the vacancy created by replacing the seed is filled by the next highest positioned
or play doubles somewhere else? player(s) on the original acceptance list.
Decision: No. However, his partner, who was not the reason for the
2) ATP Tour Doubles. After the main draw is made and prior to the commence-
withdrawal, can sign in for singles qualifying or find another partner
ment of the qualifying competition, all vacancies created by the withdrawal of un-
and sign-in on-site for doubles at the same or another tournament.
seeded teams including wild card withdrawals, shall be filled by the next highest
Can I Withdraw from Doubles to Accept a Singles Wild Card? positioned player(s) on the on-site entry list. If the vacancy was created by the
Case: A player, who is main draw in doubles, is offered a singles withdrawal of a seed, then the procedures for replacing seeds are followed and
wild card into an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event. Can he the vacancy created by replacing the seed is filled by the next highest positioned
withdraw from main draw doubles to accept this singles wild card at player(s) on the on-site entry list.
another event?
3) ATP Challenger Tour. After the withdrawal deadline and prior to the start of
Decision: Yes. The player can withdraw from the doubles before
Qualifying, vacancies will be filled in ranking order from the original main draw
the doubles on-site entry deadline to accept a wild card into the
acceptance list by players who have preserved their position on the list. Players
singles. This would be considered the same as the player being
from the main draw alternate list who are directly accepted into qualifying are con-
accepted into the main draw singles of another ATP Tour or ATP
sidered to have preserved their eligibility. A player can only preserve his eligibility
Challenger Tour tournament which is allowed.
on one list. If there are no Alternates from the original main draw acceptance list
Partner Injured: Who May Replace Him? who have preserved eligibility, the vacancy will be filled by the highest ranked
Case: A player’s doubles partner withdraws after the on-site sign-in player from the qualifying or alternate list using the Pepperstone ATP Rankings,
deadline but before the draw is made. In looking for a new partner, and then the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings, used for seeding.
is the withdrawing player’s partner allowed to choose another part-
ner from the qualifying draw? If the vacancy was created by the withdrawal of a seed, then the procedures for
replacing seeds are followed and the vacancy created by replacing the seed is
Decision: No. The player seeking a new partner may not team
filled by the next highest positioned player(s) from that event’s alternate sign-in
with any player who is accepted into the qualifying or main doubles
list, following the protocol specified above.
draws. He may re-enter with any player that he chooses as long as
their combined position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings qualifies ATP Tour Main Draw Vacancy Before Qualifying Starts
them by virtue of the system of merit for doubles entries. He may Case: After making the qualifying draw, a vacancy occurs in the
not select from players who will be or who are in the qualifying draw main draw. How is the vacancy filled?
based on the sign-in sheet.
Decision: If the qualifying competition has begun, the vacancy is
ATP Challenger Tour filled by the eligible lucky loser. If the qualifying competition has
not begun, the vacancy is filled by the next player on the original
1) A team shall constitute a doubles entry. If either of the players of a team cannot acceptance list.
play, that doubles entry is subject to withdrawal and substitution.
2) If a player from a team that is a direct acceptance in the main draw withdraws
based on a medical reason or other unavoidable circumstances after the on-site

174 175
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
E. Qualifying started or finished c) If a position becomes available during the day, the highest positioned player
who has signed that day’s lucky loser sign-in record shall be inserted at the
1) During Qualifying Competition. If a lucky loser position should become avail-
time the withdrawal is confirmed.
able during the qualifying competition, it shall be treated the same as the qualify-
d) Positions becoming available after the start of play for the last match of each
ing places for placement in the main draw. If a seeded player or team withdraws
day in that event (singles or doubles) shall be filled by the highest positioned
after the main draw has been made but prior to the release of the order of play for
player who signs the lucky loser sign-in record on the successive day of play.
the first day of main draw in that event, the vacancy created by the withdrawal of
e) When two or more positions become available at the same time, the positions
a seed shall be filled by the following method:
to be occupied by each lucky loser shall be determined by drawing.
a) 32/48/64/96 Singles Draw and 16/24/32 Doubles Draws. The vacancy shall f) In all such cases, the Supervisor is responsible to notify a player(s) that he is
be filled by the next highest positioned player or team in the main draw eligi- in the draw.
ble to be seeded. The appropriate lucky loser shall fill the remaining vacancy.
b) 28 Draw. If the vacancy involves a seed #1-4, then seed #5 moves to the When is the withdrawn player replaced?
vacated seed position and the next highest positioned player in the main draw Case: A player withdraws from the main draw 2 hours prior to the
eligible to be seeded shall be placed in the position vacated by the #5 seed. close of the lucky loser sign-in deadline. A few minutes later, the
The appropriate lucky loser shall fill the remaining vacancy. If the vacancy highest ranked lucky loser signs in. There is still one hour left before
involves a seed #5-8, then the next highest positioned player in the main the lucky loser sign-in deadline closes. As the player who signed-in
draw eligible to be seeded shall be placed in the vacated seed position. The is the highest ranked LL, is he inserted at that moment, or is the
appropriate lucky loser shall fill the remaining vacancy. vacancy filled after the sign-in deadline passes?
c) 56 Draw. If the vacancy involves a seed #1-8, then seed #9 moves to the Decision: The player is not inserted in the draw until after the sign-
vacated seed position and the next highest positioned player or team in the in deadline as others may withdraw necessitating drawing for the
main draw eligible to be seeded shall be placed in the position vacated by available spots. Multiple withdrawals occurring after the last match
the #9 seed. The appropriate lucky loser shall fill the remaining vacancy. If of that event began on the previous day, and the time that the sign-
the vacancy involves a seed #9-16, then the next highest positioned player in deadline closes on the next day, are considered to have occurred
or team in the main draw eligible to be seeded shall be placed in the vacated at the same time and the positions to be occupied by each lucky
seed position. The appropriate lucky loser shall fill the remaining vacancy. loser shall be determined by drawing.
Seeds Withdraw or Are Withdrawn
Case: The team seeded 4th withdraws after the draw but prior to 7.21 Match Scheduling
the order of play being released for the first day of main draw. How
is the vacancy filled? A. Scheduling Committee
Decision: For a 16 team draw, the vacancy created by the removal
of a seeded team is filled by the next highest positioned team eligi- The scheduling of matches and daily order of play in all tournaments shall be pre-
ble to be seeded. The appropriate alternate or lucky loser team shall pared by the Referee and/or Tour Manager and approved by a committee composed
fill the remaining vacancy. of the Tournament Director, Supervisor, Referee and the Tour Manager. In cases
where the scheduling committee cannot agree, the Supervisor shall make the final
Qualifier Eligible To Be Seeded
decision.
Case: A qualifier’s ranking was high enough for him to be seeded in
the main draw. The main draw was completed prior to the end of the B. Tournament Week Plan
qualifying event. After the player had qualified but prior to the order
of play being released for the first day of main draw a seeded player 1) Main Draw. The main draw should be scheduled so that the first round in singles
withdraws. Is the qualifier eligible to be seeded? begins on Monday and the finals in singles and doubles are completed by Sun-
Decision: Yes. The successful qualifier shall be accorded the same day, unless the tournament has special permission from ATP forty-two (42) days
right to be seeded as the other players who have gained entry as in advance of the event to complete the tournament on Saturday or on Monday.
Direct Acceptances, Wild Cards, Special Exempt etc. As per ATP a) Considerations and Priorities. The following priorities in the order listed
rules a player may not use his Protected Ranking for seed purposes should be followed:
2) Other Vacancy Procedures After Qualifying Starts. i) Schedule the halves of the draw together particularly from Wednesday
onward. At indoor tournaments, second rounds can be split within sec-
a) After the qualifying commences (when the first ball of the first match is struck), tions if necessary to avoid Monday/Thursday (singles).
main draw vacancies may only be filled by eligible lucky losers (and eligible ii) Schedule quarters together as an alternative.
alternates in the case of a Challenger event). iii) Avoid Monday/Thursday (singles) or Tuesday/Friday (doubles). Schedule
b) If a lucky loser position becomes available after the places for qualifiers are some doubles on Monday.
drawn for the main draw but before the first day of the main draw event, the iv) The singles quarterfinal matches on Friday should be scheduled by
highest positioned lucky loser shall be inserted into the draw provided he can halves and as close together as possible.
be notified.
176 177
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
v) Schedule one doubles semi-final on Friday (cannot be done if there are o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the next two (2)
two Saturday sessions). best courts with at least four (4) out of the seven (7) scheduled on the
vi) When weather or other unavoidable circumstances cause a disruption second overall best court.
in the schedule, a player may not be scheduled for more than three (3) ATP Tour Masters 1000 (32 draw doubles)
matches in a day without his consent. o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court
1. The matches may not all be singles without the consent of the player. during the tournament week.
2. Completion of a match in progress shall count as one (1) match. o Nine (9) doubles matches must be scheduled on the next two (2)
2) ATP Tour Qualifying. One (1) round per day except when weather or other un- best courts with at least four (4) out of the nine (9) scheduled on the
avoidable circumstances require two (2) rounds to be played on the same day. second overall best court.
Final. The doubles final is to be scheduled prior to the singles final. It is rec-
a) In ATP Tour events, one round shall be played on Saturday and the final
ommended that the time of the final is no earlier than two (2) hours before the
round shall be played on Sunday except when weather or other unavoidable
singles final, unless otherwise approved by ATP.
circumstances forces two rounds to be played on Sunday.
It is further recommended that the tournament begin each session (day and
b) In ATP Tour 250 events, one round shall be played on Sunday and the final
night) with a doubles match as an “opening act”.
round shall be played on Monday except when weather or other unavoidable
If exceptional circumstances do not allow for a doubles match to be sched-
circumstances forces two rounds to be played on Monday.
uled on the Center Court or a designated show court, then best efforts shall
ATP Tour 250 events may elect and will be approved for qualifying to be held
be made by the scheduling committee to schedule an additional doubles
on Saturday and Sunday. A notification for Saturday – Sunday qualifying must
match on one of the other show courts, if any.
be submitted in writing by the tournament and received by the appropriate
a) Exceptional Circumstances may include, but are not limited to, the fol-
ATP regional office no later than six (6) months prior to the first Monday of the
lowing:
event.
i) Contractual television obligations.
3) ATP Challenger Tour Qualifying. One (1) round per day except when weather
ii) Security issues.
or other unavoidable circumstances require two (2) rounds to be played on the
iii) Weather or other scheduling interruptions.
same day.
iv) Combined with WTA Tour event.
C. Daily Scheduling Overview v) Unforeseen circumstances as determined by the scheduling committee.
Definition of show court(s): Center Court and all other courts that are used to
1) Feature singles matches should be scheduled after the scheduling committee televise matches; or, if only Center Court is televised, then the next court with the
considers the needs of players, television, tournament and the public.Tourna- greatest number of spectator seating.
ments may not schedule more than two (2) evening matches to begin no later
than 7:30 p.m. local time (6:30 p.m. recommended) without prior ATP approval. Violation of this section may subject the Tournament to the penalties set
forth in VIII. The Code - section 8.02 Tournament Violations.
2) The scheduling committee must schedule a doubles match on all show courts
(including Center Court) as follows: 3) Normally, matches are scheduled using “to follow on assigned court.” However,
assigning feature matches a time or “not before” basis is permissible. The Tourna-
ATP Tour 250 (16 draw doubles) ment Director should understand that scheduling “not before” in a Center or show
o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court courts may result in a court not having a match until the announced time.
during the tournament week.
ATP Tour 250 (24 draw doubles) 4) First round doubles matches can be scheduled on a “not before” basis which will
o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court then allow for the fixing of the lucky loser or alternate sign-in deadline.
during the tournament week. 5) Starting matches after Midnight is not recommended (after 1:00 a.m. should be
o Four (4) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Grandstand or avoided). The ATP Supervisor may postpone a match after examining the impact
second court. on the tournament and the players. If postponing the match is not possible, then
ATP Tour 500 (16 draw doubles) consideration must be given to moving a match to another court, if available.
o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court
during the tournament week. Note applicable to all ATP Tour Tournaments on a trial basis in 2024: A max-
ATP Tour 500 (24 draw doubles) imum of 5 matches may be scheduled per court starting at 11 a.m. with three (3)
o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court matches during the day session and two (2) matches during the evening session.
during the tournament week. Any match not on court by 10:30pm will be moved to another court at 11 p.m.
o Four (4) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Grandstand or local time. No matches will be started after 11 p.m. local time, unless approved
second court. by the ATP Supervisor in consultation with ATP management. The ATP Schedul-
ATP Tour Masters 1000 (24 draw doubles) ing Working Group reviewing tournament Match Schedule Plans shall have the
o Seven (7) doubles matches must be scheduled on the Center Court authority to consider and issue waivers for deviations from the above trial sched-
during the tournament week. uling rules based on local cultural traditions or weather conditions.

178 179
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
D. Order of Play mine to what extent players still competing may have difficulties in arriving for
play. To the extent possible, and providing it does not jeopardize the fairness
The daily order of play is the published summary of all matches scheduled for a par- of scheduling and the completion of his tournament, matches should be sched-
ticular day. uled so that each player with reasonable difficulties can be accommodated. The
Supervisor shall whenever possible give the player one full day’s rest between
1) Release Deadline. Once the scheduling committee determines the order of play,
his last match played in a previous week’s tournament or event and the play-
it should be released no later than 10 p.m. local time at the tournament.
er’s first match in the succeeding tournament, unless weather or unavoidable
2) Change. Once released, the order of play may not be changed except upon the circumstances have caused a schedule disruption or the player was a finalist in
approval of the Supervisor. a Monday or other delayed final. There shall be no first-round singles matches
scheduled to start on Wednesday in 32 draw outdoor tournaments without the
3) Notification.
approval of ATP or on-site Supervisor. The on-site Supervisor shall consider ap-
a) It is the responsibility of all players to ascertain their schedules from the Su- proving Wednesday starts only in the following circumstances:
pervisor/Referee for each day’s play.
a) If a player is competing on the Sunday in a Grand Slam, ATP Tour, ATP Chal-
b) The Supervisor/Referee should also use all available means to notify each
lenger Tour, Davis Cup or ITF M 25 tournament, and the following week’s
player of his schedule.
tournament is on a different continent; or in a Monday Final on the same con-
4) Notes / Reminders. Daily order of play must have footnotes reflecting the follow-
tinent. Davis Cup Ties on the same continent which are delayed until Monday
ing:
may also be considered. For the purposes of this rule the world is divided
a) The singles (and doubles) lucky loser sign-in deadline is______________(on into 7 distinct continents. They are Europe, Asia, Antarctica, Australia, Africa,
appropriate days). North America (including Central America) and South America.
b) The alternate sign-in deadline is __________(on appropriate days). In such cases, the match must be scheduled early Wednesday and if the
c) Any match on any court or session may be moved. player enters doubles, then he shall be required to play as determined by the
Supervisor.
E. Calling of Matches
The criteria listed in a) above shall not apply in the case where a tournament
The Supervisor determines when a match is to be called. Players must be ready to has been approved for a Saturday final.
play when their matches are called. The Supervisor shall determine when a match is
Case: A player competes in a Grand Slam Junior match on the final
to be called or when a match was in fact called. Schedules and match updates may
Sunday. Is he eligible for a Wednesday start if his next tournament
only be reliably obtained from the Supervisor, Tour Manager or the Referee.
is the following week and on a different continent?
F. Rain Decision: No. The Wednesday start provisions indicated in the ATP
Rulebook only apply to Main Draw Singles, Main Draw Doubles and
If because of rain, etc., a tournament cannot be completed within the tournament Mixed Doubles.
week, then, at the option of the tournament, one (1) extra day shall be allowed. The 2) Main Draw and Qualifying. Other than in exceptional circumstances, no player
Supervisor shall approve the commencement times for matches on the extra day, shall be required to play his first-round match in the singles main draw until at
which shall then be scheduled during the morning or early afternoon. No further ex- least twelve (12) hours after the completion of his final qualifying match. The
tension of the tournament shall be permitted without the approval of ATP. following should also be considered:
Case: A tournament with an approved and announced Saturday a) If a player plays two (2) rounds of singles qualifying on the first day of quali-
final is interrupted by weather so that the final is scheduled for Sun- fying, then the scheduled start time of his final round of qualifying shall be no
day. If adverse weather on Sunday prevents the match from being earlier than eighteen (18) hours from the start time of his second qualifying
played, may the tournament be extended to Monday at the option of match.
the tournament? b) If a player plays in two (2) singles qualifying matches on Sunday, then he
Decision: No. For a tournament with a Saturday final the tour- shall not be scheduled to play in a singles main draw match on Monday.
nament week would end on Saturday and the one (1) extra day However, the player may be scheduled to play, if necessary, a doubles match
allowed at the option of the tournament would be Sunday. It must on Monday.
be noted however that if play cannot be completed on Sunday then c) If a player plays in two (2) doubles qualifying matches on Sunday, then he can
ATP would consider approving Monday play only in the case where be scheduled to play in either one (1) singles or one (1) doubles main draw
all parties (tournament & all players) request to finish on Monday. match on Monday.
d) If a player plays in one (1) singles qualifying and two (2) doubles qualifying
G. Rest Periods - Minimums and Guidelines matches on Sunday, then he shall not be scheduled to play on Monday.
1) Between Main Draw and Prior Week’s Tournament(s). Before scheduling e) If a player plays in one (1) singles qualifying and one (1) doubles qualifying
matches for the first day of play, the Supervisor must contact the Supervisor(s), match on Sunday, then he can be scheduled to play in one (1) singles main
Referee(s) or Tour Manager(s) of the preceding week’s tournament(s) to deter-
180 181
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
draw match on Monday. The singles match is to be scheduled early if that 4) Between Singles Semi-final and Singles Final
player is also playing in a doubles qualifying match (final) on that Monday. a) When the two (2) semi-final matches are not to be played consecutively, then
f) If the final doubles qualifying match is scheduled for Monday, the main draw the scheduled start time of the final shall be no earlier than eighteen (18)
doubles matches shall be scheduled no earlier than three (3) hours after the hours from the scheduled start time of the second semi-final match. In the
final qualifying match. If the main draw doubles match should be scheduled case where the two (2) semi-final matches are to be played consecutively
earlier, then it is understood that if a doubles lucky loser is required, the match (i.e. “followed-by”), then the scheduled start time of the final shall be no earli-
shall be re-scheduled with that lucky loser inserted. er than twenty (20) hours from the scheduled start time of the first semi-final
g) Any player who becomes a lucky loser may be scheduled to play on Monday match.
regardless of the number of matches that he has competed in on Sunday. Ex- b) Tournaments are encouraged to plan the schedule so that it exceeds the
cept, however, a player who played in three (3) matches on Sunday may only minimum requirement.
play one (1) match (singles) on Monday. If the player is to be required to be c) If rain or other unavoidable circumstances have caused a disruption in the
a doubles lucky loser or is scheduled to play a main draw doubles match, the schedule, then after considering the interests of the tournament, the players,
doubles match would be rescheduled when his team is inserted into the draw the television and the public, the Supervisor shall determine the revised time
unless the Supervisor determines the schedule shall be adversely affected. of the semi-final and/or the final.
Case: Due to weather or other unforeseen circumstances, a player Player Entitled to Minimum Rest
played two singles qualifying matches on Monday in an outdoor Case: Because of rain delays, the singles semi-final and final
tournament. May he be scheduled for a main draw singles match on matches are scheduled for Sunday. The two (2) semi-final singles
Tuesday? matches are played on two (2) courts starting at 10 a.m. The final,
Decision: Yes. The provision of not playing on Monday after playing because of television commitments, is scheduled to begin at 2 p.m.
two qualifying matches on Sunday does not apply as there are no with live television coverage. One of the semi-final matches does
Wednesday starts permitted. not finish until 1:15 p.m. The tournament and the television staff still
3) Between Main Draw Matches. insist that the final match begin at 2 p.m. What is the solution?
a) Players shall not be scheduled to play in a match within twelve (12) hours Decision: The player is entitled to a minimum rest of 1 1/2 hours.
after completing his last match the preceding day. The final cannot start before 2:45 p.m.
b) Players shall not be scheduled for more than one (1) singles and one (1) Note: In circumstances where television is a factor, the Supervisor
doubles match per day, unless weather or other unavoidable circumstances should try to give as much flexibility as possible by starting the
have caused schedule disruptions. Completion of a match in progress shall semi-final matches as early as possible. Also, it is important to know
count as one (1) match. the latest start time acceptable for television. The goal is to give the
c) A player’s singles match on any particular day shall be scheduled before his players more than their minimum rest time between a semi-final and
doubles match(es) unless otherwise directed by the Supervisor. Even without final.
a schedule disruption, a player may be scheduled for two (2) doubles match- Rain: How Many Matches Per Player?
es if he is not scheduled to play in singles that day. Case: Rain has put the tournament behind schedule. Player A’s
d) Whenever it is necessary to schedule a player to compete in more than one singles match was suspended at one set all. Player A is also behind
match in the same day, a player shall be given the following minimum rest in the doubles. How many matches may player A be scheduled to
periods (other factors may result in more time being authorized) unless he is play the next day?
in a singles and doubles finals to be played consecutively: Decision: Three (3). Completion of a match shall count as one (1)
Outdoor Indoor match. If the player wins the singles match in progress then he may
i) If he has played less than 1 hour 30 min. rest 30 min. rest be scheduled for one (1) more singles plus one (1) doubles. If he
ii) If he has played between 1 and 1/2 hours 1 hr. rest 45 min. rest loses the first singles match, then he may be scheduled for two (2)
iii) If he has played for more than 1 1/2 hours 1 1/2 hr. rest 1 hr. rest doubles matches.
iv) If play has been interrupted for thirty (30) minutes or more because of rain
Scheduling Priorities
or other warranted delay, the length of match time would be assessed
from the moment play resumes after the delay. Case: In preparing the schedule of play for Wednesday in a 32-
v) If play is interrupted for less than thirty (30) minutes, match time would be draw outdoor event, the upper half of the draw is the half the tourna-
considered continuous from the moment the first ball of the match was ment would like to play. Several players will have played singles on
put into play. Monday and not again until Thursday if that half is played. Sections
e) Whenever it is necessary for a player to compete in two (2) singles matches of the draw would have to be split to accommodate players not hav-
in the same day, other than in exceptional circumstances a player shall be ing two (2) days off between singles matches. What is the correct
scheduled the following day no earlier than eighteen (18) hours from the start priority in scheduling?
of his last match of the previous day, singles or doubles. Decision: Scheduling in outdoor events must keep sections of
the draw together. Preferably, halves of the draw are scheduled

182 183
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
together, if that is not possible then quarters are scheduled together. b) Rule. A player may not appeal the determination made by the on-court offi-
Players playing singles on Monday and Thursday should be avoid- cials on a question of fact.
ed; however, halves of the draw should be kept together. Inclement 2) Questions of Tennis Law.
weather can adversely affect the schedule as well as the fair treat-
ment of the players unless these priorities are followed. a) Definition. A question of tennis law is defined as an issue relating to the
construction and application of specific facts to the ATP rules and regulations
Rain Delayed Semi-final, When to Play Final?
and the rules of tennis. During a match, the Chair Umpire shall first determine
Case: Rain on Saturday prevents both semi-final singles from being questions of tennis law. If the Chair Umpire is uncertain or if a player appeals
played. The second semi-final is played on Sunday morning, with the determination of the Chair Umpire, then the decision shall be made by the
the winner due to play the final that afternoon. Can the winner of the Supervisor, which shall be final and non-appealable.
second semi-final insist on a Monday final? b) Player Rights. A player shall have the right to appeal any ruling of tennis law
Decision: No. Every effort must be made to finish the tournament in accordance with the following procedures:
on Sunday. The winner of the second semi-final should be given i) When a player is of the opinion that a ruling by the Chair Umpire on a
the maximum amount of rest possible before playing the final. (ATP matter of tennis law is erroneous, he may appeal the ruling by notification
Policy) to the Chair Umpire in a professional and non-abusive manner.
Moving Indoors at an Outdoor event ii) The Chair Umpire shall stop play and immediately call for the Supervisor.
Case: Rain has disrupted play to the point where the event is in Upon the arrival of the Supervisor, the Chair Umpire shall state the facts
danger of not being completed. There are indoor courts available for of the incident and the Supervisor shall be bound by the facts as stated.
use. May the Supervisor move the matches indoors to complete this The Chair Umpire shall then state his position with respect to the ruling.
event? The Supervisor shall review briefly the applicable rules with the player
Decision: Yes. Under the responsibilities of the Supervisor it states and the Chair Umpire and either affirm or reverse the ruling.
that “the Supervisor may, if necessary to eliminate the possibility of iii) Play shall be resumed upon the statement of “Let’s Play” by the Supervi-
a player having to play two singles matches in one day, or if neces- sor and the players must proceed to commence play and the twenty-five
sary to complete the event, move a match to another court, indoors (25) second clock shall commence.
or outdoors, regardless of surface”. The exception to this is if the E. Tennis Law - Cases
Tournament Director demonstrates to the Supervisor that there will
Appeal of Judgment Calls
be a detrimental impact on the success of the tournament if singles
or doubles matches are played indoors. In this case, the Supervisor Case: A first serve is hit down the middle and is called out and then
may elect to keep all matches for outdoor play. (ATP Policy) corrected to good by the center service Line Umpire. The Chair
Umpire awards the point to the server, but the receiver disagrees
7.22 On-Court Procedures and Requirements saying that he had a play on the ball. The Chair Umpire agrees
and rules that the point be replayed. The Supervisor is called to the
A. Start of Tournament court.
Decision: Point to server. The Chair Umpire may not change a
A tournament shall commence when the first serve of the first point of the first match judgment decision after a player appeal.
is struck. Appeal of the “Facts”: Receiver
B. Start of Match Case: First point of a game, the first serve is called fault and over-
ruled by the Chair Umpire to good. The Chair Umpire then announc-
A match shall commence when the first serve of the first point is struck. es 15-Love. The receiver states that the point should be re-played
because he returned the ball into the court. The Chair Umpire real-
C. Rules of Tennis izes that the receiver did in fact return the ball and orders the point
to be replayed. The server claims that the Chair Umpire cannot
The Rules of Tennis shall apply to all ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments change his decision and asks for the Supervisor to be called.
except as amended by the ATP Official Rulebook. Decision: The point is re-played. The Chair Umpire’s initial award-
ing of the point to the server was incorrect based upon the facts as
D. Appeal of Calls described by the Chair Umpire: The receiver did return the serve.
1) Questions of Fact. Appeal of the “Facts”: Server
Case: First point of a game, the first serve is called fault and
a) Definition. A question of fact is defined as an issue relating to what actually overruled by the Chair Umpire to good. The Chair Umpire awards
occurred on court during a specific match. Only the on-court officials shall the point to the server based upon his judgment that the receiver
determine questions of fact arising during a match and the player or the Su- did not have a play on the ball. The receiver claims that he could
pervisor may not change such determinations.
184 185
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
have played the ball. The Chair Umpire is not sure of his original that the next time play is stopped by the Chair Umpire because of that play-
judgment and orders the point to be re-played. The server claims er’s similar actions; it shall result in a loss of point.
that the Chair Umpire may not change his judgment based upon an b) Any distraction caused by a player may be ruled deliberate and result in the
appeal from the receiver and asks for the Supervisor to be called. loss of a point (intentional or unintentional). Deliberate is defined as the play-
Decision: Point to the server. The facts on which the Chair Umpire er meant to do what it was that caused the hindrance or distraction.
based his initial decision did not change. Therefore, the Chair c) Care must be exercised to ensure rulings do not result in providing a player(s)
Umpire may not change his original decision based upon a player’s with two opportunities to win a point.
appeal or protest.
G. Hindrance Cases
Umpire Blocked on Question of Fact
Delaying the Server
Case: Player A stops play claiming that player B had played the
ball after it had bounced twice. The Chair Umpire said that he was Case: During a match with Review ELC in use, the receiver breaks
“blocked” and could not make the decision. a string after returning a first serve called fault. The server challeng-
es the fault call and the receiver changes his racket before the result
Decision: The point stands as played. When the Chair Umpire has
of the challenge is displayed on the screen. Should the server be
the primary responsibility for a call (nets, throughs, not-ups and
awarded a first serve if the call stands?
touches) as opposed to the secondary responsibility (line calls), an
immediate decision must be made. If the Chair Umpire did not see a Decision: Second serve, as the receiver changing his racket did not
rules violation on something for which he has the primary responsi- delay the server in any way.
bility then technically no violation can be called Corrected Call
Appealing for a Let Case: A second serve is a “net” call. The service Line Umpire calls
Case: Player A serves and player B returns the ball for a winner. “out,” then corrects it to “good.”
Player A appeals to the Chair Umpire that the service was a let. The Decision: Second serve
Chair Umpire says that he did not hear a let. Player A then asks Opponent’s Gear Falls On The Court
player B if he heard a let. Player B answers yes. Upon hearing this, Case: Clothing or equipment (excluding the racquet) that is worn or
the Chair Umpire says that since both players heard a let, we shall carried by a player, including a ball from his pocket, falls to the court
play a let. Player B objects saying that it is the Chair Umpire’s call during play.
and that he was only confirming to player A that the Chair Umpire Decision: The Chair Umpire shall call a let and replay the point. He
had made a mistake. shall also inform the player that if the Chair Umpire makes a second
Decision: The point stands as played. The Chair Umpire cannot call of let, it will result in a loss of point.
make assumptions as to the intent of player B’s comment. The Case: A player’s shoe comes off during play and is laying on the
Chair Umpire should be certain that the intention of player B was to court.
play a let before making any decision.
Decision: The default position of the Chair Umpire should be that
F. Hindrance. A hindrance may result (1) from a corrected call by an official or (2) from the point continues, unless the Chair Umpire is convinced that the
an inadvertent event that occurs on-court: opponent is hindered and in that case, a let could be called.
Opponent Makes Noise
1) Corrected Call. Whenever there is a corrected call either by overrule, correction
Case: During play, a player thinking he has hit a winner, shouts “va-
by a Line Umpire or otherwise, the Chair Umpire in his sole judgment must deter-
mos”, “come on”, “yes”, etc. as his opponent is in the act of hitting
mine if either player was hindered, and if so, order a “Let” to be played.
the ball.
a) If a call is corrected from “Good Ball” to “Out,” then the point is ended and Decision: If the Chair Umpire rules that a hindrance has occurred
there is no hindrance. then, as the sound or exclamation that caused the hindrance was
b) If the call is corrected from “Out” to “Good Ball,” then there must be a “Let” deliberate, the point shall be awarded.
played unless it was a clear ace or a clear winning shot that the player could
Inadvertent Hindrance
not possibly have retrieved. If there is any reasonable possibility that such a
Case: As a player is in the process of hitting a volley into the net,
ball could have been played, then the player who would have lost the point
his hat falls off. He then claims a let for hindrance.
must be given the benefit of the doubt.
2) Inadvertent or Deliberate event. A distraction occurring on-court may be ruled Decision: No let. A player may not hinder himself. A let should only
inadvertent (unintentional) or ruled deliberate. be called when the opponent could have been hindered.
Singles Stick Falls
a) Inadvertent distractions may include the following (a “Let” may be called in
Case: After a first serve fault, the singles stick falls to the court.
these cases): a ball rolling onto the court; a ball falling out of a pocket; a hat
falling off; or an involuntary sound or exclamation (ex. verbal reaction to an Decision: The Chair Umpire should award a first serve unless in
injury) from a player. Any player who created the hindrance must be advised his opinion the replacement time was such that the server was not

186 187
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
delayed in his delivery of a second serve. ing shot or when a player (team) stops playing the point during the rally (Re-
Spectator Noise turns are permitted but then the player must immediately stop). The Chair
Case: During play an “out” call is made by a spectator. The player Umpire shall check ball marks if there is some doubt about the accuracy of
stops playing and claims hindrance. the call.
Decision: The point stands as played. b) If the Chair Umpire sees a clear mistake, he may stop play with an overrule.
c) The original call or overrule shall always stand if the Line Umpire and/or Chair
Early Foot Fault Call
Umpire cannot determine the location of the mark or if the mark is unread-
Case: The baseline umpire calls a foot fault on the server prior to able.
him hitting a first serve. The server continues with his motion and d) Once the Chair Umpire has identified and ruled on a ball mark, this decision
hits the serve into the net. is final and not appealable.
Decision: First serve awarded. It is not a foot fault until the ball has e) In clay court tennis, the Chair Umpire should not be too quick to announce
been struck. Therefore, the call is erroneous and the Line Umpire the score unless absolutely certain of the call. If in doubt, the Chair Umpire
has hindered the server. should wait before calling the score to determine whether a ball mark in-
spection is necessary. Ball mark inspections made after the score has been
H. Overrule
announced or after first serves shall be done as quickly as possible so the
1) The Chair Umpire may overrule a Line Umpire only if (1) there is a clear mistake server is not unreasonably delayed.
by a Line Umpire, and (2) the overrule is made promptly after the mistake. A play- f) In doubles, the appealing player must make his appeal in such a way that
er may never appeal a determination on questions of fact to the Supervisor. either both players stop playing the point or the Chair Umpire stops play.
a) Clear Mistake. As a matter of practice the Chair Umpire must be in a posi- If an appeal is made to the Chair Umpire, then the Chair Umpire must first
tion to make a determination that a call was erroneous beyond a reasonable determine that the correct procedure was followed. If it is not proper or if it
doubt. To overrule a ball called “Good” by the Line Umpire, the Chair Umpire is late, then the Chair Umpire may determine that the opposing team was
must have been able to see a space between the ball and the line. To overrule deliberately hindered.
an “Out” or “Fault” call by a Line Umpire, the Chair Umpire must have seen g) Players may not cross the net to check a ball mark without being subject to
the ball hit on or inside the line. Clear foot-faults not called by the responsible the Code. A player may not erase marks unless he is conceding the call or
Line Umpire should be called by the Chair Umpire. after a ball mark inspection occurs and the Chair Umpire has made a final
b) Promptly. The Chair Umpire must overrule immediately after the Line Umpire decision.
makes the “clear mistake.” The overrule “call” must be made almost simulta- 2) Line Umpires
neously with the “clear mistake” made by the Line Umpire. a) If a Line Umpire has to make a close call, he must keep his eyes on the mark
2) A player may request that the Chair Umpire verify a call or other determination and should not look at the Chair Umpire.
of fact on a point-ending call made by an on-court official; upon such request the b) If requested by the Chair Umpire, the Line Umpire shall walk directly to the
Chair Umpire shall immediately verify the same either by his own personal obser- mark and identify the mark to the Chair Umpire. The Chair Umpire shall then
vation or upon confirmation of the Line Umpire or other on-court official involved. inspect the mark and make the determination.
The Chair Umpire may never overrule the call of a Line Umpire upon the request c) If directed by the Chair Umpire to identify a mark and the Line Umpire is not
of a player. A Line Umpire may never change a call as a result of a protest or sure of the mark, the Line Umpire must state immediately to the Chair Um-
appeal, except in the case of clay court ball mark procedures. pire, “I do not have the mark.”
3) The request, verification and resumption of play should be completed within the K. Clay Court Cases
twenty-five (25) seconds allowed between points. If the player prolongs the argu- Can’t Find Ball Mark
ment, the Chair Umpire should announce “Let’s Play,” and the player is subject to
Case: A Line Umpire calls a ball out on a clay court. The Chair
the provisions of the Code.
Umpire asks him to show the mark. The Line Umpire cannot locate
I. Correction/Verification of Call the mark and neither can the Chair Umpire.
Decision: The original (out) call must stand.
Line umpires. When a Line Umpire realizes that he/she has made an erroneous
Clay Court: Doubles Ball Mark Appeal
call, including an inadvertent sound, he/she should immediately call “Correction”
so that the Chair Umpire and the players are aware of the error. The Line Umpire Case: Player B returns a serve but his partner, player A, says, “wait”
should then make the corrected call. as he moves to look at the mark. The Chair Umpire stops play. The
opponent, player C, appeals to the Supervisor, saying player B
J. Ball Mark Inspection Procedures (Clay Courts) returned the serve, which player C put away.
Decision: The procedure was correct (The Chair Umpire stopped
1) Chair Umpire play after an interruption by player A.) The mark is examined and if
a) A ball mark inspection requested by a player (team) shall be allowed only if it is good, Team A-B loses the point; otherwise, it is a second serve.
the Chair Umpire cannot determine the call with surety on either a point-end-
188 189
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Must Both Players on a Team Stop to Get Ball Mark Inspection. 7) The original call or overrule will always stand if the electronic review is unable, for
Case: In doubles on a clay court, the second serve is called good. whatever reason, to make a decision on that line call or overrule. In this case, the
The receiver returns the ball but hesitates in search of the mark. His player shall not have his available number of challenges reduced.
partner crosses (poaches) and hits the ball into the net. The receiver 8) If there is no call made from the on-court officials (unsighted Line Umpire and
then appeals the second serve, stating that he stopped play prior to Chair Umpire cannot make the call) on a point ending shot, the Chair Umpire may
his reflex return. call for a review and the result of the review will not affect the remaining challeng-
Decision: The point stands as played. Both players must stop es of either player.
playing or the player appealing must do so in a manner that results
in the Chair Umpire stopping play. 9) The decision of the electronic review is final and cannot be appealed.
Overrule Then Inspect Ball Mark 10) A certified official, approved by the ATP Supervisor, shall act as the Review Offi-
Case: As a Chair Umpire, you overrule a ball on a clay court. The cial* and his duties shall include, but are not limited to:
player disagrees and asks for a ball mark inspection. You think that a) Determining which impact shall be reviewed by the system.
maybe you made a mistake on the overrule. b) Act as the final authority on tracking the number of challenges each player
Decision: The Chair Umpire should check the mark. has remaining.
c) Monitor the system to ensure that it is functioning properly.
L. Electronic Review / Electronic Review - Line Calling (Review ELC) d) Notify the Chair Umpire immediately in the case of a system failure or any
A. Electronic Review (Review ELC) other condition that prohibits or brings into question the ability of the system
to review a challenged call. In this case, the Chair Umpire shall immediately
The use of an approved electronic system for reviewing line calls and/or overrules is notify both players that review is not available until further notice.
authorized for use at ATP events. The protocol for Review ELC is as follows: * Review official and supporting technology staff shall be located within the sta-
dium or arena in a secured area and with an unobstructed view of the court.
1) A request for an electronic review of a line call by a player (team) shall be allowed
11) For each court that is using a review system, there shall be a minimum of one
only on either a point-ending shot or when a player (team) stops playing the point
(1) video board, of sufficient size, located in a position where the Chair Umpire,
during a rally (returns are permitted but then the player must immediately stop).
players and spectators may view the results of the challenge.
2) In doubles the appealing player must make his appeal in such a way that either
12) Review Official Protocol is described in “Exhibit T.
play stops or the Chair Umpire stops play. If an appeal is made to the Chair
Umpire the Chair Umpire must first determine that the correct appeal procedure B. Electronic Review - Live Line Calling (Live ELC)
was followed. If it was not correct or if it was late, then the Chair Umpire may
determine that the opposing team was deliberately hindered, in which case the The use of an approved Live ELC electronic line calling system is authorized for use
appealing team loses the point. at ATP events in 2024.

3) Each player/team shall receive three (3) challenges per set (excluding the tie- The following protocol shall be used.
break game). If the player/team is incorrect with a challenge, then one of the
challenges is lost. If the player (team) is correct with a challenge, then the player 1) There shall be no line umpires. All lines shall be called using the Live ELC System
retains his same number of challenges. Challenges remaining, if any, at the end approved by ATP to call all lines.
of a set do not carry over to the next set. 2) Foot-faults will be called by a Review Official monitoring two (2) court-level cam-
4) During the tie-break game in any set, each player/team shall receive one (1) ad- eras placed on the baseline and on the center service line at each end of the court
ditional challenge. This is in addition to any challenges not lost, if any, during the if available or the Chair Umpire.
set. 3) In the unlikely event the Live ELC system malfunctions, play will be delayed for up
5) For doubles, the Match Tie Break shall be considered as a new set and each until such time as the issue is corrected or 15 minutes have elapsed. If the issue
team shall receive three (3) challenges. Challenges remaining from the previous is not resolved within 15 minutes the ATP Tour Supervisor will decide when and
set do not carry over into the Match Tie Break. Successful challenges do not how the match will resume.
reduce the number of challenges that may remain. 4) If the Live ELC system fails to make a call, the call shall be made by the Chair
6) In order to challenge, a player must show an immediate interest in making a Umpire. If the Chair Umpire is unable to determine if the ball was in or out, then
challenge and must do it in a timely manner. The key to the policy is “immediate the point shall be replayed. This protocol applies only to point ending shots or
interest”. The player must also make his/her intention to challenge known to the in the case when a player stops play. In the case where there is no call, and the
Chair Umpire either verbally or visually using his racquet or finger. The Chair player stops play, the umpire shall call for the shot to be displayed on the video
Umpire will (a) reconfirm with the player his intent to challenge; (b) confirm that board for confirmation.
the player has challenges remaining; and (c) proceed with the electronic review. 5) If equipment is available, automatic replays of the call will be shown on the video
boards on point ending shots that are “out” by 15 centimeters or less. Winning
190 191
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
shots warranting a replay will be manually directed to the video board by the Re- been no interference which prevented the server from serving within that time
view Official. or a delay by the Chair Umpire.
6) Physical requirements for the on-site booth to be confirmed.. 4) Not Playing to the Reasonable Pace of the Server
a) Start Stop Watch. The Chair Umpire must start the stopwatch when the play-
M. Continuous Play/Delay of Game er is ordered to play or the moment the ball goes out of play.
b) Time Violation or Code Violation. The Chair Umpire must assess a Code
Play shall be continuous, except that a maximum of twenty-five (25) seconds may Violation if the receiver is employing “gamesmanship.” The Chair Umpire
elapse from the moment the ball goes out of play at the end of one point to the time must issue a Time Violation before the expiration of twenty-five (25) seconds
the ball is struck for the next point, except at a ninety (90) second changeover or a if the receiver’s actions delay the reasonable pace of the server.
one hundred and twenty (120) second set break. The procedures for enforcing this
5) Stoppage and Postponement of a Match
rule are as follows:
a) The Chair Umpire may stop a match temporarily because of or conditions
1) Time Between Points. 25 Seconds/Continuous Play of the grounds or weather. Any such stoppage by a Chair Umpire must be
a) Start Stop Watch. The Chair Umpire must start the stopwatch after the ball reported immediately to the Supervisor. Once a match is stopped and until
goes out of play or when the players are ordered to play. a match is postponed, the Chair Umpire must ensure that he, the players
b) Time Violation or Code Violation. A Time or Code Violation must be as- and all on-court officials remain ready to resume the match. The Supervisor
sessed if the ball is not struck for the next point within the twenty-five (25) makes the decision to postpone a match until a later day.
seconds allowed, except if the Chair Umpire extends the time for special cir- b) Upon stoppage or postponement by the Supervisor, the Chair Umpire shall
cumstances defined by ATP. There is no time warning prior to the expiration record the time, point, game and set score, the name of the server, the side
of the twenty-five (25) seconds. on which each player was situated and shall collect all balls in use for the
2) 90 Seconds/Change-Over (Changing Ends) match.
6) Warm up / Re-warm up.
a) Start Stop Watch. The Chair Umpire must start the stopwatch the moment
the ball goes out of play. There shall be a four (4) minute warm-up before a match and in the case of a
b) “Time.” The Chair Umpire must announce to players “Time” after one (1) stopped or postponed match, the period of warm-up shall be as follows:
minute has elapsed. If requested, prior to the match, by a television broad- a) 0-15 minutes delay — No warm--up;
caster, the Chair Umpire shall have the authority to delay the start of play until b) more than 15 minutes but less than 30 minutes —Three (3) minutes of warm-
the end of the ninety (90) second changeover period. up; and
c) “15 Seconds.” The Chair Umpire may announce to players “15 Seconds” if c) 30 or more minutes of delay — Four (4) minutes of warm-up [Five (5) minutes
the players are still at their chairs and/or have not started toward their playing at Challengers].
positions.
d) Time Violation or Code Violation. The Chair Umpire must assess a Time N. Video Review (“VR”)
Violation or, when applicable, a Code Violation (after a medical time-out or
treatment) if the ball is not struck for the next point within the ninety (90) sec- The use of VR to determine specific judgment calls is approved for use at events
onds / one hundred twenty (120) seconds allowed, provided there has been where there is Electronic Line Calling (“ELC”) and the VR system has been approved
no interference which prevented the Server from serving within that time or a by ATP.
delay by the Chair Umpire. The protocol for use is as follows:
3) 120 Seconds/Set Break
a) Reviewable calls
a) Start Stop Watch. The Chair Umpire must start the stopwatch the moment i) Not-up – ball bounced more than once prior to contact.
the ball goes out of play. ii) Foul shot – player carries the ball on the racquet, player contacts the ball
b) “Time”. The Chair Umpire must announce to players “time” after 90 seconds before it crosses the net, player’s racquet touches the ball while not under
has elapsed. If requested, prior to the match, by a television broadcaster, the the control of the player.
Chair Umpire shall have the authority to delay the start of play until the end of iii) Touch – ball touches player, or anything he is wearing or carrying (except
the one hundred twenty (120) second set break. racquet), player touches net while ball is in play.
c) “15 Seconds.” The Chair Umpire may announce to players “15 Seconds” if iv) Invasion – player touches the opponent’s court with any part of his body
the players are still at their chairs and/or have not started toward their playing or his racquet while the ball is in play.
positions. v) Through – the ball passes through the net instead of passing over the net.
d) Time Violation or Code Violation. The Chair Umpire must assess a Time vi) Hindrance – any decision on whether a point should be awarded, or the
Violation or, when applicable, a Code Violation (after a medical time-out or point should be replayed. Most common use of this would be a call cor-
treatment) if the ball is not struck for the next point within the one hundred rected from out to good and whether the player had a play on the ball.
twenty (120) / one hundred fifty (150) seconds allowed, provided there has vii) Original Call Stands – when a challenge to a line call has properly been
made and the line review system is unable to make a determination, the
192 193
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
chair umpire may review the call for clear evidence that confirms or over- play”. After another 25 seconds elapses, what does the Chair
turns the call on the court. Umpire do?
viii) Foot-faults Decision: A Code Violation is announced, (and possibly an inquiry,
ix) Scoring error such as, “Are you OK?”) followed by “Let’s Play”.
b) Process Two Explanations are Enough
i) When a reviewable call is challenged, the VR operator will find, through Case: A player asks for an explanation and is given one. He then
the various camera angles available, the best view of the incident. raises another point and receives another response. How long may
ii) The VR operator will then send the video to a screen attached to the this go on?
Chair Umpire’s chair.
Decision: Normally only twice since continuous play provisions are
iii) The Chair Umpire will review the video and determine if there is clear
not being complied with. After two brief responses, the Chair Umpire
evidence to support the original decision or to overturn the decision.
announces “Let’s Play” and subsequently issues a Code Violation if
iv) If there is no clear evidence, then the original decision stands.
the ball is not in play as a result of that player’s action.
c) Limit to Challenges
i) Each player will be limited to three (3) incorrect challenges during the set. Changing Shoes
ii) If any set reaches 6-all, each player will receive one (1) additional chal- Case: May a player receive extra time on a changeover in order to
lenge. change his shoes and/or socks? If yes, how many times may he do
iii) A review under a) vii) above shall not be recorded as a won/lost chal- so during the course of the match?
lenge. Decision: Yes. The Chair Umpire may allow a reasonable extension
of the allotted changeover time in order for a player to change his
O. Time and Equipment Cases
shoes and/or socks. The player should not be allowed to leave the
Crowd Movement court in this instance. The player is limited to one change per match
Case: The server is given a Time Violation for going beyond the 25 when extra time is granted unless the provisions for “equipment out
seconds that is allowed between points. The server claims that he of adjustment” take precedent. In that case, the Chair Umpire has
should have been given additional time because there were some the authority to decide each request on its own merit.
spectators taking their seats. Contact Lens
Decision: The Time Violation stands. The continuous play proce- Case: During a match, a player requests permission to leave the
dures shall be in effect regardless of spectator movement unless court in order to put in a contact lens.
the Chair Umpire believes the movement is intended as a deliberate Decision: The request to leave the court is denied. Contact lenses
attempt to distract a player(s) or occurs in the designated lowest tier shall not be considered as equipment out of adjustment unless the
of seats. player is wearing them at the time of the incident.
Ball Person as Personal Valet Note - Every attempt should be made to assist the player so that he
Case: A player receives a time violation from the Chair Umpire while may put the contact lenses in during the changeover.
waiting for the ball person to retrieve a towel. The player claims the Time: Refusal to Play
ball person caused the delay. Case: After several close calls that go against him, a player comes
Decision: The Time Violation stands. Toweling off between points to his chair on the changeover and says, “I’m not playing until the
with or without the help of a ball person is not a valid reason for Line Umpire Crew is changed”. After the Chair Umpire calls “Time”,
delay. the player says“, I told you I’m not playing until the Line Umpires are
Time Violation, No Play, Results in Code changed”. What should the Chair Umpire do?
Case: A player, upon hearing a Time Violation, comes to the Chair Decision: The Chair Umpire should order the player to play and
Umpire and asks “Why?” He receives an explanation followed by after 25 seconds use the Point Penalty Schedule.
“Let’s Play”. The player continues his discussion and is given a Re-Gripping Racquet
Code Violation. The player appeals to the Supervisor saying he Case: During a change of ends, while a player is re-taping the grip
should have received a Time Violation, Point Penalty. of his racquet, the Chair Umpire calls time. The player walks out to
Decision: The Chair Umpire suspends play and calls for the Super- the baseline still taping the grip. At the end of the 90 seconds, the
visor. Upon arrival, the Supervisor affirms the decision of the Chair player has failed to commence his serve and is still working on the
Umpire as the player was directed to play when the Chair Umpire grip.
said “Let’s Play.” Decision: The Chair Umpire issues a Time Violation. The racquet
Time Violation + 25 Seconds = Code is not equipment out of adjustment and therefore the player must
Case: A player receives a time violation while standing at the back serve within the allotted time. (Rules of Tennis, “Rule 29”.) Similarly,
fence. He does not move to play and the Chair Umpire says, “Let’s

194 195
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
adjusting the position of the strings or fixing string savers is not an 3) Any toilet break taken after the warm-up has started is considered the authorized
excuse for delaying play. break. Additional breaks will be authorized, but will be penalized with the back-to-
Replacing Shoes back Time Violations if the player is not ready within the allowed time.
Case: During a match, a player requests permission to leave the 4) The Chair Umpire has the authority to decide each request for change of attire
court area to retrieve another pair of tennis shoes. He states that he break on its own merit when provisions of “equipment out of adjustment” take
is slipping and wants to get a pair of shoes with a different sole from precedent.
his locker.
Toilet Visit
Decision: The request is denied. However, the Chair Umpire should
Case: In a best of three (3) set match, a player has used his one
use all possible means to have the shoes retrieved and brought to
toilet visit. The player informs the Chair Umpire that at the next
the court. This is not considered “Equipment Out of Adjustment”.
changeover he would like to take another toilet visit prior to his
The shoes could have been brought to the court with the player and
serving.
changed on-court; however, once he has the shoes, reasonable
time is allowed for the change. Decision: The Chair Umpire may allow a player to leave the court
but must inform the player that any delay beyond the 90 seconds
Shoe Breaks
will be penalized with the back-to-back Time Violations.
Case: A player breaks his shoe and he needs to change, but his
Toilet Visit: When Does Play Resume?
second pair is in the locker room.
Case: After play has been paused for an authorized toilet visit,
Decision: The Chair Umpire should stop play and allow the player
when does the “clock” start to resume play?
to get shoes.
Decision: When the player returns to the court and has had the
No Play After 90 Seconds
opportunity to retrieve his racquet, then the Chair Umpire should
Case: A player is not ready to play after the ninety (90) second announce “Time”. This announcement shall signal the players to
changeover (no injury involved). resume the match.
Decision: A Time Violation is announced. “Let’s Play” is normally
added. The same applies if a player is not ready to play after the Q. Medical
120-second set break.
1) Medical Condition
P. Toilet/Change of Attire Break A medical condition is a medical illness or a musculoskeletal injury that warrants
1) A player may be permitted to leave the court for a toilet or change of attire break. medical evaluation and/or medical treatment by the Physiotherapist during the
A player is entitled to one (1) toilet or change of attire break during a best of three warm-up or the match.
set match and two (2) toilet or change of attire breaks during a best of five set a) Treatable Medical Conditions
match. For best of five set matches one toilet break may be taken during the first i) Acute medical condition: the sudden development of a medical illness
three sets. The second break may only be taken after the end of the third set. Toi- or musculoskeletal injury during the warm-up or the match that requires
let or change of attire breaks may only be taken on a set break and can be used immediate medical attention.
for no other purpose. The toilet break is limited to a maximum of three (3) minutes ii) Non-acute medical condition: a medical illness or musculoskeletal in-
from the time the player enters the toilet. jury that develops or is aggravated during the warm-up or the match and
requires medical attention at the changeover or set break.
A change of attire break combined with a toilet break is limited to a maximum of
b) Non-Treatable Medical Conditions
five (5) minutes from the time the player enters the off court changing area/toilet.
i) Any medical condition that cannot be treated appropriately, or that will not
A change of attire break is limited to a maximum of five (5) minutes from the time be improved by available medical treatment within the time allowed.
the player enters the off court changing area/toilet. ii) Any medical condition (inclusive of symptoms) that has not developed or
Players will only be allowed to leave the court on a set break to change wet has not been aggravated during the warm-up or the match.
shorts/underwear. Shirts, socks, and shoes should be changed on court. iii) General player fatigue.
iv) Any medical condition requiring injections or intravenous infusions, ex-
Players exceeding the allowed time will be penalized by back-to-back Time Viola- cept for diabetes, for which prior medical certification has been obtained,
tions. and for which subcutaneous injections of insulin may be administered.
a) For doubles, each team is entitled to a total of one (1) toilet or change of at- For the avoidance of any doubt, the use of supplemental oxygen is not
tire break in all matches. If partners leave the court together, it counts as the permitted at any time.
team’s authorized break. 2) Medical Evaluation
2) Any time a player leaves the court for a toilet break or a change of attire break, it During the warm-up or the match, the player may request through the Chair Um-
is considered the authorized break regardless of whether or not the opponent has pire for the Physiotherapist to evaluate him during the next change over or set
left the court.
196 197
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
break. Only in the case that a player develops an acute medical condition that may be a total of two (2) full change of ends treatments for muscle cramping in a
necessitates an immediate stop in play may the player request through the Chair match, not necessarily consecutive.
Umpire for the Physiotherapist to evaluate him immediately.
Note: A player who has stopped play by claiming an acute medical condition, but
The purpose of the medical evaluation is to determine if the player has developed is determined by the Physiotherapist and/or tournament Doctor to have muscle
a treatable medical condition and, if so, to determine when medical treatment is cramping, shall be instructed by the Chair Umpire to resume play immediately.
warranted. Such evaluation should be performed within a reasonable length of
If the player cannot continue playing due to severe muscle cramping, as de-
time, balancing player safety on the one hand, and continuous play on the other.
termined by the Physiotherapist and/or tournament Doctor, he may forfeit the
At the discretion of the Physiotherapist, such evaluation may be performed in
point(s)/game(s) needed to get to a change of end or set-break in order to receive
conjunction with the tournament Doctor, and may be performed off-court. *
treatment.
If the Physiotherapist determines that the player has a non-treatable medical con-
If it is determined by the Chair Umpire or Supervisor that gamesmanship was
dition, then the player will be advised that no medical treatment will be allowed.
involved, then a Code Violation for Unsportsmanlike Conduct could be issued.
* It is recognized that national laws or governmental or other binding regula-
5) Medical Treatment
tions imposed upon the event by authorities outside its control may require
more compulsory participation by the tournament Doctor in all decisions re- A player may receive on-court medical treatment and/or supplies from the Phys-
garding diagnosis and treatment. iotherapist and/or tournament Doctor during any changeover or set break. As
3) Medical Time-Out a guideline, such medical treatment should be limited to two (2) changeovers/
set breaks for each treatable medical condition, before or after a medical time-
A medical time-out is allowed by the Supervisor or Chair Umpire when the Phys-
out, and need not be consecutive. Players may not receive medical treatment for
iotherapist has evaluated the player and has determined that additional time for
non-treatable medical conditions.
medical treatment is required. The medical time-out takes place during a change
over or set break, unless the Physiotherapist determines that the player has de- 6) Penalty
veloped an acute medical condition that requires immediate medical treatment. After completion of a medical time-out or medical treatment, any delay in resump-
The medical time-out begins when the Physiotherapist is ready to start treatment. tion of play shall be penalized by Code Violations for Delay of Game.
At the discretion of the Physiotherapist, treatment during a medical time-out may Any player abuse of this medical rule will be subject to penalty in accordance with
take place off-court, and may proceed in conjunction with the tournament Doctor. the Unsportsmanlike Conduct section of the Code of Conduct.
The medical time-out is limited to three (3) minutes of treatment. However, at 7) Bleeding
professional events with prize money of $50,000/€43,000 or less, the Supervisor
may extend the time allowed for treatment if necessary. If a player is bleeding, the Chair Umpire must stop play as soon as possible, and
the Physiotherapist should be called to the court for evaluation and treatment.
A player is allowed one (1) medical time-out for each distinct treatable medical The Physiotherapist, in conjunction with the tournament Doctor if appropriate,
condition. All clinical manifestations of heat illness shall be considered as one (1) will evaluate the source of the bleeding, and will request a medical time-out for
treatable medical condition. All treatable musculoskeletal injuries that manifest as treatment if necessary.
part of a kinetic chain continuum shall be considered as one (1) treatable medical
condition. If requested by the Physiotherapist and/or tournament Doctor, the Supervisor or
Chair Umpire may allow up to a total of five (5) minutes to assure control of the
A total of two (2) consecutive medical time-outs may be allowed by the Super- bleeding.
visor or Chair Umpire for the special circumstance in which the Physiotherapist
determines that the player has developed at least two (2) distinct acute and treat- If blood has spilled onto the court or its immediate vicinity, play must not resume
able medical conditions. This may include: a medical illness in conjunction with a until the blood spill has been cleaned appropriately.
musculoskeletal injury; two or more acute and distinct musculoskeletal injuries. 8) Vomiting
In such cases, the Physiotherapist will perform a medical evaluation for the two
or more treatable medical conditions during a single evaluation, and may then If a player is vomiting, the Chair Umpire must stop play if vomiting has spilled
determine that two consecutive medical time-outs are required. onto the court, or if the player requests medical evaluation. If the player requests
medical evaluation, then the Physiotherapist should determine if the player has a
4) Muscle Cramping treatable medical condition, and if so, whether the medical condition is acute or
A player may receive treatment for muscle cramping only during the time allotted non-acute.
for changeovers and/or set breaks. Players may not receive a medical time-out If vomiting has spilled onto the court, play must not resume until the vomit spill
for muscle cramping. In cases where there is doubt about whether the player has been cleaned appropriately.
suffers from an acute medical condition, non-acute medical condition inclusive of
muscle cramping, or non-treatable medical condition, the decision of the Physio-
therapist, in conjunction with the tournament Doctor, if appropriate, is final. There

198 199
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
9) Physical Incapacity three-minute medical time-out begins, and after the Chair Umpire
announces “Time”, the player has 30 seconds to play or be subject
During a match, if there is an emergency medical condition and the player in-
to the Point Penalty Schedule.
volved is unable to make a request for a Physiotherapist, the Chair Umpire shall
immediately call for the Physiotherapist and tournament Doctor to assist the play- Equipment Out of Adjustment (Knee Brace)
er. Case: During play, a player’s knee brace becomes out of adjust-
ment. The player requests time to repair his knee brace.
Either before or during a match, if a player is considered unable physically to
Decision: The player is allowed reasonable time to repair his knee
compete at a professional level, or poses a significant health risk to players, of-
brace without penalty. Any medical apparatus worn by a player
ficials or Tournament staff, the Physiotherapist and/or tournament Doctor should
shall be considered as equipment in regards to “Equipment Out of
inform the Supervisor and recommend that the player is ruled unable to compete
Adjustment”.
in the match to be played, or retired from the match in progress. Additionally, if
the Supervisor, in consultation with the tournament Doctor, Physiotherapist, or a Exceeding 90 Seconds: Code Violation
representative of the ATP Medical Advisory Board, determines that a player’s par- Case: If a player is receiving treatment by the Physiotherapist on a
ticipation in a tournament match may put the player at risk due to a life threatening 90-second change-over, and the treatment goes over the allowed
or otherwise serious medical problem, the Supervisor has the authority to rule a 90 seconds, what happens?
player ineligible to compete. Decision: When the Chair Umpire says “Time”, the player must put
the ball in play within 30 seconds. Any delay after that will result in a
The Supervisor shall use great discretion before taking this action and should
Code Violation.
base the decision on the best interests of professional tennis, as well as taking all
medical advice and any other information into consideration. Medical Time-Out and Re-Warm-Up
Case: If eight (8) minutes elapse before the Physiotherapist arrives
When the Supervisor has ruled a player ineligible to play due to circumstances and treatment begins two (2) minutes later (the medical time-out
involving a life threatening or otherwise serious medical condition, the player may begins) and is completed after another three (3) minutes, is a re-
return to play and be deemed eligible upon receipt by ATP of a written statement warm-up authorized?
from the player’s personal physician concluding that the player’s medical con-
Decision: No, a re-warm-up is not authorized.
dition is sufficient to play in competition, and the Supervisor, following consulta-
tion with the tournament Doctor and/or a representative of ATP Medical Advisory Medical Time-Out Request Honored?
Board (who may require that the player undergo additional testing and obtain a Case: A player asks for the Physiotherapist. After examination, it is
written statement clearing player to return to competition from a specialist physi- determined by the Physiotherapist that the player is suffering from
cian), indicates that the player is eligible to play. general fatigue that may not be improved by on-court medical treat-
ment. What course of action should the Chair Umpire take?
For retirements or withdrawals that are not deemed to be life threatening or other-
Decision: The Chair Umpire announces, “Let’s Play”, after the
wise serious medical condition, the player may subsequently compete in another
Physiotherapist completes his diagnosis. Delays will be penalized in
event at the same tournament if the tournament Doctor determines that the play-
accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule. The Chair Umpire has
er’s condition has improved to the extent that the player may safely physically
the option to issue a Code Violation for Unsportsmanlike Conduct in
perform at an appropriate level of play or no longer poses a significant health risk
unusual cases.
to players, officials or Tournament Staff, whether the same day or on a later day.
Medical Time-Out Starts When?
R. Medical Cases Case A: When does a medical time-out begin?
Delayed Medical Time-Out Decision A: Medical time-out begins when the Physiotherapist
arrives and is ready and able to treat the player. Thus, the Physio-
Case: A player has an accidental injury and asks to have a medical
therapist has completed his examination/diagnosis and the medical
time-out during the next changeover. What procedure should be
time-out starts when the Physiotherapist begins treating the player.
used for timing the treatment if the Physiotherapist arrives?
Case B: A player asks to see the Physiotherapist during the middle
A. 30 seconds into the changeover?
of a game although the Chair Umpire observed no accidental injury.
B. After 60 seconds has elapsed on the changeover? What should the umpire do?
Decision A: The Physiotherapist has 3 1/2 minutes [but, as a Decision B: First, tell the player that you will call the Physiotherapist
minimum, he has three (3) minutes to treat after completing his and he can see him at the changeover. If the player insists that he
diagnosis] to treat the player before the Chair Umpire announces cannot continue, then stop play and call the Physiotherapist. The
“Time”. The player then has 30 seconds to play, subject to the Point Physiotherapist will make the decision, upon examining the player,
Penalty Schedule. whether a medical time-out is needed.
Decision B: The Chair Umpire stops the clock at 60 seconds and
stops play until the Physiotherapist is ready to treat the player. The

200 201
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Only 90 Seconds to Re-Tape
Note: The Physiotherapist may be called to make adjustments
Case: A player turns his ankle, which is taped by the Physiothera- during the 90-second changeover; however, any delays shall be pe-
pist, and then on the next changeover wants the ankle re-taped. nalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule. If the player
Decision: The Chair Umpire may authorize the re-taping which makes the adjustment without the help of the Physiotherapist and vi-
must be completed within the 90-second changeover or the Point olates the continuous play rule, then the player shall be penalized in
Penalty Schedule applies. accordance with the penalties set forth under “Unreasonable Delay”,
Penalties After Medical Time-Out i.e., Time Violation.
Case: When is the player penalized for going over three minutes on Treatment for Fatigue
a medical time-out? Case: May a Physiotherapist put his hands on a player suffering
Decision: After the Chair Umpire says “Time”; the player must put from what appears to be fatigue?
the ball in play within 30 seconds. Any delay after that will result in a Decision: Yes. The Physiotherapist then makes the decision re-
Code Violation. The player is allowed the time necessary to put on garding a medical time-out.
shoes, socks, ankle supports, etc. Treatment: Within 90 Seconds
Case: A player receives treatment on a changeover or receives Case: After an even game, a player asks to see the Physiothera-
a Medical Time-Out. The player is then slow to resume play after pist on the next changeover. The next game ends and 90 seconds
“Time” has been called. What is the appropriate penalty? elapse without the Physiotherapist arriving on-court. The player
Decision: The appropriate Delay of Game Penalty (Warning, Point, asks that the changeover time be extended so that he may receive
Game). treatment. His rationale is that the Physiotherapist’s arrival to the
Case: After receiving treatment for cramping on the changeover, a court is not the player’s fault.
player plays one or more points and then is slow to resume play. If Decision: The Chair Umpire suspends play until the Physiotherapist
the player goes over the allowed time, what penalty does the player examines the player and determines whether a medical Time-out is
receive? needed.
Decision: The appropriate Time Violation (Warning, Point/Fault). When to Take a Medical Time-Out?
Re-Injury Case: What happens if a player is injured during a match and
Case: A player injures his ankle and is granted a three (3) minute decides not to take his injury time-out right away? (Before the end of
medical time-out by the Physiotherapist. Five (5) games later, the the next change-over)
player asks for another medical time-out claiming that he has re-in- Decision: A player may call for the Physiotherapist at any time. The
jured the same ankle. Physiotherapist shall determine whether the medical time-out is to
Decision: The Chair Umpire shall call for the Physiotherapist who be authorized.
shall determine upon examination whether or not a three (3) minute Chair Umpire Orders Medical Time-Out
medical time-out is authorized. Case: A player has an accidental ankle injury and the Chair Umpire
Resuming Play After a Medical Time-Out believes that continued play will result in non-professional play. May
Case A: After an injury and a four-minute suspension (by the Chair the Chair Umpire stop play (and call for the Physiotherapist)?
Umpire) for the arrival of the Physiotherapist, the Physiotherapist Decision: Yes.
arrives and completes the treatment in one and 1/2 minutes. When Singles Retirement: Still in Doubles?
does play resume?
Case: A player retires from his singles match because of illness or
Decision A: Immediately. medical reason. May he compete in the doubles competition?
Case B: After a player becomes injured, the Physiotherapist treats Decision: If upon examination by the tournament Doctor after the
the player in two (2) minutes. When should play resume? retirement and again before the player’s scheduled doubles match,
Decision B: Immediately when the player and Physiotherapist are it is determined that the player’s condition has “improved” to the
satisfied with the treatment administered, but the treatment is not to extent that he can compete at a professional level, then the player
exceed three (3) minutes. may continue in the doubles competition. If the player’s condition
Tape Is Not “Equipment Adjustment” has not improved then he must not be allowed to compete in the
Case: During play, a player requests play to be suspended in order doubles.
for him to adjust the tape on his ankle.
S. Miscellaneous Officiating Cases and Decisions
Decision: Play must continue. Taping is not considered as “Equip-
ment Out of Adjustment”. Broken String: First Service Fault
Case: On a first service fault, the receiver breaks a string.

202 203
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: In Singles matches If the receiver changes his racquet, not rule that an invasion occurred. Invasion occurs only when the
then a first serve will be awarded to the server. If the receiver elects ball is in play. Since the Chair Umpire did not know the timing of the
not to change racquets, then the server must play a second serve. incident, he may not assume that an invasion did occur.
In Doubles matches if the receiver changed the racquet with his Player Hits Net Pipe Support
partner the Chair Umpire should award a second serve unless in his Case: A player touches a “pipe support” with his foot while the ball
opinion the replacement time was such that the server was delayed is in play.
in his delivery of a serve. Decision: In this case the “pipe support” is to be considered as part
Broken String: First Service Let of the net; thus if a player touches it while the ball is in play, he loses
Case: The receiver breaks a string on a first service let. the point.
Decision: The receiver must change racquets. A player is allowed Touching Net or Opponent’s Court
to finish the point with a broken string but may not start a point with Case: If while the ball is in play a player’s foot slides under the net
a broken string. but does not touch the net, should this still be considered a “touch”
Broken String: No Racquets since the net should have extended fully to the court surface?
Case: The player breaks a string in his last racquet. Decision: No. This cannot be considered a “touch” if the player did
Decision: The player is not allowed to continue with broken strings. not actually touch the net. It is likely, however, that an invasion has
The player is subjected to the penalties set forth in the Point Penalty occurred from the player’s foot touching his opponent’s court. If this
System for Unreasonable Delay. did occur, then the Chair Umpire shall call an “invasion” and award
Receiver Not Ready the point to the player’s opponent.
Case: The receiver is not ready but looks up as the second serve is Ball Touches Net Pipe Support
hit, reflexes a return and says, “wait.” Case: The ball falls over the net and hits the “pipe support ”used on
Decision: Second serve. The server should observe that the indoor courts.
receiver is ready. (If the Chair Umpire believes that gamesmanship Decision: In this case, the “pipe support” is to be considered as
is involved on the part of the receivers, then he may issue a code part of the court; thus when the ball hit the pipe, it would be ruled as
violation for Unsportsmanlike Conduct). a first bounce.
Ball Hits Net Post Signage Player Touches Net Outside of Singles Stick
Case: The ball, while in play, hits the top of the ATP net signage and Case: A player runs for a drop shot and returns it into the oppo-
goes into the proper court. nent’s court and then runs into net between net post and singles
Decision: ATP net signage will be considered permanent fixtures stick. What is the ruling?
(other than the net, posts, singles sticks, cord or metal cable, strap Decision: Play continues. This part of the net is considered a per-
or band) and will result in the loss of point. manent fixture.
Ball hits Overhead Camera Cable Ball Rolls Onto Court
Case: A player throws up a lob which is over the court and it hits the Case: After a first service fault, a ball comes into the court from
cable supporting Spider Cam which is positioned diagonally across another court.
the court from the service line to baseline. Is the point awarded to Decision: If the server has started his motion, then a first serve
the opponent; is the point replayed; or does play continue? shall be awarded. In other cases, a second serve shall be played
Decision: The cable is considered a permanent fixture and there- unless in the opinion of the Chair Umpire the delay was unusually
fore, it is a loss of point. long and unfairly disrupted the rhythm of the server.
Invasion: Ball in Play Umpire Unsighted
Case: A player’s dampening device flies out of his racquet and Case: A Line Umpire is unsighted and the Chair Umpire cannot
touches the net or goes into his opponent’s court. make the decision.
Decision: If the ball was still in play, the player loses point. The Decision: The point is replayed, except in the case where it was
dampening device shall be considered a part of the racquet. discovered after the point had been completed that during a rally a
Invasion: No Replay Line Umpire had been unsighted. In that case, the point would stand
as played.
Case: After the point has been completed, player discovers oppo-
nent’s dampening device lying in his court. The player claims a point Intimidating Line Umpire
based on Rules of Tennis, rule “Rule 24”). Case: A serve is hit near the sideline and the receiver, hearing no
Decision: The point stands as played. Since the Chair Umpire did call, immediately turns around and screams at the Line Umpire. The
not see the dampening device land in the opponent’s court, he may Line Umpire, who had signaled good, then calls and signals out.

204 205
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
Decision: The Chair Umpire rules the serve good based on the Line end shall alternate calling the center service line of the “deuce” and “ad-
Umpire’s original call. The Supervisor, if called, upholds the Chair vantage” courts, moving between points.
Umpire’s decision based on an official not changing his call based ii) One Line Umpire calls serves at each end of the court.
on a player appeal. iii) One Line Umpire calls each base line (2).
Note: The Chair Umpire may have to ask for the Line Umpire’s iv) Chair umpire calls all “Lets,” “Not Ups,” “Foul Shots,” “Touches,” “Hin-
original call if he is uncertain or disregard the Line Umpire’s call and drances” and “Throughs.”
make the call himself. b) Six (6) Line Umpires.
Service Order i) Three (3) umpires cover the long lines; the side service lines are called
Case: In a doubles match, Team A serves out of order. After two through the net from the server’s end of court and the center service line
points have been played, the Chair Umpire realizes the mistake. is called from the receiver’s end.
aa) There is no movement during a point.
Decision: The Chair Umpire should correct the mistake immediate-
ii) One Line Umpire calls serves at each end of the court.
ly.
iii) One Line Umpire calls each base line (2).
Receiving Order iv) Chair umpire calls all “Lets,” “Not Ups,” “Foul Shots,” “Touches,” “Hin-
Case: In a doubles match, the players on the team switched their drances” and “Throughs.”
receiving positions during the set. When this is realized, what action c) Five (5) Line Umpires. The assignments are the same as for the six (6) man
should the Chair Umpire take? crew, except that the center service Line Umpire shall move after the serve to
Decision: The original receiving positions of each player on that the side line.
team must be taken after the completion of the game in progress. d) Four (4) Line Umpires. The assignments are the same as for the five (5)
If error occurred during a tie break, then the receiving order shall man crew, except that the Chair Umpire, depending on personal preference
remain as altered until the completion of the tie break game. and court surface, selects the lines that he will call.
e) Less Than Four (4) Line Umpires. The Chair Umpire shall assign the Line
7.23 Line Umpire Requirement, Positions and Calls Umpires to the best advantage possible.
f) Umpiring Without Line Umpires. If a Chair Umpire is required to umpire a
A. Number for Matches
match without any Line Umpires, or without a full complement of Line Um-
1) Full Complement of Line Umpires. If a Chair Umpire has a full complement of pires, then the Chair Umpire must make the calls for the net and all unattend-
Line Umpires, then the assignments shall be as follows: ed lines. If the Chair Umpire is unable to give a decision on a call or other
questions of fact, then he must order a “Let” to be played.
a) Base, side, center service and service Line Umpires call all “Outs” and Players Don’t Call Lines
“Faults” for their respective lines.
Case: In ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour qualifying events where
b) Net judge calls all “Nets” and “Throughs” (if designated by the Chair Umpire),
approval has been granted to use less than five (5) Line Umpires
measures the net height at the beginning of each set and administers the ball
per match; may the Chair Umpire designate certain or all lines for
changes. A net device may be authorized for use.
the players to make the calls?
c) Base, side and center service Line Umpires call “Foot Faults” on their respec-
tive lines. Decision: No. If a Chair Umpire is required to umpire a match
d) Chair umpire calls all “Lets,” “Foul Shots,” “Foul Strokes,” “Hindrances,” “Not without any Line Umpires or without a full complement of Line Um-
Ups” and “Touches.” pires, then the Chair Umpire must make the calls for the net and all
e) Line umpires shall not be permitted to call through the net. unattended lines.
2) Less than a Full Complement of Line Umpires. If less than a full complement B. Hand Signals of Line Umpires
of Line Umpires is available, the following should be used (Sufficient Line Um-
pires must be assigned in the main draw so that the Chair Umpire is not solely The approved hand signals are as follows:
responsible for calling any one line.):
1) “Out” or “Fault.” The arm should be fully extended sideways at shoulder height,
a) Seven (7) Line Umpires. All long lines are called only up to the net. Serves
pointing in the direction in which the ball has fallen, palm of the hand facing the
are called from the receiver’s end and the center Line Umpire returns to his
Chair Umpire, fingers extended and joined. If the ball falls out of the court to the
assigned sideline after the serve is put into play, i.e., there is movement
left or the right, the left or right arm as the case may be is extended after the ver-
during the point. The assignments for seven (7) Line Umpire crew are as
bal call of “Out” or “Fault” (as applicable) is made. The hand signal is in addition to
follows:
and is secondary to the verbal call of “Out” or “Fault”; the hand signal must never
i) Four (4) side Line Umpires, one of who calls the receiver’s center service
be used instead of the verbal call.
line; after the serve is put into play, this umpire returns to his assigned
side line. (The umpire calling the center service line on the receiver’s end 2) “Good Ball.” The hands shall be pointed down with palms down and fingers
moves during the point when he returns to his assigned side line after the extended together. There is no verbal call for a good ball. The hand signal is used
serve is put into play.). In addition, the side Line Umpire on the receiver’s in silence and only when necessary to verify that a close ball was good.
206 207
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
3) “Unsighted.” The hands are placed beneath the eyes facing in the direction of 3) Statement of Facts. A contemporaneous statement should be made of all the
the Chair Umpire but not affecting the vision of the Line Umpire. The hand signal facts (who, what, when, where and why) of the violation quoting verbatim any
verifies that a Line Umpire is unable to call a ball because of his vision being statements made that are considered to be obscene or abusive.
obscured. There is no verbal call for a Line Umpire being unsighted and the hand
signal is used in silence. 7.25 Announcing
7.24 Scoring of Match A. Calls of On-Court Officials

A. Manual The verbal calls of the on-court officials shall be made loudly and clearly in English
and any other appropriate language as follows:
The Chair Umpire shall mark his scorecard in accordance with the following:
1) “Fault.” If either the first or second service fails.
1) Pre-Match. Before the pre-match meeting with the players, ensure the comple-
2) “Out.” If a return hits the ground, a permanent fixture or another object outside
tion of the information requested on the scorecard such as name of tournament,
the court.
round, players’ names, etc.
3) “Net” If a service hits the top of the net.
2) Toss. After the “toss,” note who won the toss, their election, etc.
4) “Footfault” If a player violates rule 7 or 8 of the Rules of Tennis.
3) Warm-Up. Note the time that the warm-up begins.
5) “Let.” If the Chair Umpire determines that a point should be replayed.
4) Time. Note the time play begins and concludes in each set.
6) “Not Up.” If a player fails to hit a ball in play on the first bounce.
5) Sides For Serve. Note the initials of each player in the order of their serves and
also on the side of the scorecard corresponding to their proper sides of the court. 7) “Foul Shot” or “Touch.” If a ball is intentionally struck twice, or touched before
it comes over the net, or while volleying, the ball hits the court after leaving the
6) Ball Change. Mark in advance the game for which a ball change will be made on
racquet before going over the net, or a player touches the net while the ball is in
the left side of the scorecard.
play, or a ball in play touches a player, or anything that he wears or carries falls
7) Points. Points should be made by slanted marks in the boxes on the scorecard into the opponent’s court or touches the net.
and/or by the following code:
8) “Hindrance.” If a player deliberately or involuntarily commits an act which hin-
“A” - Ace ders his opponent in making a stroke.
“D” - Double Fault
9) “Through.” If a ball goes through the net.
“C” - Code Violation
“T” - Time Violation 10) “Wait Please.” To preclude starting play when a hazard or other circumstance
“.” - First Service Fault (a dot shall be made in the middle of the bottom line of makes it appropriate to delay the beginning of a point. Do not make this call if a
the Server’s box). player’s arm is in motion to strike the ball (call “Let” immediately after the serve is
8) Games. Games may be marked by either of the following methods: struck).
a) Method A. The cumulative total of games won by each player is set out in the 11) Overrule. Make the following announcement:
“Games” column at the end of each game; and a) “Correction, the ball was in;” or
b) Method B. The cumulative total of games won by the winner of each game b) “Out” or “Fault.”
only is set out in the “Games” column at the end of each game.
B. Code and Time Violations
B. Handheld Device
The following are examples of Code of Conduct announcements to be used:
Instructions will be provided on-site at ATP Tour tournaments for the operation of the
handheld scoring device. 1) Point Penalties assessed for violation of the Code should be announced in accor-
dance with the following examples:
C. Point Penalty Card “Code Violation, Delay of Game, Warning, Mr..___(last name).”
“Code Violation, Verbal Abuse, Point Penalty, Mr..___(last name).” “Let’s
The Chair Umpire must mark his Point Penalty Card in accordance with the following:
play” (“Let’s Play” is optional).
1) Post-Match. If a Code Violation, Time Violation or Post Match incident occurs, “Code Violation, Verbal Abuse, Game Penalty, Mr..___(last name).”
complete the information requested on the Point Penalty Card, such as name of If instructed by the Supervisor, the announcement for a default shall be, for exam-
tournament and a summary of the incident. ple:
2) Rules Violation. The violation should be checked and the Code section noted for “Code Violation, Unsportsmanlike Conduct, Default, Mr..___(last name).”
each violation.
208 209
VII. THE COMPETITION VII. THE COMPETITION
2) Time Violations resulting from non-compliance with the Unreasonable Delay pro- E. Player Introductions
visions of the Code shall be announced in accordance with the following exam-
ples: The following are examples of announcing statements to be used for player introduc-
“Time Violation, Warning, Mr..___(last name).” (“Let’s Play” is optional.) tions:
Subsequent Delays by the Server: 1) If the introduction of players is to be made from the chair, then during the warm-
“Time Violation, 2nd Service” (“Let’s Play” is optional.) up, the Chair Umpire says: “This is a ___round singles/doubles match, best of
Subsequent Delays by the Receiver: three (3) tie-break sets. To the right of the chair _____(full name) and to the left of
“Time Violation, Point Penalty, Mr..___(last name).”(“Let’s Play” is optional.) the chair _____(full name).____(full name)won the toss and elected to _____.”
3) After a point or game penalty, the new score is announced.
2) If the introduction of players is made by a tournament announcer, then before
4) If a Chair Umpire wants the Supervisor to assess an immediate default, he is to each player’s first service game the Chair Umpire says: “______(full name) to
announce “Code Violation, Supervisor to the court.” serve.” (optional - “first set “).
5) A player cannot appeal to the Chair Umpire for the withdrawal of a “Time Viola-
F. Score
tion” or “Code Violation” given to his opponent.
6) Code Violations shall be announced in English. The following are examples of announcing statements to be used for scoring:

C. Language - Chair Umpire 1) The Server’s score is always called first, except in the Tie-break.
2) The score is announced: Fifteen-Love, Love-Fifteen, Thirty-Love, Love-Thirty,
Chair umpires should announce matches in the language of the tournament and sub- Forty-Love, Love-Forty, Fifteen-All, Fifteen-Thirty, Thirty-Fifteen, Fifteen-Forty,
sequently in English. Conversations between the Chair Umpire and player may be in Forty-Fifteen, Thirty-All, Thirty-Forty, Forty-Thirty, Deuce (never Forty-All), Ad-
any language; however, if the language used is not English, then the Chair Umpire vantage ____(last name), Game _____(last name). For No-Ad scoring, when the
must be prepared to advise the other player of the nature of the discussion. score reaches deuce, the chair should announce: “Deuce, Deciding Point, Re-
ceiver’s Choice.”
D. Medical Time-Out
3) The score must be announced loudly and distinctly when a point is finished for the
The following are examples of announcements to be made when there is a medical players and the crowd. The Chair Umpire has the option to make the announce-
time-out: ment either before or after the applause, whichever guarantees the announce-
ment can be heard by the players. “Timing” for the next point begins when the
When the Chair Umpire decides to call for the Physiotherapist, the Chair Umpire point ends, not when the announcement is made.
shall announce:
4) At the end of a game or set the Chair Umpire, in addition to announcing “Game
“The Physiotherapist has been called to the court.” _____(last name),” should announce the score in games in conformity with the
After a three (3) minute time-out is authorized, the Chair Umpire should make the following example:
public announcement of: “Game Smith, Jones/Smith lead 4 games to 2 (or 4-2)” or Game Smith, 3
“Mr..________________is now receiving a medical time-out.” games all.”
“Game and third set, Smith, 7 games to 5. Jones leads 2 sets to 1.”
The following announcements are to be made privately to the Physiotherapist and If there is a scoreboard visible to the spectators, then the set number need not be
both players/teams: mentioned. In such case only the score in games should be announced: “Game
“Two (2) minutes remaining” Smith, first game.”
“One (1) minute remaining” 5) When a set reaches the Tie-break, the Chair Umpire announces:
“Thirty (30) seconds remaining” “Game Smith, 6 games all. Tie-break.”
6) During the Tie-break, the score is announced by first giving the score and then the
“Treatment complete”
name of the player(s) leading, e.g.:
“Time” (public) “1-0, Jones” or “1-0, Jones/Smith” (Use “Zero” rather than “Love” in the Tie-
Once the “Treatment complete” notice has been given to the Physiotherapist and break.)
both players/teams, then if needed, the player should be given the time neces- “1 All”
sary to put on socks and shoes before “Time” is called. “2-1,Smith”
At the conclusion of the Tie-break, the Chair Umpire announces:
If there is no play after an additional thirty (30) seconds, the delay is penalized in
accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule. “Game and _____set,_____(last name), 7 games to 6 (or 7-6).”

210 211
VII. THE COMPETITION VIII. THE CODE
7) At the conclusion of the match, the Chair Umpire announces the winner in confor- 8.01 Tournament Obligations
mity with the following example:
A. Application Requirements
“Game, set and match Smith (optional -3 sets to 2); 3-6, 5-7, 7-5, 6-1, 6-3.”
In each set, call first the number of games won by the winner of the match. Each tournament agrees to comply with all provisions contained in the ATP Tour
8) During the warm-up, the following examples of announcing statements should be tournament and ATP Challenger Tour Applications where applicable.
used at the appropriate times:
B. Ranking Based Entry
“Three (3) minutes - 3 minutes until warm-up ends.
“Two (2) minutes” - 2 minutes until warm-up ends.
Each tournament agrees to accept entries of tennis players on the basis of the Pep-
“One (1) minute” - 1 minute until warm-up ends.
perstone ATP Rankings and the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings.
“Time” (optional - “prepare to play”)- end of warm-up; direct balls to Server’s
end of court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Russian and Belarusian nationals may be required
“______” (full name), (optional - “first set”), to Serve, Play” - immediately prior (as determined solely by ATP) to provide a signed Declaration of Neutrality (in a form
to Server preparing to serve. approved by ATP) in order for them to enter and participate in certain tournaments.

Exception 1: In the event that a government or country imposes restrictions pre-

venting Russian or Belarusian nationals from entering the country after the singles
or doubles main draw entry deadline, ATP reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to
permit the tournament to proceed. In addition, in such instance, ATP may allow the
affected Russian or Belarusian nationals to play in another ATP event.

Exception 2: ATP will accept tournaments in countries where Covid-19 vaccination

is required for entry into the country.

C. Other Circuit

Each ATP Tour tournament and ATP Challenger Tour tournament agrees to refrain
from being advertised or promoted as part of any other circuit or series of tourna-
ments, unless expressly authorized by ATP.

8.02 Tournament Standards Violations

No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall violate any provision of ATP’s
rules, regulations, or conditions of approval. Unless otherwise specified, a violation
of this section shall subject the tournament to a fine specified in the table below*
(“Tournament Standards Violations Fines Table”).

Violation Sanction**
Failure to meet basic Tournament Stan- Warning or a fine up to $25,000
dards with no material impact on com-
petition, players, or the overall image
of the ATP Tour / ATP Challenger Tour
/ tournament
Failure to meet Tournament Standards Fine up to $50,000
with minor impact on competition,
players or the overall image of the ATP
Tour / ATP Challenger Tour / tournament

212 213
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
Violation Sanction** affiliated with a company that offers, wagering on tennis, or if a betting, casino, lottery
or fantasy sport-branded company is not a Tennis Betting Operator and the proposed
Failure to meet Tournament Standards Fine up to $100,000 sponsorship will not promote a Tennis Betting Operator, these rules shall not apply to
with significant impact on competition, the sponsorship and there are no restrictions on the sponsorship agreement, except
players or the overall image of the ATP that ATP approval shall still be required and Tournament Support Personnel shall
Tour / ATP Challenger Tour / tournament still comply with the TACP (as defined below). If, during the term of the sponsorship,
Major, willful, and/or repetitive non- Fine up to a maximum of $250,000 the company becomes a Tennis Betting Operator or the sponsorship will promote a
compliance with the Tournament Stan- and/or a change in category and/or tennis betting brand, the sponsorship must comply with these rules. However, most
dards membership status*** fantasy sport brands offer, or are affiliated with companies that offer, wagering on
tennis and constitute a Tennis Betting Operator as defined herein. In that case, all
*Tour Tournament Standards Violation Fines Table under review. the terms and conditions in Exhibit AD apply to such fantasy sport Tennis Betting
Operator. Such agreements may not extend beyond December 31, 2026.
**Specific amounts are on a per violation basis and should depend and may vary on
the severity of the violation and issue(s) presented. This maximum fine amount will E. On-Site Tennis Betting
increase by one-hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive year violation of the
same standard by a tournament. No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall, directly or indirectly, solicit or
facilitate any person to wager on tennis matches while at the tournament site. Allow-
***Change in category and/or membership status is subject to a decision by the ATP ing betting companies, directly or through a third party, to accept any tennis wagers
Board. (electronically or otherwise) at the tournament site or any tournament related event is
prohibited.
A. On-Site
F. Determination of Violation and Penalty
On-site violations may include, but are not limited to, tournament obligations spec-
ified in the current ATP Official Rulebook under sections titled ATP Circuit Regula- The SVP – Rules & Competition shall make a reasonable investigation to determine
tions, Branding, Financial, Personnel and Facilities & On-Site Conditions. the facts regarding all tournament on-site offenses. Upon determining that a violation
has occurred, the SVP – Rules & Competition shall specify the fine up to $10,000
B. Security at Tournaments and/or other punishment in written notice to the tournament. The ATP Members Fines
Committee will make determination for fines over $10,000 and/or other punishment in
Each tournament has the responsibility to provide security at the tournament site. written notice to the tournament.The tournament shall have the right to appeal such
Tournaments must submit their security plan sixty (60) days in advance to the ATP determination to the ATP Members Fine Committee for violations up to $10,000 or to
Security Director. the ATP Standards Commitee for violations over $10,000, consistent with the proce-
dures outlined in the Code.
C. Tournament Report
G. Payment of Fines
Each ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall submit to ATP a report of
the tournament and its affairs as requested by ATP. Fines levied by the SVP – Rules & Competition for tournament on-site offenses shall
be paid in accordance with the following:
D. ATP Fantasy Sport and Sponsorship 1) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. Each tournament shall promptly
pay the fine to ATP.
ATP Tour tournaments may enter sponsorship agreements with a company that of-
fers wagering on tennis (a “Tennis Betting Operator”) subject to the terms and con- 2) The tournament may authorize ATP to withhold the amount of the fine from any
ditions stated in Exhibit AD. The agreements may not extend beyond December 31, monies owed the tournament by ATP.
2026. ATP Challenger 125 and 175 tournaments may enter sponsorship agreements 3) If the monies owed to the tournament are insufficient to pay the fine, the tourna-
with a Tennis Betting Operator subject to those agreements being sold and controlled ment shall pay the balance within twenty-one (21) days after receiving written
centrally by the ATP, the revenues are distributed to the relevant tournaments and notice of the fine.
follow the rules applicable to ATP Tour events. The agreements for ATP Challenger
125 and 175 tournaments may not extend beyond December 31, 2026. ATP will as- H. Procedures for Appeal
sess any negative effects of such sponsorship agreements in determining whether to
extend these periods. 1) Any tournament in violation of a tournament on-site offense may, after paying all
fines, appeal to the ATP Members Fine Committee for violations up to $10,000
ATP Tour tournaments may accept sponsorship from a fantasy sport branded compa- or to the ATP Standards Commitee for violations over $10,000 for review of a
ny promoting only the fantasy sport brand. If the company does not offer, and is not determination of guilt and the penalty assessed.

214 215
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
2) Such appeal shall be in accordance with the procedure specified in Section 8.03 2) In the event the ATP CEO or Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition be-
F. 4. lieves that a tournament may be violating this section, then upon demand, the
tournament must furnish to the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his
8.03 Tournament Major Offenses agent access to and copies of all records to which it has access relating to such
alleged prohibited compensation or, in the absence of such records, an affidavit
No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall violate any provision of ATP’s setting forth the facts in detail with respect to any transaction under question by
rules and regulations contained below under the Tournament Major Offense sec- the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition. In the event a tournament fails
tion of the current ATP Official Rule Book. Unless otherwise specified, violation of to provide such records or affidavit for such audit, it may be subject to a fine up
this section shall subject the tournament to a fine up to $250,000, or in the case of to $100,000 and termination of membership, pending compliance with such de-
Tournament Standards Violation under the Tournament Standards Violations Fine mand.
Table, plus any additional financial penalties specified in other rules, and/or change
in membership status, and/or forfeiture of all sums, if any, previously paid to ATP. 3) Violation of this section shall subject the tournament to a fine up to $100,000 plus
the amount or value of any such compensation, and termination of membership,
A.Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of the Game and/or forfeiture of all sums, if any, previously paid to ATP.

The favorable reputation of ATP, its tournaments and players is a valuable asset and D. Wagers and On-Site Tennis Betting
creates tangible benefits for all ATP members. Accordingly, it is an obligation for ATP
No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament, ATP member or any person w h o
Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, owner(s), promoter(s), operator(s) or rep-
directly or indirectly has a controlling ownership interest therein or who is the Des-
resentative(s) thereof, to refrain from engaging in conduct contrary to the integrity of
ignated Representative (as defined in the ATP By-Laws) or Tournament Director or
the game of tennis. Conduct contrary to the integrity of the game shall include, but not
other employee or agent of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament or ATP
be limited to, comments to the news media publicized comments that unreasonably
member (excluding employees or agents who do not have executive or material man-
attack or disparage any person or group of people, a tournament, sponsor, player,
agement authority) shall engage in any form of gambling or wagering in connection
official or ATP.
with any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament.
Responsible expressions of legitimate disagreement with ATP policies are not pro-
E. Wild Cards
hibited. However, public comments that one of the stated persons above knows,
or should reasonably know, will harm the reputation or financial best interests of a
No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament, or any person who directly or indi-
tournament, player, sponsor, official or ATP are expressly covered by this section.
rectly has a controlling ownership interest therein or who is the Designated Repre-
sentative (as defined in the ATP By-Laws) or Tournament Director or other employee
B. Aggravated Behavior
or agent of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall directly or indirectly,
1) No ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament, or any person who directly or accept compensation in exchange for a wild card.
indirectly has a controlling ownership interest therein or who is the Designated
Representative (as defined in the ATP By-Laws) or Tournament Director or other F. Investigation, Determination, Imposition and Review
employee or agent of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall en-
1) The Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fines Commit-
gage in aggravated behavior which is defined as follows:
tee, as applicable, shall investigate all facts concerning any alleged tournament
a) One incident of behavior that is flagrant and particularly injurious to the suc- violation of an ATP rule or regulation and shall provide written notice of such
cess of the ATP or its members or is singularly egregious. investigation to the tournament involved. The tournament shall be given at least
b) A series of two (2) or more violations of this Code in consecutive years which five (5) days (excluding weekends) to provide to the Senior Vice President - Rules
singularly do not constitute aggravated behavior, but when viewed together & Competition/ATP Members Fine Committee, directly or through counsel, such
establish a pattern of conduct that is collectively egregious and is detrimental evidence as the tournament deems to be relevant to the investigation. The Se-
or injurious to ATP and/or its members. nior Vice President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fine Committee shall
C. Promotional Fees conduct the investigation in consultation with the applicable ATP Regional EVP or
SVP.
1) ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 tournaments have the option to offer fees for pro-
2) Upon the completion of the investigation, the Senior Vice President - Rules &
motional services. No other ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament owner,
Competition/ATP Members Fine Committee, as applicable, shall determine the
operator, sponsor or agent is permitted to offer, give or pay money or anything of
innocence or guilt of the tournament involved and, in the latter case, shall state in
value, nor shall the tournament permit any other person or entity to offer, give or
writing the facts as found by him, his conclusions and the penalty to be imposed
pay money or anything of value to a player, directly or indirectly, to influence or
on the tournament. A copy of the decision of the Senior Vice President - Rules
assure or entice a player’s competing in a tournament or event within the tourna-
& Competition/ATP Members Fine Committee shall be promptly delivered to the
ment, other than prize money, unless authorized to do so by ATP.
tournament with copies to the ATP CEO, or in the case of Standards Violations,
the ATP Members Fine Committee up to $10,000 or the ATP Standards Commit-
216 217
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
tee for fines over $10,000 and the applicable ATP Regional EVP or SVP. 6) Service of any document on a tournament as is required by this section shall be
deemed completed if mailed to the Tournament Director at the address indicat-
3) All fines shall be paid by the tournament by delivery to the Senior Vice President
ed in the tournament application or as subsequently revised by the tournament
- Rules & Competition within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of written notice.
member. Any written communication to be sent to the ATP CEO or Senior Vice
4) Any tournament found to have violated an ATP rule, regulation or condition of President - Rules & Competition, or in the case of Standards Violations, the ATP
approval that results in a fine, may, after paying all fines, petition the ATP CEO Members Fines Committee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable) should be
for discretionary review, or in the case of Standards Violations, the ATP Members addressed as follows, unless notice of change is subsequently published.
Fines Committee for fines up to $10,000 or the ATP Standards Committee for
ATP CEO OR SVP - Rules & Competition or ATP
fines over $10,000. This petition shall be in writing and must be filed with the
Fines/Standards Committees
ATP CEO, Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition, or the ATP Members
Fine Committee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable) within twenty-one (21) 22 Worple Road ATP
days after notice of the determination and penalty is received by the tournament.
Wimbledon 201 ATP Tour Blvd.
(The Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fines Commit-
tee, where applicable, shall forward the review petition promptly to the ATP CEO SW14 4DD Ponte Vedra Beach, FL 32082, USA
or ATP Members FInes Commiteee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable)). Telephone: +44 207 381 7890 Telephone: +1 904 285 8000
Such petition shall state in detail the basis for the appeal. Within twenty-one (21)
days after receipt of the petition, the ATP CEO or his designee, or in the case of Facsimile: +44 207 381 7895 Facsimile: +1 904 779 3300
Standards Violations, the ATP Members Fines Commiteee/ATP Standards Com- 7) ATP is authorized to obtain collection of all overdue fines along with costs, if any,
mittee (as applicable) shall determine whether the appeal should proceed to a by all reasonable means, including legal proceedings as may be deemed neces-
hearing or if a determination based upon the facts as presented is appropriate. sary and appropriate.
If the ATP CEO or his designee, or in the case of Standards Violations, the ATP
Members Fines Commitee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable) determines
that the appeal should not proceed to a hearing, then the decision, upon notice
8.04 Player Code of Conduct (“Code”)
to the tournament, becomes final. This decision may affirm, reverse or modify A. Entry/Withdrawal Offenses
the decision of the Senior Vice President - Rules and Competition/ATP Members
Fines Committee. If the ATP CEO or his designee, or in the case of Standards Entry Obligations. No player or team entered into the main draw or moved into
Violations, the ATP Members Fines Committee/ATP Standards Committee (as the main draw as a direct acceptance of a tournament may withdraw after the
applicable) determines that the appeal should proceed to a hearing, he shall des- entry and withdrawal deadline or not appear for first-round match(es) without pen-
ignate a date; time and place for the hearing of the appeal, and the ATP CEO alty as described below. The Senior Vice President, Rules & Competition shall
or his designee, or in the case of Standards Violations, the ATP Members Fines make such investigation as is reasonable to determine the facts regarding any
Committee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable) shall notify the tournament such entry offense and, upon determining that a violation has occurred, shall
and the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fines Com- specify the fine.
mittee. At the hearing, the tournament and the Senior Vice President - Rules
B. Fines
& Competition/ATP Members Fines Commitee shall present to the ATP CEO or
his designee, or in the case of Standards Violations, the ATP Members Fines 1) ATP Tour Tournaments
Committee/ATP Standards Committee (as applicable), their respective positions
a) The provisions relating to assessment and payment of withdrawal, late with-
on the facts. On the appeal, the ATP CEO or his designee, or in the case of Stan-
drawal or punctuality fines for tournaments are separate from but in addition
dards Violations, the ATP Members Fines Committee/ATP Standards Commit-
to the provisions of the player ATP commitment. The penalties are:
tee (as applicable) may affirm, reverse or modify the decision of the Senior Vice
i) Singles
President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fines Committee. If the appeal
aa) ATP Tour 250 Only. Withdrawals occurring prior to the 10 AM, East-
is decided against the tournament, then the ATP CEO or his designee, or in the
ern time, USA, Friday withdrawal deadline:
case of Standards Violations, the ATP Members Fines Committee/ATP Standards
Committee (as applicable) shall charge to the tournament the reasonable costs ATP
of the appeal, which shall include, but not be limited to, the reasonable travel and Pepperstone Fifth (5th)
living expenses incurred by all witnesses. Rankings Third (3rd) Fourth (4th) and Subsequent
5) If the penalty imposed on the tournament includes a recommendation for loss (most recent) Offense Offense Offenses
or change in tournament membership status, that recommendation shall be re- 1 - 10 $10,000 $20,000 $40,000
viewed by the ATP Board, which may implement, modify or reject the recommen-
dation of the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition/ATP Members Fines 11 - 25 $5,000 $10,000 $20,000
Committee or ATP Standards Committee. The imposition of any non-fine penalty 26 - 50 $2,000 $4,000 $8,000
by the ATP Board shall be made in accordance with the By-laws.

218 219
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
d) In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injurious to the success of
51-100 $1,000 $2,000 $4,000 a tournament, or are singularly egregious, a single violation of this section
101 + $500 $1,000 $2,000 shall also constitute the player Major Offense of Aggravated Behavior.
2) ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments
bb) ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 & 250 events. a) The penalty for fourth and subsequent withdrawals is a fine of $250 for each
Withdrawals occurring after the 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA, Friday offense and applies to singles. Fines shall be doubled in the case of any
withdrawal deadline (Late Withdrawals): player who would have been seeded, based on the most recent Pepperstone
ATP Rankings.
ATP b) Any singles withdrawal occurring after 10 AM, Eastern Time, USA on Friday,
Pepperstone Third (3rd)* shall be assessed a fine of $1,000 (or $2,000 if seeded).
Rankings First (1st) Second (2nd) and Subsequent c) ATP Challenger Tour Qualifying. Fifth and subsequent withdrawals from
the qualifying competition will be fined $150 or $300 if he would have been
(most recent) Offense Offense Offenses seeded based upon the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings. If the player
1 - 10 $20,000 $40,000 $80,000 withdraws after the 10 AM Eastern time, USA, Friday deadline, or is a No
Show, it is a Late Withdrawal and the fine shall be $500 (or $750 if seeded).
11 - 25 $10,000 $20,000 $40,000
d) ATP Challenger Doubles.
26 - 50 $4,000 $8,000 $16,000 i) If the withdrawal was after 10 AM, Eastern time, USA, Friday and prior to
51-100 $2,000 $4,000 $8,000 the onsite sign-in deadline then the fine is $500 per team member (dou-
bled if team would have been seeded).
101 + $1,000 $2,000 $4,000 ii) If the withdrawal was after the on-site sign-in deadline then this is to be
*For purposes of determining 2nd, 3rd and Subsequent Offenses, only Late considered as a Late Withdrawal and the fine is $1,000 per team member
Withdrawals are counted. (doubled if team would have been, or was, seeded).
ii) Doubles. iii) Doubles Exceptions apply as noted above for ATP Tour.
aa) If the withdrawal was after 10 AM, Eastern time, USA, Friday and prior
to the onsite sign-in deadline then the fine is $1,000 per team member
(doubled if team would have been seeded). C. Tournament Rebates
bb) If the withdrawal was after the on-site sign-in deadline then this is to
Tournaments shall receive a rebate from ATP when the following conditions have
be considered as a Late Withdrawal and the fine is $2,500 per team
occurred:
member (doubled if team would have been, or was, seeded).
iii) Doubles Qualifying. If the withdrawal was after 10 AM Eastern time, 1) ATP Tour Masters 1000. All fine amounts collected as a result of late withdrawals
USA, Friday, then the fine is $500 per team member (doubled if the team shall be returned to the tournament where the late withdrawal occurred.
would have been seeded).
iv) Doubles – Exceptions 2) ATP Tour 500. All fine amounts collected as a result of late withdrawals shall be
aa) If both members of the team were on-site at the time of the withdrawal returned to the tournament where the late withdrawal occurred.
and the withdrawal was due to a medical condition, then neither play- 3) ATP Tour 250. All fine amounts collected as a result of withdrawals or late with-
er is subject to a fine. drawals shall be returned to the tournament where the withdrawal or late with-
bb) If the withdrawal was due to one or both members of the team being drawal occurred.
accepted into the main draw singles of another event, then neither
4) ATP Tour Qualifying. All fine amounts collected as a result of withdrawals or late
player is subject to a fine.
withdrawals shall be returned to the tournament where the withdrawal or late
b) Fines shall be doubled in the case of any player who would have been seed-
withdrawal occurred.
ed, based on the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings.
c) ATP Tour Masters 1000 or ATP Tour 500 Qualifying. Third and subsequent D. Withdrawal Penalties
withdrawals from the qualifying competition will be fined $250 or $500 if he
would have been seeded based upon the most recent Pepperstone ATP 1) ATP Tour 500. Any player withdrawing after the entry/withdrawal deadline shall
Rankings. have a ranking penalty assessed in accordance with procedures specified in the
ATP Tour 250 Qualifying. Third and subsequent withdrawals from the qual- ranking section of this rule book. Players shall not have the ranking penalty as-
ifying competition will be fined $250 or $500 if he would have been seeded sessed if they complete the requirements for “promotional activities”; are out of
based upon the most recent Pepperstone ATP Rankings. competition for 30 days; or the withdrawal complied with the requirements for an
All ATP Tour Qualifying events. If the player withdraws after the 10 AM on-site withdrawal. Players may appeal withdrawal penalties to a Tribunal who
Eastern time, USA, Friday deadline, or is a No Show, it is a Late Withdrawal will determine whether the penalties are affirmed or set aside.
and the fine shall be $1,000 (or $2,000 if seeded).

220 221
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
2) ATP Tour Masters 1000. Any player withdrawing from the main draw shall have F. Special Exempt/Wild Card Non-Appearance
a ranking penalty assessed in accordance with procedures specified in the rank-
ing section of this rule book and be suspended from a subsequent ATP Tour A player who accepts a wild card or a special exempt pursuant to the procedures set
Masters 1000 event. This event shall be the event where the player earned the forth under section 7.10, special exempts, shall appear for play. A violation of this
highest point total during the previous 12 months. Subsequent withdrawals will section would be considered as a late withdrawal and be subject to the penalties set
carry a second suspension from the next event where the player earned his sec- forth under late withdrawals.
ond highest point total. Additional withdrawals will include further suspensions in
the same manner. Players shall not have the suspension penalty assessed if they G. Payment of Fines
complete the requirements for “promotional activities” or the withdrawal complied
with the requirements for an on-site withdrawal. Players may appeal suspension The player shall pay all fines to ATP within ten (10) days after the notice of fine is
penalties to a Tribunal who will determine whether the penalties are affirmed or provided to the player. All collected entry/withdrawal fine amounts, with the exception
set aside (see sections J & K). Ranking penalties are automatic and cannot be of Challenger fines, shall be returned to the event from which the fine was incurred.
appealed.
H. Playing Another event
NOTE1: If there were no 1000 results, the suspension would be from the next
Masters 1000 event he is accepted as a Direct Acceptance. 1) No player who has entered and been accepted into the main draw or qualifying
of an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall play in any other tennis
NOTE2: Players with grandfathered earned complete commitment reduction from
event during the period of such tournament, except if appropriately released by
all ATP Tour Masters 1000 events, who withdrew from that event for any reason
ATP. Once a player enters and is accepted into the main draw or qualifying of the
the previous year, do not need to submit an appeal to avoid the suspension pen-
singles or doubles competition, he is committed to that tournament for the week,
alty.
unless released by the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or Supervi-
E. Retirement or Withdrawal Penalty (On-Site) sor. A violation of this section shall constitute the Major Offense of Aggravated
Behavior.
1) A player who, because of injury or illness, retires during a match or withdraws
2) A player who has entered and been accepted into the main draw of an ATP Tour
during the tournament week must submit to an on-site medical examination by
or ATP Challenger Tour tournament shall be permitted to sign-in and compete
the designated tournament Doctor. Any player who retires during a match must be
in the doubles event of the same tournament if his withdrawal was for medical
examined by the tournament Doctor prior to the end of play on the day of the re-
reasons and he is determined by the Supervisor, upon written medical advice, to
tirement. Failure to submit to such examination shall be a violation of this section
be physically capable to compete on a professional level of play.
and shall subject a player to a fine at ATP Tour tournaments of $10,000 ($2,500
for the qualifying competition) or at ATP Challenger Tour tournaments to a fine of 3) A player may receive permission from a Tournament Director of an ATP Tour 250
$1,000, ($500 for the qualifying competition), or the amount of prize money won tournament to compete in a special event on the Monday of that tournament.
at the tournament, whichever is greater.
I. Repeal of Withdrawal Fines and/or Penalties
2) Following any on-site retirement or withdrawal, the Supervisor at the next tourna-
ment in which the players wants to play, may require the player to submit to an on- 1) ATP Tour 250
site examination by the designated tournament Doctor and receive authorization a) Consecutive Withdrawals
from the Supervisor before competing in any future ATP Tour and ATP Challenger i) Players with multiple consecutive withdrawals* who are out of competi-
Tour tournaments. The Supervisor’s authorization shall be based on the following: tion for thirty (30) days or more due to injury will not be subject to a fine
the results of the on-site medical examination; a review of such results with one of as long as verified and approved medical forms are provided.
ATP’s medical services directors, if possible; and any other appropriate informa- Note: The count shall begin on the withdrawal deadline date; the date of
tion. the retirement; the date of the late withdrawal; or the date of the on-site
No Medical? Big Mistake withdrawal, whichever was chronologically first.
Case: A player retires from his singles match and leaves the tourna- ii) A player must not compete in any other tennis event during those peri-
ment site without having been examined by the tournament Doctor. ods.
Later, it is discovered that the player has left the tournament city. *Each consecutive withdrawal must be prior to 10 AM on Friday, before the
What action does the Supervisor take? tournament.
Decision: Any player who fails to submit to an on-site examina- b) On-Site Medical Examination.
tion by the tournament Doctor after retiring from a match shall be Players who withdraw after 10 AM Eastern Time, USA on Friday (or in the
subjected to a fine of $10,000 ($1,000 for ATP Challenger Tour case of doubles, after the entry deadline) before a tournament shall not have
tournaments) or the amount of prize money won at the tournament, the late withdrawal fine assessed if determined to be unfit to play that week if:
whichever is greater. i) The player who is still competing in a tournament or Davis Cup* after the
Friday 10 AM deadline is forced to withdraw/retire and is examined by

222 223
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
that event’s Doctor and determined to be unfit for the following week’s of promotional activities over a two (2) day period, as determined by ATP,
tournament; or shall not have the applicable fine and ranking penalties assessed. Players
ii) The player was on-site at the event when the withdrawal occurred and is who travel to the event to complete their promotional activity requirement
determined to be unfit for play by that tournament’s Doctor. Players who shall receive full hospitality from the day of arrival through the night following
are examined by the on-site tournament Doctor shall receive tournament the completion of their promotional obligation.
provided hotel rooms through the night of the examination. d) Appeal.
* A withdrawal from Davis Cup must be from a “live” match, for medical The player may appeal the fine and ranking penalty to the Appeals Tribunal
reasons. as specified below under “Review of Penalties for Entry and Commitment
c) Promotional Activities. Offenses”. See also ATP Tour 500 - Ranking Penalty, page 250.
A player who was not on-site when the withdrawal/late withdrawal occurred e) Replacement Event. A commitment player who has received a zero (0) point
but travels to the tournament within the first three (3) days of the main draw, ranking penalty for withdrawing from an ATP Tour 500 event may replace the
unless otherwise determined by ATP, and participates in a reasonable zero (0) point by playing an additional ATP Tour 500 event in that same cal-
amount of promotional activities over a two (2) day period, as determined endar year for a total of four (4) played. The replacement tournament must be
by ATP, shall not have the applicable fines assessed. Players who travel to after the 500 withdrawal that has resulted in a ranking penalty. Only one (1)
the event to complete their promotional activity requirement shall receive full additional ATP Tour 500 event per year may be used to replace an ATP Tour
hospitality from the day of arrival through the night following the completion of 500 ranking penalty. See also ATP Tour 500 - Ranking Penalty, page 250.
their promotional obligation. 3) ATP Tour Masters 1000
d) Appeal.
a) On-Site Medical Examination.
The player may appeal the fine to the SVP - Rules and Competition as spec-
Players who withdraw after 10 AM Eastern Time, USA on Friday (or in the
ified below under “Review of Penalties for Entry and Commitment Offenses”.
case of doubles, after the entry deadline) before a tournament shall not have
2) ATP Tour 500 the late withdrawal fine and the suspension assessed if determined to be unfit
a) Consecutive Withdrawals to play that week if:
i) Players with multiple consecutive withdrawals* who are out of competi- i) The player who is still competing in a tournament or Davis Cup* after the
tion for thirty (30) days or more due to injury will not be subject to a late Friday 10 AM deadline is forced to withdraw/retire and is examined by
withdrawal fine or a ranking penalty as long as verified and approved that event’s Doctor and determined to be unfit for the following week’s
medical forms are provided. tournament; or
Note: The count shall begin on the withdrawal deadline date; the date of ii) The player was on-site at the event when the withdrawal occurred and is
the retirement; the date of the late withdrawal; or the date of the on-site determined to be unfit for play by that tournament’s Doctor. Players who
withdrawal, whichever was chronologically first. are examined by the on-site tournament Doctor shall receive tournament
ii) A player must not compete in any other tennis event during those periods. provided hotel rooms through the night of the examination.
*Each consecutive withdrawal must be prior to 10 AM on Friday, before the * A withdrawal from Davis Cup must be from a “live” match, for medical
tournament. reasons.
b) On-Site Medical Examination. b) Promotional Activities.
Players who withdraw after 10 AM Eastern Time, USA on Friday (or in the A player who was not on-site when the withdrawal/late withdrawal occurred
case of doubles, after the on-site entry deadline) before a tournament shall but travels to the tournament within the first three (3) days of the main draw,
not have the late withdrawal fine or ranking penalty assessed if determined to unless otherwise determined by ATP, and participates in a reasonable
be unfit to play that week if: amount of promotional activities over a two (2) day period, as determined
i) The player who is still competing in a tournament or Davis Cup* after the by ATP, shall: (i) not have the applicable fine assessed, (ii) may recoup po-
Friday 10 AM deadline is forced to withdraw/retire and is examined by tential bonus pool money under Section 1.07.H.2 and (iii) shall not have the
that event’s Doctor and determined to be unfit for the following week’s suspension penalties assessed. Players who travel to the event to complete
tournament; or their promotional activity requirement shall receive full hospitality from the
ii) The player was on-site at the event when the withdrawal occurred and is day of arrival through the night following the completion of their promotional
determined to be unfit for play by that tournament’s Doctor. Players who obligation.
are examined by the on-site tournament Doctor shall receive tournament c) Appeal.
provided hotel rooms through the night of the examination. The player may appeal the fine and suspension to the Appeals Tribunal as
* A withdrawal from Davis Cup must be from a “live” match, for medical specified below under “Review of Penalties for Entry and Commitment Of-
reasons. fenses.
c) Promotional Activities. d) Exceptions.
A player who was not on-site when the withdrawal/late withdrawal occurred The player will not have the suspension assessed if he has grandfathered
but travels to the tournament within the first three (3) days of the main draw, earned commitment reductions and withdraws prior to the withdrawal dead-
unless otherwise determined by ATP, and participates in a reasonable amount line and he did not withdraw in any manner from the same event the previous

224 225
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
year. For the avoidance of doubt, the ranking penalty is automatic and unap- 1) Deadline. The deadline for filing an appeal is as follows:
pealable regardless of any grandfathered ATP Masters 1000 exemptions. ATP Tour Masters 1000 - 6:00 PM Eastern USA on the Tuesday of the event
4) ATP Challenger Tour/ATP Qualifying/ATP Challenger Tour Qualifying week; except that:
a) Consecutive Withdrawals 96-draw tournaments shall be the first Thursday of the tournament week.
i) Players with multiple consecutive withdrawals* who are out of competi- If the Tribunal requests additional information, the player will have 24 hours
tion for 30 days or more due to injury will not be subject to a fine as long from receipt of this notice to submit the requested information.
as verified and approved medical forms are provided. ATP Tour 500 - 10 days from the Monday of the event week.
ii) A player must not compete in any other tennis event during those periods. If the Tribunal requests additional information, the player will have 48 hours
Note: The count shall begin on the withdrawal deadline date; the date of from receipt of this notice to submit the requested information.
the retirement; the date of the late withdrawal; or the date of the on-site ATP Tour 250/ATP Tour Qualifying/ATP Challenger Tour - 10 days from
withdrawal, whichever was chronologically first. the Monday of the event week.
*Each consecutive withdrawal must be prior to 10 AM on Friday, before the If the SVP - Rules and Competition requests additional information, the player
tournament. will have 48 hours from receipt of this notice to submit the requested informa-
b) On-Site Medical Examination. tion.
Players who withdraw after 10 AM Eastern Time, USA on Friday (or in the Appeals must be submitted in writing to the Appeals Tribunal/SVP - Rules and
case of doubles, after the entry deadline) before a tournament shall not have Competition and received prior to the deadline. Send electronically via email or
the late withdrawal fine assessed if determined to be unfit to play that week if: fax to:
i) The player who is still competing in a tournament or Davis Cup* after the Miro Bratoev
Friday 10 AM deadline is forced to withdraw/retire and is examined by Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition
that event’s Doctor and determined to be unfit for the following week’s 201 ATP Tour Boulevard
tournament; or Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida 32082 USA
ii) The player is examined on-site, at the event from which he withdrew, and Email: miro.bratoev@atptour.com
determined to be unfit for play by that tournament’s Doctor during qualify- 2) Determination. The Tribunal President/SVP - Rules and Competition shall re-
ing or within the first three (3) days of the main draw for Challengers/ATP view the petition and make a determination within the following time period:
Tour Qualifying. Players who are examined by the on-site tournament
Doctor shall receive tournament provided hotel rooms through the night ATP Tour Masters 1000 - 10 AM Eastern USA on the Friday* of the event
of the examination. week.
* A withdrawal from Davis Cup must be from a “live” match, for medical *For 96-draw tournaments, the determination shall be made by 10 AM
reasons. Eastern USA on the 2nd Friday of the event.
c) Appeal. ATP Tour 500 - 20 days from the Monday of the event week.
The player may appeal the fine to the SVP - Rules and Competition as spec- ATP Tour 250/ATP Tour Qualifying/ATP Challenger Tour - 20 days from
ified below under “Review of Penalties for Entry and Commitment Offenses”. the Monday of the event week.
No Penalty After Retirement 3) Scope of determination. The Tribunal’s/SVP - Rules and Competition decision
Case: A player is injured at an ATP Tour tournament and is forced on each case is limited to the following:
to retire from his match. He is also unable to compete in the next United Cup
week’s tournament. The injury occurred after 10 AM, Friday, Eastern Late Withdrawal Fine, if applicable
Time, USA. Must the player travel to the next tournament to be ATP Tour Masters 1000
examined by that tournament’s Doctor to avoid the appropriate Suspension
penalties? Late Withdrawal Fine, if applicable.
Decision: No. If the player is forced to retire after 10 AM, Friday, ATP Tour 500
Eastern Time, USA, he may be examined by that tournament’s Ranking penalty
Doctor. Late Withdrawal Fine, if applicable.
ATP Tour 250/ATP Tour Qualifying/ATP Challenger Tour
J. Review of Penalties for Entry and Commitment Offenses Withdrawal Fine
Late Withdrawal Fine
Any player found to have committed a United Cup, ATP Tour Masters 1000 or ATP
Tour 500 entry or commitment offense may petition the Appeal Tribunal for discre- K. Tribunal.
tionary review. ATP Tour 250, ATP Tour Qualifying and ATP Challenger Tour appeals
shall be submitted to and determined by the ATP Senior Vice President – Rules and The ATP Board of Directors and ATP CEO shall nominate designees for the appeals
Competition. This written petition shall detail the basis for the appeal. tribunal as follows:

226 227
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
1) The three members of the board representing the players shall nominate a desig- - If not a patch, the area of a logo or mark shall be determined
nee to serve a one (1) year term on the tribunal. by the circumference of a circle or the perimeter of a triangle or
2) The three members of the board representing the tournaments shall nominate a rectangle drawn around the logo or mark.
designee to serve a one (1) year term on the tribunal. ii) Logo Usage. All logos or patches must be firmly attached at all points
on the clothing or equipment. All commercial ID logos placed on the shirt
3) The ATP CEO shall nominate a designee to serve a one (1) year term on the front or collar must be embroidered or screen printed. All manufacturer
tribunal. logos must be embroidered, screen printed or otherwise professionally
4) Medical Advisor. attached at all points.
1. Bags, Towels or Other Items. Standard logos of tennis equipment
a) A person nominated by the medical services committee shall be present, manufacturers on each item plus two (2) separate commercial identi-
if requested by the three (3) voting members of the Tribunal, at all tribunal fications on one (1) bag, neither of which may exceed six (6) square
meetings to offer advice and expert opinion on medical matters presented to inches (39 sq. cm.).
the Tribunal. 2. Drink Containers. Players are permitted to use drink containers on-
b) The advisor has no vote in any appeal decisions. court if they are of reasonable size and they contain no logo or writing
L. On-Site Offenses/Procedures of the drink manufacturer. ATP has designated three (3) beverage
categories of drinks for purposes of this rule: bottled water, electrolyte
The on-site offense provisions shall apply to every player during his participation in or other drinks (soft drinks, energy drinks and any other drink with the
an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament. On-site includes tournament hotels, exception of alcoholic drinks and tea / cofee). The Supervisor may
transportation, all tournament facilities and activities. approve for use on-court a reasonably sized drink container that has
a logo or writing, not to exceed four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm.) if:
1) Dress and Equipment · The advertised on-court drink sponsor is the same as the play-
Every player shall dress and present himself for play in a professional manner. er’s drink container manufacturer, or;
Clean and customarily acceptable tennis attire as approved by ATP shall be worn. · The advertised on-court drink sponsor(s) is not in the same bev-
A player who violates this section may be ordered by the Chair Umpire or Super- erage category as the player’s drink container.
visor to change his attire or equipment immediately. Failure of a player to comply 3. Hat or Headband. One (1) standard logo of a clothing manufacturer
with such order may result in an immediate default. or a tennis equipment manufacturer and/or one (1) commercial iden-
tification, both of which may contain writing. Neither shall exceed four
a) Identification/Visible
(4) square inches (26 sq. cm.).
No visible identification shall be permitted on a player, his clothing, products
Restrictions:
or equipment on court during a match or at any press conference or tourna-
• The commercial logo must be located on the side of the hat /
ment ceremony, except as follows:
headband and worn so that it is positioned on the side of the
i) ATP Definitions.
head;
1. Clothing Designs. Clothing designs will not be interpreted as manu-
• No hat or headband, with or without logos, may be worn during
facturer’s logos and such logos can be incorporated into the clothing
the awards ceremony;
design, provided they conform to the size and placement restrictions.
• Once a player has competed in the first match of his first event
2. Commercial Identification. Corporate or product identification other
with a commercial brand logo on his hat/headband then he may
than the manufacturer of the item, including social media usernames,
not change commercial brands during that calendar year, unless
hashtags, and URLs.
approved by ATP.
3. Tennis Equipment Manufacturer. The tennis equipment manufac-
Note: Players shall include a clause in their contracts permitting
turer is the entity that distributes, or offers for sale, tennis racquets,
them to opt out at the end of any year in the event ATP rules
clothing, strings or shoes.
change to prohibit a commercial brand logo on the hat or head-
4. Clothing Manufacturer. Clothing manufacturer is the corporate or
band in the manner described above.
product identification, trademarks (regardless of registration status)
4. Wristband. One (1) standard logo of a clothing manufacturer or ten-
or other recognizable names presented in the form of a logo or mark
nis equipment manufacturer, which may contain writing, not to exceed
on the clothing product in question.
four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm.)
5. Size Limitation.
5. Racquet. Standard logos of the manufacturer shall be permitted on
- If a patch, the size is determined by the area of the actual patch.
racquets and strings.
If a solid color patch is the same color as the clothing, then the
6. Shirt, Sweater or Jacket.
size of the actual patch will be determined by the size of the logo
· Front, Back and Collar. Two (2) standard logo positions of the
identification, as described below.
clothing manufacturer or commercial ID, neither of which ex-
ceeds six (6) square inches (39 sq. cm.), may be placed in any
location (i.e. 2 on the front, or 1 on the front and 1 on the collar)
228 229
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
or one (1) logo of the clothing manufacturer or commercial ID Tattoo as Logo
which may not exceed six (6) square inches (39 sq. cm.), may be Case: A player arrives on court wearing an approved sleeveless
placed on the front or collar and then an additional clothing man- shirt. The Chair Umpire notices that the player has a tattoo of the
ufacturer logo, not to exceed four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm.), clothing manufacturer on his upper arm. If there is no issue with the
may be placed on the back. Logos may contain writing. Once a size, is this allowed?
player has competed in the first match of his first event with a Decision: No. The rules for both clothing manufacturer and com-
commercial brand logo on the front, collar or headgear, he may mercial I.D. logo placement clearly specify where these logos may
not change brands during that calendar year, unless approved be placed.
by ATP. No new commercial logo may be added to the shirt front iii) Restrictions /Government. Any commercial or other identification that
for events following the US Open through the Nitto ATP Finals. violates applicable governmental and/or television regulations is prohibit-
Note: Players shall include a clause in their contracts permitting ed.
them to opt out at the end of any year in the event ATP rules iv) Restrictions/Other Tennis event. The identification by use of the name,
change to prohibit a commercial brand logo on the front of a emblem, logo, trademark, symbol or other description of any tennis cir-
shirt, sweater or jacket in the manner described above. cuit, series of tennis events, tennis exhibition or tournament other than
ATP Premier / Platinum Sponsor Patch. An additional com- the “ATP” is prohibited on all dress or equipment at any ATP Tour and ATP
mercial identification patch may be placed on the back of the Challenger Tour tournaments, unless otherwise approved by ATP.
shirt, below the collar, if part of the ATP Premier / Platinum spon- v) Restrictions /Timing. Once a player has competed in the first match of
sor patch program. This program is optional and is in addition to his first event with a commercial brand logo in either of the two locations
any manufacturer identification on the back of the shirt. (shirt front and/or hat/headband), he may not change brands during that
· Sleeves. Two positions for commercial (i.e., non-clothing manu- calendar year, unless approved by ATP.
facturer) or manufacturer’s identification for each sleeve, neither Note: Players shall include a clause in their contracts permitting them to
of which exceeds six (6) square inches (39 sq. cm). A maximum opt out at the end of any year in the event ATP rules change to prohibit
of two (2) logos may be placed within each 6 square inch (39 sq. a commercial brand logo on the front of a shirt, sweater or jacket in the
cm.) position. Logos may contain writing. manner described above.
· Sleeveless. Two (2) logo positions of the clothing manufacturer vi) Restrictions / General. Tobacco and companies associated with tennis
or commercial ID none of which exceeds six (6) square inches gambling will be prohibited from any endorsements on player clothing.
(39 sq. cm.) may be placed on the front of the shirt. If no more ATP reserves the right to prohibit any identification it deems not to be in
than one (1) logo is placed on the front or collar of the shirt, then the best interest of the game and/or ATP.
one (1) manufacturer logo may be placed on the back of the
shirt, not to exceed four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm). b) Shoes
· Other. A logo of the clothing manufacturer, without the name of i) General. Players are required to wear tennis shoes generally accepted
the manufacturer or any other writing, may be placed once or re- as proper tennis attire. Shoes shall not cause damage to the court other
peatedly within an area not to exceed twelve (12) square inches than what is expected during the normal course of a match or practice.
(77.5 sq. cm.) in one of the following positions: Damage to a court may be considered as physical or visible, which may
a. On each of the shirt sleeves, or include a shoe that leaves marks beyond what is considered accept-
b. On the outer seams (sides of torso) of the shirt. able. The Supervisor has the authority to determine that a shoe does not
7. Shorts. meet the criteria of “customarily acceptable” and may order the player to
· Front and Back. Two (2) standard logos of the clothing manu- change.
facturer neither of which exceeds two (2) square inches (13 sq. ii) Clay Courts. Players are required to wear tennis shoes generally ac-
cm.), may be placed on the front or back of the shorts; or two cepted for play on clay courts or granular surfaces. The Supervisor has
(2) standard logos of the clothing manufacturer neither of which the authority to determine that a tennis shoe’s sole does not conform and
exceeds four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm), may be placed as can prohibit its use at any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament.
follows: one (1) logo on the front and one (1) logo on the back of Grass court shoes should not be worn during a match on clay courts.
the shorts. Logos may contain writing. iii) Grass Courts. In ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments played
· Compression shorts and/or compression sleeves may contain on grass courts, no shoes other than those with rubber soles, without
two (2) standard logos of the clothing manufacturer which must heels, ribs, studs or covering, shall be worn by players.
not exceed two (2) square inches (13 sq. cm.) or one (1) stan- aa) Special grass court shoes shall not be used without the express ap-
dard logo of the clothing manufacturer which must not exceed proval of ATP, based on the following specifications:
four (4) square inches (26 sq. cm.). 1) The pimples or studs on the base of the sole should be verti-
8. Socks /Shoes. Standard logos of the manufacturer of the article may cal from the outsole and shall have a maximum top diameter
appear on each sock and each shoe. of three (3) millimeters and a minimum top diameter of two (2)
millimeters. The maximum height of the pimples or studs shall
230 231
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
be two (2) millimeters, from the base of the shoe. The hardness The maximum fine will increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each
of any pimple or studs shall be between 55 and 60 based on a consecutive violation during the same calendar year.
Shore “A” scale. The number of pimples per square inch shall be 2) Point Penalty Schedule
no less than 15 and no more than 28.
a) The Point Penalty Schedule to be used for Code Violations is as follows:
2) Shoes with pimples or studs around the outside of the toes shall
FIRST OFFENSE WARNING
not be permitted. The foxing / sidewall can be contoured only
SECOND OFFENSE POINT PENALTY
in the medial forefoot and medial toe area but only within the
THIRD AND EACH SUBSEQUENT OFFENSE GAME PENALTY
following restrictions. The contoured area may begin in the tran-
However, after the third Code Violation, the Supervisor shall determine
sition area between outsole and sidewall but can only go to a
whether each subsequent offense shall constitute a default.
maximum of 1.5 cm up the sidewall. This contoured area must
b) In ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments and events, Code Viola-
be flat (not textured or undulating) but can be stepped with no
tions shall be levied by the Chair Umpire for on-court offenses. In the event
more than 5 steps each no more than 1 mm in depth.
that the Chair Umpire fails to levy a code violation, then the Supervisor may
3) Forefoot and heel areas may be separated but there should be
order him to do so.
no more than a 2 mm step in the outsole of the shoe.
c) In doubles, code violations shall be assessed against the team.
• Approval of special grass court shoes should be received by
ATP at least ninety (90) days in advance of the grass court 3) Code Violations Not Witnessed By Chair Umpire
tournament. Occasionally, there are code violations by players that are not witnessed by the
All shoes approved for play in 2008 shall continue to be approved. Chair Umpire. The Line Umpire should immediately approach the Chair Umpire
c) Violations/Fines and report the facts of the violation, during which time the Chair Umpire should
Any player who violates this section and is not defaulted shall be subject to turn off all microphones in the area of the chair. The Chair Umpire may ask the
the following fines: player to respond to such report; thereafter, the Chair Umpire must make a deci-
i) Commercial Identification. Violation of the provisions with respect to sion and he either dismisses the report or declares a code violation and assesses
commercial identifications shall result in a fine up to: a penalty. If a code violation is assessed, then the Chair Umpire must announce
• $2,000 for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments. such violation to the player, opponent and spectators. If in his opinion there was
• $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments. a code violation, but because of the time of discovery (another point has been
• $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments. played), it would be inappropriate to issue a Code Violation Warning, Point or
• $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments. Game Penalty, then he/she must notify the player that he/she will refer the matter
The maximum fine will increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each to the Supervisor for action after the match. If a serious violation that may warrant
consecutive violation during the same calendar year. an Immediate Default has been reported and acted upon no later than the end of
ii) Tennis Equipment Manufacturer’s logo. Violation of the provisions with the next changeover, the ATP Supervisor may be called to discuss an Immediate
respect to standard logos of manufacturers shall result in a fine up to: Default. The Supervisor may order the Chair Umpire to issue a code violation for
• $500 for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments. a violation witnessed or not witnessed by the Chair Umpire.
• $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments.
Case 1: A Line Umpire reports to the Chair Umpire an incident
• $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments.
which occurred three (3) points earlier, may the Chair Umpire issue
• $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments.
a Warning, Point or Game Penalty?
The maximum fine will increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each
consecutive violation during the same calendar year. Decision 1: No, in this case a Code Violation may be issued only
iii) Other Tennis event. Violation of the provisions with respect to the name if the violation was reported immediately (before the next point is
of an event other than the “ATP” shall result in a fine up to: played).
• $5,000 for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments. Case 2: Same situation as Case 1 above except that the violation
• $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments. reported is a serious violation that may warrant an Immediate De-
• $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments. fault. May the Supervisor/Referee be called to discuss an Immediate
• $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments. Default?
The maximum fine will increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each Decision 2: Yes, as long as the violation has been reported and
consecutive violation during the same calendar year. acted upon no later than the end of the next changeover. Once the
iv) Unacceptable Attire. Violation of the provisions with respect to unac- first point of the game immediately following the changeover has
ceptable attire shall result in a fine up to: been played then no Code Violation for an Immediate Default may
• $1,000 for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments be issued. The player may however be subject to a fine as deter-
• $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments. mined by the Supervisor.
• $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments.
• $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments.

232 233
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
4) Offenses crease by one hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive violation
a) Ball Abuse during the same calendar year. In addition, if such violation occurs during
i) Players shall not violently, dangerously or with anger hit, kick or throw a match, the player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Pen-
a tennis ball while on the grounds of the tournament site except in the alty Schedule. In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injuri-
reasonable pursuit of a point during a match (including warm-up). For ous to the success of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, the ATP
purposes of this rule, abuse of balls is defined as intentionally or reckless- Supervisor may refer the matter to the ATP Members Fines Committee
ly hitting a ball out of the enclosure of the court, hitting a ball dangerously who shall conduct an investigation to determine whether the player Major
or recklessly within the court or hitting a ball with disregard of the conse- Offense of Aggravated Behavior or Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of
quences. the Game has occurred. Prize money earned at that event shall be held
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine of up to $350 for by ATP until the ATP Members Fines Committee has concluded their in-
each violation. In addition, if such violation occurs during a match, the vestigation and made a determination.
player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule. e) Audible Obscenity
b) Racquet or Equipment Abuse i) A player shall not use an audible obscenity while on-site. Audible obscen-
i) Players shall not violently, dangerously or with anger hit, kick or throw a ity is defined as the use of words commonly known and understood to be
racquet or other equipment within the precincts of the tournament site. profane and uttered clearly and loudly enough to be heard.
For purposes of this rule, abuse of racquets or equipment is defined as ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $5,000 for
intentionally, dangerously and violently destroying or damaging racquets each violation. In addition, if such violation occurs during a match, the
or equipment or intentionally and violently hitting the net, court, umpire’s player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule.
chair or other fixture during a match out of anger or frustration. In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injurious to the suc-
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $500 for each cess of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, a single violation of
violation. In addition, if such violation occurs during a match, the player this section shall also constitute the player Major Offense of Aggravated
shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule. Behavior.
c) Physical Abuse f) Visible Obscenity
i) Players shall not at any time physically abuse any official, opponent, i) Players shall not make obscene gestures of any kind while on-site. Visible
spectator or other person within the precincts of the tournament site. For obscenity is defined as the making of signs by a player with hands and/or
purposes of this rule, physical abuse is the unauthorized touching of an racquet or balls that commonly have an obscene meaning.
official, opponent, and spectator or other person. ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $5,000 for
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $20,000 each violation. In addition, if such violation occurs during a match, the
for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tour- player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule.
naments, $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injurious to the suc-
Masters 1000 tournaments for each violation. The maximum fine will in- cess of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, a singles violation of
crease by one hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive violation this section shall also constitute the player Major Offense of Aggravated
during the same calendar year. In addition, if such violation occurs during Behavior.
a match, the player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Pen- g) Unsportsmanlike Conduct
alty Schedule. In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injuri- i) Players shall at all times conduct themselves in a sportsmanlike manner
ous to the success of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, the ATP and give due regard to the authority of officials and the rights of oppo-
Supervisor may refer the matter to the ATP Members Fines Committee nents, spectators and others. Unsportsmanlike conduct is defined as any
who shall conduct an investigation to determine whether the player Major misconduct by a player that is clearly abusive or detrimental to the suc-
Offense of Aggravated Behavior or Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of cess of a tournament, ATP and/or the Sport. In addition, unsportsmanlike
the Game has occurred. Prize money earned at that event shall be held conduct shall include, but not be limited to, the giving, making, issuing,
by ATP until the ATP Members Fines Committee has concluded their in- authorizing or endorsing any public statement having, or designed to
vestigation and made a determination. have, an effect prejudicial or detrimental to the best interest of the tourna-
d) Verbal Abuse ment and/or the officiating thereof.
i) Players shall not at any time directly or indirectly verbally abuse an of- ii) Players and their support team members accredited at any event must
ficial, opponent, sponsor, spectator or any other person within the pre- comply with the physical distancing and COVID-19 precautionary mea-
cincts of the tournament site. Verbal abuse is defined as any statement sures applicable for each event. Any repetitive or blatant breach of those
about an official, opponent, sponsor, spectator or any other person that measures may be considered a violation of the code of conduct under this
implies dishonesty or is derogatory, insulting or otherwise abusive. Section or the Major Offense of Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of the
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $20,000 Game depending on the severity of the violation.
for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tour- iii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $20,000
naments, $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tour-
Masters 1000 tournaments for each violation. The maximum fine will in- naments, $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour
234 235
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
Masters 1000 tournaments for each violation. The maximum fine will in- k) Ceremonies
crease by one hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive violation i) All tournament finalists must attend and participate in the post-match cer-
during the same calendar year. In addition, if such violation occurs during emonies, unless he is physically unable to do so as determined by the
a match, the player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Pen- tournament Doctor. This includes retirements and finals not played due to
alty Schedule. In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injuri- a walkover.
ous to the success of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, the ATP ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $5,000.
Supervisor may refer the matter to the ATP Members Fines Committee l) Coaching and Coaches
who shall conduct an investigation to determine whether the player Major i) Players shall not receive coaching during a tournament match*. Commu-
Offense of Aggravated Behavior or Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of nications of any kind, audible or visible, between a player and a coach
the Game has occurred. Prize money earned at that event shall be held may be construed as coaching. Coaches on-site are prohibited from:
by ATP until the ATP Members Fines Committee has concluded their in- aa) Using an audible obscenity or making obscene gestures of any kind.
vestigation and made a determination. bb) Abusing any official, opponent, spectator or other person, verbally or
h) Best Efforts physically.
i) A player shall use his best efforts during the match when competing in a cc) Engaging in conduct contrary to the integrity of the game of tennis.
tournament. Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to Conduct contrary to the integrity of the game shall include, but not be
$20,000 for ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 limited to, comments to the news media that unreasonably attack or
tournaments, $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP disparage a tournament, sponsor, player, official or ATP. Responsi-
Tour Masters 1000 tournaments for each violation. The maximum fine will ble expressions of legitimate disagreement with ATP policies are not
increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive violation prohibited. However, public comments that one of the stated persons
during the same calendar year. above knows, or should reasonably know, will harm the reputation or
ii) For purposes of this rule, the Supervisor and/or the Chair Umpire shall financial best interest of a tournament, player, sponsor, official or ATP
have the authority to penalize a player in accordance with the Point Pen- are expressly covered by this section.
alty Schedule. In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injuri- ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $5,000 for
ous to the success of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, the ATP each violation. In addition, if such violation occurs during a match, the
Supervisor may refer the matter to the ATP Members Fines Committee player shall be penalized in accordance with the Point Penalty Schedule.
who shall conduct an investigation to determine whether the player Major In circumstances that are flagrant and particularly injurious to the success
Offense of Aggravated Behavior or Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of of a tournament, or are singularly egregious, the Supervisor shall have
the Game has occurred. Prize money earned at that event shall be held the authority to relocate the position of a coach if there is reasonable
by ATP until the ATP Members Fines Committee has concluded their in- belief that coaching is occurring or the Supervisor may order the coach to
vestigation and made a determination. be removed from the match site or tournament site and upon his failure to
i) Leaving the Court comply with such order, may declare an immediate default of such player.
i) A player shall not leave the court area during a match (including the
warm-up) without the permission of the Chair Umpire or Supervisor. *Coaching is allowed at ATP Tour and Challenger Tour tournaments through the
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $3,000 for ATP end of 2024 on a trial basis with the following conditions:
Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments,
$40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters ● The coach must sit in the tournament’s designated coaches’ seats
1000 tournaments for each violation. The maximum fine will increase by ● Verbal coaching is permitted only when the player is at the same end of
one hundred percent (100%) for each consecutive violation during the the court
same calendar year. In addition, the player may be defaulted and shall be
● Verbal coaching may consist of a few words and/or short phrases (no con-
subject to the additional penalties for failure to complete match.
versations are permitted)
j) Failure to Complete Match
i) A player must complete a match in progress unless he is reasonably un- ● Non-verbal coaching (hand signals) is permitted
able to do so.
● Coaching (verbal and non-verbal) is allowed only if it does not interrupt
ii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $5,000 for ATP
play or create any hindrance to the opponent
Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments,
$40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters ● Players may approach their coach or engage in conversation with their
1000 tournaments. The maximum fine will increase by one hundred per- coach during an opposing player’s Medical Timeout or a Toilet Break/
cent (100%) for each consecutive violation during the same calendar Change of Attire Break or another break approved by the Chair Umpire
year. Violation of this section shall subject a player to immediate default during which the players remain on court
and shall also constitute the Major Offense of Aggravated Behavior.

236 237
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
● Coaches may not speak to their player, when the player leaves the court gross prize money earned for the event where he was defaulted;
for any reason and hotel accommodations, in addition to the fines that may be im-
posed for the code violations. If the player is removed from the other
● Penalties and fines to apply for abuse or misuse of the coaching conditions
event as well, he will lose all points and prize money earned from
Electronic devices both events, and hotel accommodations.
Case: May a player listen to an mp3 player or other device on a n) Punctuality
changeover? Players shall be ready to play when their matches are called.
Decision: A player is not allowed to use any electronic devices (e.g. i) Any player not ready to play within ten (10) minutes after his match is
CD players, mobile phones, etc.) during matches, unless approved called shall be fined $250.
by the Supervisor. (Tour Policy) ii) For televised matches with an announced “walk-on” time, players not
m) Default ready to walk-on at the announced time may be issued a fine at the
i) During the match. The Supervisor may default a player either for a sin- sole discretion of the ATP Supervisor. Normal fines may be in the range
gle violation of the Code (immediate default) or as outlined in the Point of $1,000-$5,000 but in extreme cases could be up to a maximum of
Penalty Schedule. $10,000.
ii) On-site. The Supervisor may withdraw a player from all events for a single iii) Any player not ready to play within fifteen (15) minutes after his match
violation of the Code occurring during the event but not during a player’s is called may be fined up to an additional $750 and shall be defaulted
match. unless the Supervisor, after consideration of all relevant circumstances,
iii) In all cases of default, the Supervisor’s decision shall be final and may elects not to declare a default. In such case, the Supervisor shall immedi-
not be appealed. ately inform the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition. This section
iv) Penalties: applies only to those players who are or have been on-site.
aa) Any player who is defaulted shall lose all prize money (gross prize Late Transportation
money to be paid to ATP), hotel accommodations and points earned Case: The scheduled transportation is late to pick up players from
for that event at that tournament. the tournament hotel. A player is defaulted for punctuality and sub-
bb) At the discretion of the Supervisor, the player may be withdrawn from sequently arrives on-site with tournament transportation. Should the
all other events, if any, in that tournament. default be rescinded and the match played?
cc) In addition, if the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition deter- Decision: The player is defaulted. Transportation is a service
mines that the default was particularly injurious to the success of the provided by the tournament; however, the player is responsible for
tournament or detrimental to the integrity of the sport, he may consid- arriving on time for his match.
er additional penalties (fines and/or suspensions). o) Continuous Play
v) The exception is when the offending incident involves: i) Delay of Play. A player will receive a warning for the first violation and
aa) A violation of the punctuality or dress and equipment provisions set be subject to a fine for each subsequent violation ($250 then doubled for
forth in the Code; or each additional violation) during that week’s event for violating the follow-
bb) As a result of a medical condition; or ing timings:
cc) A match ending on a delay penalty (Code Violation for Delay of Game)
if the delay penalty was the result of a medical condition. Time Allowed
dd) A member of a doubles team did not cause any of the misconduct Action ATP Tour ATP Challenger
code violations that resulted in the team being defaulted.
vi) In doubles: Reaching the net for the
aa) A default assessed for violation of the Code shall be assessed against pre-match meeting. Timing
60 seconds 60 seconds
the team. begins when second player/
bb) The Supervisor will assess the default penalties against both players team reaches the appropriate
on the team, unless the provisions in 4 above apply. bench.
cc) At the discretion of the Supervisor, one or both of the players may be Warm-up. Time begins at the 4 minutes 5 minutes
withdrawn from all other events, if any, in that tournament. conclusion of the pre-match
dd) The partner of the player who caused the default shall receive points meeting.
and prize money from the previous round.
Start of play. Players must
Default - List Penalties
show that they are ready to
Case: If a player is defaulted through the Code of Conduct for mis- 60 seconds 60 seconds
start play. Timing begins at
conduct, what penalties result? the conclusion of the 4 or 5
Decision: The player may be withdrawn from any other event he minute warm-up.
is entered in, as determined by the Supervisor; lose all points and

238 239
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
ii) Delay of Game. Once the match has begun, play shall be continuous and a of the server. This would be considered a second violation and a point
player shall not unreasonably delay a match for any cause. A maximum of penalty would be issued.
twenty-five (25) seconds shall elapse from the moment the ball goes out of
play until the time the ball is struck for the next point. If such serve is a fault, p) Post-Match Media Availability
then the second serve must be struck by the server without delay. The excep- i) All players scheduled to play on televised courts will be required, if re-
tion is at a ninety (90) second changeover or a one hundred twenty (120) set quested, to perform a pre-match TV interview on the day of the match (not
break. The procedures for enforcing this rule are as follows: to exceed 2 minutes in total). The interview may be conducted at either
aa) 25 Seconds Between Points. the player’s practice court or as the players approach the court for walk-
1) Start stopwatch when the player is ordered to play or when the on as determined by the host and player’s national broadcasters.
ball goes out of play.
2) Assess time violation or code violation if the ball is not struck for ii) Unless injured and physically unable to appear, a player or team must
the next point within the twenty-five (25) seconds allowed. There be available, as determined by ATP, on court (for TVs only), in the mixed
is no time warning prior to the expiration of the twenty-five (25) zone or media conference area after the conclusion of each match wheth-
seconds. er the player or team was the winner or loser. Post-match media obliga-
bb) Changeover (Ninety (90) Seconds) and Set Break (One Hundred tions include three (3) interviews, with the news service, host and player’s
and Twenty (120) Seconds). national broadcasters. This rule shall also apply to matches won or lost as
1) Start stopwatch the moment the ball goes out of play. a result of a withdrawal or retirement.
2) Announce “Time” after sixty (60) / ninety (90) seconds have
elapsed. iii) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine in accordance with
3) Announce “15 Seconds” if one or both of the players are still at the following schedule (based on most recent position in the Pepperstone
their chairs and/or have not started toward their playing posi- ATP Rankings):
tions after seventy-five (75) / one hundred and five (105) sec-
1 - 10 $20,000
onds have elapsed.
4) Assess time violation or code violation (after medical time-out 11 - 25 $10,000
or treatment) if the ball is not struck for the next point within the 26 - 50 $5,000
ninety (90) / one hundred and twenty (120) seconds allowed pro-
vided there has been no interference which prevented the server 51 - 100 $3,000
from serving within that time. 101 + $1,000
NOTE: When requested by television, “Time” shall be an- Fines will be increased to the next higher level for any national player.
nounced after ninety (90) seconds for a changeover and one Fines will double for each repeat offense within an ATP Circuit Year.
hundred twenty (120) seconds for a set break. For ATP Challenger Tour events, a violation of this section shall result in
cc) Time Violations. a fine of $500.
Violating a provision of this Section, as server or receiver, shall be q) Pre-Tournament Media Availability
penalized by a “Time Violation – Warning” and each subsequent vio- All players will be required, if requested, to take part in media availability prior
lation shall be penalized as follows: to their first match at each tournament.
• Server. When serving the time violation shall result in a “fault”. r) ATP STARS Program Penalties
• Receiver. When it is determined that the receiver is the cause Players shall be required to participate in ATP sponsored activities at each
of the time violation, then the receiver shall be penalized by the ATP Tour tournament. Failure to participate in a scheduled activity due to
assessment of one (1) point penalty. The receiver must also non-appearance or tardiness shall be deemed a missed activity. Violation of
play to the reasonable pace of the server. A Time Violation may this section shall subject a player to a fine as indicated below:
be issued in this case prior to the expiration of twenty-five (25) Fine Schedule (based on most recent position in the Pepperstone ATP Rank-
seconds if the receiver’s actions are delaying the reasonable ings):
pace of the server. Assess a code violation if the receiver is con-
sistently or obviously delaying the server, thus employing “Un- 1 - 10 $20,000
sportsmanlike Conduct”. 11 - 25 $10,000
• Server/Receiver following a toilet break. Point Penalty.
26 - 50 $5,000
Note: A second time violation occurs when a player who has received 51 - 100 $3,000
a prior warning as either the server or receiver is issued another time 101 + $1,000
violation as either server or receiver. Example is Player A had re-
ceived a warning for not serving within the 25 second limit; later, as Fines will be increased to the next higher level for any national player. Fines
receiver, Player A is deemed to not be playing to the reasonable pace will double for each repeat offense within an ATP Circuit Year.
240 241
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
s) Champion’s Media Tour 2) Any player found to have committed a player on-site offense may appeal such
Each winner of a Grand Slam or the Nitto ATP Finals, if requested, is obligat- decision in writing to the ATP Members Fines Committee. Such appeal shall be
ed to participate in media tour as arranged by ATP during the days immedi- lodged within ten (10) days of the on-site offense. The ATP Members Fines Com-
ately following the finals of any such tournament. Players and their agents mittee shall review the Appeal within twenty-one (21) days and, if necessary, des-
will be consulted with respect to the scope and substance of the activities to ignate a date, time and place for a hearing. At the hearing, the player shall present
take place during the media tour to ensure that the player is comfortable with to the ATP Members Fines Committee his respective positions on the facts. The
the proposed activities. ATP will cover all expenses incurred by a player while ATP Members Fines Committee may affirm, reverse or modify the penalty initially
participating in the media tour. imposed by the Supervisor.
t) Special Functions
Each player, if requested, is obligated to attend the ATP Awards Show and P. Appeal of Violations of STARS Program
up to two (2) additional ATP sponsored/conducted special events. Players 1) All appeals concerning the ATP STARS Program shall be governed by the proce-
and their agents will be consulted in advance to ensure that attendance at dures in this section.
any such event(s) will not substantially intrude upon the player’s schedule.
Players and their agents will also be consulted with respect to the scope and 2) A player can file a written appeal with the Senior Vice President - Rules & Com-
substance of the events to ensure that the player is comfortable with attend- petition within ten (10) days after the player’s receipt of notification of a violation
ing the event(s). of the Stars Program. As a condition to filing an appeal, the player must pay the
fine prescribed in the Program for the violation.
M. Determination of Violation and Penalty
3) Upon receipt of a timely written appeal, the Senior Vice President - Rules & Com-
1) The Supervisor shall make a reasonable investigation to determine the facts petition, or his designee, shall appoint a committee to hear and decide the appeal,
regarding all player on-site offenses. Upon determining that a violation has oc- and also shall appoint one of the committee members to act as the committee’s
curred, the Supervisor shall specify the fine and/or other punishment in written chairman. ATP may provide reasonable compensation and reimbursement of ex-
notice to the player. The Supervisor may limit the fines levied during qualifying penses to committee members.
competition as follows:
4) The committee shall convene a hearing to hear the appeal and shall render its
a) ATP Tour Tournament Qualifying Competition. A maximum of $500 for each written decision on the case as soon as practicable following the conclusion of the
violation. hearing. The decision shall be by majority of the committee members.
b) ATP Challenger Tour Tournament Qualifying Competition. A maximum of
$100 for each violation. 5) The procedure prior to and at the hearing shall be at the discretion of the com-
2) The ATP Members Fines Committee shall have the authority to investigate state- mittee chairman, including but not limited to the decision to conduct the hearing
ments or actions made by a player that are not heard or seen by on-court officials by telephone conference or in person. In establishing such procedures, the chair-
by reviewing tapes of televised matches. After reviewing all facts and circum- man shall take into account the amount of the fine involved and any other relevant
stances, the ATP Members Fines Committee may determine that a violation of considerations.
the Code has occurred and shall specify the fine and/or other punishment. The 6) The committee shall not be bound by judicial rules governing the procedure or the
player shall be given written notice of the violation and fine. The player shall have admissibility of evidence, provided that the hearing is conducted in a fair manner
the right to appeal such determination to the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & with a reasonable opportunity for each party to submit evidence, address the
Competition, consistent with the procedures outlined in the Code. committee and present his or its case.

N. Payment of Fines 7) In all appeals, ATP will appear and defend the finding of a violation, and shall
have the burden of proving, by a preponderance of the evidence, that there has
Fines levied by the Supervisor for player on-site offenses shall be paid in accordance been a violation of the STARS Program.
with the following: 8) The committee’s decision shall be the full, final and complete disposition of the
1) ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. Each tournament shall de- appeal and will be binding on all parties.
duct fines from the player’s winnings, if any, and promptly pay the fine to ATP. In 9) If the player’s appeal is upheld, the Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition
the event that the player’s winnings are insufficient to pay the fine, the player shall shall refund to the player the fine paid by the player in connection with this appeal.
pay the balance within twenty (20) days after the tournament to ATP.
Q. Notice and Service
O. Procedures for Appeal
1) Any written communication to be sent to the ATP CEO or Senior Vice President -
1) Except for appeals of violations of the Stars Program, any player in violation of Rules & Competition should be addressed as follows, unless notice of change is
a player on-site offense may, after paying all fines, appeal to the ATP Members subsequently published.
Fines Committee for review of a determination of guilt and the penalty assessed.

242 243
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
ATP Members Fines Committee or SVP - Rules & Competition a tournament, player, sponsor, official or ATP are expressly covered by this
ATP Americas section.
201 ATP Blvd b) A player, or related person, that has at any time behaved in a manner se-
Ponte Vedra Beach, FL 32082, USA verely damaging to the reputation of the sport, including submitting a falsified
Telephone: +1 904 285 8000 Covid-19 vaccination record, may be deemed by virtue of such behavior to
2) Service. Service to a player of any notice or other document shall be deemed have engaged in conduct contrary to the integrity of the Game of Tennis and
completed if mailed to the player at his home address or other address designat- be in violation of this Section.
ed by the player. c) A player, or related person, convicted of a violation of a criminal or civil law of
any jurisdiction may be deemed by virtue of such conviction to have engaged
8.05 Player Major Offenses/Procedures in conduct contrary to the integrity of the Game of Tennis.
d) A player, or related person, charged with a violation of a criminal or civil law of
A. Offenses any jurisdiction may be deemed by virtue of such charge to have engaged in
conduct contrary to the integrity of the Game of Tennis and the ATP Members
1) Aggravated Behavior
Fines Committee may provisionally suspend such player, or related person,
a) No player, their coaches, Physiotherapist, therapist, physician, management from further participation in ATP tournaments pending a final determination of
representative, agent, family member, tournament guest, business associate the criminal or civil proceeding.
or other affiliate or associate of any player (“Related Persons”), or any other e) Violation of this section shall subject the player to a fine of up to $250,000
person who receives accreditation at an Event at the request of the player or and/or suspension from play in ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments
any other Related Person, at any ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tourna- for a period of up to three (3) years. Violation of this Section by a Related
ment shall engage in aggravated behavior which is defined as follows: Person may result in a maximum penalty of permanent revocation of accred-
i) One or more incidents of behavior designated in this Code as constituting itation and denial of access to all ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Tourna-
aggravated behavior. ments.
ii) One incident of behavior that is flagrant and particularly injurious to the 3) Prohibited Promotional Fees
success of a tournament, or is singularly egregious, including the sale of
credentials. a) ATP Tour 500 and 250 tournaments have the option to offer fees for promo-
iii) A series of two (2) or more violations of this Code within a twelve (12) tional services. No other ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournament owner,
month period which singularly do not constitute aggravated behavior, but operator, sponsor or agent is permitted to offer, give or pay money or anything
when viewed together establish a pattern of conduct that is collectively of value, nor shall the tournament permit any other person or entity to offer,
egregious and is detrimental or injurious to ATP Tour or ATP Challenger give or pay money or anything of value to a player, directly or indirectly, to
Tour tournaments. influence or assure a player’s competing in a tournament, other than prize
b) Violation of this section shall subject a player to a fine up to $100,000 or the money, unless authorized to do so by ATP.
amount of prize money won at the tournament, whichever is greater, and/or b) Violation of this section shall subject the player to a fine up to $20,000 for
suspension from play in ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments, $30,000 for ATP Tour 250 tournaments,
events for a minimum period of twenty-one (21) days and a maximum period $40,000 for ATP Tour 500 tournaments, $60,000 for ATP Tour Masters 1000
of one (1) year. The suspension shall commence on the Monday after the tournaments plus the amount of value of any such payment, and/or to sus-
expiration of the time within which an appeal may be filed, or, in the case of pensions from play in ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour tournaments for a
appeal, commencing on the Monday after a final decision on appeal. Violation period of up to three (3) years. The suspension shall begin on the Monday
of this Section by a Related Person may result in a maximum penalty of per- after the expiration of the time within which an appeal may be filed, or, in the
manent revocation of accreditation and denial of access to all ATP Tour and case of appeal, commencing on the Monday after a final decision on appeal.
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments. The maximum fine will increase by one hundred percent (100%) for each
consecutive violation during the same calendar year.
2) Conduct Contrary to the Integrity of the Game
c) If the ATP Members Fines Committee believes that a player may be violat-
The favorable reputation of ATP, its tournaments and players is a valuable asset ing this section, then upon demand, the player or his agent, must furnish or
and creates tangible benefits for all ATP members. Accordingly, it is an obligation provide access to the ATP Members Fines Committee copies of all records
for ATP players and Related Persons, to refrain from engaging in conduct con- relating to their participation in or, in the absence of such records, an affidavit
trary to the integrity of the game of tennis. setting forth the facts with respect to any transaction in question. In the event
a) Conduct contrary to the integrity of the game shall include, but not be limited a player fails to provide the records or affidavit, the ATP Members Fines Com-
to, publicized comments that unreasonably attack or disparage any person or mittee may suspend him from participation in ATP Tour and ATP Challenger
group of people, a tournament, sponsor, player, official or ATP. Responsible Tour tournaments pending compliance with such demand.
expressions of legitimate disagreement with ATP policies are not prohibited.
However, public comments that one of the stated persons above knows, or
should reasonably know, will harm the reputation or financial best interests of
244 245
VIII. THE CODE VIII. THE CODE
B. Procedures e) Hearing. The hearing shall be closed to the public. Once commenced, the
hearing shall continue from day to day until concluded, unless the ATP Se-
1) Determination and Penalty
nior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee allows otherwise.
The ATP Members Fines Committee shall conduct such investigation of an al- Postponements, adjournments or any form of delay shall be permitted only
leged player major offense as they, in their sole discretion, determine is appro- in the case of documented emergency and at the sole discretion of the ATP
priate and necessary. Upon completion of their investigation, the ATP Members Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee. Requests for
Fines Committee shall determine whether a player major offense has occurred postponement shall be submitted in writing to the ATP Senior Vice President
and, if so, shall fix a penalty to be imposed. A copy of the decision setting forth - Rules & Competition or his designee.
such penalty shall be promptly delivered to the player. f) Record. Each party shall have the right to have the hearing recorded or tran-
scribed at its expense.
2) Payment of Fines
g) Interpreter-Legal Advisor. The ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Com-
The player shall pay all fines levied for player major offenses to ATP by delivery petition or his designee may, at his discretion, make provisions for the pres-
to the ATP Members Fines Committee within twenty-one (21) days after receiving ence of an interpreter and/or legal advisor for the hearing. The reasonable ex-
written notice. penses of such interpreter or legal advisor shall be assumed by ATP pending
the final decision of the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or
3) Appeal
his designee and the taxing of costs as is provided in the decision on appeal.
Any player who has received a penalty for a player major offense may, after pay- 5) Decision on Appeal
ing all monetary fines, appeal such determination by filing a written notice with the
ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition within five (5) days (excluding As soon as practicable after the conclusion of the hearing on appeal, the ATP
weekends) of such player’s receipt of notice of such determination. Upon receiv- Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee shall render a written
ing such notice of appeal, the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition decision, which decision shall constitute the full, final and complete disposition of
or his designee shall set a date and place for the hearing. the issue and will be binding upon the player and upon all members of ATP. The
ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee may vacate,
4) Hearing on Appeal affirm or modify in whole or in part the penalty, but may not increase it. Notwith-
The ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee shall con- standing the foregoing, the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or
duct the hearing on appeal in accordance with the following: his designee may tax the losing party, whether ATP or the player, all reasonable
costs of the Appeal, including, but not limited to, the expenses and charges of
a) Burden of Proof. The ATP Members Fines Committee has the responsibility the interpreter, legal advisor and any adverse witness required upon objection
to prove the violation by a preponderance of the evidence. to testify concerning facts originally presented by way of affidavit. If the costs are
b) Rules. The ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee taxed against a player, then they must be paid by the player to ATP by delivery to
must conduct the hearing in a fair and orderly manner with opportunity for the ATP Members Fines Committee within (10) days after receipt of the decision
each side to present its evidence as to the facts involved, and the player and of the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee.
his representative, if any, and the ATP Members Fines Committee are bound
to cooperate fully to this end. C. Suspensions and Collection of Fines
c) Statement of Position. The ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Compe-
tition or his designee may request the ATP Members Fines Committee and 1) Suspension - Weeks/Scope
the player to state in writing their respective positions on the facts, the provi- Whenever any suspension is involved as a penalty for a violation of the Code,
sion(s) of the Code allegedly violated and the penalty specified and file the only weeks with ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour tournaments shall be included
same with the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition or his desig- in the suspension period.
nee at least three (3) days prior to the hearing, with a copy to each other.
d) Presentation. The ATP Members Fines Committee and the player may 2) Stay of Suspensions Pending Appeal
present evidence personally or through counsel. Each party shall have the Whenever a player is suspended by ATP and an appeal either of right or discre-
right to present and to cross-examine witnesses, and to offer documentary tionary review is filed, then the suspension shall be stayed pending the resolution
evidence and testimony by affidavit or deposition. Except for purposes of re- of the appeal.
buttal, documentary evidence and affidavits shall not be admissible unless a
copy is submitted at least three (3) days prior to the hearing to the ATP Senior 3) Suspension for Non-Payment of Fines
Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee and to the other party. If a fine is not paid in a timely fashion, ATP may suspend, pending payment, the
Should objection be made to the introduction of an affidavit, the ATP Senior party fined from further participation in any ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour
Vice President - Rules & Competition or his designee may determine in his tournament. In addition, ATP is authorized to collect all overdue fines along with
discretion that the interests of fairness require that the individual be produced costs, if any, by all reasonable means, including deduction of the fine from any
to testify at the hearing, or alternatively, that such affidavit be excluded. In the subsequent winnings, or through legal proceedings. When a fine is deducted from
case of the former, a reasonable continuance may be granted for production prize money being paid in non-U.S. currency, the official ATP exchange rate shall
of such witness. be applicable to the payment of the fine, to the extent deducted.
246 247
VIII. THE CODE IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS
8.06 Tennis Anti-Corruption Program (“TACP”) 9.01 Definitions
Complete rules of the TACP can be found at https://www.itia.tennis/tacp/rules. A. The 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings is the mathematical method of
ranking men’s doubles pairs on a calendar-year basis.
8.07 Final Dispute Resolution
B. The Pepperstone ATP Rankings and the Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings are
A. Any dispute between or among ATP, its Tournaments or its players (with the excep- the objective merit-based method used for determining qualification for entry and
tion of any dispute relating to or arising out of a change in tournament class mem- seeding in all tournaments for both singles and doubles.
bership status) arising out of the application of any provision of this Rulebook which
is not finally resolved by applicable provisions of the Rulebook shall be submitted C. The Pepperstone ATP Rankings and Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings are run
exclusively to the Court of Arbitration for Sport (“CAS”) for final and binding arbitration approximately 45 times per year.
in accordance with CAS’s Code of Sports-Related Arbitration. The decision of CAS in
that arbitration shall be final, non-reviewable, non-appealable and enforceable. No D. Every player who has earned Pepperstone ATP Rankings points or Pepperstone
claim, arbitration, lawsuit or litigation concerning the dispute shall be brought in any ATP Doubles Rankings points in an eligible professional tournament during the entry
other court or tribunal. Any request for CAS arbitration shall be filed with CAS within ranking period is included in the Pepperrstone ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP
21 days of any action by ATP which is the subject of the dispute. Doubles Rankings.

B. In the event any provision of this rule is determined invalid or unenforceable, the E. The Pepperstone ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings period is the
remaining provisions shall not be affected. This rule shall not fail because any part of immediate past 52 weeks, except for:
the rule is held invalid.
* Nitto ATP Finals, singles and doubles, which is dropped on the Monday following
the last ATP Tour event of the following year.
* ITF tournaments that are only entered into the system on the second Monday
following the tournament’s week.
Once entered, all tournaments, except for the Nitto ATP Finals, remain in the
system for 52 consecutive weeks.

9.02 Eligibility
Unless otherwise approved by ATP, Pepperstone ATP Rankings and Pepperstone
ATP Doubles Rankings points are awarded to all tournaments or series of tourna-
ments that meet the following criteria. (An event seeking an exception must petition
ATP in writing at least 90 days in advance of the tournament.):

A. Events classified as ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour events. Also, Grand Slam,
ITF M 25+H, ITF M 25, ITF M 15+H and ITF M 15 events.

B. Prize money must be paid in a manner consistent with the breakdowns approved by
ATP.

C. Selection of direct acceptances shall be determined according to the Pepperstone

ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings. The Pepperstone ATP Rank-
ings and Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings lists utilized shall not be more than 42
days prior to the start of the tournament.

D. The minimum size for a draw is 28 singles players and 16 doubles teams unless
otherwise approved by ATP.

E. The composition of the draws shall be consistent with ATP rules. Tournaments are
required to provide hotel accommodation consistent with ATP rules.

248 249
IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS
9.03 Pepperstone ATP Rankings deadline, shall result in a zero (0) point ranking penalty. Further non-consecutive
withdrawals shall result in a zero (0) point ranking penalty assessed for each ad-
A. Commitment Players. The year-end Pepperstone ATP Rankings is based on cal- ditional withdrawal. Players with multiple consecutive withdrawals who are out of
culating, for each player, his total points from the four (4) Grand Slams, the eight competition for 30 days or longer due to injury will not be subject to a ranking pen-
(8) mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments and the Nitto ATP Finals of the alty as long as verified and approved medical forms are provided; or, a player shall
ranking period, the United Cup and his best seven (7) results from the United Cup, all not have the ranking penalty imposed if he completes the Promotional Activities re-
ATP Tour 500, ATP Tour 250, ATP Challenger Tour and ITF Men’s WTT tournaments. quirement as specified under “Repeal of Withdrawal Fines and/or Penalties” or if the
For every Grand Slam, mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournament or United Cup on-site withdrawal procedures apply. Players may also appeal withdrawal penalties
for which a player is not in the main draw, and was not (and, in the case of a Grand to a Tribunal who will determine whether the penalties are affirmed or set aside.* A
Slam, would not have been, had he and all other players entered) a main draw direct commitment player who has received a zero (0) point ranking penalty for withdrawing
acceptance on the original acceptance list, and never became a main draw direct ac- from an ATP Tour 500 event may replace the zero (0) point by playing an additional
ceptance, the number of his results from all other eligible tournaments in the ranking ATP Tour 500 event in that same calendar year for a total of four (4) played. The re-
period, that count for his ranking, is increased by one (1). In weeks where there are placement tournament must be after the 500 withdrawal that has resulted in a ranking
not four (4) Grand Slams and eight (8) ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments in the penalty. Only one (1) additional ATP Tour 500 event per year may be used to replace
ranking period, the number of a player’s best results from all eligible tournaments in an ATP Tour 500 ranking penalty.
the ranking period will be adjusted accordingly. Once a player is accepted in the main
draw of one of these twelve (12) tournaments, as a direct acceptance, a qualifier, a * Note 1: Commitment players who are unable to fulfill their commitment, are not eligi-
special exempt or a lucky loser, or having accepted a wild card, his result in this tour- ble to appeal the ranking penalty.
nament shall count for his ranking, whether or not he participates.* In a 52-week pe-
riod, players shall be permitted to replace up to 3 mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 Note 2: (Applicable for 9.03 A. B. C.). Players returning to competition with an Entry
singles main draw results with a better score from an ATP Tour 500 or ATP Tour 250 Protection Ranking may replace ranking penalties assessed during the period of in-
event, when the replacing score is achieved after the ATP Tour Masters 1000 score jury with results obtained at tournaments following their return to competition.
that is being replaced. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, the player must have
competed and not received a ranking penalty at the ATP Tour Masters 1000 tourna- Note 3: (Applicable for 9.03 A. and B.) Players who are out of competition for three or
ment to replace the score. more consecutive months (13-weeks minimum) can replace zero-pointers as follows:

B. Non-commitment Players. The Pepperstone ATP Rankings is based on calculating, Missed mandatory events* Number of zero pointers that can
for each player, his total points from the four (4) Grand Slams, the eight (8) manda- be replaced
tory ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments and the Nitto ATP Finals of the ranking
period, and his best seven (7) results from the United Cup, all ATP Tour 500, ATP 1 0
Tour 250, ATP Challenger Tour and ITF Men’s WTT tournaments. For every Grand 2 1
Slam or mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournament for which a player is not in
the main draw, and was not (and, in the case of a Grand Slam, would not have been, 3+ 2
had he and all other players entered) a main draw direct acceptance on the original
Player can drop zero-point ranking penalties (only from mandatory Masters 1000
acceptance list, and never became a main draw direct acceptance, the number of
events) when he competes in his next ATP 250/500 event played. When he drops the
his results from all other eligible tournaments in the ranking period, that count for his
first received zero-point ranking penalty, his next best ‘non-countable’ will count in his
ranking, is increased by one (1). In weeks where there are not four (4) Grand Slams
breakdown.
and eight (8) ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournaments in the ranking period, the number
of a player’s best results from all eligible tournaments in the ranking period will be
*Missed mandatory events include Grand Slams. However, players can only replace
adjusted accordingly. Once a player is accepted in the main draw of one of these
0-pointers from Masters 1000.
twelve (12) tournaments, as a direct acceptance, a qualifier, a special exempt or a
lucky loser, or having accepted a wild card, his result in this tournament shall count *Players must submit application to Medical Committee to be eligible to replace ze-
for his ranking, whether or not he participates. In a 52-week period, players shall be ro-pointers.
permitted to replace up to 3 mandatory ATP Tour Masters 1000 singles main draw
results with a better score from an ATP Tour 500 or ATP Tour 250 event, when the D. Loser points for the rounds achieved are awarded to players in any tournament not
replacing score is achieved after the ATP Tour Masters 1000 score that is being re- completed.
placed. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, the player must have competed and
not received a ranking penalty at the ATP Tour Masters 1000 tournament to replace E. Ties. When two or more players have the same total number of points, ties shall be
the score.* broken as follows:
C. ATP Tour 500 – Ranking Penalty. A player’s (Commitment and Non-Commitment 1) the most total points from the Grand Slams, ATP Tour Masters 1000 mandatory
players) withdrawal from an ATP Tour 500 event whether on time or after the 10 AM tournaments and Nitto ATP Finals main draws, and if still tied, then,

250 251
IX.
IX PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS
2) the fewest events played, counting all missed Grand Slams, ATP Tour Masters c) The use of a protected ranking to enter the singles and/or doubles of a Grand
1000 tournaments they could have played (as described under A. above) as if Slam event is limited to once per Grand Slam event.
played, and if still tied, then, d) The use of a protected ranking to enter the singles and/or doubles of the
3) the highest number of points from one single tournament, then, if needed, the United Cup is limited to one (1) per the duration of the player’s Protected
second highest, and so on. Ranking.
4) Expiration Date. A player has three (3) years from his original last event played
F. Entry Protection to activate his protected ranking and will not be eligible to use his entry protected
ranking beyond this date. A player who does not compete in any tennis event, in-
1) Petition. A player may petition the ATP CEO, or his designee, for an entry pro- cluding Special Events – Exhibitions, for a period of three (3) years from the date
tection when he is physically injured or has a documented medical illness and of his original last event played will have his entry protection revoked.
does not compete in any tennis event, including Special Events – Exhibitions, for
a minimum period of six (6) months. The written petition must be received within 5) Re-injury Protection. A player who has returned to competition and re-injures
six (6) months after his last tournament and must provide medical documentation himself may petition for a “freeze” of the nine (9) or twelve (12) month limit for
including a letter from a treating licensed physician confirming the injury or illness. competing using his protected ranking. To be eligible for the “freeze” the player
Each petition shall be evaluated on a case by case basis by the ATP Medical must be out of competition for a minimum of three (3) months, the written petition
Services Committee. for the “freeze” must be received within this period. Upon the player’s return to
competition he shall have the same number of events and weeks remaining as
2) Calculation and Use. The entry protection shall be a position in the Pepperstone were available when the “freeze” went into effect. A maximum of two (2) “freezes”
ATP Rankings, as determined by the player’s average Pepperstone ATP Rank- are allowed during the nine (9) or twelve (12) month period.
ings position during the first three (3) months* after his last event played. The en-
try protection shall be for entry into the main draw or qualifying competition or for Note: For purposes of this rule, three (3) months is calculated at thirteen (13)
special exempt consideration. The entry protection shall not be used for seeding weeks; six (6) months is calculated at twenty-six (26) weeks; nine (9) months
purposes or lucky loser consideration. is calculated at thirty-nine (39) weeks; and twelve (12) months is calculated at
fifty-two (52) weeks.
*The player must be ranked (have at least one singles ranking point for a singles
protected ranking and/or one doubles ranking point for a doubles protected rank- Case: A player requests an entry protection freeze after the three
ing) during each week of this three (3) month period. (3) year expiration has passed; however, his last event played is
before the three (3) year expiration date. Can the player “freeze” his
A player who has been out of competition and is applying for Entry Protection may protected ranking?
not include any period of (Doping, Corruption and/or Conduct) suspension in the Decision: A player cannot request a “freeze” after the three (3) year
player’s weeks away from competition in order to qualify for Entry Protection. expiration has passed.
3) Limit of Use. Case: A player returns to competition following a “freeze”, the num-
a) If a player is physically injured and does not compete in any tennis event for ber of weeks remaining from the freeze extend beyond the three (3)
a period of at least six (6) months but less than twelve (12) months, the entry year expiration date. Can the player use all remaining weeks past
protection shall be in effect for the first nine (9) singles and the first nine (9) the three (3) year expiration date?
doubles tournaments that the player competes* in using the entry protection Decision: A player cannot extend the use of his entry protected
(excluding wild cards and entries as a direct acceptance with his current posi- ranking beyond the three (3) year expiration date.
tion in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings) or for the period up to nine (9) months Case: A player accepted in an ATP Tour, ATP Challenger Tour main
beginning with the first tennis event, including Special Events – Exhibitions, draw or ATP Tour/Challenger Qualifying list using a PR, withdraws
that the player competes in, whichever occurs first. prior to the withdrawal deadline and accepts a WC into the same
b) If a player is physically injured and does not compete in any tennis event for event. Does this tournament count towards the total tournaments at
a period of twelve (12) months or longer, the entry protection shall be in effect which a player may use his PR?
for the first twelve (12) singles tournaments and the first twelve (12) doubles Decision: No, this tournament will not count towards the player’s
tournaments that the player competes* in using the entry protection (exclud- total of tournaments.
ing wild cards and entries as a direct acceptance with his current position in
the Pepperstone ATP Rankings) or for the period up to twelve (12) months G. Points.
beginning with the first tennis event, including Special Events – Exhibitions, 1) Points shall be allocated based on tournament category (Grand Slam, Nitto ATP
that the player competes in, whichever occurs first. Finals, ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500, ATP Tour 250, ATP Challenger
*Note: For purposes of this rule, once the player is included in the draw or Tour and ITF Men’s WTT events).
accepts prize money as an on-site withdrawal, the event shall count against
the players’ total as specified under a) and b) above. The United Cup shall 2) Points are assigned to the losers of the round indicated. Any player who reaches
not count against a player’s total protected ranking allowance. the second round by drawing a bye and then loses shall be considered to have
lost in the first round and shall receive first round loser’s points. Wild cards at
252 253
IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS
Grand Slams and ATP Tour Masters 1000 events receive points only from the 2nd * Nitto ATP Finals 1,500 for undefeated Champion (200 for each round robin match
round. No points are awarded for a first round loss at ATP Tour 500 & 250 events, win, plus 400 for a semi-final win, plus 500 for the final win)
ATP Challenger Tour or ITF Men’s WTT events.
** For details, see Section 4.03 G.
3) Players qualifying for the main draw through the qualifying competition shall re-
ceive qualifying points in addition to any points earned, as per the following table, 6) Doubles Point W F SF QF R16 R32 R64
with the exception of ITF Men’s WTT events. table.
4) In addition to the points allocated as per the following table, points shall be allo- Grand Slams 2000 1200 720 360 180 90
cated to losers at Grand Slam, ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 and ATP
Nitto ATP Finals* 1500
Tour 250 tournaments qualifying events, as follows:
ATP 1000 - 32 Draw 1000 600 360 180 90
Grand Slams 16 points for a last round loss ATP 1000 - 24/28 Draw 1000 600 360 180 90
8 points for a second round loss ATP Tour 500 - 16 Draw*** 500 300 180 90
ATP Tour Masters 1000 16 points for a last round loss (*) ATP Tour 250 - 24 Draw 250 150 90 45 20

0 points for a first round loss ATP Tour 250 - 16 Draw 250 150 90 45

ATP Tour 500 10 points for a last round loss (**)

0 points for a first round loss Challenger 175 175 100 60 32
Challenger 125 125 75 45 25
ATP Tour 250 6 points for a last round loss (***)
Challenger 100 100 60 36 20
0 points for a first round loss
Challenger 75 75 50 30 16
* 8 points only if the main draw is larger than 56
Challenger 50 50 30 17 9
** 4 points only if the main draw is larger than 32
ITF M 25/25+H 25 16 8 3
*** 3 Points only if the main draw is larger than 32
ITF M 15/15+H 15 8 4 2

5) Singles Point W F SF QF R16 R32 R64 R128 Q Q3 Q2 * Nitto ATP Finals 1,500 for undefeated Champion (200 for each round robin match
table. win, plus 400 for a semi-final win, plus 500 for the final win)
Grand Slams 2000 1300 800 400 200 100 50 10 30 16 8 ** For details, see Section 4.03 G
Nitto ATP Finals* 1500 *** The doubles qualifying team shall receive 45 ranking points. The team losing in
ATP 1000 - 96 Draw 1000 650 400 200 100 50 30 10 20 10 the final round of qualifying shall receive 25 ranking points.
ATP 1000 - 48/56 Draw 1000 650 400 200 100 50 10 30 16 Teams receiving a first round Bye and subsequently losing in the final round re-
ceive no points.
United Cup** 500
ATP Tour 500 - 48 Draw 500 330 200 100 50 25 16 8 9.04 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings
ATP Tour 500 - 32 Draw 500 330 200 100 50 25 13
A. The Pepperstone ATP Doubles Rankings is based on calculating, for each player, his
ATP Tour 250 - 48 Draw 250 165 100 50 25 13 8 4
total points from his best 19 results from all eligible tournaments, including the Nitto
ATP Tour 250 - 32 Draw 250 165 100 50 25 13 7 ATP Finals (Doubles) played in the Ranking period. For entry purposes there are no
mandatory events, however, once a player is included in the main draw of any of the
four (4) Grand Slams or the eight (8) ATP Tour Masters 1000, as a direct acceptance,
Challenger 175 175 90 50 25 13 6 3
a qualifier, alternate or a lucky loser or having accepted a wild card, his result in one
Challenger 125 125 64 35 16 8 5 3 of these twelve (12) tournaments, shall count for his ranking, whether or not he par-
Challenger 100 100 50 25 14 7 4 2 ticipates. The exception to this is once per player per calendar year, a player whose
team is forced to withdraw after the draw has been made but prior to the team’s first
Challenger 75 75 44 22 12 6 4 2
match shall not have the withdrawal count as a tournament played for purposes of
Challenger 50 50 25 14 8 4 3 1 ranking.
ITF M 25/25+H 25 16 8 3 1
ITF M 15/15+H 15 8 4 2 1
254 255
IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS
B. Loser points for the rounds achieved are awarded to players in any tournament not e) The retiring/withdrawing player had withdrawn/retired from his singles match,
completed. which was scheduled the same day; or, if the doubles match is scheduled
for a following day the player is examined by the tournament Doctor and is
C. Ties. When two or more players have the same total number of points, ties shall be declared unfit for competition in the doubles event.
broken as follows:
1) the fewest events played*, and if still tied, then, ** Example: Player A is not in the singles draw and his doubles ranking is 20;
his partner, Player B, is in the singles draw with a ranking of 15. Player B’s
2) the most total points from the Grand Slams, ATP Tour Masters 1000 mandatory doubles ranking is 30. The cutoff for their method of entry is 60. Using player
tournaments and the Nitto ATP Finals (Doubles), and if still tied, then B’s doubles ranking would have kept them as a direct acceptance so they
3) the highest number of points from one single tournament, then, if needed, the qualify for exception b) above.
second highest, etc. *** For ATP Challenger events the withdrawal for doubles must be after the with-
drawal deadline.
*Once a team is included in the main draw of a Grand Slam or one of the eight (8)
ATP Tour Masters 1000 it shall count as an event played whether or not the team Case: Player A retires / withdraws from the doubles for medical
actually participated. reasons. Player A is also in the singles draw but is not scheduled to
Note: The method for breaking ties on-site, between teams, is described under play his next match until the next day. On the day of his scheduled
Selections of Entries. singles match Player A withdraws from the singles and receives
medical documentation from the Tournament Doctor declaring him
D. Entry Protection. The Entry Protection, as described above for the Pepperstone unfit for competition. The medical condition is the same condition
ATP Rankings, applies for doubles under the same provisions. that caused the doubles retirement / withdrawal.
Decision: In this case the doubles team shall receive points / prize
E. Points. The provisions set forth under 9.03.E.1), 2) and 3) related to the Pepperstone money from the round reached.
ATP Rankings apply to doubles as well, the point table being similar, except that the Case: Player A retires from the singles competition due to a medical
second-round loser column becomes irrelevant. No points are awarded in the first issue. He is in the doubles competition but is not scheduled to play
round at any event. doubles that day. Player A is examined by the tournament Doctor
Doubles - After First Round: who confirms that the medical issue is such that the player would
not be able to compete in the doubles that week. May Player A’s
Should a doubles match in an ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour event be uncon- withdrawal and medical be accepted even though he is not sched-
tested or fail to be completed, the losing team shall only receive points and prize uled to play doubles that day?
money from the previous round unless one of the following exceptions is applica- Decision: If the medical issue is such that the tournament Doc-
ble: tor can confirm the player’s condition will not improve enough to
a) Neither player was in the singles main draw; compete in the doubles that week then the player may withdraw
b) Both players used, or could have used**, their doubles ranking for entry into immediately and the medical is valid. Player A and his partner shall
the doubles draw (does not apply to wild card teams). be eligible to receive ranking points and prize money from the round
c) The retiring/withdrawing player is still in the singles competition and at the reached.
time of the medical examination is declared unfit to play in the singles of Case: Player A withdraws from the singles competition due to food
that event or, if no longer involved in the singles competition of that event, is poisoning, he is in the doubles competition but is not scheduled to
forced to withdraw from the singles or doubles*** of the next tournament in play doubles until the next day. Player A would like to withdraw from
which he is entered. the doubles immediately, however the tournament Doctor says he
i) For ATP Tour events if the retiring/withdrawing player was not in the sin- cannot declare him unfit for play for a match scheduled the following
gles draw of that event and is forced to withdraw from the next event in day.
which he is accepted in the main draw (singles or doubles). Decision: If Player A withdraws from the doubles without a medical
ii) For ATP Challenger events if the retiring/withdrawing player was not in from the tournament Doctor declaring him unfit for play then the
the singles draw of that event and is forced to withdraw from the following team receives ranking points / prize money from the previous round.
week’s event (single or doubles) after the withdrawal deadline.
Note: In cases where the condition of the player is likely to improve
d) The retiring/withdrawing player was not involved in the singles draw of that
in a short time period the tournament Doctor should examine the
event and:
player on the day of the match to determine his status and if he
i) For ATP Tour events is forced to withdraw from the next event in which he
feels the player is fit for competition.
is entered (singles or doubles).
ii) For ATP Challenger events is forced to withdraw from the following week’s
event (singles or doubles***).

256 257
IX. PEPPERSTONE ATP RANKINGS X. EXHIBITS
9.05 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings EXHIBIT A.01 - ATP Tour Official Tournament Stamps
A. Each team is ranked according to its total points from its best 19 results from all eli-
gible tournaments (Grand Slam, ATP Tour, including the Nitto ATP Finals, ATP Chal-
lenger Tour, ITF Men’s WTT) played in the calendar year.

B. Loser points for the rounds achieved are awarded to players in any tournament not
completed.

C. Ties. Ties between two or more teams having the same total number of points shall
be broken using the same methods as for breaking ties between players in the Pep-
perstone ATP Doubles Rankings.

D. Points. The provisions set forth under 7.08 E., including a), b) and c), apply as well
when calculating the 2024 Pepperstone ATP Doubles Team Rankings.

9.06 Retiring from the Professional Tennis Circuit

EXHIBIT A.02 - Size Relationships - Men Only Events
Any player wishing to officially retire from the professional tennis circuit must submit a
signed Player Retirement Form to the Vice President, Player Relations of ATP. Once
the signed form is received the player shall be removed from the Pepperstone ATP
Rankings (singles and doubles). The player also agrees to the terms of the Tennis
Anti-Doping Program regarding reinstatement protocol.

Size Relationship: Tournament Logo

MUST be a minimum of 60% of the surfaced area of the tournament logo

Size Relationship: Tournament Title

MUST be a minimum of 60% of the surface area of the tournament title

258 259
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.03 - Size Relationship - Combined Events EXHIBIT A.04 - Positioning

MUST be placed closest to the tournament logo of tournament title, away from sponsor logos. NEVER add to sponsor logo strips
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR
LOGO
TOURNAMENT

SPONSOR
Size Relationship: WTA Logo
MUST be the same visual size (cover the same surface area)

SPONSOR
SPONSOR
SPONSOR
SPONSOR
TOURNAMENT

LOGO
Size Relationship: Tournament Logo

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

SPONSOR
MUST be at a minimum, equal size to the WTA Logo or 30% of the surface area

LOGO
TOURNAMENT
of the tournament logo, whichever is greater.

SPONSOR
SPONSOR
SPONSOR
TOURNAMENT TITLE
YEAR

SPONSOR
SPONSOR
Size Relationship: Tournament Title
MUST be at a minimum, equal size to the WTA Logo or 30% of the surface area
of the tournament title, whichever is greater.

260 261
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.05 - Exclusion Area EXHIBIT A.06.1 - Acceptable & Unacceptable uses - Men Ony

DO
place the ATP Tour Official Tournament
TOURNAMENT Stamp closest to the tournament logo.
LOGO Ensure it is at least 60% of the surface area
of the tournament logo and is positioned
away from sponsor logos, federation names
or any other brand mark

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO
place the ATP Tour Official Tournament
Stamp closest to the tournament title when it
is used larger than, or in place of the
TOURNAMENT TITLE tournament logo. Ensure it is at least 60% of
the surface area of the tournament title and
YEAR is positioned away from the sponsor logos,
federation names or any other brand mark.

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

262 263
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.06.2 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Men Only EXHIBIT A.06.3 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Men only

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

TOURNAMENT LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR TOURNAMENT

LOGO
TOURNAMENT

LOGO TOURNAMENT

LOGO

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
TOURNAMENT SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT

apply rules to the smallest tournament logo make the ATP Tour Official Tournament Place sponsor logos closest to the place the ATP Tour Official Tournament
or tournament title on this page. Stamp smaller than 60% of the tournament logo or tournament title Stamp alongside sponsor logos or add it
tournament logo or tournament title. to sponsor logo strips

TOURNAMENT TITLE TOURNAMENT TITLE TOURNAMENT TITLE

YEAR YEAR
TOURNAMENT

LOGO
YEAR

SPONSOR
LOGO

TOURNAMENT TITLE
YEAR
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR

DO NOT
DO NOT
DO NOT DO NOT break the exclusion area for sponsor
make the ATP Tour Official Tournament
omit the ATP Tour official Tournament Apply rules to the smallest tournament logos
Stamp smaller that 60% of the surface
Stamp when using a tournament title in logo or tournament title when both are area of the tournament logo or
place of a tournament logo. used on a page. The 60% applies to the tournament title
greater of the two.

264 265
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.06.4 Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined EXHIBIT A.06.5 Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined
DO
place the ATP Tour Official
TOURNAMENT Tournament Stamp closest to
LOGO the tournament logo. The ATP
Tour Official tournament stamp TOURNAMENT TOURNAMENT
must be at a minimum, equal LOGO LOGO
size to the WTA logo or 30% of
the surface area of the
tournament logo, ehichever is
greater. Position away from
sponsor logos, federation names
or any other brand mark.

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
TOURNAMENT SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO NOT DO NOT
apply rules to the smallest tournament make the ATP Tour Official Tournament
logo or tournament title on the page. Stamp smaller than 30% of the surface
area of the tournament logo.

DO
place the ATP Tour Official
Tournament Stamp closest to
the tournament title when it is
TOURNAMENT TITLE used larger than, or in place of, TOURNAMENT TITLE
YEAR the tournament logo. The ATP YEAR TOURNAMENT TITLE
YEAR
TOURNAMENT

LOGO
Tour Official Tournament Stmp
must be at a minimum egual
size to the WTA logo or 30% of
the surface area of the
tournament title, whichever is
greater. Position away from
sponsor logos, federation names
or any other brand mark.

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO NOT DO NOT
omit the ATP Tour Official Tournament apply rules to smallest tournament
Stamp when using a tournament title in logo or rournament title when both are
place of a tournament logo. used on the page. 30% rule applies to
the greater of the two.

266 267
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.06.6 - Acceptable & Unacceptable Uses - Combined EXHIBIT A.07 - Website Exhibit

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR TOURNAMENT
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
LOGO TOURNAMENT

LOGO
TOURNAMENT

LOGO

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR

LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO
SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO NOT DO NOT
place the ATP Tour Official make the WTA Logo visually larger
Tournament Stamp alongside sponsor than the ATP Tour Official Tournament
logos or add it to sponsor logo strips. Stamp. DO NOT place sponsor logos
closer to the tournament logo or
tournament title. EXHIBIT A.08 - Scoreboards / Draw Boards

TOURNAMENT TITLE

SPONSOR
LOGO

TOURNAMENT TITLE

SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR SPONSOR
LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO LOGO

DO NOT DO NOT
break the exclusion area for sponsor make the size of the ATP Tour Official
logos. Tournament Stamp smaller than 30% of
the surface area of the tournament logo
tournament title.

268 269
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.09 - Electronic Devices EXHIBIT A.10 - Nets / Net Signage

270 271
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.11 - Media Backdrop
EXHIBIT A.12 - Court Surface Color
P
N
W E
S
MATCH TO PMS CYAN

ONE L INE ONE L INE

MATCH TO PMS 281

ONE L INE ONE L INE

TWO L I NE S

272 273
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.13.1 - Court Host Locality - Option 1 - Hard Court EXHIBIT A.13.1 - Court Host Locality - Option 1 - Clay Court
P P
N N
W E W E
S CHAIR UMPIRE CHAIR UMPIRE
S
ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm
TWO L I NE S

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm
TWO L I NE S
DISTANCE FROM

DISTANCE FROM

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm

DISTANCE FROM

DISTANCE FROM

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm
TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm
SPONSOR LOGO SPONSOR LOGO
HOST LOCALITY HOST LOCALITY

ONE LINE P ONE LINE P

N N
E W E W
S CHAIR UMPIRE CHAIR UMPIRE CHAIR UMPIRE CHAIR UMPIRE
S

ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE

T

TWO L I NE S

T
TWO L I NE S
SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm
DISTANCE FROM

DISTANCE FROM
TEXT HEIGHT

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm

= 16" / 40 cm

DISTANCE FROM

DISTANCE FROM
TEXT HEIGHT

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm

= 16" / 40 cm
SPONSOR SPONSOR
HOST 8"/20cm Spacing HOST 8"/20cm Spacing
8"/20cm Spacing 8"/20cm Spacing
LOGO LOGO
LOCALITY LOCALITY

TWO LINES TWO LINES

274 275
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.13.2 - Court Host Locality - Option 2 - Text EXHIBIT A.13.2 - Court Host Locality - Option 2 - Logo
N
P N
P
W E W E
S S
HOST LOCALITY HOST LOCALITY

ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE

CHAIR UMPIRE CHAIR UMPIRE

ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE ONE L INE

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm

SIDELINE = 16" / 40 cm
DISTANCE FROM

DISTANCE FROM
TEXT HEIGHT

TEXT HEIGHT
= 16" / 40 cm

= 16" / 40 cm
TWO L I NE S SPONSOR LOGO TWO L I NE S SPONSOR LOGO
9'10" / 300 cms

9'10" / 300 cms

= 20" / 50 cms

= 20" / 50 cms
TEXT HEIGHT

TEXT HEIGHT
BASELINE =

BASELINE =
DISTANCE

DISTANCE
MAXIMUM

MAXIMUM
MINIMUM

MINIMUM
FROM

FROM
HOST LOCALITY HOST LOCALITY

276 277
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.14 - Court Backdrops EXHIBIT A.15 - ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark
LOGO
SPONSOR

LOGO
SPONSOR
LOGO
SPONSOR
TITLE SPONSOR

TITLE SPONSOR

EXHIBIT A.16 - ATP Challenger Tour Website

LOGO
SPONSOR

LOGO
SPONSOR
LOGO
SPONSOR

LOGO
SPONSOR
LOGO
SPONSOR

278 279
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A.17. ATP Challenger Tour Court Backdrops EXHIBIT B - ATP Tour Logo
ATP Tour Trademark and Logo (Terms and Conditions)

In addition to Exhibit A, the following are the terms and conditions for the use of any
ATP Tour trademark or logo (collectively referred to herein as the “ATP Logo”). Only
ATP Tour tournaments referred to in CIRCUIT REGULATIONS shall be permitted to
use the ATP Logo. ATP Challenger Tour tournaments are authorized to use only the
ATP Challenger Tour Brand Mark (collectively referred to herein as the “Challenger
Tour Brand Mark”) (see “EXHIBIT A.15”).
1) Each tournament acknowledges that ATP has created the ATP Logo and has
used the ATP Logo on and in connection with the promotion of the sport of ten-
nis, recreational facilities, tennis videos, sporting goods, clothing, various printed
matter, and other officially licensed products and merchandise, and have sought
worldwide trademark registration for same and, through the use of the ATP Logo,
ATP has developed goodwill associated with the ATP Logo.
2) Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, ATP hereby authorizes each
tournament, by this license, to use the ATP Logo (and the applicable 1,000, 500
or 250 Tournament Stamp) or Challenger Tour Brand Mark, as applicable, in
connection with the advertising and promotion of such tournament. This authori-
zation and license shall (i) in the case of each ATP Tour tournament, be subject
to such ATP Tour tournament remaining a member in good standing of ATP as
well as compliance with the other terms and conditions set forth herein, and (ii) in
the case of each ATP sanctioned tournament or event, including ATP Challenger
Tour events, be subject to such tournament maintaining its sanction with ATP
in good standing as well as compliance with the other terms and conditions set
forth herein. Such license will be limited to written advertising and publicity, such
use being for the sole purpose of identifying a tournament as an ATP Tour or
Challenger Tour tournament and will not extend to any use that exploits the ATP
Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark in any other fashion or to the use of the ATP
Logo or Challenger Logo on merchandising or products of any kind without the
express written approval of ATP.
3) Use of the ATP Logo or Challenger Logo by a tournament shall be restricted
to the advertising and promotion of such tournament. The use of the ATP Logo
must be approved in advance by ATP.
4) The use of the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark by a tournament does
not extend to use on merchandise or resold products without the express written
approval of ATP, unless obtained through an official ATP licensee.
5) However, the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark may be used by a tour-
nament to produce and sell tournament T-shirts and sweatshirts (not collared
shirts) with the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark not to exceed four (4)
square inches (26 sq. cm.). Express written approval is required from ATP if a
tournament wants to produce these items itself. No approval is required if the
T-shirts and sweatshirts are obtained from an approved ATP licensee.
6) Each tournament hereby acknowledges that ATP owns all rights, title and inter-
est in and to the ATP Logo (and the applicable 1,000, 500 or 250 Tournament
Stamp) and Challenger Logo and each tournament agrees it will do nothing in-
consistent with such ownership nor attack ATP’s title or interest in and to the ATP

280 281
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark other than the right to use the ATP Logo or EXHIBIT C - Broadcast Standards
Challenger Tour Brand Mark in accordance with this agreement.
Broadcast Quality Standards
7) Each tournament agrees that it will not file a trademark application or otherwise
attempt to register the ATP Logo (and the applicable 1,000, 500 or 250 Tourna- 1) Tape Delay/Repeats
ment Stamp) or Challenger Tour Brand Mark, or any trademark or logo that may Tournaments may not license to domestic or international broadcasters the right
incorporate the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark, for any goods or ser- to telecast any portion of any match more than 48 hours after the termination of
vices whatsoever. Each tournament shall promptly notify ATP of any infringement that match, and not more than (3) times within that 48-hour period, unless written
of the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark or any act of unfair competition by authorization is obtained in advance from ATP. Each repeated telecast during the
third parties relating to the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark, whenever same day must be scheduled in a different part of the day in the same time zone.
such infringement or act shall come to the attention of a tournament. In the case of any telecast that is not live, tournaments must ensure that broad-
8) Each tournament agrees that all goodwill that is or shall become associated with casters provide a continuously visible on-screen legend stating “Tape Delay”.
the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark shall be the sole property of ATP. The requirement in the above paragraph shall not apply to telecasts under the
9) Each tournament agrees to use the ATP Logo or Challenger Tour Brand Mark following situations.
strictly in compliance with and in observance of any and all applicable laws and a) Less than five (5) minutes of continuous action (including time between
strictly in accordance with ATP rules and regulations and guidelines and will take points) or less than three (3) minutes of match highlights on any news or
whatever steps are reasonably necessary to fully protect ATP’s ownership of the highlights program.
ATP Logo and Challenger Tour Brand Mark, including, without limitation, such b) If because of rain delay or other unavoidable cessation in play, the scheduled
legends, markings and notices in connection therewith as may be required by broadcast match is canceled, the 48-hour tape delay restriction will be lifted.
ATP. Any previously recorded match from the current year’s competition or last
10) Each tournament agrees that such tennis tournament and related services identi- year’s competition can be repeated as “filler” programming.
fied in connection with the ATP Logo and Challenger Tour Brand Mark shall be of 2) Broadcaster’s Responsibilities
the highest quality and shall conform to the high standards and reputation of ATP. Each tournament must incorporate the following terms within their Broadcaster
Each tournament acknowledges that the provisions of this paragraph are of the contracts.
essence of this authorization and license.
a) Host Broadcaster and all International Broadcasters must graphically identify
11) If a tournament shall fail to perform or observe any term, condition, agreement, or the broadcast with the ATP’s logo at the commencement of each broadcast
covenant in this “EXHIBIT B - ATP Tour Logo”, ATP shall have the right to auto- and during the broadcast no less than once an hour, each occurrence lasting
matically terminate this authorization and license forthwith. no less than five (5) seconds, so as to make clear that the tournament being
played is an official ATP event.
b) Host Broadcaster must supply ATP, or ATP designee with one international
dirty HDCam or DigiBeta of the final match or on a Portable Hard Drive with
a USB 3.0 or FireWire 800 port (or a Beta SP if no other option). Recordings
must be available to the ATP Senior Vice President - Rules & Competition
on-site immediately after signing off the air or sent to an ATP office promptly
after the tournament.
c) With respect to any live match scores or related statistical data provided to
broadcaster by ATP, or its designee, or collected by broadcaster, such broad-
casters shall agree (i) not to onward supply, sublicense or otherwise make
such scores and data available to any third party for use not related to the
broadcast, and (ii) to restrict their use of such scores and data to use on a
contemporaneous basis within their live broadcast of any match; any other
use shall be subject to a delay of at least :30 seconds.
d) All tournament agreements with Host Broadcasters must comply with, and
shall be subject to, all ATP rules as amended from time to time.

3) Technical Requirements
Each tournament must incorporate the following technical terms within their Host
Broadcaster contract. These conditions represent the minimum technical stan-
dards necessary to produce a quality broadcast.

282 283
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Cameras EXAMPLE 1
No less than five (5) cameras must be used on Center court (and no less than
three (3) cameras on other courts)) for an acceptable tennis broadcast.
Camera 1: Tripod camera high up in the stands (Center Court line).
Camera 2: Tripod camera approximately three (3) rows lower than Cam-
era 1 (Center Court line). (Example 1)
Cameras 3 and 4: Camera objective lens height approximately 1.00m
(see attached charts for camera positions). Used for player close-ups for
cutting into coverage and isos.
These cameras may be positioned on the same or opposite side from
where the players sit down.
Camera 5: Low angle camera on court behind the baseline usually
aligned with sideline (see attached chart, Camera Example 2)
Note: Cameras 1, 2, 3,and 4 need to be on secure tripods with fully rotat-
ing camera mounts, and remotely controlled irises.
Lenses
Lenses for Camera 1 should be 18:1. Lenses for Cameras 2, 3, and 4
should be 50:1.
Microphones
1) Four (4) corner court microphones must be positioned in the corners
of the court and adjacent to Cameras 3 and 4.
2) At least one (1) microphone must be placed for purposes of picking
up sound from the crowd.
3) One (1) microphone must be placed on the umpire’s chair.

Center Court Masters 1000 Tournaments: ATP Masters 1000 tourna-

ment shall provide a fully cabled site and infrastructure for aerial camera
system on center court.

Television Regulation Regarding Same Day Exclusivity

No tournament Class member shall be permitted to telecast or grant any
telecaster the right to telecast, in any country in the territory of Europe,
all or any portion of any tennis match on the same day as a tennis match
from any ATP event that is being telecast in such country by a telecast-
er to which ATP has granted telecast rights, unless (x) such tournament
Class member (i) is obligated to grant such rights pursuant to a binding
agreement entered into prior to September 4, 1994, and furnished to the
General Counsel of ATP pursuant to the ATP Board’s resolution of Sep-
tember 4, 1994, or (ii) has received the written permission of the ATP
CEO, or (y) the telecast right granted by the tournament Class member is
to a host broadcaster whose television signal is carried only in the country
in which that member’s tournament is conducted, subject to such reason-
able “spillage” into other countries as may be approved by the ATP CEO;
provided, however, that the foregoing shall not limit the right of any tour-
nament Class member to permit the telecast of up to three (3) minutes in
the aggregate of any match in respect of any local, regional, national or
international news or sports news programming.

EXAMPLE 2
Standard Camera Position for Tennis Broadcast
284 285
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT D - Attendance Standards
EXAMPLE 2
ATP Tour Tournament Attendance Quality Standards
Standard Camera Positions for Tennis Broadcast
Set forth below for each of the tournament classes are two attendance standard
recommendations. In each year of operation, each ATP Tour tournament class mem-
ber is expected to meet both of these recommendations. A member not meeting the
recommended attendance standard three (3) years in a row (excluding extenuating
circumstances) must present to the ATP Standards Committee a strategic plan on
how they will meet the recommended standard in future years.

1) Recommended Attendance Standards

a) ATP Tour Masters 1000 & ATP Tour 500 tournaments
The recommended total attendance is calculated as follows:
• Start of main draw through Thursday.
o 50% of the actual seating capacity* for match courts, as specified in
section 1.20, multiplied by the number of sessions.
• Friday through Sunday
o 75% of the Center Court capacity* multiplied by the number of ses-
sions.
• The sum of these totals determine the recommended total attendance for
the week.
b) ATP Tour 250
The recommended total attendance is calculated as follows:
• Start of main draw through Tuesday.
o 25% of the Center Court seating capacity multiplied by the number of
sessions.
• Wednesday and Thursday
o 50% of the Center Court seating capacity multiplied by the number of
sessions.
• Friday through Sunday
o 75% of the Center Court capacity multiplied by the number of ses-
sions.
• The sum of these totals determine the recommended total attendance for
the week.

* For events that cover Center Court seats, available seats on that day will be
used to determine percentages, however, this number may not be less than
the minimum requirement.
2) Minimum Weekend Attendance
The average minimum attendance per session during the final weekend of play is
recommended to be in excess of 75% of capacity for the Center Court.
3) Measurement
a) On a daily basis during the operation of each tournament, each tournament
class member shall provide the ATP Supervisor with attendance figures in
writing on a per session basis for each session held during the prior day.
Such report shall set forth both total spectator attendance and the percentage
of capacity. Each tournament class member shall promptly provide the ATP
Supervisor or other member of the ATP staff with any backup necessary to
verify its spectator attendance figures if such information is requested.
286 287
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT E - Virtual Insertion
b) If the ATP Supervisor has any questions concerning the accuracy of such
Each ATP Tournament must comply with the following in order to use virtual insertion
spectator attendance figures based upon his observation of the event, the
technology in telecasts:
ATP Supervisor shall promptly so notify the tournament class member and
shall inform the member of what he believes is a more accurate spectator at- 1) Each telecast of an ATP Tour tournament using virtually inserted signage must
tendance count. In such circumstance, the burden will be on the tournament receive the prior approval of ATP.
class member to persuade the ATP Supervisor of the accuracy of its figures.
2) The company and methodology used to produce virtually inserted signage must
The final report of the ATP Supervisor shall be conclusive.
meet quality and technical standards and be pre-approved by ATP.
3) Virtually inserted signage may be inserted only in existing signage positions.
4) Virtually inserted signage may be altered between points if synchronized with the
change of Electronically Inserted Signage if in use.
5) Only static logos may be inserted. No moving logos or videos may be inserted.
6) Virtually inserted signage must be consistent in color, graphical look and size with
the Tournament’s other permanent signage.

288 289
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT F - Lighting EXHIBIT G - ATP Challenger Tour Logo (Print & Promotional Materials)
Lighting Form
Basic Guidelines:
Tournament City: 1) The brand mark may not be modified in any way or redrawn. The two fixed ele-
Tournament Number: ments (the ATP Challenger Tour logo type; the official ATP Challenger Tour logo)
LIGHTING MEASUREMENTS may not be separated from each other.
Date of Measurement: 2) The ATP Challenger Tour brand mark may only be reproduced in its provided
Referee: Tournament Supervisor: format.
Site name: 3) The ATP Challenger Tour brand mark may not be used on a background that may
COURT NAME:
make it appear indistinct. It shall always appear on an uncluttered background to
ensure clarity.
4) The ATP Challenger Tour brand mark shall be positioned in its own clear space,
standing apart from other images and/or brand marks. In order to achieve this, an
6 Feet 6 Feet area of clear space equal to the width of the stem of the T must always be on all
1.82 Meters 1.82 Meters sides of the brand mark.
5) The ATP Challenger Tour brand mark may not be positioned like a sponsor. It
should be separated from sponsor logos in order to stand out as an endorsement
of the quality and authenticity of the tournament.

EXHIBIT H - ATP Challenger Tour Logo (On-Court Version)

ATP Challenger Tour tournaments must only use the on-court version of the logo,
shown above, for any signage around the court perimeter.

6 Feet 6 Feet
1.82 Meters 1.82 Meters

290 291
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT I - Rules of Tennis FOREWORD
FOREWORD
Rule 1 THE COURT The International Tennis Federation (ITF) is the governing body of the game of tennis
Rule 2 PERMANENT FIXTURES and its duties and responsibilities include PROTECTING THE INTEGRITY OF THE
Rule 3 THE BALL GAME THROUGH determination of the Rules of Tennis.
Rule 4 THE RACKET
Rule 5 SCORE IN A GAME To assist the ITF in carrying out this responsibility, the ITF has appointed a Rules of
Rule 6 SCORE IN A SET
Tennis Committee which continually monitors the game and its rules, and when con-
Rule 7 SCORE IN A MATCH
Rule 8 SERVER & RECEIVER sidered necessary makes recommendations for changes to the Board of Directors of
Rule 9 CHOICE OF ENDS & SERVICE the ITF who in turn make recommendations to the Annual General Meeting of the ITF
Rule 10 CHANGE OF ENDS which is the ultimate authority for making any changes to the Rules of Tennis.
Rule 11 BALL IN PLAY
Rule 12 BALL TOUCHES A LINE Appendix V lists approved alternative procedures and scoring methods. In addition,
Rule 13 BALL TOUCHES A PERMANENT FIXTURE on its own behalf or on application by interested parties, certain variations to the rules
Rule 14 ORDER OF SERVICE may be approved by the ITF for trial purposes only at a limited number of tourna-
Rule 15 ORDER OF RECEIVING IN DOUBLES
Rule 16 THE SERVICE
ments or events and/or for a limited time period. Such variations are not included in
Rule 17 SERVING the published rules and require a report to the ITF on the conclusion of the approved
Rule 18 FOOTFAULT trial.
Rule 19 SERVICE FAULT
Rule 20 SECOND SERVICE Note: If there are any inconsistencies between the English version and Rules of
Rule 21 WHEN TO SERVE & RECEIVE Tennis translated into other languages, the English version shall prevail.
Rule 22 THE LET DURING A SERVICE
Rule 23 THE LET 1. THE COURT
Rule 24 PLAYER LOSES POINT
Rule 25 A GOOD RETURN
Rule 26 HINDRANCE The court shall be a rectangle, 78 feet (23.77 m) long and, for singles matches, 27
Rule 27 CORRECTING ERRORS feet (8.23 m) wide. For doubles matches, the court shall be 36 feet (10.97 m) wide.
Rule 28 ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS
Rule 29 CONTINUOUS PLAY The court shall be divided across the middle by a net suspended by a cord or metal
Rule 30 COACHING cable which shall pass over or be attached to two net posts at a height of 3 ½ feet
Rule 31 PLAYER ANALYSIS TECHNOLOGY (1.07 m). The net shall be fully extended so that it completely fills the space between
RULES OF WHEELCHAIR TENNIS the two net posts and it must be of sufficiently small mesh to ensure that a ball cannot
AMENDMENT TO THE RULES OF TENNIS
Appendix I THE BALL
pass through it. The height of the net shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) at the Center, where it
CLASSIFICATION OF COURT SURFACE PACE shall be held down tightly by a strap. A band shall cover the cord or metal cable and
Appendix II THE RACKET the top of the net. The strap and band shall be completely white.
Appendix III PLAYER ANALYSIS TECHNOLOGY
• The maximum diameter of the cord or metal cable shall be 1/3 inch (0.8 cm).
Appendix IV ADVERTISING
Appendix V ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURES AND SCORING METHODS • The maximum width of the strap shall be 2 inches (5 cm).
Appendix VI ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS • The band shall be between 2 inches (5 cm) and 2 ½ inches (6.35 cm) deep
on each side.
Appendix VII 10 AND UNDER TENNIS COMPETITION
For doubles matches, the centers of the net posts shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) outside
Appendix VIII PLAN OF THE COURT
the doubles court on each side.
Appendix IX SUGGESTIONS ON HOW TO MARK A COURT
Appendix X RULES OF BEACH TENNIS For singles matches, if a singles net is used, the centers of the net posts shall be 3
feet (0.914 m) outside the singles court on each side. If a doubles net is used, then
Appendix XI PROCEDURES FOR REVIEW AND HEARINGS ON
the net shall be supported, at a height of 3 ½ feet (1.07 m), by two singles sticks, the
THE RULES OF TENNIS
centers of which shall be 3 feet (0.914 m) outside the singles court on each side.
• The net posts shall not be more than 6 inches (15 cm) square or 6 inches (15
cm) in diameter.
References to the International Tennis Federation or ITF shall hereafter mean ITF • The singles sticks shall not be more than 3 inches (7.5 cm) square or 3 inches
Limited. (7.5 cm) in diameter.
• The net posts and singles sticks shall not be more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) above
the top of the net cord.
292 293
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
The event organizers must announce in advance of the event:
The lines at the ends of the court are called baselines and the lines at the sides of the
court are called sidelines. a. The number of balls for play (2, 3, 4 or 6).
b. The ball change policy, if any.
Two lines shall be drawn between the singles sidelines, 21 feet (6.40 m) from each
Ball changes, if any, can be made either:
side of the net, parallel with the net. These lines are called the service lines. On each
side of the net, the area between the service line and the net shall be divided into two i) After an agreed odd number of games, in which case, the first ball change
equal parts, the service courts, by the center service line. The center service line shall in the match shall take place two games earlier than for the rest of the
be drawn parallel with the singles sidelines and half way between them. match, to make allowance for the warm-up. A tie-break game counts as
one game for the ball change. A ball change shall not take place at the
Each baseline shall be divided in half by a center mark, 4 inches (10 cm) in length, beginning of a tie-break game. In this case, the ball change shall be de-
which shall be drawn inside the court and parallel with the singles sidelines. layed until the beginning of the second game of the next set; or
• The center service line and center mark shall be 2 inches (5 cm) wide. ii. At the beginning of a set
• The other lines of the court shall be between 1 inch (2.5 cm) and 2 inches (5 If a ball gets broken during play, the point shall be replayed.
cm) wide, except that the baselines may be up to 4 inches (10 cm) wide.
Case 1: If a ball is soft at the end of a point, should the point be
All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines and all lines of the replayed?
court shall be of the same color clearly contrasting with the color of the surface. Decision: If the ball is soft, not broken, the point shall not be
replayed.
No advertising is allowed on the court, net, strap, band, net posts or singles sticks
except as provided in Appendix IV. Note: Any ball to be used in a tournament which is played under the Rules of Tennis,
must be named on the official ITF list of approved balls issued by the International
In addition to the court described above, the court designated as “Red” and the court Tennis Federation.
designated as “Orange” in Appendix VII can be used for 10 and under tennis compe-
tition. 4. THE RACKET

Note: Guidelines for minimum distances between the baseline and backstops and Rackets, which are approved for play under the Rules of Tennis, must comply with
between the sidelines and sidestops can be found in Appendix IX. the specifications in Appendix II.

2. PERMANENT FIXTURES The International Tennis Federation shall rule on the question of whether any racket
or prototype complies with Appendix II or is otherwise approved, or not approved, for
The permanent fixtures of the court include the backstops and sidestops, the spec- play. Such ruling may be undertaken on its own initiative, or upon application by any
tators, the stands and seats for spectators, all other fixtures around and above the party with a bona fide interest therein, including any player, equipment manufacturer
court, the Chair Umpire, Line Umpires, net umpire and ball persons when in their or National Association or members thereof. Such rulings and applications shall be
recognized positions. made in accordance with the applicable Review and Hearing Procedures of the Inter-
national Tennis Federation (see Appendix X).
In a singles match played with a doubles net and singles sticks, the net posts and the
Case 1: Is more than one set of strings allowed on the hitting sur-
part of the net outside the singles sticks are permanent fixtures and are not consid-
face of a racket?
ered as net posts or part of the net.
Decision: No. The rule mentions a pattern (not patterns) of crossed
3. THE BALL strings. (See Appendix II)
Case 2: Is the stringing pattern of a racket considered to be gener-
Balls, which are approved for play under the Rules of Tennis, must comply with the ally uniform and flat if the strings are on more than one plane?
specifications in Appendix I. Decision: No.
Case 3: Can vibration damping devices be placed on the strings of
The International Tennis Federation shall rule on the question of whether any ball a racket? If so, where can they be placed?
or prototype complies with Appendix I or is otherwise approved, or not approved, Decision: Yes, but these devices may only be placed outside the
for play. Such ruling may be taken on its own initiative or upon application by any pattern of the crossed strings.
party with a bona fide interest therein, including any player, equipment manufacturer
Case 4: During a point, a player accidentally breaks the strings. Can
or National Association or members thereof. Such rulings and applications shall be
the player continue to play another point with this racket?
made in accordance with the applicable Review and Hearing Procedures of the Inter-
national Tennis Federation (see Appendix X). Decision: Yes, except where specifically prohibited by event orga-
nizers.

294 295
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Case 5: Is a player allowed to use more than one racket at any time
during play? to be used, it must also be announced whether the final set will be played as a “Tie-
Decision: No. break Set” or an “Advantage Set”.
Case 6: Can a battery that affects playing characteristics be incor- a. “Advantage Set”
porated into a racket?
The first player/team to win six games wins that “Set”, provided there is a margin
Decision: No. A battery is prohibited because it is an energy of two games over the opponent(s). If necessary, the set shall continue until this
source, as are solar cells and other similar devices. margin is achieved.
5. SCORE IN A GAME b. “Tie-break Set”
a. Standard game The first player/team to win six games wins that “Set”, provided there is a margin
of two games over the opponent(s). If the score reaches six games all, a tie-break
A standard game is scored as follows with the server’s score being called first: game shall be played.

No point - “Love” Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix V.

First point - “15” 7. SCORE IN A MATCH

Second point - “30” A match can be played to the best of 3 sets (a player/team needs to win 2 sets to
win the match) or to the best of 5 sets (a player/team needs to win 3 sets to win the
Third point - “40” match).
Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix V.
Fourth point - “Game”
8. SERVER & RECEIVER
except that if each player/team has won three points, the score is “Deuce”. After
“Deuce”, the score is “Advantage” for the player/team who wins the next point. If that The players/teams shall stand on opposite sides of the net. The server is the player
same player/team also wins the next point, that player/team wins the “Game”; if the who puts the ball into play for the first point. The receiver is the player who is ready
opposing player/team wins the next point, the score is again “Deuce”. A player/team to return the ball served by the server.
needs to win two consecutive points immediately after “Deuce” to win the “Game”.
Case 1: Is the receiver allowed to stand outside the lines of the
b. Tie-break game court?
Decision: Yes. The receiver may take any position inside or outside
During a tie-break game, points are scored “Zero”,“1”, “2”, “3”, etc. The first player/ the lines on the receiver’s side of the net.
team to win seven points wins the “Game” and “Set”, provided there is a margin of
two points over the opponent(s). If necessary, the tie-break game shall continue until 9. CHOICE OF ENDS & SERVICE
this margin is achieved.
The choice of ends and the choice to be server or receiver in the first game shall be
The player whose turn it is to serve shall serve the first point of the tie-break game. decided by toss before the warm-up starts. The player/team who wins the toss may
The following two points shall be served by the opponent(s) (in doubles, the player of choose:
the opposing team due to serve next). After this, each player/team shall serve alter-
a. To be server or receiver in the first game of the match, in which case the oppo-
nately for two consecutive points until the end of the tie-break game (in doubles, the
nent(s) shall choose the end of the court for the first game of the match; or
rotation of service within each team shall continue in the same order as during that
set). b. The end of the court for the first game of the match, in which case the opponent(s)
shall choose to be server or receiver for the first game of the match; or
The player/team whose turn it was to serve first in the tie-break game shall be the
c. To require the opponent(s) to make one of the above choices.
receiver in the first game of the following set.
Case 1: Do both players/teams have the right to new choices if the
Additional approved alternative scoring methods can be found in Appendix V. warm-up is stopped and the players leave the court?
Decision: Yes. The result of the original toss stands, but new choic-
6. SCORE IN A SET es may be made by both players/teams.

There are different methods of scoring in a set. The two main methods are the “Ad-
vantage Set” and the “Tie-break Set”. Either method may be used provided that the
one to be used is announced in advance of the event. If the “Tie-break Set” method is
296 297
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
16. THE SERVICE
10. CHANGE OF ENDS
Immediately before starting the service motion, the server shall stand at rest with
The players shall change ends at the end of the first, third and every subsequent odd both feet behind (i.e. further from the net than) the baseline and within the imaginary
game of each set. The players shall also change ends at the end of each set unless extensions of the center mark and the sideline.
the total number of games in that set is even, in which case the players change ends
at the end of the first game of the next set. The server shall then release the ball by hand in any direction and hit the ball with the
racket before the ball hits the ground. The service motion is completed at the moment
During a tie-break game, players shall change ends after every six points. that the player’s racket hits or misses the ball. A player who is able to use only one
arm may use the racket for the release of the ball.
Additional approved alternative procedures can be found in Appendix V.
17 SERVING
11 BALL IN PLAY
When serving in a standard game, the server shall stand behind alternate halves of
Unless a fault or a let is called, the ball is in play from the moment the server hits the
the court, starting from the right half of the court in every game.
ball, and remains in play until the point is decided.
In a tie-break game, the service shall be served from behind alternate halves of the
12. BALL TOUCHES A LINE
court, with the first served from the right half of the court.
If a ball touches a line, it is regarded as touching the court bounded by that line.
The service shall pass over the net and hit the service court diagonally opposite,
before the receiver returns it.
13. BALL TOUCHES A PERMANENT FIXTURE
18. FOOT FAULT
If the ball in play touches a permanent fixture after it has hit the correct court, the
player who hit the ball wins the point. If the ball in play touches a permanent fixture
During the service motion, the server shall not:
before it hits the ground, the player who hit the ball loses the point.
a. Change position by walking or running, although slight movements of the feet
14. ORDER OF SERVICE are permitted; or
b. Touch the baseline or the court with either foot; or
At the end of each standard game, the receiver shall become the server and the c. Touch the area outside the imaginary extension of the sideline with either
server shall become the receiver for the next game. foot; or
d. Touch the imaginary extension of the center mark with either foot.
In doubles, the team due to serve in the first game of each set shall decide which
player shall serve for that game. Similarly, before the second game starts, their oppo- If the server breaks this rule it is a “Foot Fault”.
nents shall decide which player shall serve for that game. The partner of the player Case 1: In a singles match, is the server allowed to serve standing
who served in the first game shall serve in the third game and the partner of the behind the part of the baseline between the singles sideline and the
player who served in the second game shall serve in the fourth game. This rotation doubles sideline?
shall continue until the end of the set. Decision: No.
Case 2: Is the server allowed to have one or both feet off the
15. ORDER OF RECEIVING IN DOUBLES ground?
Decision: Yes.
The team which is due to receive in the first game of a set shall decide which player
shall receive the first point in the game. Similarly, before the second game starts, their 19. SERVICE FAULT
opponents shall decide which player shall receive the first point of that game. The
player who was the receiver’s partner for the first point of the game shall receive the The service is a fault if:
second point and this rotation shall continue until the end of the game and the set.
a. The server breaks rules 16, 17 or 18; or
After the receiver has returned the ball, either player in a team can hit the ball. b. The server misses the ball when trying to hit it; or
Case 1: Is one member of a doubles team allowed to play alone c. The ball served touches a permanent fixture, singles stick or net post before it hits
against the opponents? the ground; or
Decision: No.
d. The ball served touches the server or server’s partner, or anything the server or
server’s partner is wearing or carrying.
298 299
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Case 1: After tossing a ball to serve, the server decides not to hit it b. The player does not return the ball in play before it bounces twice consecu-
and catches it instead. Is this a fault? tively; or
Decision: No. A player, who tosses the ball and then decides not to c. The player returns the ball in play so that it hits the ground, or before it bounc-
hit it, is allowed to catch the ball with the hand or the racket, or to let es, an object, outside the correct court; or
the ball bounce. d. The player returns the ball in play so that, before it bounces, it hits a perma-
Case 2: During a singles match played on a court with net posts nent fixture; or
and singles sticks, the ball served hits a singles stick and then hits e. The receiver returns the service before it bounces; or
the correct service court. Is this a fault? f. The player deliberately carries or catches the ball in play on the racket or
Decision: Yes. deliberately touches it with the racket more than once; or
g. The player or the racket, whether in the player’s hand or not, or anything
20. SECOND SERVICE which the player is wearing or carrying touches the net, net posts/singles
sticks, cord or metal cable, strap or band, or the opponent’s court at any time
If the first service is a fault, the server shall serve again without delay from behind the while the ball is in play; or
same half of the court from which that fault was served, unless the service was from h. The player hits the ball before it has passed the net; or
the wrong half. i. The ball in play touches the player or anything that the player is wearing or
carrying, except the racket; or
21. WHEN TO SERVE & RECEIVE j. The ball in play touches the racket when the player is not holding it; or
k. The player deliberately and materially changes the shape of the racket when
The server shall not serve until the receiver is ready. However, the receiver shall play the ball is in play; or
to the reasonable pace of the server and shall be ready to receive within a reason- l. In doubles, both players touch the ball when returning it.
able time of the server being ready.
Case 1: After the server has served a first service, the racket falls
A receiver who attempts to return the service shall be considered as being ready. If it out of the server’s hand and touches the net before the ball has
is demonstrated that the receiver is not ready, the service cannot be called a fault. bounced. Is this a service fault, or does the server lose the point?
Decision: The server loses the point because the racket touches
22. THE LET DURING A SERVICE
the net while the ball is in play.
The service is a let if: Case 2: After the server has served a first service, the racket falls
out of the server’s hand and touches the net after the ball has
a. The ball served touches the net, strap or band, and is otherwise good; or, bounced outside the correct service court. Is this a service fault, or
after touching the net, strap or band, touches the receiver or the receiver’s does the server lose the point?
partner or anything they wear or carry before hitting the ground; or
Decision: This is a service fault because when the racket touched
b. The ball is served when the receiver is not ready.
the net the ball was no longer in play.
Case 3: In a doubles match, the receiver’s partner touches the net
In the case of a service let, that particular service shall not count, and the server before the ball that has been served touches the ground outside the
shall serve again, but a service let does not cancel a previous fault. correct service court. What is the correct decision?
Additional approved alternative procedures can be found in Appendix V. Decision: The receiving team loses the point because the receiv-
er’s partner touched the net while the ball was in play.
23. THE LET Case 4: Does a player lose the point if an imaginary line in the
extension of the net is crossed before or after hitting the ball?
In all cases when a let is called, except when a service let is called on a second ser- Decision: The player does not lose the point in either case provided
vice, the whole point shall be replayed. the player does not touch the opponent’s court.
Case 1: When the ball is in play, another ball rolls onto court. A let Case 5: Is a player allowed to jump over the net into the opponent’s
is called. The server had previously served a fault. Is the server now court while the ball is in play?
entitled to a first service or second service? Decision: No. The player loses the point.
Decision: First service. The whole point must be replayed. Case 6: A player throws the racket at the ball in play. Both the
racket and the ball land in the court on the opponent’s side of the
24. PLAYER LOSES POINT
net and the opponent(s) is unable to reach the ball. Which player
wins the point?
The point is lost if:
Decision: The player who threw the racket at the ball loses the
a. The player serves two consecutive faults; or point.

300 301
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Case 7: A ball that has just been served hits the receiver or in Decision: No, the player loses the point.
doubles the receiver’s partner before it touches the ground. Which Case 3: A ball in play hits a bird flying over the court. Is this a
player wins the point? hindrance?
Decision: The server wins the point, unless it is a service let. Decision: Yes, the point shall be replayed.
Case 8: A player standing outside the court hits the ball or catches Case 4: During a point, a ball or other object that was lying on the
it before it bounces and claims the point because the ball was defi- player’s side of the net when the point started hinders the player. Is
nitely going out of the correct court. this a hindrance?
Decision: The player loses the point, unless it is a good return, in Decision: No.
which case the point continues. Case 5: In doubles, where are the server’s partner and receiver’s
25. A GOOD RETURN partner allowed to stand?
Decision: The server’s partner and the receiver’s partner may take
It is a good return if: any position on their own side of the net, inside or outside the court.
However, if a player is creating a hindrance to the opponent(s), the
a. The ball touches the net, net posts/singles sticks, cord or metal cable, strap hindrance rule should be used.
or band, provided that it passes over any of them and hits the ground within
the correct court; except as provided in Rule 2 and 24 (d); or 27. CORRECTING ERRORS
b. After the ball in play has hit the ground within the correct court and has spun
or been blown back over the net, the player reaches over the net and plays As a principle, when an error in respect of the Rules of Tennis is discovered, all points
the ball into the correct court, provided that the player does not break Rule previously played shall stand. Errors so discovered shall be corrected as follows:
24; or
a. During a standard game or a tie-break game, if a player serves from the
c. The ball is returned outside the net posts, either above or below the level of
wrong half of the court, this should be corrected as soon as the error is dis-
the top of the net, even though it touches the net posts, provided that it hits
covered and the server shall serve from the correct half of the court according
the ground in the correct court; except as provided in Rules 2 and 24 (d); or
to the score. A fault that was served before the error was discovered shall
d. The ball passes under the net cord between the singles stick and the adjacent
stand.
net post without touching either net, net cord or net post and hits the ground
b. During a standard game or a tie-break game, if the players are at the wrong
in the correct court, or
ends of the court, the error should be corrected as soon as it is discovered
e. The player’s racket passes over the net after hitting the ball on the player’s
and the server shall serve from the correct end of the court according to the
own side of the net and the ball hits the ground in the correct court; or
score.
f. The player hits the ball in play, which hits another ball lying in the correct
c. If a player serves out of turn during a standard game, the player who was
court.
originally due to serve shall serve as soon as the error is discovered. Howev-
Case 1: A player returns a ball which then hits a singles stick and
er, if a game is completed before the error is discovered the order of service
hits the ground in the correct court. Is this is a good return?
shall remain as altered. In this case, any ball change to be made after an
Decision: Yes. However, if the ball is served and hits the singles agreed number of games should be made one game later than originally
stick, it is a service fault. scheduled.
Case 2: A ball in play hits another ball which is lying in the correct A fault that was served by the opponents(s) before the error was discovered
court. What is the correct decision? shall not stand.
Decision: Play continues. However, if it is not clear that the actual In doubles, if the partners of one team serve out of turn, a fault that was
ball in play has been returned, a let should be called. served before the error was discovered shall stand.
d. If a player serves out of turn during a tie-break game and the error is discov-
26. HINDRANCE ered after an even number of points have been played, the error is corrected
immediately. If the error is discovered after an odd number of points have
If a player is hindered in playing the point by a deliberate act of the opponent(s), the
been played, the order of service shall remain as altered.
player shall win the point.
A fault that was served by the opponent(s) before the error was discovered
shall not stand.
However, the point shall be replayed if a player is hindered in playing the point by
In doubles, if the partners of one team serve out of turn, a fault that was
either an unintentional act of the opponent(s), or something outside the player’s own
served before the error was discovered shall stand.
control (not including a permanent fixture).
e. During a standard game or a tie-break game in doubles, if there is an error in
Case 1: Is an unintentional double hit a hindrance? the order of receiving, this shall remain as altered until the end of the game in
Decision: No. See also Rule 24 (f). which the error is discovered. For the next game in which they are the receiv-
Case 2: A player claims to have stopped play because the player ers in that set, the partners shall then resume the original order of receiving.
thought that the opponent(s) was being hindered. Is this a hin-
drance? 302 303
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
A limited number of toilet/change of attire breaks may also be allowed, if this
f. If in error a tie-break game is started at 6 games all, when it was previously
is announced in advance of the event.
agreed that the set would be an “Advantage set”, the error shall be corrected
d. Event organizers may allow a rest period of a maximum of ten (10) minutes if
immediately if only one point has been played. If the error is discovered after
this is announced in advance of the event. This rest period can be taken after
the second point is in play, the set will continue as a “Tie-break set”.
the 3rd set in a best of 5 sets match, or after the 2nd set in a best of 3 sets
g. If in error a standard game is started at 6 games all, when it was previously
match.
agreed that the set would be a “Tie-break set”, the error shall be corrected
e. The warm-up time shall be a maximum of five (5) minutes, unless otherwise
immediately if only one point has been played. If the error is discovered after
decided by the event organizers.
the second point is in play, the set will continue as an “Advantage set” until
the score reaches 8 games all (or a higher even number), when a tie-break 30. COACHING
game shall be played.
h. If in error an “Advantage set” or “Tie-break set” is started, when it was pre- Coaching is considered to be communication, advice or instruction of any kind and by
viously agreed that the final set would be a match tie-break, the error shall any means to a player.
be corrected immediately if only one point has been played. If the error is
discovered after the second point is in play, the set will continue either until In team events where there is a team captain sitting on-court, the team captain may
a player or team wins three games (and therefore the set) or until the score coach the player(s) during a set break and when the players change ends at the end
reaches 2 games all, when a match tie-break shall be played. However, if the of a game, but not when the players change ends after the first game of each set and
error is discovered after the second point of the fifth game has started, the set not during a tie-break game.
will continue as a “Tie-break set”. (See Appendix V)
i. If the balls are not changed in the correct sequence, the error shall be cor- In all other matches, coaching is not allowed.
rected when the player/team who should have served with new balls is next Case 1: Is a player allowed to be coached, if the coaching is given
due to serve a new game. Thereafter the balls shall be changed so that the by signals in a discreet way?
number of games between ball changes shall be that originally agreed. Balls Decision: No.
should not be changed during a game.
Case 2: Is a player allowed to receive coaching when play is sus-
28. ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS pended?
Decision: Yes.
For matches where officials are appointed, their roles and responsibilities can be
Case 3: Is a player allowed to receive on-court coaching during a
found in Appendix VI.
match?
29. CONTINUOUS PLAY Decision: Sanctioning bodies may apply to the ITF to have on-court
coaching allowed. In events where on-court coaching is allowed,
As a principle, play should be continuous, from the time the match starts (when the designated coaches may enter the court and coach their players
first service of the match is put in play) until the match finishes. under procedures decided by the sanctioning body.

a. Between points, a maximum of twenty-five (25) seconds is allowed. When the 31. PLAYER ANALYSIS TECHNOLOGY
players change ends at the end of a game, a maximum of ninety (90) seconds
are allowed. However, after the first game of each set and during a tie-break Player analysis technology, that is approved for play under the Rules of Tennis, must
game, play shall be continuous and the players shall change ends without a comply with the specifications in Appendix III.
rest.
At the end of each set there shall be a set break of a maximum of one hun- The International Tennis Federation shall rule on the question of whether any such
dred and twenty (120) seconds. equipment is approved, or not approved. Such ruling may be taken on its own initia-
The maximum time starts from the moment that one point finishes until the tive, or upon application by any party with a bona fide interest therein, including any
first service is struck for the next point. player, equipment manufacturer or National Association or members thereof. Such
Event organizers may apply for ITF approval to extend the ninety (90) sec- rulings and applications shall be made in accordance with the applicable Review and
onds allowed when the players change ends at the end of a game and the Hearing Procedures of the International Tennis Federation (see Appendix X).
one hundred and twenty (120) seconds allowed at a set break.
b. If, for reasons outside the player’s control, clothing, footwear or necessary RULES OF WHEELCHAIR TENNIS
equipment (excluding the racket) is broken or needs to be replaced, the play- The game of wheelchair tennis follows the ITF Rules of Tennis with the following
er may be allowed reasonable extra time to rectify the problem. exceptions.
c. No extra time shall be given to allow a player to recover condition. However, a. The Two Bounce Rule
a player suffering from a treatable medical condition may be allowed one The wheelchair tennis player is allowed two bounces of the ball. The player
medical time-out of three minutes for the treatment of that medical condition. must return the ball before it hits the ground a third time. The second bounce
can be either in or out of the court boundaries.
304 305
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
b. The Wheelchair A decision to reject a proposed modification may be appealed under Ap-
The wheelchair is considered part of the body and all applicable rules, which pendix III of the ITF Wheelchair Tennis Regulations.
apply to a player’s body, shall apply to the wheelchair. f. Propelling the Chair with the Foot
c. The Service i. If due to lack of capacity a player is unable to propel the wheelchair via
The service shall be delivered in the following manner. the wheel then they may propel the wheelchair using one foot.
I. Immediately before commencing the service, the server shall be in a sta- ii. Even if in accordance with rule e) i. above a player is permitted to propel
tionary position. The server shall then be allowed one push before striking the chair using one foot, no part of the player’s foot may be in contact with
the ball. the ground:
ii. The server shall throughout the delivery of the service not touch with any a) during the forward motion of the swing, including when the racket
wheel, any area other than that behind the baseline within the imaginary strikes the ball;
extension of the center mark and sideline. b) from the initiation of the service motion until the racket strikes the ball.
iii. If conventional methods for the service are physically impossible for a iii. A player in breach of this rule shall lose the point.
quadriplegic player, then the player or an individual may drop the ball for
f. Wheelchair/Able-bodied Tennis
such a player. However, the same method of serving must be used each
time. Where a wheelchair tennis player is playing with or against an able-bodied person
d. Player Loses Point in singles or doubles, the Rules of Wheelchair Tennis shall apply for the wheelchair
A player loses a point if: player while the Rules of Tennis for able-bodied tennis shall apply for the able-bod-
i. The player fails to return the ball before it has touched the ground three ied player. In this instance, the wheelchair player is allowed two bounces while the
times; or able-bodied player is allowed only one bounce.
ii. Subject to rule f) below the player uses any part of their feet or lower
extremities as brakes or as stabilizers while delivering service, stroking a Note: The definition of lower extremities is: the lower limbs, including the buttocks,
ball, turning or stopping against the ground or against any wheel while the hips, thighs, legs, ankles and feet.
ball is in play; or
iii. The player fails to keep one buttock in contact with their wheelchair seat AMENDMENT TO THE RULES OF TENNIS
when contacting the ball.
e. The Wheelchair (Article 28 of the Constitution of ITF Ltd)
Wheelchairs used in all competitions played under the Rules of Wheelchair The official and decisive text to the Rules of Tennis shall be for ever in the English
Tennis must comply with the following specifications: language and no alteration or interpretation of such Rules shall be made except at an
i. The wheelchair may be constructed of any material provided that such Annual General Meeting of the Council, nor unless notice of the Resolution embody-
material is non-reflective and does not constitute a hindrance to the op- ing such alterations shall have been received by the ITF in accordance with Article
ponent. 17 and such Resolution or one having the like effect shall be carried by a majority of
ii. Wheels may have a single pushrim only. No changes to the wheelchair two-thirds of the votes recorded in respect of the same.
that afford the player a mechanical advantage are permitted, such as
levers or gears. During normal play, wheels shall not leave permanent Any alteration so made shall take effect as from the first day of January following
marks on, or otherwise damage, the court surface. unless the Meeting shall by the like majority decide otherwise.
iii. Subject to Rule e(v), players shall use only the wheels (including
pushrims) to propel the wheelchair. No steering, braking or gearing or The Board of Directors shall have power, however, to settle all urgent questions of
other device that may assist operation of the wheelchair, including energy interpretation subject to confirmation at the General Meeting next following.
storage systems, is permitted.
iv. The height of the seat (including cushion) shall be fixed and players’ but- This text shall not be altered at any time without the unanimous consent of a General
tocks shall remain in contact with the seat during the playing of a point. Meeting of the Council.
Strapping may be used to secure the player to the wheelchair.
v. Players who meet the requirements of Article 10 of the ITF Wheelchair
Tennis Classification Rules may use a wheelchair powered by electric
motor(s) (a “powered wheelchair”). Powered wheelchairs must not be
able to exceed 15 km/h in any direction and shall be controlled by the
player only.
vi. Applications may be made for modifications to the wheelchair for legit-
imate medical reasons. All such applications shall be submitted to the
ITF Sport Science & Medicine Commission for approval a minimum of 60
days prior to intended use in an ITF-sanctioned event.

306 307
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
d. Only the ball types specified in the table below can be used in 10 and under tennis
APPENDIX I competition:
THE BALL STAGE 3 STAGE 3 STAGE 2 STAGE 1
(RED) (RED) (ORANGE) (GREEN)
For all measurements in Appendix I, SI units shall take precedence FOAM STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD

MASS (WEIGHT) 25.0-43.0 grams 36.0-49.0 grams 36.0-46.9 grams 47.0-51.5 grams
a. The ball shall have a uniform outer surface consisting of a fabric cover except for the (0.882-1.517 oz) (1.270-1.728 oz) (1.270-1.654 oz) (1.658-1.817 oz)
Stage 3 (Red) foam ball. If there are any seams they shall be stitchless. SIZE 8.00-9.00 cm 7.00-8.00 cm 6.00-6.86 cm 6.30-6.86 cm
(3.15-3.54 inches) (2.76-3.15 inches) (2.36-2.70 inches) (2.48-2.70 inches)
b. The ball shall conform to one of types specified in the table immediately below or in
REBOUND 85-105 cm 90-105 cm 105-120 cm 120-135 cm
the table under paragraph (d). (33-41 inches) (35-41 inches) (41-47 inches) (47-53 inches)

type 1 (fast) type 2 (medium)1 Type 3 (Slow)2 High Altitude3 FORWARD 1.40-1.65 cm 0.80-1.05 cm
------- -------
DEFORMATION1 (0.551-0.650 in.) (0.315-0.413 in.)
mass 56.0-59.4 grams 56.0-59.4 grams 56.0-59.4 grams 56.0-59.4 grams
(1.975-2.095 oz) (1.975-2.095 oz) (1.975-2.095 oz) COLOUR2 Any Red and Yellow, Orange and Yel- Yellow with a
(weight) (1.975-2.095 oz) or Yellow with a low, or Yellow with Green dot
Red dot an Orange dot
size 6.54-6.86 cm 6.54-6.86 cm 7.00-7.30 cm 6.54-6.86 cm
(2.57-2.70 in) (2.57-2.70 in) (2.76-2.87 in) (2.57-2.70 in)
Notes:
rebound 138-151 cm 135-147 cm 135-147 cm 122-135 cm
(54-60 inches) (53-58 in) (53-58 in) (48-53 in) 1
The deformation shall be the average of a single reading along each of three
forward 0.56-0.74 cm 0.56-0.74 cm 0.56-0.74 cm 0.56-0.74 cm perpendicular axes. There is no limit on the difference between individual forward
deformation4 (0.220-0.291 in) (0.220-0.291 in) (0.220-0.291 in) (0.220-0.291 in)
deformation readings. There is no specification for return deformation.
return 0.74-1.08 cm 0.80-1.08 cm 0.80-1.08 cm 0.80-1.08 cm 2
All coloured dots shall be reasonable in size and placement.
deformation4 (0.291-0.425 in) (0.315-0.425 in) (0.315-0.425 in) (0.315-0.425 in)

COLOR White or Yellow White or Yellow White or Yellow White or Yellow e. All tests for rebound, mass, size, deformation and durability shall be made in accor-
Notes: dance with the Regulations described in the current edition of ITF Approved Tennis
1
This ball type may be pressurised or pressureless. The pressureless ball shall Balls & Classified Court Surfaces.
have an internal pressure that is no greater than 7 kPa (1 psi) and may be used
for high altitude play above 1,219 m (4,000 feet) above sea level and shall have CLASSIFICATION OF COURT PACE
been acclimatized for 60 days or more at the altitude of the specific tournament.
2
This ball type is also recommended for high altitude play on any court surface The ITF test method used for determining the pace of a court surface is ITF CS 01/02
type above 1,219 m (4,000 feet) above sea level. (ITF Court Pace Rating) as described in the ITF publication entitled “ITF guide to test
3
This ball type is pressurised and is specified for high altitude play above 1,219 m methods for tennis court surfaces”.
(4,000 feet) above sea level only.
Court surfaces which have an ITF Court Pace Rating of 0 to 29 shall be classified
4
The deformation shall be the average of a single reading along each of three as being Category 1 (slow pace). Examples of court surface types which conform to
perpendicular axes. No two individual readings shall differ by more than 0.08 cm this classification will include most clay courts and other types of unbound mineral
(0.031 inches). surface.

c. In addition, all ball types specified under paragraph (b) shall conform to the require- Court surfaces which have an ITF Court Pace Rating of 30 to 34 shall be classified as
ments for durability as shown in the following table: being Category 2 (medium-slow pace), while court surfaces with an ITF Court Pace
Rating of 35 to 39 shall be classified as being Category 3 (medium pace). Examples
mass rebound forward return of court surface types which conform to this classification will include most acrylic
(weight) deformation deformation coated surfaces plus some carpet surfaces.
maximum 0.4 gr 4.0 cm 0.08 cm 0.10 cm
change1 (0.014 oz) (1.6 in) (0.031 in) (0.039 in) Court surfaces with an ITF Court Pace Rating of 40 to 44 shall be classified as being
Category 4 (medium-fast pace), while court surfaces which have an ITF Court Pace
Notes:
Rating of 45 or more shall be classified as being Category 5 (fast pace). Examples
1
The largest permissible change in the specified properties resulting from the du- of court surface types which conform to this classification will include most natural
rability test described in the current edition of ITF Approved Tennis Balls & Classi- grass, artificial grass and some carpet surfaces.
fied Court Surfaces. The durability test uses laboratory equipment to simulate the
Case 1: Which ball type should be used on which court surface?
effects of nine games of play.
308 309
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Decision: 3 different types of balls are approved for play under the
Rules of Tennis, however: are utilised to limit or prevent wear and tear or vibration or, for the frame only, to
distribute weight, are permitted. All permissible objects, protrusions and devices
a. Ball Type 1 (fast speed) is intended for play on slow pace court sur- must be reasonable in size and placement for their respective purpose(s).
faces
b. Ball Type 2 (medium speed) is intended for play on medium-slow, No energy source that in any way could change or affect the playing characteris-
medium and medium-fast pace court surfaces tics of a racket may be built into or attached to a racket.
c. Ball Type 3 (slow speed) is intended for play on fast pace court sur-
faces APPENDIX III
Note: In addition to the ball types specified under paragraph (b) above, the Stage 1
(Green) ball may be used for all levels of competitive play except for world ranking PLAYER ANALYSIS TECHNOLOGY
professional tennis events, Davis Cup and Billie Jean King Cup, the Olympic and
Paralympic Tennis Events, World Tennis Tour Men’s, Women’s and Junior Tourna- Player Analysis Technology is equipment that may perform any of the following func-
ments and Team events sanctioned by the ITF and affiliated Regional Associations, tions with respect to player performace information:
ITF Senior Circuit and Team events and ITF Wheelchair Tennis Tour Circuit and Team
events. A. Recording

Each National Association shall have the right to decide which national competitive B. Storing
events should use the stage 1 (green) ball.
APPENDIX II C. Transmission

D. Analysis
THE RACKET
E. Communication to a player of any kind and by any means
For all measurements in Appendix II, SI units shall take precedence
Player Analysis Technology may record and/or store information during a match.
a. The racket shall consist of a frame and string(s). The frame shall consist of a
Such information may only be accessed by a player in accordance with Rule 30.
handle and head, and may also include a throat. The head is defined as that part
of the racket to which the string(s) connect. The handle is defined as that part of APPENDIX IV
the racket connected to the head which is held by the player in normal use. The
throat, where present, is that part of the racket that joins the handle to the head. ADVERTISING

1. Advertising is permitted on the net as long as it is placed on the part of the net
b. The hitting surface, defined as the main area of the stringing pattern bordered by
that is within 3 feet (0.914 m) from the center of the net posts and is produced in
the points of entry of the strings into the head or points of contact of the strings
such a way that it does not interfere with the vision of the players or the playing
with the head, whichever is the smaller, shall be flat and consist of a pattern of
conditions.
crossed strings, which shall be alternately interlaced or bonded where they cross.
The stringing pattern must be generally uniform and, in particular, not less dense A mark (non-commercial) of the sanctioning body is permitted on the lower part
in the center than in any other area. The racket shall be designed and strung such of the net, minimum 20 inches (0.51 m) from the top of the net, as long as it is
that the playing characteristics are identical on both faces. produced in such a way that it does not interfere with the vision of the players or
the playing conditions.
c. The racket shall not exceed 73.7 cm (29.0 inches) in overall length, and 31.7 cm 2. Advertising and other marks or material placed at the back and sides of the court
(12.5 inches) in overall width. The hitting surface shall not exceed 39.4 cm (15.5 shall be permitted unless it interferes with the vision of the players or the playing
inches) in overall length, when measured parallel to the longitudinal axis of the conditions.
handle, and 29.2 cm (11.5 inches) in overall width, when measured perpendicular
3. Advertising and other marks or material placed on the court surface outside the
to the longitudinal axis of the handle.
lines is permitted unless it interferes with the vision of the players or the playing
conditions.
d. The racket shall be free of any attached object, protrusion or device which makes
4. Notwithstanding paragraphs (1), (2) and (3) above, any advertising, marks or
it possible to change materially the shape of the racket, or its moment of inertia
material placed on the net or placed at the back and sides of the court, or on the
about any principal axis, or to change any physical property which may affect
court surface outside the lines may not contain white or yellow or other light colors
the performance of the racket during the playing of a point. Attached objects,
that may interfere with the vision of the players or the playing conditions.
protrusions and devices that are approved as Player Analysis Technology, or that

310 311
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
5. Advertising and other marks or material are not permitted on the court surface The player/team who first wins seven points shall win this match tie-break and the
inside the lines of the court. match provided there is a margin of two points over the opponent(s).
APPENDIX V 4. MATCH TIE-BREAK (10 POINTS)

ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURES AND SCORING METHODS When the score in a match is one set all, or two sets all in best of five sets matches,
one tie-break game shall be played to decide the match. This tie-break game replac-
SCORE IN A GAME (Rule 5): es the deciding final set.

The player/team who first wins ten points shall win this match tie-break and the match
This alternatives listed in this Appendix V may be used. provided there is a margin of two points over the opponent(s).
“No-Ad” SCORING METHOD Note: When using the match tie-break to replace the final set:
A “No-Ad” game is scored as follows with the server’s score being called first: • the original order of service continues. (Rules 5 and 14)
• in doubles, the order of serving and receiving within the team may be altered,
as in the beginning of each set. (Rules 14 and 15)
No point - “Love”
• before the start of the match tie-break there shall be a 120 seconds set break.
First point - “15”
• balls should not be changed before the start of the match tie-break even if a
Second point - “30”
ball change is due.
Third point - “40”
Fourth point - “Game” CHANGE OF ENDS (Rule 10):

During a tie-break game, players shall change ends after the first point and thereafter
If both players/teams have won three points each, the score is “Deuce” and a decid- after every four points.
ing point shall be played. The receiver(s) shall choose whether to receive the service
from the right half or the left half of the court. In doubles, the players of the receiving THE LET DURING A SERVICE (Rule 22):
team cannot change positions to receive this deciding point. The player/team who
wins the deciding point wins the “Game”. “NO LET” RULE
In mixed doubles, the player of the same gender as the server shall receive the de- This alternative is play without the service let in Rule 22.
ciding point. The players of the receiving team cannot change positions to receive the Wherby a serve that touches the net, strap or band is in play.
deciding point.
At the discretion of the sanctioning body, when playing doubles using Short Sets in
SCORE IN A SET (Rules 6 and 7): combination with No-Ad scoring and the No-Let rule, either player on the receiving
1. SHORT SETS team is permitted to return a serve that touches the net, strap or band and lands
within the correct service box.
The first player/team who wins four games wins that set, provided there is a
APPENDIX VI
margin of two games over the opponent(s). If the score reaches four games all, a
tie-break game shall be played. Alternatively (at the discretion of the sanctioning
ROLE OF COURT OFFICIALS
body), if the score reaches three games all, a tie-break game shall be played.
2. SHORT SET TIE-BREAK
The Referee is the final authority on all questions of tennis law and the Referee’s
When playing Short Sets only, a Short Set tie-break may be used. The first player/ decision is final.
team to win five points wins the “Game” and “Set”, with a deciding point if the
score reaches four all. The order and number of serves shall be determined by In matches where a Chair Umpire is assigned, the Chair Umpire is the final authority
the sanctioning body. Players/Teams will only change ends after the first four on all questions of fact during the match.
points have been played.
3. MATCH TIE-BREAK (7 POINTS) The players have the right to call the Referee to court if they disagree with a Chair
Umpire’s interpretation of tennis law.
When the score in a match is one set all, or two sets all in best of five sets match-
es, one tie-break game shall be played to decide the match. This tie-break game In matches where Line Umpires and net umpires are assigned, they make all calls
replaces the deciding final set. (including foot-fault calls) relating to that line or net. The Chair Umpire has the right to
overrule a Line Umpire or a net umpire if the Chair Umpire is sure that a clear mistake
312 313
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Case 6: Is a Line Umpire allowed to change the call after the Chair
has been made. The Chair Umpire is responsible for calling any line (including foot- Umpire has announced the score?
faults) or net where no Line Umpire or net umpire is assigned. Decision: Yes. If a Line Umpire realizes a mistake, a correction
should be made as soon as possible provided it is not as the result
A Line Umpire who cannot make a call shall signal this immediately to the Chair Um-
of a protest or appeal of a player.
pire who shall make a decision. If the Line Umpire can not make a call, or if there is
no Line Umpire, and the Chair Umpire can not make a decision on a question of fact, Case 7: If a Chair Umpire or Line Umpire calls “out” and then cor-
the point shall be replayed. rects the call to good, what is the correct decision?
Decision: The Chair Umpire must decide if the original “out” call
In team events where the Referee is sitting on-court, the Referee is also the final was a hindrance to either player. If it was a hindrance, the point
authority on questions of fact. shall be replayed. If it was not a hindrance, the player who hit the
ball wins the point.
Play may be stopped or suspended at any time the Chair Umpire decides it is neces- Case 8: A ball is blown back over the net and the player correctly
sary or appropriate. reaches over the net to try to play the ball. The opponent(s) hinders
the player from doing this. What is the correct decision?
The Referee may also stop or suspend play in the case of darkness, weather or ad- Decision: The Chair Umpire must decide if the hindrance was delib-
verse court conditions. When play is suspended for darkness, this should be done erate or unintentional and either awards the point to the hindered
at the end of a set, or after an even number of games have been played in the set in player or order the point to be replayed.
progress. After a suspension in play, the score and position of players on-court in the
match shall stand when the match resumes.
BALL MARK INSPECTION PROCEDURES
The Chair Umpire or Referee shall make decisions regarding continuous play and
coaching in respect of any Code of Conduct that is approved and in operation. 1. Ball mark inspections can only be made on clay courts.

Case 1: The Chair Umpire awards the server a first service after an 2. A ball mark inspection requested by a player (team) shall be allowed only if the
overrule, but the receiver argues that it should be a second service, Chair Umpire cannot determine the call with certainty from their chair on either a
since the server had already served a fault. Should the Referee be point-ending shot or when a player (team) stops playing the point during a rally
called to court to give a decision? (returns are permitted but then the player must immediately stop).
Decision: Yes. The Chair Umpire makes the first decision about 3. When the Chair Umpire has decided to make a ball mark inspection, they should
questions of tennis law (issues relating to the application of specific go down from the chair and make the inspection themselves. If they do not know
facts). However, if a player appeals the Chair Umpire’s decision, where the mark is, they can ask the Line Umpire for help in locating the mark, but
then the Referee shall be called to make the final decision. then the Chair Umpire shall inspect it.
Case 2: A ball is called out, but a player claims that the ball was 4. The original call or overrule will always stand if the Line Umpire and Chair Umpire
good. May the Referee be called to court to make a decision? cannot determine the location of the mark or if the mark is unreadable.
Decision: No. The Chair Umpire makes the final decision on
questions of fact (issues relating to what actually happened during a 5. Once the Chair Umpire has identified and ruled on a ball mark, this decision is
specific incident). final and not appealable.
Case 3: Is a Chair Umpire allowed to overrule a Line Umpire at the 6. In clay court tennis the Chair Umpire should not be too quick to announce the
end of a point if, in the Chair Umpire’s opinion, a clear mistake was score unless absolutely certain of the call. If in doubt, wait before calling the score
made earlier in the point? to determine whether a ball mark inspection is necessary.
Decision: No. A Chair Umpire may only overrule a Line Umpire 7. In doubles the appealing player must make their appeal in such a way that ei-
immediately after the clear mistake has been made. ther play stops or the Chair Umpire stops play. If an appeal is made to the Chair
Case 4: A Line Umpire calls a ball “Out” and then the player argues Umpire then they must first determine that the correct appeal procedure was fol-
that the ball was good. Is the Chair Umpire allowed to overrule the lowed. If it was not correct or if it was late, then the Chair Umpire may determine
Line Umpire? that the opposing team was deliberately hindered.
Decision: No. A Chair Umpire must never overrule as the result of
8. If a player erases the ball mark before the Chair Umpire has made a final deci-
the protest or appeal by a player
sion, they concedes the call.
Case 5: A Line Umpire calls a ball “Out”. The Chair Umpire was
unable to see clearly, but thought the ball was in. May the Chair 9. A player may not cross the net to check a ball mark without being subject to the
Umpire overrule the Line Umpire? Unsportsmanlike provision of the Code of Conduct.
Decision: No. The Chair Umpire may only overrule when sure that
the Line Umpire made a clear mistake.
314 315
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
ELECTRONIC REVIEW PROCEDURES APPENDIX VII

10 AND UNDER TENNIS COMPETITION

At tournaments where an Electronic Review System is used, the following proce-
dures should be followed for matches on courts where it is used. Courts:
1. A request for an Electronic Review of a line call or overrule by a player (team) In addition to the (full sized) court described in Rule 1, the following court dimensions
shall be allowed only on either a point-ending shot or when a player (team) stops may be used for 10 and under tennis competition:
playing the point during a rally (returns are permitted but then the player must
immediately stop). • A court, designated “Red” for the purposes of 10 and under tennis competition,
shall be a rectangle, between 36 feet (10.97 m) and 42 feet (12.80 m) long, and
2. The Chair Umpire should decide to use the Electronic Review when there is doubt
between 14 feet (4.27 m) and 20 feet (6.10 m) wide. The net shall be between
about the accuracy of the line call or overrule. However, the Chair Umpire may
31.5 inches (0.800 m) and 33.0 inches (0.838m) high at the center.
refuse the Electronic Review if they believe that the player is making an unrea-
sonable request or that it was not made in a timely manner. • A court, designated “Orange”, shall be a rectangle, between 58 feet (17.68 m) and
60 feet (18.29 m) long, and between 20 feet (6.10 m) and 27 feet (8.23 m) wide.
3. In doubles the appealing player must make their appeal in such a way that ei-
The net shall be between 31.5 inches (0.800 m) and 36.0 inches (0.914m) high at
ther play stops or the Chair Umpire stops play. If an appeal is made to the Chair
the center.
Umpire then they must first determine that the correct appeal procedure was fol-
lowed. If it was not correct or if it was late, then the Chair Umpire may determine Balls:
that the opposing team was deliberately hindered, in which case the appealing
team loses the point. Only the following ball types, which are specified in Appendix I, can be used in 10 and
under tennis competition:
4. The original call or overrule will always stand if the Electronic Review is unable,
for whatever reason, to make a decision on that line call or overrule. • A Stage 3 (Red) ball, which is recommended for play on a “red” court, by players
aged up to 8 years, using a racket up to 23 inches (58.4 cm) long.
5. The Chair Umpire’s final decision will be the outcome of the Electronic Review
and is not appealable. If a manual choice is required for the system to review • A Stage 2 (Orange) ball, which is recommended for play on an “orange” court, by
a particular ball impact, a Review Official approved by the Referee shall decide players aged 8 to 10 years, using a racket between 23 inches (58.4 cm) and 25
which ball impact is reviewed. inches (63.5) cm long.
6. Each player (team) is allowed three (3) unsuccessful appeals per set, plus one • A Stage 1 (Green) ball, which is recommended for play on a full sized court, by
(1) additional appeal in the tie-break. For matches with advantage sets, players advanced players aged 9 to 10 years, using a racket between 25 inches (63.5 cm)
(teams) will start again with a maximum of three (3) unsuccessful appeals at 6 and 26 inches (66.0 cm) long.
games all and every 12 games thereafter. For matches with match tie-break, the
match tie-break counts as a new set and each player (team) starts with three (3) Note: Other ball types described in Appendix I cannot be used in 10 and under tennis
appeals. Players (teams) will have an unlimited number of successful appeals. competition.

Scoring methods:

For 10 and under tennis competition using Stage 3 (Red), Stage 2 (Orange) or Stage
1 (Green) balls, scoring methods specified in the Rules of Tennis (including those
specified in Appendix V) can be utilised, in addition to short duration scoring methods
involving matches of one match tie-break, best of 3 tie-breaks/match tie-breaks, one
short set or one regular set.

Timed matches:

For 10 and under tennis competition the tournament committee may set a specific
time period for matches in the event.

316 317
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
APPENDIX VIII APPENDIX IX

SUGGESTIONS ON HOW TO MARK OUT A COURT

Including Blended Lines

NOTE: All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.

The following procedure is for the usual combined doubles and singles court. (See
note at foot for a court for one purpose only.)

First select the position of the net; a straight line 42 feet (12.80 m) long. Mark the
center (X on the diagram above) and, measuring from there in each direction, mark:
at 13’6” (4.11 m) the points a, b, where the net crosses the inner sidelines,
at 16’6” (5.03 m) the positions of the singles sticks (n, n),
at 18’0” (5.48 m) the points A, B, where the net crosses the outer sidelines,
at 21’0” (6.40 m) the positions of the net posts (N, N), being the ends of the original
42’0” (12.80 m) line.
.
Insert pegs at A and B and attach to them the respective ends of two measuring
tapes. On one, which will measure the diagonal of the half-court, take a length 53’1”
NOTE: All court measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines.
(16.18 m) and on the other (to measure the sideline) a length of 39’0” (11.89 m). Pull

318 319
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
both taut so that at these distances they meet at a point C, which is one corner of feet (3.66 m).
the court. Reverse the measurements to find the other corner D. As a check on this
operation it is advisable at this stage to verify the length of the line CD which, being As a guide for recreational and Club play, the recommended minimum distance
the baseline, should be found to be 36’0” (10.97 m); and at the same time its center between the baselines and the backstops should be 18 feet (5.48 m) and between
J can be marked, and also the ends of the inner sidelines (c, d), 4’6” (1.37 m) from the sidelines and the sidestops the recommended minimum distance should be 10
C and D. feet (3.05 m).

The center line and service line are now marked by means of the points F, H, G, As a guide, the recommended minimum height measured at the net from the court
which are measured 21’0” (6.40 m) from the net down the lines bc, XJ, ad, respec- surface to the ceiling should be 30 feet (9.14 m)..
tively. APPENDIX X
Identical procedure the other side of the net completes the court. RULES OF BEACH TENNIS
If a singles court only is required, no lines are necessary outside the points a, b,
c, d, but the court can be measured out as above. Alternatively, the corners of the The Rules of Beach Tennis are approved by the Rules of Tennis Committee and
baseline (c, d) can be found if preferred by pegging the two tapes at a and b in- the Board of Directors and can be found on https://www.itftennis.com/en/itf-tours/
stead of at A and B, and by then using lengths of 47’5” (14.46 m) and 39’0” (11.89 beach-tennis-tour/
m). The net posts will be at n, n, and a 33’0” (10 m) singles net should be used.
APPENDIX XI
When a combined doubles and singles court with a doubles net is used for singles,
the net must be supported at the points n, n, to a height of 3 feet 6 inches (1.07 PROCEDURES FOR REVIEW AND HEARINGS ON THE RULES OF TENNIS
m) by means of two singles sticks, which shall be not more than 3 inches (7.5 cm)
square or 3 inches (7.5 cm) in diameter. The centers of the singles sticks shall be
3 feet (.914 m) outside the singles court on each side. 1. INTRODUCTION

To assist in the placing of these singles sticks it is desirable that the points n, n, 1.1 These procedures were approved by the Board of Directors of the International
should each be shown with a white dot when the court is marked. Tennis Federation (“Board of Directors”) on 17 May 1998.
1.2 The Board of Directors may from time to time supplement, amend, or vary these
When sanctioning bodies approve so called “Blended Lines” on courts the follow- procedures.
ing guidelines must be followed:
2. OBJECTIVES
Colour:
2.1 The International Tennis Federation is the custodian of the Rules of Tennis and
• Within the same colour family as the background playing surface. is committed to:
• Lighter than the background playing surface. a. Preserving the traditional character and integrity of the game of tennis.
b. Actively preserving the skills traditionally required to play the game.
• Limit on colour variation of +22 points on the L* scale
c. Encouraging improvements, which maintain the challenge of the game.
(Add <25% by volume of white paint to the background colour) d. Ensuring fair competition.
2.2 To ensure fair, consistent and expeditious review and hearings in relation to the
Pace:
Rules of Tennis the procedures set out below shall apply.
• Within 5 CPR of the playing surface.
3. SCOPE
Dimensions:
3.1 These Procedures shall apply to Rulings under:
• 1.0-1.5 cm narrower than the standard lines.
a. Rule 1 – The Court.
Marking: b. Rule 3 – The Ball.
c. Rule 4 – The Racket.
• Terminate 8 cm from intersection with white playing lines. d. Appendix I and II of the Rules of Tennis.
Note: e. Any other Rules of Tennis which the International Tennis Federation may
decide.
As a guide for international competitions, the recommended minimum distance
between the baselines and the backstops should be 21 feet (6.40 m) and between
the sidelines and the sidestops the recommended minimum distance should be 12
320 321
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
f. When an application for a Ruling on a racket or other piece of equipment is
4. STRUCTURE
made, a prototype or, exact, copy of the equipment in question must be sub-
4.1 Under these procedures Rulings shall be issued by a Ruling Board. mitted with the application for a Ruling.
g. If, in the opinion of the Applicant, there are extraordinary or unusual circum-
4.2 Such Rulings shall be final save, for an entitlement to appeal to an Appeal Tribu- stances, which require a Ruling to be made within a specified time or before
nal pursuant to these procedures. a specified date they shall include a statement describing the extraordinary
or unusual circumstances.
5. APPLICATION
8.4 If an application for a Ruling does not contain the information and/or equipment
5.1 Rulings shall be taken either:
referred to at Clause 8. 3 (a)-(g) above the President or their designee shall notify
a. Following a motion of the Board of Directors; or the Applicant giving the Applicant a specified reasonable time within which to remedy
b. Upon the receipt of an application in accordance with the procedures set out the defect. If the Applicant fails to remedy the defect within the specified time the
below. application shall be dismissed.
6. APPOINTMENT AND COMPOSITION OF RULING BOARDS
9. CONVENING THE RULING BOARD
6.1 Ruling Boards shall be appointed by the President of the International Tennis
9.1 On receipt of a valid application or on the motion of the Board of Directors the
Federation (“President”) or their designee and shall comprise of such a number,
President or their designee may convene a Ruling Board to deal with the applica-
as the President or their designee shall determine.
tion or motion.
6.2 If more than one person is appointed to the Ruling Board the Ruling Board shall
9.2 The Ruling Board need not hold a hearing to deal with an application or motion
nominate one person from amongst themselves to act as Chairperson.
where the application or motion, in the opinion of the Chairperson can be resolved
6.3 The Chairperson shall be entitled to regulate the procedures prior to and at any in a fair manner without a hearing.
review and/or hearing of a Ruling Board.
10. PROCEDURE OF THE RULING BOARD
7. PROPOSED RULINGS BY THE RULING BOARD
10.1 The Chairperson of a Ruling Board shall determine the appropriate form, proce-
7.1 The details of any proposed Ruling issued upon the motion of the Board of Di- dure and date of any review and/or hearing.
rectors may be provided to any bona fide person or any players, equipment man-
10.2 The Chairperson shall provide written notice of those matters set out at 10.1
ufacturer or national association or members thereof with an interest in the pro-
above to any Applicant or any person or association who has expressed an inter-
posed Ruling.
est in the proposed Ruling.
7.2 Any person so notified shall be given a reasonable period within which to forward
10.3 The Chairperson shall determine all matters relating to evidence and shall not be
comments, objections, or requests for information to the President or his desig-
bound by judicial rules governing procedure and admissibility of evidence provid-
nee in connection with the proposed Ruling.
ed that the review and/or hearing is conducted in a fair manner with a reasonable
8. APPLICATION FOR RULINGS opportunity for the relevant parties to present their case.

8.1 An application for a Ruling may be made by any party with a bona fide interest in 10.4 Under these procedures any review and/or hearings:
the Ruling including any player, equipment manufacturer or national association a. Shall take place in private.
or member thereof. b. May be adjourned and/or postponed by the Ruling Board.
8.2 Any application for a Ruling must be submitted in writing to the President. 10.5 The Chairperson shall have the discretion to co-opt from time to time additional
members onto the Ruling Board with special skill or experience to deal with spe-
8.3 To be valid an application for a Ruling must include the following minimum infor- cific issues, which require such special skill or experience.
mation:
10.6 The Ruling Board shall take its decision by a simple majority. No member of the
a. The full name and address of the Applicant. Ruling Board may abstain.
b. The date of the application.
c. A statement clearly identifying the interest of the Applicant in the question 10.7 The Chairperson shall have the complete discretion to make such order against
upon which a Ruling is requested. the Applicant [and/or other individuals or organizations commenting objecting or
d. All relevant documentary evidence upon which the Applicant intends to rely at requesting information at any review and/or hearing] in relation to the costs of
any hearing. the application and/or the reasonable expenses incurred by the Ruling Board in
e. If, in the opinion of the Applicant, expert evidence is necessary they shall holding tests or obtaining reports relating to equipment subject to a Ruling as he
include a request for such expert evidence to be heard. Such request must shall deem appropriate.
identify the name of any expert proposed and their relevant expertise.

322 323
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
11. NOTIFICATION Appellant as a condition of appeal. Such appeal fee shall be repaid to the Appel-
11.1 Once a Ruling Board has reached a decision it shall provide written notice to the lant if the appeal is successful.
Applicant, or, any person or association who has expressed an interest in the
proposed Ruling as soon as reasonably practicable. 15. CONVENING THE APPEAL TRIBUNAL

11.2 Such written notice shall include a summary of the reasoning behind the decision 15.1 The President or their designee shall convene the Appeal Tribunal following pay-
of the Ruling Board. ment by the Appellant of any appeal fee.

11.3 Upon notification to the Applicant or upon such other date specified by the Ruling 16. PROCEDURES OF APPEAL TRIBUNAL
Board the Ruling of the Ruling Board shall be immediately binding under the
Rules of Tennis. 16.1 The Appeal Tribunal and their Chairperson shall conduct procedures and hear-
ings in accordance with those matters set out in sections 10, 11 and 12 above.
12. APPLICATION OF CURRENT RULES OF TENNIS 16.2 Upon notification to the Appellant or upon such other date specified by the Appeal
12.1 Subject to the power of the Ruling Board to issue interim Rulings the current Tribunal the Ruling of the Appeal Tribunal shall be immediately binding and final
Rules of Tennis shall continue to apply until any review and/or hearing of the under the Rules of Tennis.
Ruling Board is concluded and a Ruling issued by the Ruling Board.
17. GENERAL
12.2 Prior to and during any review and/or hearing the Chairperson of the Ruling Board
may issue such directions as are deemed reasonably necessary in the implemen- 17.1 If a Ruling Board consists of only one member that single member shall be re-
tation of the Rules of Tennis and of these procedures including the issue of interim sponsible for regulating the hearing as Chairperson and shall determine the pro-
Rulings. cedures to be followed prior to and during any review and/or hearing.

12.3 Such interim Rulings may include restraining orders on the use of any equipment 17.2 All review and/or hearings shall be conducted in English. In any hearing where
under the Rules of Tennis pending a Ruling by the Ruling Board as to whether or an Applicant, and/or other individuals or organizations commenting, objecting
not the equipment meets the specification of the Rules of Tennis. or requesting information do not speak English an interpreter must be present.
Wherever practicable the interpreter shall be independent.
13. APPOINTMENT AND COMPOSITION OF APPEAL TRIBUNALS 17.3 The Ruling Board or Appeal Tribunal may publish extracts from its own Rulings.
13.1 Appeal Tribunals shall be appointed by the President or their designee from 17.4 All notifications to be made pursuant to these procedures shall be in writing.
[members of the Board of Directors/Technical Commission].
17.5 Any notifications made pursuant to these procedures shall be deemed notified
13.2 No member of the Ruling Board who made the original Ruling shall be a member upon the date that they were communicated, sent or transmitted to the Applicant
of the Appeal Tribunal. or other relevant party.
13.3 The Appeal Tribunal shall comprise of such number as the President or his des- 17.6 A Ruling Board shall have the discretion to dismiss an application if in its reason-
ignee shall determine but shall be no less than three. able opinion the application is substantially similar to an application or motion
13.4 The Appeal Tribunal shall nominate one person from amongst themselves to act upon which a Ruling Board has made a decision and/or Ruling within the 36
as Chairperson. months prior to the date of the application.

13.5 The Chairperson shall be entitled to regulate the procedures prior to and at any
© ITF Limited t/a International Tennis Federation
appeal hearing.
All rights reserved
14. APPLICATION TO APPEAL 2020

14.1 An Applicant [or a person or association who has expressed an interest and for-
warded any comments, objections, or requests to a proposed Ruling] may appeal
any Ruling of the Ruling Board.
14.2 To be valid an application for an appeal must be:
a. Made in writing to the Chairperson of the Ruling Board who made the Ruling
appealed not later than 45 days following notification of the Ruling;
b. Must set out details of the Ruling appealed against; and
c. Must contain the full grounds of the appeal.
14.3 Upon receipt of a valid application to appeal the Chairperson of the Ruling Board
making the original Ruling may require a reasonable appeal fee to be paid by the

324 325
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT J - Prize Money EXHIBIT K - Glossary
ATP Tour and ATP Challenger Tour Draw Results:

Please refer to Detail Sheet for approved prize money breakdowns. The Supervisor must record match results using, where appropriate, the following
definitions:
Abandoned: Match began but was not completed for any reason other than de-
fault or retirement. There is no winner or loser. The match is not to be completed.
Players receive points and money equivalent to loser of that round.
Default: Losing player was defaulted under provisions of Code of Conduct after
match had begun.
Incomplete: Match began but was not completed for any reason other than
weather, default, or retirement. There is no winner or loser. It is anticipated that
the match will be resumed and completed.
Ineligible: Player fails to sign the Consent and Agreement form prior to his first
match.
Retired: Losing player retired because of illness or injury after match had begun.
Unplayed: Match did not begin for any reason other than (a) illness or injury on
the part of one player or (b) one player was subjected to penalties of Code of
Conduct before first serve of match was struck or otherwise not permitted by ATP
or tournament Supervisor from playing. There is no winner or loser and the match
will not be played.
Unregistered: Player fails to complete the registration process prior to his first
match.
Walkover: Match did not begin because:
a) losing player was ill or injured or
b) losing player was subjected to penalties of Code of Conduct before first serve
of match was struck or otherwise not permitted by ATP or tournament Super-
visor to play.
This would not be used when a lucky loser or alternate is substituted. Winners
of “walkover”/”no match” matches receive points and prize money as if the
match had been played.
Weather: Match began but was not completed because of inclement weather.
There is no winner or loser. It is anticipated that the match will be resumed and
completed.

Miscellaneous Definition of Terms

Alternate: The next highest ranked player(s) who were not a direct acceptance
at the time of the entry deadline.
ATP Player Dues: Money owed or collected for ATP player membership or the
annual dues of such membership.
ATP Standards Committee: A committee approved by the ATP Board with cer-
tain powers to oversee creation and compliance of ATP tournament standards.
Ball Mark Inspection (BMI): On clay courts the Chair Umpire may leave the chair
and inspect the mark left by the ball in play to determine the correctness of the

326 327
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
call. This can only be done after a point-ending shot or if the player or team stops ifying players at ATP Tour Masters 1000, ATP Tour 500 events and ATP Tour 250
play to request an inspection. events. This does not apply to the Challenger Circuit.
Ceremonies: Awards presentations customarily held following the conclusion of On-Site Withdrawal (ATP Tour): Player withdraws after 10 AM Eastern time,
the final championship match(es). USA on Friday and was on-site at the event when the withdrawal occurred and
Chair Umpire: This official is responsible for the conduct of the match. His main is determined to be unfit for play by that tournament’s Doctor. Players still com-
duties are to enforce all ATP Rules and Regulations and on-court procedures to peting in a tournament or Davis Cup match after the 10 AM deadline and are
ensure accuracy, fairness and safety. He is the final authority on all questions of forced to withdraw/retire, from a match may be examined by that event’s Doctor
fact that may arise during the match. and shall then be considered the same as an On-Site Withdrawal. Withdrawals/
Retirements from Davis Cup must be from “live” matches and include a medical
Direct Acceptance: Players or teams accepted directly in the draw by virtue of certification from the Independent Doctor. This should be documented on the
their position in the Pepperstone ATP Rankings or Pepperstone ATP Doubles withdrawal summary from the tournament that the player withdrew from.
Rankings System or by their protected ranking.
On-Site Withdrawal (ATP Challenger or ATP Tour Qualifying): Player with-
Pepperstone ATP Rankings (Singles & Doubles): The objective merit-based draws after the 10 AM Friday deadline and is examined at the tournament site
method used for determining qualification for entry and seeding in all tournaments within the first three (3) days of the event, or in the case of ATP Tour qualifying on
for both singles and doubles and the Nitto ATP Finals (singles & doubles). the Saturday or Sunday of qualifying. Players still competing in a tournament or
Ineligible: Player fails to sign the Consent and Agreement Form prior to his first Davis Cup match after the 10 AM deadline and are forced to withdraw/retire, from
match. a match may be examined by that event’s Doctor and shall then be considered
the same as an On-Site Withdrawal. Withdrawals/Retirements from Davis Cup
Late Withdrawal: Player withdraws after 10 AM PVB time on the Friday prior to must be from “live” matches and include a medical certification from the Indepen-
the event; or player does not appear for his match and is not on-site. dent Doctor. This should be documented on the withdrawal summary from the
Late Withdrawal (Dbl-MD) – used to indicate a player who has withdrawn from tournament that the player withdrew from.
doubles after the on-site entry deadline. Protected Ranking: A ranking assigned a player who has been unable, due to
Late Withdrawal, Qualifying: This applies to ATP Tour Masters 1000 and ATP injury, to compete in any tennis event for a minimum of six (6) months.
Tour 500 events where there is an advance acceptance list for the qualifying and Punctuality: Player fails to appear, in a timely manner, when his match has been
the player withdraws after the deadline. called. Provisions for Non-Appearance do not apply.
Line Umpire: Officials responsible for calling specific assigned lines according to Qualifier: Player who has won his place into the main draw by way of a qualifying
the ATP Rules under the direct on-court supervision of the Chair Umpire. competition.
Lucky Loser: Players who have lost in the final round of qualifying, or if needed, Qualifying Non-Appearance: A player is entered into the qualifying through the
earlier rounds. These players are placed in rank order and may become eligible Supervisor of another event and does not appear for his match. This also in-
to replace any player in the main draw who is forced to withdraw prior to his first cludes players accepted into the qualifying as a wild card who do not appear
match. for their match. This includes those who sign-in through the Supervisor as an
Major Offenses: aggravated behavior, Bribes or Other Payments, Conduct Con- alternate to ATP Tour qualifying. It also covers ATP Challenger Tour events.
trary to the Integrity of the Game, Prohibited Promotional Fees and Wagers. A Referee: Official hired by the tournament to advise in planning the event and
Major Offense is initiated and investigated by the Senior Vice President - Rules & assist the ATP Supervisor in his assigned duties and responsibilities.
Competition and is in addition to any penalties that may have been levied by the
on-site Supervisor. Review Official: Official hired by ATP who is responsible for the Review function
of Electronic Line Calling systems on-site.
Medical Time-Out (MTO): Official time allotted during the match for treatment
due to an approved medical condition. The treatment is given by the ATP Physio- Seed: Players who are given preferential positions in the draw based on the
therapist. The time allowed is 3 minutes (4 1/2 if taken on a changeover) for each Pepperstone ATP Rankings System.
separate medical condition. Special Event: Those events other than Grand Slams, ATP Tour tournaments or
No Match: There was not an eligible alternate available. ATP Challenger Tour tournaments.

No Show: Player does not appear for his first match and there has been no con- Special Exempt: Player accepted into the main draw who was still competing in
tact or prior notification from the player that he would not appear for the match. the singles event of another qualified event at the time of this event’s qualifying.
For penalty purposes, this would be penalized as a “Late Withdrawal”. Player may not have been accepted as a direct acceptance, if entered.

Non-Member Service Fee: Players who are not members in good standing of Special Exempt /Wild Card Non-Appearance: A player accepts a SE or WC
ATP must pay a fee for services rendered. This applies to main draw players at and does not appear for his match and is not on-site. This violation would be
all ATP Tour Masters 1000 or ATP Tour 500 and ATP Tour 250 events and to qual- considered as a Late Withdrawal and be subject to the penalties set forth under

328 329
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Late Withdrawal.
EXHIBIT L - Chief of Umpires
Supervisor: Final on-site authority ensuring that the tournament is conducted
fairly in accordance with ATP’s Rules and Regulations as to all matters arising The Chief of Umpires shall:
that require immediate resolution. 1) Be prepared to brief the Supervisor and Referee on:
Tour Manager: Represents the player’s interests in all matters involving the sign- a) The plan for implementing the officials.
ins, draws and the scheduling of the event.
Tournament Director: Person representing the owners of the event in the day- 2) Discharge the following responsibilities:
to-day management of the tournament. a) Pre-tournament.
Tournament Week: Commences on a Monday and concluding on a Sunday, i) Recruit a sufficient number of competent officials who are qualified to of-
unless otherwise approved by ATP. Tournaments with a published Saturday final ficiate at this level of event. The most qualified officials must be assigned
shall have the tournament week conclude on Saturday. through the finals. Prepare a list of officials (Line Umpires with ratings,
Chair Umpires with ratings) for the full-time ATP official coordinating the
Unregistered - Player fails to complete the registration process prior to his first officials for the event.
match. ii) If applicable, negotiate a contract or agreement for officials with the tour-
Wild Card: Players included in the draw at the sole discretion of the tournament. nament.
A specified number of wild cards are available in each event. iii) If a Challenger event, submit to ATP a list of proposed Designated Chair
Umpires no less than 90 days prior to the start of the tournament.
Withdrawal: Player who withdraws after the entry deadline but prior to 10 AM iv) If requested by the tournament, provide a list of officials to the Chairper-
(PVB) on the Friday prior to the event. son responsible for the program.
• Withdrawal (Dbl) - used to indicate a doubles withdrawal that is after the 10 AM v) Compile an officials’ clothing sizes list, in case the tournament furnishes
Friday withdrawal deadline and prior to the on-site sign-in deadline clothing for uniforms.
vi) Conduct the necessary pre-tournament training of officials including re-
• Withdrawal (Dbl)/On-Site Medical – used to indicate a player who has with- view of the Rules of Tennis, ATP tournament Rules and Code.
drawn from doubles where both members were on site at the time of the with- vii) Check with the tournament about arrangements for:
drawal and the withdrawal was due to a medical condition o umpire chairs o cushions//sunshades
o singles sticks o chairs for use on--court by Line Umpires
o scorecards o scoreboards//personnel
o new and used balls
viii)Check supplies for the tournament:
o scorecards o clipboards (if needed)
o point penalty forms o first aid kit
o pencils o office supplies
o crew rotation forms o on-court Line Umpire evaluation forms
Note: Rotation information is available upon request from ATP.
ix) Check all applicable arrangements for officials:
o on--site office and lounge
o transportation (long-distance or local)
o food and beverages o parking
o telephones o housing
o security o toilets
o photocopier o walkie--talkies
x) Prepare a check-in form if the number of officials requires it.
xi) Organize a method of notification or a mailing that informs all of the offi-
cials about the tournament dates, officials report times (no less than 30
minutes before start of play), uniform requirements and arrangements
for transportation, parking and housing. An umpire information sheet is
recommended for an event larger than a 32 draw.
xii) Present to the ATP Supervisor at least 2 weeks prior to the qualifying
sign-in:
o an availability list of the Chair Umpires for each day including both

330 331
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
the designated and additional Chair Umpires. Categorize according
EXHIBIT M - Special Exempts - ATP 250 to ATP 500 Events
to rating, experience and ability. Special Exempt from ATP Tour 250 – list of events.
b) During the Tournament:
i) Provide assistance to the ATP Supervisor as needed.
ii) Be on-site at all times during play. The Chief of Umpires may not be a 500 Event SE Eligible from 250
Chair Umpire or Line Umpire unless authorized by the ATP Supervisor.
iii) Instruct the officials on the tournament procedure for handling new and Rotterdam Montpellier
used balls.
Rio de Janeiro Buenos Aires Dallas
Note that it is inappropriate for the Chair Umpires to supply the court with
the balls for their matches. Acapulco Delray Beach
iv) Instruct the officials on the procedure for reporting and turning in point Dubai Marseille
penalty forms.
v) Schedule the on-court assignment of the Line Umpires, subject to the ap- Barcelona None
proval of the ATP Supervisor, Line Umpires for the quarterfinals, semi-fi- Halle ‘s-Hertogenbosch Stuttgart
nals and finals must have worked a minimum of two (2) days prior to
the quarterfinal and must have demonstrated that their skills merit the London Queens ‘s-Hertogenbosch Stuttgart
assignment. Washington D.C. Atlanta
c) Observe the performance of all officials during the matches.
Beijing Chengdu Zhuhai
d) Remove, rotate or replace a Line Umpire whenever it is necessary to improve
the officiating of a match. Tokyo Chengdu Zhuhai
e) Maintain the ATP Line Umpire evaluation process, and make ongoing assign-
Basel Antwerp Moscow Stockholm
ments based upon evaluations.
i) Be prepared for other contingencies (such as rain) that may change the Vienna Antwerp Moscow Stockholm
number of courts being used.
ii) Prepare a day in advance, recording Chair Umpire assignments on the
order of play and preparing rotations for the line teams.
Complete information must be posted before the arrival of the officials the
next day, no less than 30 minutes before the start of play.
iii) Conduct a daily meeting with all officials.
f) Post-Tournament.
Prepare a written report for the Supervisor. Include recommendations for im-
provements and the prevention of problems.

332 333
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT N - Special Exempts - ATP Challenger Tour ea-Bissau, Kenya, Lesotho, Liberia, Libya, Madagascar, Madeira (Port.), Malawi,
Mali, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte (Fr.), Morocco, Mozambique, Namibia, Niger,
For the purpose of the ATP Challenger Tour special exempt rule, a geographic region Nigeria, Reunion (Fr.), Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Senegal, Seychelles,
is defined as follows: Sierra Leone, Somalia, South Africa, Sudan, Swaziland, Tanzania, Togo, Tunisia,
Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
Region I -
Middle East -
Americas.
Armenia, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Cyprus, Gaza Strip (Israeli-occupied terr.), Geor-
This region includes the following countries: gia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Syria,
Turkiye, United Arab Emirates, West Bank (Israeli-occupied terr.),Yemen.
North America -
Canada, United States (including Hawaii) and Mexico Western Asia -
Afghanistan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Pakistan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan and
Central America and the Caribbean -
Uzbekistan.
Anguilla (UK), Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba (Neth.), Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda (UK), British Virgin Islands (UK), Cayman Islands (UK), Costa Rica, Western Russia -
Cuba, Dominica, Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Greenland (Den.), Grenada, Includes Moscow, St. Petersburg and Togliatti.
Guadeloupe (Fr.), Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Martinique
(Fr.), Montserrat (UK), Netherlands Antilles (Neth.), Nicaragua, Panama, Puerto Region III -
Rico (U.S.), St. Kitts and Nevis, St. Lucia, St.-Pierre and Miquelon (Fr.), St. Vin-
cent and the Grenadines, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos Islands (UK), Eastern part of Asia and Oceania -
Virgin Islands (U.S.).
This region includes the following countries:
South America -
Eastern Asia -
Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Falkland Islands (UK),
French Guiana (Fr.), Paraguay, Peru, Suriname, Uruguay, Venezuela. Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, China, Chinese Taipei, Guam (U.S.),
India, Indonesia, Japan, Republic of Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of Ko-
rea, Laos, Malaysia, Maldives, Mongolia, Myanmar, Nepal, Northern Mariana Is-
Region II - lands (U.S.), Palau, Philippines, Eastern Russia, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Thailand,
Vietnam.
Europe, Africa, Middle East, Western part of Russia and some Western Asia
countries. Oceania -

This region includes the following countries: American Samoa (U.S.), Australia, Cook Islands (N.Z.), Fiji, French Polynesia
(Fr.), Kiribati, Marshall Islands, Micronesia, Nauru, New Caledonia (Fr.), New
Zealand, Niue (N.Z.), Papua New Guinea, Pitcairn Islands (UK),Samoa, Solomon
Europe - Islands, Tokelau (N.Z.), Tonga, Tuvalu, Vanuatu, Wallis and Futuna (Fr.).

Albania, Andorra, Austria, Belarus, Belgium, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria,

Channel Islands (UK), Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Gibraltar (UK), Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Lat-
via, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Montene-
gro, Netherlands, F.Y.R. of Macedonia, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San
Marino, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Ukraine, United
Kingdom, Vatican City.

Africa -
Algeria, Angola, Azores (Port.), Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cam-
eroon, Canary Islands (Sp.), Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Co-
moros, Congo, Côte d ‘Ivoire, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Djibouti, Egypt,
Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Ethiopia, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guinea, Guin-

334 335
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT O - Consent and Agreement Form
3. The ITIA may conduct anti-doping testing at ATP sanctioned events under the
PLAYER’S CONSENT AND AGREEMENT TO THE ATP OFFICIAL RULEBOOK, “TADP”. ATP will honor and enforce any penalties or sanctions against me resulting
INCLUDING THE TENNIS ANTI-CORRUPTION PROGRAM & TENNIS ANTI-DOP- from the TADP. The TADP shall apply to and be binding upon me and shall gov-
ING PROGRAMME ern participation in the events specified at Article B of the TADP, which includes all
ATP-sanctioned events (including Challenger events). I hereby submit to the juris-
I, the undersigned player, acknowledge, consent and agree as follows: diction and authority of the ITIA to manage, administer and enforce the TADP on
behalf of the ITF and to the jurisdiction and authority of the Anti-Doping Tribunal
1. I will comply with and be bound by all of the provisions of the 2024 ATP OFFICIAL and the CAS to determine any charges brought under the TADP. I also hereby give
RULEBOOK, ATP Tour, Inc.’s (“ATP”) By-Laws, resolutions and regulations (the “ATP my explicit consent to (i) ATP receiving and processing my Anti-Doping results from
Rules"), including, but not limited to, all amendments to the ATP Rules. I have re- the ITIA at ATP events as well as other Covered Events (as defined in the TADP),
ceived and had an opportunity to review the ATP Rules and any and all Covid-19 including information relating to any alleged Whereabouts Failures (i.e. Missed Tests
policies and protocols, as amended from time to time and/or Filing Failures) on my part, as well as notice of any charges brought against
me under the TADP and (ii) keeping ATP informed thereafter of the progress of such
2. I am bound by and will comply with the Tennis Anti-Corruption Program (the “TACP”), alleged Whereabouts Failures/charges in accordance with the TADP.
a copy of which can be found at the following website: https://www.itia.tennis/tacp/
rules. I acknowledge that I have had the opportunity to review the TACP and that I 4. Any dispute arising out of any decision made by the Anti-Doping Tribunal, or any dis-
understand, accept and agree not to violate any of the provisions therein. I acknowl- pute arising under or in connection with the TADP, after exhaustion of the TADP’s An-
edge that I have a duty to inform my Related Persons (as defined in the TACP) of the ti-Doping Tribunal process and any other proceedings expressly provided for in the
provisions of the TACP and to instruct them to comply with the TACP. I accept that I TADP, shall be submitted exclusively to the Appeals Arbitration Division of the CAS
must complete any Tennis Integrity education programs mandated by the ATP Tour. for final and binding arbitration in accordance with Article O of the TADP and CAS’s
The TACP prohibits certain conduct by me and my Related Persons, including, but Code of Sports-Related Arbitration. The decisions of CAS shall be final, non-review-
not limited to, (i) wagering on the outcome or any other aspect of any tennis match, able, non-appealable and enforceable. I agree that I will not bring any claim, arbitra-
(ii) contriving or attempting to contrive the outcome or any other aspect of any tennis tion, lawsuit or litigation in any other court or tribunal. The time limit for any submis-
match, (iii) receiving or providing consideration in exchange for Inside Information sion to CAS shall be 21 days after the decision of the Anti-Doping Tribunal has been
(as defined in the TACP), (iv) facilitating, encouraging or promoting any other person communicated to me.
to wager on the outcome or any other aspect of a tennis match, (v) associating with
any Related Person who is serving any period of ineligibility under the TACP or has 5. Any dispute between or among the ATP and me arising out of the application of any
been convicted or found in criminal, disciplinary or professional proceedings to have provision of the 2024 ATP Official Rulebook which is not finally resolved by applica-
engaged in conduct which would have constituted a Corruption Offense if the TACP ble provisions of such Rulebook shall be submitted exclusively to CAS for final and
had applied to them and (vi) failing to report any knowledge I may have regarding binding arbitration in accordance with CAS’s Code of Sports-Related Arbitration. The
potential violations of the TACP. I acknowledge that I have an obligation to report any decision of CAS in that arbitration shall be final, non-reviewable and enforceable. No
approaches that I may receive and any known or suspected offenses by others as claim, arbitration, lawsuit or litigation concerning the dispute shall be brought in any
soon as possible. I accept that I must cooperate fully with investigations and shall not other court or tribunal. Any request for CAS arbitration shall be filed with CAS within
tamper with or destroy any evidence. I hereby submit to the jurisdiction and authority 21 days of any action by the ATP which is the subject of the dispute. In the event any
of the International Tennis Integrity Agency (the “ITIA”) to manage, administer and provision of this clause is determined invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-
enforce the TACP and to the jurisdiction and authority of the ITIA, Anti-Corruption sions shall not be affected. This clause shall not fail because any part of the rule is
Hearing Officer (“AHO”) and the Court of Arbitration for Sport (“CAS”), as applicable, held invalid.
to determine any charges brought under the TACP. I acknowledge that the TACP con-
tains an agreement to arbitrate disputes in accordance with the process described in 6. I acknowledge the Notice of Privacy Practices and Consent is set forth in the ATP
the TACP and I am bound by the TACP until the earlier of (i) the date of my valid re- Rulebook and is available online at https://www.atppz.com. I understand that the
tirement in accordance with the requirements of the Tennis Anti-Doping Programme GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation) Privacy Notice is available at this same
(the “TADP”), a copy of which is available online at https://www.itia.tennis/tadp/rules/, site under PlayerZone Terms & Conditions. I also acknowledge that I have reviewed
or (ii) two years after the last Event (as defined in the TACP) in which I enter or par- these notices and agree to the terms and conditions contained therein.
ticipate, unless, at either such time, (a) I am subject to a period of ineligibility under
either the TACP or TADP (in which case I will cease to be bound by the TADP upon 7. For Members who are competing on the ATP Tour or ATP Challenger Tour: I acknowl-
the conclusion of my period of ineligibility), or (b) I am aware that I am the subject edge that at least every two years a completed Competition Clearance form signed
of an investigation by the ITIA or law enforcement (in which case I will cease to be by a physician licensed to practice medicine in the jurisdiction where such physician
bound by the TACP when such investigation is closed, or after 10 years, whichever is practices medicine, must be submitted before players are permitted to participate
earlier). Nothing in this paragraph 2 shall modify or limit the full text of the TACP. in ATP activities. I also acknowledge that should my physician not deem me fit to
participate, and I choose to do so regardless, I will not be permitted to compete
without signing the Release and Hold Harmless form. Finally, I explicitly consent to

336 337
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
the release of my medical information included on the Competition Clearance form to
EXHIBIT P - Privacy Notice (“HIPAA”)
authorized medical personnel at any ATP tournament that I participate in, which may
be required for treatment purposes.
NOTICE OF PRIVACY PRACTICES AND CONSENT
8. I have read and understand the foregoing Player’s Consent and Agreement.
This notice is being provided in connection with the Health Insurance Portability and
Accountability Act of 1996 (“HIPAA”). Although ATP is not bound to comply with all
aspects of HIPAA, ATP is committed to making sure that players are aware of the
manner in which personal health information will be used, maintained and released.
Date Print Player’s Name (Last Name, First Name)
THIS NOTICE DESCRIBES HOW THE ATP TOUR (the “ATP”; FOR THE PUR-
POSES OF THIS EXHIBIT, INCLUDED IN THE DEFINITION OF “ATP” SHALL BE
NON-ATP EMPLOYED STAFF AT CHALLENGER TOURNAMENTS WHO PRO-
Player’s Date of Birth Player’s Signature and
VIDE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE) MAY USE AND DISCLOSE YOUR MEDICAL IN-
(Day/Month/year)
FORMATION, AND HOW YOU CAN GAIN ACCESS TO YOUR PERSONAL AND
PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (“PHI”); PLEASE REVIEW CAREFULLY.

ATP is committed to maintaining the confidentiality of your PHI, in accordance with

Place of Birth If player is a minor, signature of player’s
applicable federal and applicable state privacy laws, as well as our own company
parent or guardian
privacy policies. This notice describes how we may use and disclose your PHI and
explains your legal rights regarding PHI. This notice also describes certain risks as-
sociated with Players and others utilizing a Physiotherapist Treatment Room or other
Player’s Nationality facility.

When we use the term “PHI”, we mean information about you, including any health
care payment, medical or demographic information that can reasonably be used to
identify you and relates to your medical history. This includes, but is not limited to,
injuries, illnesses, sickness, diseases, health care providers and laboratory and other
test results.

This notice is effective on January 1, 2010. The terms of this notice apply to all
records containing your PHI that are created or retained by ATP. We reserve the
right to revise or amend this notice. Any revision or amendment to this notice will be
effective for all of your records that ATP has created or maintained in the past, and for
any of your records that ATP may create or maintain in the future. You will find this
and any revised or amended notices posted at ATP’s offices in Ponte Vedra Beach,
Florida in a visible location, as well as on the PlayerZone website located at: https://
atp-playerzone.com.

HOW ATP MAY USE AND DISCLOSE YOUR PHI

In order to provide you with certain health and other services, we may create or
receive PHI relating to you. In coordinating and administering services, we may use
and disclose your PHI in various ways, including:
1) Treatment. ATP may use your PHI to assist in your treatment by providers. For
example, a Physiotherapist or the medical director of a tournament may access
your PHI to understand and better treat your condition.
2) Health Care Operations. We may use and disclose PHI during the course of
managing our business. For example, we may use your PHI to internally evalu-
ate the quality of care that you received, to conduct internal company audits, for

338 339
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
data information systems management, to conduct company cost management
YOUR LEGAL RIGHTS REGARDING PHI
assessments, for evaluations and for general business planning purposes.
HIPAA gives you certain rights with respect to your PHI. You have the right to:
3) Payment. Your PHI may be requested by a third party for billing purposes, with
regard to services provided to you, to conduct utilization and medical necessity • Ask us to communicate with you in a certain way or at a certain location. We
reviews, to coordinate care with your health care insurance company or carrier, to will accommodate reasonable requests.
calculate cost sharing amounts, and to respond to audits or reviews by federal or • Request that we restrict the way we use or disclose your PHI in connection
state government agencies, insurance companies or carriers. with health care operations, payment and treatment. We will consider, but
may not agree to, such requests. You also have the right to ask us to restrict
4) Qualified Service Organizations and Business Associates. We may share disclosures to persons involved in your health care.
your PHI with qualified service organizations, national federations or business • Obtain a copy of certain portions of your PHI, subject to applicable federal,
associates who provide services to ATP. In each case, these entities will have state and local laws, rules and regulations. We may ask you to make your
agreements with us to safeguard and keep confidential your PHI. We will only request in writing, may charge a reasonable fee for producing and mailing the
share the minimum PHI necessary for these entities to carry out their duties to copies, and in certain cases may deny the request.
ATP. • Amend PHI that you believe to be incorrect. Your request must be in writing
5) Patient Information Purposes. We may use your PHI to inform you about po- and must include the reason for the request. If we deny the request, you may
tential treatment alternatives or options, and to notify you of other health related file a written statement of disagreement.
benefits and services that may be of interest to you. • Have us provide you with a list of certain disclosures of PHI we have made
about you. Your request must be in writing. If you request such an account-
6) Disclosures in Accordance with Florida Law, Required by Law and Govern-
ing more than once in a twelve month period, we may charge a reasonable
ing Law.
fee.
By signing the Player’s Consent and Agreement to the ATP Official Rulebook, you • File a complaint if you think your privacy rights have been violated. You will
are agreeing that, for purposes of medical consent and release of records, the not be penalized or retaliated against for filing a complaint. To file a com-
laws of the State of Florida shall govern. Certain disclosures of your PHI may plaint, you must contact the United States Department of Health and Human
be required by laws. These include, but are not limited to: (A) reports to feder- Services, Office of Civil Rights. For more information about how to file a
al, state or local law enforcement in connection with crime or threats to commit complaint, please visit www.hhs.gov/ocr/hipaa.
crime; (B) reports to appropriate state agencies in connection with reporting By signing the Player’s Consent and Agreement to the ATP Official Rulebook, you
child abuse or neglect; (C) reports in connection with medical emergencies, for acknowledge that any health information that is disclosed in accordance with this
the purpose of treating conditions which pose an immediate threat to the health authorization form might be redisclosed by the recipient of that information and
of any individual or which require immediate medical attention; (D) reports in may no longer be protected by federal health care privacy laws and rules.
response to court orders, if you are involved in a lawsuit or similar proceeding,
If you have questions regarding your PHI, confidentiality of your PHI, or this No-
or in response to a subpoena if you give us written authorization to release your
tice, please contact:
PHI; (E) reports in connection with public health risk management (e.g., reporting
of adverse drug reactions, notifications for recalled products or devices, required ATP Tour, Inc.
reports for certain diseases).
Attn: Player Relations Department
7) Serious Threats to Health or Safety. We may disclose your PHI as necessary
201 ATP Tour Blvd
to reduce or prevent a serious threat to your health and safety, or the health and
safety of another individual or the public. Under these circumstances, we will Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida 32082
only make disclosures to such persons or organizations able to help prevent such
threat.
GENERAL PRIVACY CONSIDERATIONS RELATING TO PHYSIOTHERAPIST
In all other situations, we will ask for your written authorization before disclosing ROOMS AND TREATMENT ROOMS
your PHI. If you have given us an authorization, you may revoke it at any time, if
we have not already acted on it. Revocation of consent is effective upon receipt
of written notice, mailed via certified mail, return receipt requested and addressed This notice also is intended to remind you that the ATP Physiotherapist and/or
to Chief Player Officer, 201 ATP Tour Boulevard, Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida Treatment Rooms provided at the Tournaments are not designated as a private
32082, with a copy (sent certified mail, return receipt requested) to Jeffrey T. Reel, area. Should you choose to receive treatment there, or discuss confidential infor-
201 ATP Tour Boulevard, Ponte Vedra Beach, Florida 32082. Revocation of this mation (health or otherwise), it is possible that this information may be overheard
consent does not affect the validity of any prior use or disclosure of your PHI. You by individuals that have no obligation to refrain from further disclosure of such
further understand that your right to revoke this authorization shall not serve to information. Access to these areas is not limited to ATP personnel. Players are
excuse any failure by you to comply with the provisions of the ATP Tour Official reminded of their duties and obligations arising from the ATP Rules and Anti-Co-
Rule Book covering your affiliation with ATP Tour, or any other rule or agreement
that may govern the terms and condition of your participation in tournaments.
340 341
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
ercion Policy. The information discussed, as well as photographic images also EXHIBIT Q - Player Food Service
may be intercepted by electronic surveillance devices including but not limited to Recommendations for Player Food Service Planning
digital and other cameras, video cameras, cellular telephones and personal data
devices. Neither the Tournament nor ATP is responsible for the unauthorized A. Player food should be prepared simply, with few sauces or spices. The following is a
capturing of any PHI or other personal/confidential information or the subsequent list of recommended food groups:
disclosure of the same.
1) Carbohydrates
Should you wish to ensure the confidential nature of health or other information,
we encourage you to receive treatment in a secure environment of your choosing. a) Breads and Starches
Assorted multi-grain breads and rolls, bagels, crackers, low-sugar cereals,
pasta (with all sauces on the side), baked (white and sweet) potatoes (with
selection of toppings) and rice (preferably brown or wild).
b) Fruits and Vegetables
Assorted fresh fruit salad, dried fruits, whole fresh fruits, and fresh cut raw
vegetables. Salad bar: tomatoes, potatoes, lettuce (variety), cucumbers,
sprouts, mushrooms, carrots, peas, beans, etc. with oil and vinegar-based
dressings on the side.
2) Proteins
Chicken (white meat), turkey (white meat), fish (assorted variety), soft low-fat
cheeses, low fat cottage cheese, low fat yogurt, hard-boiled eggs, tofu, non-
fat milk. Additional recommendations are soy milk and assorted nuts.
3) Miscellaneous
a) Broth-based soups, (e.g., minestrone, chicken noodle, vegetable).
b) All sauces should be served on the side (in a warmer if necessary).
c) Low-fat cooking methods should be used (baked, broiled and roasted, with
limited butter and oils).
d) Seasonings should be light; offer extra salt, pepper, garlic, etc. on the side.
B. Daily Meal Planning
1) When providing meals, a variety of food choices are preferred on a daily basis.
2) In addition to daily meals, snacks should be provided throughout the day and eve-
ning (e.g., fruits, breads and rolls, cheeses, yogurts, nuts, crackers and raisins,
etc.).
3) If morning practices and matches are played, breakfast items should also be
available (e.g., cold cereals, bagels and breads, yogurt, fruit).
4) Suggested lunch and dinner menus should include Carbohydrates (bread/pasta/
potatoes/rice) and at least two (2) protein selections (one [1] chicken and the
other fish, meat, turkey, tofu or other vegetarian protein option).
5) Practice hours and match schedule will determine when meals and/or snacks are
served. Allow for during playing hours, and up until the last match has gone on
court.
6) Each tournament may contact the ATP Medical Services Department for menu
recommendations and/or review.

342 343
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT R - Media Facilities Guidelines EXHIBIT S - Electronic Line Calling Facilities Guidelines
A. Media working area
A The ELC booth must be located in direct line of sight to the court, in order to provide
1) Adequate workspace for all credentialed media an unobstructed view of the court. It should preferably be at the back (North or South
end) of the court when possible.
2) High speed internet access *
3) Telephone line B. The Review Official must have a full view of the whole court and Line Umpires.
4) Power supply C. The booth must have direct audio from the Chair Umpire’s microphone (not from the
5) High capacity copier Television feed).
6) Access to a fax machine D. The Review Official should be able to hear the Line Umpire calls from the court. If the
7) Smoke free CU microphone does not provide sufficient volume of court sounds, then a separate
microphone and speaker must be installed to allow the Review Official to clearly hear
8) Lock boxes or lockers that can be used to store valuables
all court sounds, including Line Umpire calls.
9) Security
E. The booth must have room for five (5) persons plus equipment (minimum of 25 sq.
B. Photographer workstation with internet and telephone access meters (82 sq. feet) with a minimum court frontage of 5 meters (16.5 feet) as required
by ELC vendor.
C Separate, sound proof interview room
1) 1 person running the system.
D. Separate media lounge, where appropriate 2) 1 person dedicated to the Official Review process.

E. Credentials 3) 1 person dedicated to the television send.

1) All media must be credentialed. 4) 1 additional staff of the vendor.

i) Proof of identity must be presented prior to receiving credential. 5) 1 Review Official for each match - designated by ATP.
ii) Credentials must include photo.
F. The booth should have full air conditioning for equipment and personnel, unless tech-
iii) Credential must include the provisions set forth in Rule 6.21.
nically unable to do so, and approved by ATP/WTA and the vendor.
2) Credentials limited to members of the working press only.
i) Journalists known to be working for online gambling companies shall not G. Access to the booth must be reasonably easy and safe.
be issued credentials. If found to be working for an online gambling com-
pany after issue of the credential, the credential shall be revoked. H. Tables, chairs and high stools must be provided as requested by the ELC team.
ii) Persons who are known to work for data re-sellers shall not be issued
credentials. If found to be working for a data re-seller after issue of the
credential, the credential shall be revoked.
3) Working area, lounge and interview room must be secured with access provided
only to properly credentialed media, players (interview room) and other tourna-
ment and ATP Staff when in the performance of their duties.
4) Members of the International Tennis Writers Association (ITWA) shall be given
preferred status for workspace and court side seating.
* Tournaments are recommended to use web filtering technology to restrict
access to internet gambling sites in all areas where tournament provided in-
ternet access is provided.

344 345
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT T - Review Officials Duties and Procedures for the ELC EXHIBIT T.1 - Review Electronic Line Calling System (Review
Systems ELC)
• The ELC Review Official (RO) shall be designated by the governing body respon- A Line calling system with a challenge process (Line Umpires on-court)
sible for the Tournament
• Attend all mandatory official’s meetings and requested training Review ELC Official (RO) Protocol
• RO team leader (Lead RO) should be appointed at the beginning of the event.
• RO shall be in direct communication with the CU.
• RO’s will work on a rotation basis, the schedule will be made by the Lead RO.
• Most desirable method is a direct talk box with a “push to talk” button. The alterna-
• In the case of a temporary RO in the booth the designated RO is responsible to
tive is dedicated walkie-talkie.
make sure that the temporary RO is aware of all the local set up and booth proce-
• If using a computer to record the challenges load proper match into it.
dures specific to that event.
• On all “potential” review impacts – Make sure you listen to the CU announcement
• Prior to the start of the ELC system on any court, during the Chair Umpire (CU)
(which line and call made) – if in any doubt radio the CU to double-check. For
meeting, be responsible to inform the CU’s about:
additional information, see Review Official Protocol for a Challengeable shot
o On site booth set up
• Alert system operators to a possible Challenge by announcing “STANDBY” Con-
o Location
firm that a Challenge has been requested or anticipate that there will be no Chal-
o Conditions
lenge. “Release to television” announcement establishes the time when the video
o Type of communication with ELC Staff and TV.
may be sent the television.
• Organize ahead of time walkie-talkies with a dedicated channel for each court that
• This applies to when either the RO determines that a Challenge will not be made
is in use for each day. This can be done through the tournament supervisor or
or cannot be made. A visual indication that the player has accepted the call and a
referee and the channels must be clear and not used by anyone else.
Challenge is not likely. Circumstances when a Challenge cannot be made would
• If there are any issues during the match, the CU should speak directly with the RO
include an improper Challenge (not a point-ending shot) or when the player has no
who was in the booth at the time and that RO should inform the Lead RO about the
Challenges remaining. Responsible for determining that the requested impact is
situation.
available for review.
• Any general ELC issues, or personal) matters should be discussed with Lead RO.
• RO is responsible to send the correct shot and correct line to the videoboard for
• RO to record any issues with the system, scoreboards, radios etc. and provide all
the Challenge. The RO must listen to the CU announcement (which line was chal-
the information to the final event wrap up.
lenged). And double-check if the correct ball is requested. If any doubt, confirm
• Any issues that arise should be communicated immediately to the Supervisor by
with the CU before sending to the board.
the RO Team Leader.
• Once the proper impact is determined, gives the order to send to video board and
• On the final day of the tournament, the Lead RO should send a report to the Su-
television simultaneously. The On- Court Board should be sent first if 2 different
pervisor detailing any major issues and areas for improvement.
inputs need to be sent.
• Be ready in the ELC Booth 20 minutes prior to the start of the 1st match
• Responsible for monitoring the status of the system.
• Wear appropriate uniform as per tournament regulations.
• If the system crashes or is not functioning, the RO must immediately notify the CU
• The RO should not leave their position until they have been replaced by the next
so that the players may be informed that no review is available until further notice.
RO. All necessary information and situations should be reported in full to the re-
• If the RO’s monitor cannot retrieve the data to review the call, then the RO shall
placing RO. This change should only occur during a changeover or at a set break.
notify the CU that the original call shall stand.
• Any issues should be reported immediately after the shift or between matches
• If the RO’s monitor is working properly but it is the Main Video Board (in-stadium
using the designated online form.
video) that is malfunctioning, then the RO will notify the CU of the decision via
• RO assigned on first match of the day is responsible to bring all the needed equip-
radio or other communication device. The CU should inform the players of this at
ment (walkie talkie, report paperwork if needed etc.), and the one assigned to the
the first opportunity.
last match is responsible to return and charge walkie talkie and any other equip-
• Will notify the CU when the system is back and available for review (if the RO is
ment.
satisfied that the cause has been identified and corrected).
• The RO is prohibited from using the internet while matches are in progress.
• The RO shall notify the CU at the first available time, including during a game in
• No electronic devices shall be used by the RO in the booth unless approved by
progress. Before returning to “live” mode:
the tournament during matches in progress. This includes personal smartphones,
• Ensure that the operators have performed all their protocols when returning a sys-
smartwatches and personal tablets/laptops. The RO is prohibited from emailing,
tem to “go” status following a crash or restart of the system.
messaging or texting in any form while they are on duty in the booth and the match
• Act as the final authority on the number of Challenges remaining for each player or
is in progress.
team.
• Officials are prohibited from talking to media unless the interview has been ap-
• Since available Challenges will be displayed on the video board, the RO is respon-
proved by the Supervisor.
sible for the correct number of the Challenges to be displayed (including the addi-
• The RO has to abide by all the Rules and procedure of the Body Government and
tional Challenges in a tie-break or re-setting after the set break). If the video board
follow the code of Conduct, the TUI rules and procedure for officials
operator is changing the Challenges on cue from the CU, then only verification is
• Any violation of this policy could be considered a breach of the code of conduct for
needed.
Officials.
346 347
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
• If a Challenged call is not available for review – this shall not count against the
Announcing
total of the challenging player.
• Ensure that the RO and CU communicate verbally when one player or team has Chair Umpire
only 1 and no (0) Challenges remaining.
• Ensure that communication between RO and CU regarding the number of Chal- When a Challenge is made:
lenges is made in a timely manner and considering pace of the match. • The Player shall clearly express their desire to have the call reviewed by stating, “I
Challenge”. If the CU is not 100% sure that the Player is Challenging, then the CU
shall confirm with the Player prior to announcing the Challenge request. When the
Video Board CU is satisfied that a proper Challenge request has been made, then:
• During the warm-up, the following statement shall appear on the video board o CU shall announce over the microphone “Mr./Ms. _______ is Challenging the
and remain visible for at least 90 seconds. This should coincide with the An- call on the Base Line (give specific line) the ball was called IN/OUT”.
nouncer’s introductions (if an announcer is used). • After the review, CU should announce “The call stands, or the call is overturned.
“This match will use Electronic Review as an officiating aid. Each player (team) Then announce the score if point is awarded or replay the point and then repeat
will have three incorrect Challenges per set, plus one more in a tiebreak. Chal- the previous score. Depending on the timing, try to also announce “Mr./Ms. X has
lenges must be made in a timely manner and can only be made on point-ending X Challenges remaining” when there is a reduction.
shots or when a player stops play. If, for any reason, Electronic Review of the • If the review is not available, simply say (after informing the players) “Review is
call is unavailable, the original call will stand.” unavailable; the original call of IN/OUT stands. No Challenge is charged to Mr./Ms.
• There shall not be any review shown in the Stadium except for “Official Review” _______.”
challenges. The RO is responsible for the correct communication with the oper- • In the case where the line umpire is unsighted and the CU cannot make the call,
ators. if the umpire asks for a review then he shall inform the crowd of this procedure by
• The in-stadium video shall not replay “live” action on any controversial or re- stating, “line umpire was unsighted – the call shall be reviewed”.
viewed call. • Announce the additional Challenges available at the start of each tiebreak.
• If video replays are shown between points or if the video goes live between • After announcing 6-games all – tie-break, announce “Both players/teams receive
points, the operator shall return to the scoreboard just prior to the serving player one additional Challenge.”
taking his position at the baseline. • If there are no in-Stadium Video Boards or if there is a malfunction and they are not
• Once it is confirmed that a Challenge has been made: available for use, then the CU shall use the following procedures:
- The RO shall have direct communication with the operator of the video o The RO will communicate the result of the Challenge to the CU via the ra-
board and will give verbal instructions on when to show review. dio, using the following wording: “Call Challenged by [name of player] on the
- When the RO has confirmed the impact-image is correct then the RO [name of the line]: the ball is IN/OUT”.
gives the order to send the result to board or if the RO has control of the o The CU will acknowledge the good reception of the information by immedi-
board then sends the result personally. When sending Challenge to the ately answering the RO using the following wording: “The result of the chal-
board, make sure to check that what is displayed on the stadium score- lenged call on the [name of the line] is IN/OUT”.
board is the same (same line) that was confirmed with the operator and o If the review is not available, simply say (after informing the players) “Review
was challenged. is unavailable; the call (in/out) stands”.
- Video shows the tracking of the ball into and out of the impact area, and • In the event the video screen shows the mark OUT and the “IN/OUT” text graphic
then the view angle is moved to show the impact mark. The “flyover” mode shows IN or the video screen shows the mark IN and the “IN/OUT” text graphic
is used to slow the process down “to build the moment”. shows OUT, the protocol is as follows:
• Graphic includes “Official Review”. o The mark determines IN / OUT not the text graphic.
• Graphic at bottom of the screen shows “IN” or “OUT”. The “in” / “out” will not o The CU should communicate with the RO to ensure that is correct.
appear until after the overhead zoom to enhance the drama of the video. Tele- o The corrected text graphic should be displayed on the big screen, so players,
vision will receive the exact same feed as the video board with the graphic officials and spectators see the corrected mistake.
“OFFICIAL REVIEW” and showing “IN” or “OUT”.
Additional REVIEW ELC procedures Specifically for Hawk Eye
• If review is not available, the RO shall notify the CU and then while the CU is
informing the players, the graphic “Review Not Available - Original Call Stands” • The RO will instruct the Hawkeye Operator that when the command “Stand By”
shall be sent to the video board. Reviews not available shall not count against is given, the operator will immediately say if the ball is “in” or “out” and give the
the challenging players’ total. measurement.
- The graphic is held until the players have reached the baselines preparing • Confirm specifically with the VR Operator that:
to play, at which time the board returns to the main scoreboard view. o The system is set for the appropriate event (singles or doubles)
- The video board(s), scoreboard(s) or other location(s) must always show • During warm-up, view at least one (1) test review.
number of remaining Challenges for each player. This information must be • At 1 min. announcement, confirm with the System Operator and the VR Operator
part of the scoreboard build. that all systems are good to go.

348 349
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
• To ensure the number of Challenges for each player is correct.
• In doubles, when the score reaches “Deuce” – deciding point, tell the Hawkeye
• When there is a Challenge press the button START CHALLENGE.
Operator if the receiver will be from the “Deuce” or “Advantage” side.
• Before sending the Challenge to the video board double-check that the distance 2. When the RO presses START CHALLENGE the RO will see (WAITING FOR DATA)
and the decision “IN” or “OUT” given by the Hawk eye operator is corresponding
• If DATA is displayed go to point 3,
with the image on the RO screen (serve, rally, singles, doubles etc.)
• if DATA NOT AVAILABLE is displayed, go to Point 8
Additional REVIEW ELC Procedures Specifically for FoxTenn 3. If DATA is received the RO will have to choose the ball, which the RO can do in 2
In general, the role of the RO when working with FoxTenn is the same but there are ways:
some differences, which are going to be mentioned here.
• Press the dot with the number on the court (after the dot is pressed it will become
red), or
Pre-match:
• Press the number at the bottom of the screen (yellow balls above “CHOOSE
• Check with the Operator that they have calibrated the lines for the appropriate BALL” writing)
event – singles or doubles.
• During the warmup look at one image of the ball to make sure the system is ready. 4. After choosing the ball, the RO needs to double-check if the RO has chosen the
• When the match starts: correct ball and CONFIRM BALL
• When giving “Standby”, the RO must also give the exact line. So, for example:
“Standby –left near sideline”. 5. Next step is to confirm/change the area (darker grey color) to the correct area
• For FoxTenn it’s very important to give the “Standby” as soon as possible because • If it is a serve, then one of the service boxes should be in darker color – if it’s incor-
they must capture the image immediately to avoid long delays. So, the RO should rect, touch the screen to change the box
be giving more “Standby” commands. Give the “Standby” every time if there is any • If it is a rally, the whole half of the court (singles/doubles) should be in a darker
chance there will be a Challenge. color.
• When the Challenge is made the RO will be looking at the live image and needs to
confirm the bounce on the live image. There will be no numbers on the screen, so 6. When the RO confirms the area, the RO will see the screen with the information:
it’s IMPERATIVE that the RO watch the match all the time to know which bounce “WAITING FOR RESULT” If NO SHOTS WERE RECEIVED go to point 8.
it is.
• When the VR operator says “ready”, the RO should have graphic image of the 7. After the RO receives the result the RO will have to PREVIEW the Challenge – if
mark on the RO’s screen with the decision “in” or “out” written. Then the RO can everything is good and correct, press: START ANIMATION (system won’t let the RO
send the Challenge to the video board. send the Challenge to the board before the RO previews the Challenge)
• When the Challenge is shown on the video board there are two images shown: the
8. At point 2 or 6 the RO might receive the screen with the information “NO DATA RE-
live image of the ball and graphic image of the mark with the decision “in” or “out”.
CEIVED” or “NO SHOTS WERE RECEIVED”
There may be instances when only one of those two images will be shown.
• Do not “Release” the Challenge too early. It’s better to hold it longer, until the RO is • If “NO SHOTS WERE RECEIVED”, the procedure is to ask the operator: “Do you
100% sure there will be no Challenge, or the next point is about to start. If the RO have it?”
has a Challenge after it was released, it will cause a longer delay. o YES –the operator will input the rally from their computer to the tablet or
• There will be no distances given from FoxTenn, only “in” or “out”. o NEED MORE TIME – the operator will look for the rally and input it to the
• As FoxTenn operates differently than Hawkeye, there is no option to look at some tablet or
of the close balls from the points played, so, do not ask for that. • In both cases the RO needs to go back to the original procedure – DATA
• IMPORTANT to remember LANGUAGE to use: available Point 2/ SHOT available Point 7)
o STAND BY and the line (ex. STAND BY LEFT BASE) • NO – ORIGINAL CALL STANDS (the RO presses the red button located under
o WORK ON IT (when it’s not sure if the ball will be Challenged) match time in the right top corner), see below
• The CU’s chair is shown in a different position based on which camera is in use,
but the ORIENTATION POINT IS ALWAYS the CU’s chair, so, left base will always IMPORTANT INFORMATION:
be left base in relation to the CU’s chair, regardless of what side of the screen the
chair is located at that particular Challenge. 1. Any time that the RO presses the button START CHALLENGE the system is
LOCKED and is not recording anything further, the RO has buttons that can be used
Additional REVIEW ELC Procedures Specifically for FlightScope in case a Challenge is not happening or has been cancelled:
At the beginning of the match Remember to check the
• If “WAITING FOR DATA” or “WAITING FOR RESULT” press DISMISS
1. INITIAL SCREEN • In any other case press RELEASE (located in the bottom right corner)
• To ensure the correct match is loaded NOTE: It is very important to DISMISS/RELEASE as soon as it is known that there
• To ensure the player names are at the correct side of the court (after the coin toss) won’t be a Challenge to have the system fully functioning.

350 351
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
2. Another button that the RO can see is BACK – it can be used to go one step back at Review Official Protocol for Challengeable Shot
the time.

3. In point 7 the RO sees the button REPLAY – which can be used to replay the preview
Review Official Protocol for Challengeable Shot
of the Challenge as many times as needed before the RO START ANIMATION.

4. In point 3-5 two buttons can be seen - PREVIOUS and NEXT – this is the option to
see all the bounces (long rally) as on the RO’s screen when the RO presses START CLOSE CALL
CHALLENGE the RO will see the last 5 bounces – It is strongly recommended
NOT TO USE these buttons unless necessary (there should be no reason to allow
the Challenge of the ball that is 5 shots or more back).

Player Looks Interested

This system is provided by FlightScope, who at some events is also providing other
services (e.g. Scoreboards). Player Not Interested
At some events whenever the RO presses START ANIMATION it will go directly to the
scoreboard and will automatically go off-board when the animation is finished (the RO
“STANDBY”
will have the option to press the button OFF BOARD-located in the bottom left corner-
earlier if needed). (Both TV operator and video board
SAY NOTHING operator are alerted to potential review)
If FlightScope is not operating the scoreboards there will be an extra step when the
(TV Replay operator knows he can give TV
RO releases it, the Challenge will be sent to the vendor who will be responsible to the image)
send to the board.

Player Decides Not to Challenge Player Challenges

“Release to Television”
Get Confirmation That Video
(TV operator is now free to give image to Review is Ready
television – imperative that R.O. give this
command as soon as it is felt that there will (Confirms shot to be reviewed and that it is
not be a challenge) cued for display)

Hand Signals
(in case verbal communication fails)

 Throat Slash: system down

 Arms in X position: Booth “Send to Video Board”
communication is down
 Thumbs up: Review system (Video Board control is given to review booth
functioning properly for display)

352 353
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
o Manual System: The system works the same as above except the close calls
EXHIBIT T.2 - Live Electronic Line Calling System (LIVE ELC)
do not go automatically to the board. The RO is responsible for sending close
A line calling system making automated line calls with no Line Umpires on-court. calls to the board and taking them off again. Normally this is done simply with
LIVE ELC Review Official Procedures and Protocols the press of a button.
Note: Close calls between first and second serves that can disturb play should
The players do not have any challenges when using the LIVE ELC and therefore the not be sent to the board by the RO.
RO duties are different than when using the REVIEW ELC system. • If a player wants to see a replay of a shot outside of this range (150mm & 50mm)
the CU should announce “Mr./Mrs. (players name) is requesting the replay of the
Review Booth Procedures
call on the (line)” to alert the RO and the operator. Play must not continue until the
• Prior to the first match of the day, confirm with the System operators that all sound replay has been shown on the board.
and system checks have been completed, if not please request a sound and sys- • If it is suspected that the LIVE ELC System malfunctioned or failed to decide on a
tem check. call this call may be made by the CU. This protocol will only apply on point ending
• Communication to the CU should be limited to essential communication as live shots or when a player stops play.
microphones are on court. • The CU should communicate with the RO to confirm if the system was able to
• Confirm that close calls have been tested and sent to the board. decide.
Note: The RO should not do sound checks or close call checks to the board upon • If the RO can confirm the ball is “in” or “out” then the CU should acknowledge the
arrival in the booth other than prior to the first match. This will disturb the pro- result and inform the players.
duction of the event and could be heard on television broadcast which should be • If the system is not available and the CU is unable to make a call, the point should
avoided. If any issue, it is always suggested to do an extra check if possible. be replayed.
• Confirm specifically the system is: • There is sometimes a slight delay on the “out” call. This can in some situations
o Set for the right event singles/doubles. If singles confirm regular scoring is create confusion and if this happens the CU might contact the RO. The RO should
activated. If doubles confirm no-ad scoring is activated. confirm the outcome of the call.
o At 1 min in the warmup confirm system is armed and ready to go. • If play continues after the Electronic Line Calling Live System has determined a
• Perform a radio test with the CU during the warm-up to make sure the CU’s radio ball is out, the RO should deploy the Stop Play Protocol from the booth by pressing
is on and to find out who is serving first. the stop play button triggering an audible “Stop, Stop” announcement on court.
The RO should communicate the explanation of the out call to the CU and the CU
o Inform the Operator who is serving first and from which end of the court.
should inform the players of the decision by the system.
• The RO has a monitor that will show 3 camera angles. The camera should be set
Note: This can happen for a number of reasons, players and CU did not hear the
to watch the server and it is the responsibility of the RO to call foot faults if they
audio out call, the audio out call failed, the operator has stopped the point too early
occur.
effectively disarming the system so there is no audio call.
o Foot fault cameras are available for center serve and the base line on both • The RO has the responsibility of making sure that the correct service box is
ends. To toggle between each end, use the F1 and F2 keys on the keyboard. selected by the operator at the start of every point. A view of the court should be
The CU is responsible for calling sideline foot faults. visible on the ROs screen with a highlighted service box. The highlighted service
o If a foot fault occurs press the foot fault button making sure to wait until the box indicates the “active” box to which the system shall decide if the serve is in or
player has struck the ball. This will make an audible “foot fault” call over the out. On any match where the “no-ad” scoring system is being used when the score
speakers. reaches “deuce” the RO should inform the operator if they will be serving to the
• If any foot fault camera becomes inoperable either by loss of video or it is knocked deuce or advantage court.
the RO should inform the operating staff so they can send someone down to fix it. If o If the RO sees, for any reason, that the wrong box is highlighted before the
the RO can still call foot faults using the other cameras they should continue to do start of the point, they should immediately tell the operator to change to the
so. If ALL cameras lose video or the foot fault camera PC crashes, the RO should correct box before the serve is hit.
communicate this with the CU and inform them they will need to call foot faults Note: It is very important to always keep a close eye on the service box selection
from the chair until the cameras are operational again. Once cameras resume by the operator especially if anything odd or unusual happens during the point.
operation, inform the CU that the RO can start calling foot faults again. Let 1st serves, let 2nd serves, let replay the point, touch, are just a few unusual
• Close calls will be shown on the board in one of two ways depending on system situations where the operator may not be aware of what has happened and may
set up. Automatically or Manually. have the incorrect score and therefore the incorrect service box highlighted.
o Automatic System: Automatic replays of close calls will be shown on the vid- • On “let” serves repeat “let 1st’ serve” or “let 2nd serve” to ensure the operator
eo boards (if video boards are available). These replays will be on point-end- knows whether it is a 1st serve or 2nd serve.
ing non-service shots that are in or out by 150mm or less. The replays will • If there is a malfunction of the LIVE ELC System and it is not functional the match
be of point-ending service shots that are in or out by 50mm or less. must be stopped. The RO should contact the CU immediately and inform the CU
Note: Close calls between first and second serves that can disturb play should be that the system is not operational. The supervisor/referee should also be contact-
cancelled from going to board by the RO using the cancel button. ed.

354 355
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
o The RO should keep in radio contact with the CU and supervisor/referee and EXHIBIT U - Anti-Doping Testing Facilities Guidelines
inform them on how long it is expected before the system is again operation- Doping Control Station
al.
o The supervisor/referee will then decide on how/when/where the match will The Doping Control Station must be a dedicated facility for the exclusive use of
resume again. the Doping Control team for the duration of the event.
o If it is deemed the system will be operational in a short reasonable time the Location: near the locker room (but not with direct access).
players will wait on court and resume play when the system is available.
o If it is deemed the system will not be available in a reasonable time, the Accommodation: a minimum of two (and preferably three) connected areas or
supervisor/referee will decide on another option. These could include sus- rooms: a Sample Collection Room and a Waiting Room at a minimum, plus an
pending the match, moving the match to another court, using line umpires (if Administration Room if possible, all of which should be air-conditioned or well
available), postponing the match or continuing the match without the system ventilated. The Sample Collection Room should be directly connected to a toilet
and the CU calling ALL the lines. (for the sole use of Doping Control).
o The RO should note the time of the match and the score when the system Security: If free-standing, a security guard should be posted to restrict admission
became unavailable and also the time when the system became available to those with appropriate credentials. It must be lockable, with access restricted
again. The Lead RO should then be informed of this either at the end of the to the Doping Control team. The Doping Control Officer must be given charge of
shift or between matches. all keys to all rooms for the duration of testing.
• The RO should record the time and the score of any system malfunctions or un-
Hygiene: The Doping Control Station should be cleaned every day at a time
usual situations with the LIVE ELC System and report them to the Lead RO after
agreed with the Doping Control Officer.
their shift or between matches.
• If the LIVE ELC System is operational but the audio speakers around the court Items to be supplied in the Doping Control Station (for all draw sizes):
fail the match should not be stopped. The CU must use the LED lights (green and
red) on the chair to determine if the ball is “in” or “out” and must call audibly by SAMPLE COLLECTION ROOM WAITING ROOM
themselves.
1 toilet Comfortable seating for 8 people
Desk and 4 chairs Refrigerator with an adequate
supply of individually sealed,
non-caffeniated and non-alcoholic
beverages
Table to display testing materials Table to display reading materials
TV/Court Monitor (and also in the TV/Court Monitor
Administration Room if provided)
Mains electricity supply Waste bin
Lockable refrigerator
2 large waste bins
Sink, with soap or hand wash
paper towels
Storage cupboard
A suggested layout for a doping control station is shown in the following diagram:

356 357
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT V - Retractable Roof Policy
Whenever practical, playing conditions on the center court will remain the same
as on all other courts.
In the event rain is falling prior to the scheduled starting time of the match, the roof
will remain closed for the duration of that match.
If the rain stops and the forecast is good, the roof may be opened after the match
in progress is completed. Decisions on re-opening the roof will be made on a
match-by-match basis depending upon current conditions and the forecast.
If play commences with the roof open, a decision to close the roof will normally be
made after play has stopped because of rain, although if other factors warrant the
roof to be closed prior to this, the Supervisor will make that decision.
The roof will not normally be closed because of the threat of rain.
In the event high winds, sufficient to harm the retractable roof, are forecast with
reasonable certainty, the roof may be closed prior to the start of the match. The
reverse is applicable when the roof is closed and high winds or other conditions
necessitate, for safety reasons, that the roof be opened.
In the event that the temperature is below 50F / 10C prior to the start of a match,
in order to enhance the fan experience, the roof may be closed as directed by
the Supervisor. Decisions on whether to close the roof for cold will be made on a
match-by-match basis.
In some instances, the roof must be partially closed for the lights to function prop-
erly. In this case, the roof must be partially closed prior to the start of the match.
The ATP Supervisor shall be the final authority on all decisions regarding the

358 359
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT W - Writing Table For Umpire Chairs
In an effort to provide a comfortable platform for the Chair Umpires to place their
hardware such as tablet, walkie-talkie, net device handset, it is requested that all
tournaments attach a writing table according to the instructions below to the Chair
Umpire’s chairs on all match courts.

This simple and low cost upgrade will contribute tremendously to reduce scoring er-
rors caused by data being accidentally entered as a result of the umpire holding the
tablet in their hand and ease the process of entering data in the tablet.

When setting up the writing tables, please make a note of the following:
• Attach the writing table to the right side armrest. If there is a microphone attached
to the chair, the microphone must be installed on the left side of the chair so as
not to interfere with the writing platform on the right side armrest.
• Ensure that the writing table is installed with the slender end at the back of the
armrest. The design is made considering most armrests are 20 inches (50.8 cm)
long and 3 inches (7.62 cm) wide. This design calls for the overall dimension of
32 inches (81.28 cm) which leaves a full 12 inches (30.48 cm) of space in front of
the umpire for the various equipment.
• A standard wood product could be used. For example, in the USA a 1 x 12 could
be used and just cut to length and ripped for the 9 x 20 piece that is taken out. The
actual dimension of a 1 x 12 is 11 ½ inches wide by ¾ inches thick. A comparable
product could also be used in countries using the metric standard.

360 361
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT X - Premier Player Protocol
Premier Player Group.Players ranked as a year-end top 30 player (commitment play-
ers) or have a current protected ranking within the top 10 are eligible to be selected in
the premier player group for purposes of fulfilling the restriction on who is eligible to be
named as an additional Wild Card at an ATP Tour 500 event. The size of the premier
player group shall be ten (10) players plus two (2) alternates selected as follows:
Ten (10) players shall be selected as “tournament” premier players (A+) by each of
the ATP 500 tournaments. Each tournament shall also designate two (2) alternates
as A1 and A2. The regional EVP’S shall solicit input from the respective events to
determine the ten (10) tournament selections, plus alternates. These ten (10) players
and the two (2) alternates shall be presented to the Board at the final Board meeting
of the previous year for approval.

In the event that an A+ player becomes injured or otherwise is not able to compete for
an extended period of time, as specified below, he will be replaced by the A1 player
designated by the tournament.

The same procedure will be followed in the event that a second player needs to be
replaced as determined below.

If additional A+ players are required and the designated A1 and A2 players have al-
ready been promoted or are otherwise not available, then the A+ replacement player
will be the next highest ranked player on the most current Pepperstone ATP Rank-
ings.

Replacement protocol. The replacement of a Premier Player will automatically oc-

cur when any of the following apply:
1) A Premier Player has withdrawn / retired from an event due to illness or injury and
has been out of competition for sixty (60) days; or
2) A Premier Player has announced that due to illness / injury or other reasons he
will be out of competition for a period of at least sixty (60) days; or
3) A Premier Player announces his retirement; in this case he is replaced immedi-
ately following his last event.

Note: The count shall begin on the withdrawal deadline date; the date of the retire-
ment; the date of the late withdrawal; or the date of the on-site withdrawal, whichever
was chronologically first.

A player must not compete in any other tennis event during those periods.

If the replaced player returns to competition during the season, he shall be reinstated
as a premier A+ player upon the start of his first match (singles or doubles) in his first
ATP Tour event.

362 363
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT Y - Mandatory Physical EXHIBIT Z - Clothing Logos

2 Manufacturer’s ID (2 sq in /13 sq cm) on front or

2 Manufacturer’s ID (4 sq in/26 sq cm) placed 1

headband and worn so it is positioned on side of

2 Manufacturer’s ID (2 sq in/13 sq cm) OR

1 Manufacturer’s ID (4 sq in/26 sq cm)
*Commercial ID must be on side of hat/

COMPRESSION SHORTS and/or

1 Commercial ID* (4 sq in/26 sq cm)

COMPRESSION SLEEVES
SHORTS (front and back)
Writing is permitted on both
1 Manufacturer’s ID and/or
MANDATORY PHYSICAL / COMPETITION CLEARANCE

on front and 1 on back

All manufacturer logos must be embroidered, screen printed or otherwise professionally attached at all points
Please Print Clearly: All Illegible Forms Will be Returned Without Processing

the article on each sock/shoe

May contain writing

Logos of the manufacturer of

(NEW – see example)

OR
All commercial ID logos placed on the shirt front or collar must be embroidered or screen printed

HAT, HEADBAND

back of shorts
ATP PLAYERS’ DRESS AND EQUIPMENT
Player Name: ____________________ Date of Birth (DD/MM/YYYY) ____ / ____ / _______

SOCKS/SHOES
I certify that _____________________, a patient of mine has been medically evaluated and is:
[Insert player name]

head
Check One:

Deemed medically fit to participate in playing competitive tennis

Not deemed medically fit to participate in playing competitive tennis

DATE OF EVALUATION: __________________________________________

LOCATION OF EVALUATION (City & Country):___________________________________________

LIST ANY SIGNIFICANT MEDICAL CONDITIONS YOU WOULD LIKE ATP MEDICAL SERVICES TO
BE AWARE OF: ____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________

1 Manufacturer’s ID (4 sq
in/26 sq cm) Writing is
I further certify that I am a Medical Doctor (MD) licensed to practice medicine in
(Country)_______________________,

WRISTBAND
License Number.___________________.

permitted
________________________________________

Tennis Equipment Manufacturer’s ID on each

Print Name of Physician

BAGS - 2 commercial ID (6 sq in/39 sq cm)

__________________________________
Signature of Physician

The “Adidas three stripes” is

__________________________________

considered a manufacturer’s
Email of Physician

RACQUET & STRINGS

BAGS, TOWELS, ETC.
Date: ______________

Manufacturer’s ID on
racquet and strings
Contact Telephone Number:
__________________

identification
on one (1) bag

***IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS TO PHYSICIAN***

item PLUS

Please immediately fax the completed form to the attention the attention of Todd
Ellenbecker at +1.904.758.5312 or scan and email the form to:
todd.ellenbecker@atptour.com

364 365
 Manufacturer ID on the back of the shirt.
program. This is optional and is in addition to any
if part of the ATP Premier/Platinum sponsor patch
placed on the back of the shirt (below the collar)
An additional Commercial ID (4 sq in) may be
ATP PREMIER/PLATINUM SPONSOR PATCH

front or collar
One (1) M/C 6 sq
X. EXHIBITS

Logos may contain writing. or

on the back. 4 sq in
manufacturer’s ID (up to 4 sq in) can be placed ATP Premier
(6 sq in) is placed on the front, an additional M/C 6 sq
As long as only 1 Manufacturer/Commercial ID
M 4 sq
the Nitto ATP Finals.
front for events following the US Open through M/C 6 sq
No new commercial logo may be added to the shirt

without ATP approval.

366
gear, then he cannot change brands during that year
a commercial brand logo on the front, collar or head-
*Once a player has competed in his 1 st match with

on the back
an additional 1 Manufacturer’s ID (4 sq in/26 sq cm
PLUS
on front or collar front or collar
1 Manufacturer’s or Commercial ID (6 sq in/39 sq cm) One (1) M/C 6 sq

OR or
M 4 sq M/C 6 sq M/C 6 sq
Logos may contain writing.
and 1 on collar
39 sq cm ) in any location (2 on front, or 1 on front or
2 Manufacturer (M) or Commercial (C) IDs (6 sq in/
M/C 6 sq
M/C 6 sq

SHIRT, SWEATER OR JACKET - Front, back & collar

C/M 6 sq C/M 6 sq
SLEEVES C/M 6 sq
C/M 6 sq
2 Commercial (C) ID (non-manufacturer) C/M 6 sq
C/M 6 sq
or Manufacturer ID on each sleeve not to
exceed 6 sq in/39 sq cm

Maximum of 2 ID’s may be placed

X. EXHIBITS

Within each 6 square inch position.

1 patch = 6 sq in
C/M C/M

NOTE: Commercial ID’s can be different.

Logos may contain writing.

OTHER
1 Manufacturer (without manufacturer name or
367

writing may be placed once or repeatedly within

an area not to exceed 12 sq in in one of the SLEEVELESS
following locations: If sleeveless, then 2 logo positions of the Commercial (C) ID (non-manufacturer) or manufacturer
On each of the shirt sleeves OR ID may be placed on the front, however neither shall exceed 6 sq in/ 3 sq cm.
On the outer seams (sides of the torso)
If only one logo is placed on the front or collar, then one manufacturer logo (4 sq/ in/ sq cm)
may be placed on the back of the shirt.

M 4 sq

HAT/HEADBAND
1 Manufacturer’s ID not to exceed 4 sq in/26 sq cm
and /or
or
*1 Commercial (C) ID (non-manufacturer) not to exceed 4 sq in/26 sq cm.

•The Commercial logo must be on the side of the hat/headband and must be worn so that it is posi-
tioned on the side of the hat.
•No hat or headband with or without logos may be worn during the awards ceremony.
M 4 sq
C 4 sq
*Once a player has competed in his 1st match with a commercial ID, then he cannot change brands
during that year without ATP approval.
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT AA - Sample Basic Accreditation Policy Wording Accreditee is at any time unsure whether to comply with such instruction, order or
direction he/she must contact
1. SCOPE AND TERM OF ACCREDITATION
3.1.5. to the extent permitted by law, the Accreditee grants (free of charge) to the
1.1.This accreditation policy (the Policy) shall be binding on any person (the Ac- Accreditor and ATP Tour, Inc. (the ATP) the perpetual right to make and use,
creditee) who has applied for or been issued with a temporary or permanent exhibit and reproduce worldwide at their discretion, the Accreditee’s name, voice,
accreditation(the Accreditation) by or on behalf of [insert
insert name of Tournament biographical material, likeness, image and/or any visual description of the Ac-
owner] (the Accreditor) in respect of the [insert
owner insert year]
year [insert
insert Tournament name]
name creditee made during the Tournament for: (i) promotion and publicity of the Tour-
(the Tournament) whether on his/his own account, on behalf of an employer, or nament; (ii) information and news in relation to the Tournament; i) audio visual
on behalf of any person or company he/she is working with (in whatever form) in coverage and broadcast of the Tournament; and (iv) archive purposes. The Ac-
respect of the Tournament. creditee acknowledges and agrees that such use of his/her name, voice, bi-
1.2.With effect from the date of signature or online acceptance of this Policy, this ographical material, image and/or any visual depiction by the Accreditor or the
Policy shall supersede and replace any prior agreement, understanding, arrange- ATP may be affected by way of any technologies, distribution techniques or media
ment, representation or document, whether written or oral, entered into between and without compensation;
the Accreditor and the Accreditee with respect to the subject matter of this Policy. 3.1.6.he/she shall conduct himself/herself and act generally in a manner that will not:

2. TERM (i) bring the Tournament, the ATP (or any of its subsidiaries), the Accreditor or the
game of tennis into disrepute; or (ii) otherwise inhibit the enjoyment of any other
2.1.This Policy shall come into effect and be binding as between the Accreditor and party in attendance at the Tournament.
Accreditee from the date of signature or online acceptance of this Policy by the
Accreditee and shall terminate upon the conclusion of the Tournament in the rel- Ground Regulations/Access
evant year (save that the Accreditee and the Accreditor agree that paragraphs 3.1.7. he/she shall comply with the Tournament Ground Regulations which can be
3.1.3, 3.1.5, 3.1.11, 3.1.13, 3.1.21 (inclusive) and paragraphs 4, 5 and 6.4 shall insert web address]
found at [insert address and as attached as Appendix 1 to this Policy;
survive expiry or termination of this Policy).
3.1.8. he/she shall directly or indirectly access only those areas of the Tournament
2.2.The Accreditation provided to the Accreditee shall at all times remain the property site specifically allowed by the Accreditation and necessary for the Accreditee to
of the Accreditor and be subject to the Accreditee complying with the terms of this perform activities directly related to the purpose for which the Accreditation as
Policy. The Accreditor may, at any time and in its sole discretion: (i) terminate this granted;
Policy; (ii) rescind any Accreditation provided to the Accreditee for the current
year; (iii) reject any applications for future Accreditation; and/or (iv) eject the Ac- Players
creditee from the Tournament site, and/or take legal action against the Accreditee 3.1.9. he/she shall not film any player anywhere within the Tournament site without
for breach of this Policy. having obtained the player’s prior written permission, unless the filming is being
done for noncommercial purposes and is not for more than :60 seconds;
3. TERMS AND CONDITIONS
3.1.10. players and their registered coaches may film a players’ practice session
3.1.In consideration for the grant to the Accreditee of his/her Accreditation, the Ac- within the Tournament site provided that such film may only be used for their own
creditee hereby agrees, undertakes and/or acknowledges (as applicable) that: personal use and shall not be used for any commercial purposes.
General 3.1.11. he/she shall not expressly or impliedly associate any player with any products,
3.1.1.the Accreditation is strictly non-transferable and in particular the Accreditation services or brands (including, but not limited to, the products, services or brands
may not be used as a prize or give-away or as part of any competition or promo- of the Accreditee’s employer);
tion or other similar activity; 3.1.12. players’ press conferences shall be held in press conference rooms or other
3.1.2. the Accreditation must be worn correctly at all times (with any photo clearly designated areas, and only authorized accredited media representatives may ac-
visible – if applicable) and be visible and accessible to be scanned or otherwise cess the press conference;
checked prior to entry and exit from the Tournament site, and at relevant areas Photographs/Filming (General)
within the Tournament site, at all times;
3.1.13. other than where approved in advance in writing by the Accreditor or as set
3.1.3. he/she shall not alter, edit or otherwise amend the Accreditation or make or out in paragraphs 3.1.14.8, 3.1.15 and 3.1.16 below, the Accreditee is strictly for-
take any copy of the Accreditation or provide any third party with the Accredita- bidden to film, broadcast, stream, publish, transmit and/or otherwise offer to the
tion, any photograph or copy of the Accreditation (whether directly or indirectly by public (or assist any third party in offering to the public), on a live or on a delayed
way of social media for example); basis, in whole or in part, and whether on a free basis or subject to payment,
3.1.4. he/she shall abide by all instructions, orders and directions given to the Accred- any sound recording, video footage, motion picture, film and/or other audio-visual
itee by the Accreditor or any Tournament official, employee or agent and if the content captured by any means whatsoever inside the Tournament site (includ-
ing, without limitation, the competition courts, the practice courts and inside any
368 369
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
restricted areas including locker rooms and areas reserved for players) regard- within the live broadcast of any match, any other uses shall be subject to a delay
less of the means of transmission or media whether now known or in the future of at least :30 seconds;
(all of such rights, being Broadcast Rights), other than to the extent expressly
News Agencies
permitted under this Policy;
3.1.16. if the Accreditee is not an Official Broadcast Accreditee but has been granted
3.1.14. subject to paragraphs 3.1.15 and 3.1.16 below, the Accreditee is in particular
Accreditation by the Accreditor to in order to provide news, information, data and/
prohibited from:
or reporting in relation to the Tournament, (any such Accreditee, an Official News
3.1.14.1.filming Tournament matches, regardless of the category (e.g. singles, dou- Access Accreditee), he/she shall be entitled to exercise the Broadcast Rights
bles, junior, wheelchair tournament, legends trophy) or courts (including competi- only to the extent permitted by, and strictly in accordance with, the terms of: (i)
tion courts and practice courts); the relevant mandatory news access regulations (or similar), if any, prescribed
under applicable law in the territory in which the Tournament takes place; and ii)
3.1.14.2.undertaking or facilitating live or delayed broadcast coverage (including, by
any other applicable documentation issued to the Accreditee by the Accreditor
way of example only, live broadcasting/streaming through platforms such as Peri-
from time to time in relation to any such news access or reporting. In the event of
scope or Meerkat) from any location within the Tournament site whatsoever;
any conflict or inconsistency between a term in the regulations referred to in (i)
3.1.14.3.filming or producing studio or stand up footage within the Tournament site, and a term of this Policy or the documentation referred to in (ii), the term in the
whether by way of live or delayed broadcast; regulations referred to in (i) shall prevail. Further, such Accreditee agrees that
3.1.14.4.soliciting and/or filming personal interviews of players; he/she will not disseminate, transmit, publish or release from the grounds of the
Tournament any live match score or related live statistical data until :30 seconds
3.1.14.5.selling footage filmed within the Tournament site; after the actual occurrence of the incident of match play or action that leads to
3.1.14.6.producing a magazine or specific program relating to the Tournament and such live score update (e.g., a point be scored), and that such use shall be solely
containing footage filmed at the Tournament; for news reporting and editorial use;

3.1.14.7.associating himself/herself with any footage filmed within the Tournament Assignment of copyright
site or with the trademarks, logos or distinctive signs of the Tournament and/or 3.1.17. if and to the extent that the Accreditee obtains, acquires or exercises any
the Accreditor; Broadcast Rights other than as expressly permitted pursuant to paragraphs
3.1.14.8.publishing any photographs or footage captured anywhere on the Tourna- 3.1.15 or 3.1.16 above, the Accreditee hereby assigns all such Broadcasting ig-
ment site during the Tournament for any purpose, except that this shall not pre- hts (including all intellectual property rights therein), by way of a present assign-
vent the Accreditee from publishing still photographs or video that is less than :60 ment of past, present and future rights, to the Accreditor (or its nominee). The Ac-
seconds from the Tournament on his/her personal social media account(s) for creditee shall do and execute all such further acts and things as are reasonably
solely non-commercial purposes; and/or required to give full effect to the assignment referred to in this paragraph 3.1.17.
All goodwill arising from the Accreditee’s use or exploitation of any such Broad-
3.1.14.9. associating, directly or indirectly, all or part of photographs, footage or other cast Rights shall accrue to the Accreditor (or its nominee);
audio-visual content captured within the Tournament site with any brand and/or
name, whether commercial or not, especially as a part of a sponsorship; Tournament Website

Official Broadcast Partners 3.1.18. no text, photo and/or audio or video content whatsoever from the Tournament
insert website])
official website ([insert website or from the Accreditor’s or the ATP’s official web-
3.1.15. if the Accreditee is working on behalf of a radio, TV or other media channel, sites shall be reproduced and/or represented, in any manner whatsoever, on any
network or platform which has acquired or is otherwise in bona fide possession other media without the prior written consent of the Accreditor and/or the ATP;
of legally enforceable Broadcasting Rights to the Tournament (an Official Broad-
cast Partner), such Accreditee (an Official Broadcast Accreditee) shall be entitled Data
to exercise the Broadcast Rights only to the extent permitted by, and strictly in 3.1.19. unless approved in advance in writing by the Accreditor or ATP, the Accred-
accordance with, the terms of: (i) the relevant agreement between the owner/ itee may not continually collect, disseminate, transmit, publish or release from
licensor of the relevant Broadcast Rights and the Official Broadcast Partner on the rounds of the Tournament any match scores or related statistical data (the
whose behalf the Accreditee is working; and (ii) any other applicable documenta- Statistical Data), during match play (from the commencement of a match through
tion issued to the Accreditee by the Accreditor from time to time in relation to the its conclusion) for any commercial, betting or gambling purpose. In particular he/
exercise of those Broadcast Rights. In the event of any conflict or inconsistency she shall not use any communication device (including without limitation a mobile
between a term in the documentation referred to in (i) and a term of this Policy telephone, tablet or laptop) to transmit Statistical Data to a third party in connec-
or the documentation referred to in (ii), the term in the documentation referred to tion with the placing of a bet or for any improper, corrupt, fraudulent or otherwise
n (i) shall prevail. Further, any such Accreditee agrees (x) not to onward supply, unlawful purpose whatsoever. As between the parties, the Accreditor remains the
sublicense or otherwise make any scores or related statistical data from the Tour- sole and exclusive owner of the Statistical Data;
nament available to any third party for use not related to the broadcast, and (y)
to restrict their use of such scores and data to use on a contemporaneous basis

370 371
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
Gambling of the Accreditor and/or the Tournament, and the Accreditee must comply with the
Policy as amended.
3.1.20. he/she shall not engage, whether directly or through an intermediary and
regardless of the method (including, without limitation, by way of using online 6.3. If any paragraph in this Policy is rendered void or unenforceable by any court
communication techniques) in any form of gambling or betting activity whatsoever or authority of competent jurisdiction then all other provisions of this Policy will
including private gambling or between physical persons in connection with the remain in full force and effect and will not in any way be impaired provided the
Tournament. Further, the Accreditee shall not communicate to any third party any parties agree a replacement provision which is as close as is legally permissible
privileged information within the scope of his or her function and unknown to the to the provision found invalid or unenforceable.
public in connection with the Tournament, nor shall the Accreditee communicate
insert juris-
6.4. The Accreditation and this Policy shall be governed by the laws of [insert
to any third party any privileged information acquired within the scope of his or her
diction] and the Accreditor and Accreditee agree that the courts of [insert
diction insert juris-
Accreditation and unknown to the public in connection with the Tournament; and
diction] shall have exclusive jurisdiction over any dispute (whether contractual or
diction
3.1.21. without prejudice to paragraph 3.1.20 above, he/she shall comply with the non-contractual) in relation to this Accreditation Policy.
terms of the Tennis Anti-Corruption Program (available for download at https://
www.itia.tennis/tacp/rules.
4. DATA PROTECTION
4.1.The Accreditor may use the Accreditee’s personal details (including his/her photo-
graph) for the purposes of: assessing a request for Accreditation, administration,
marketing and/or vetting/security checking. The Accreditor may also disclose the
Accreditee’s personal details to its service providers and agents for these pur-
poses and to the ATP/other tournament owners where the Accreditor reasonably
believes that the Accreditee poses a risk in relation to the security, staging or
commercial rights of other tournaments.
4.2.The Accreditor shall comply with applicable laws when processing the Accredi-
tee’s personal details as described in paragraph 4.1 above.
5. INDEMNITY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
5.1.The Accreditee hereby indemnifies and holds harmless the Accreditor and ATP
against any direct loss or damage to the Accreditor or ATP or their employees,
officers or agents or arising out of any dispute, proceedings, claim suit or other ac-
tion brought against the Accreditor or ATP or their employees, officers or agents
by any third party resulting from or in any way connected with (i) negligence or
misconduct of the Accreditee at the Tournament site; or (ii) a breach of this Policy
by the Accreditee.
5.2. PROVIDED THAT NOTHING IN THIS POLICY SHALL EXCLUDE OR LIMIT EI-
THER PARTY’S LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY
THE NEGLIGENCE OF THAT PARTY OR THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES,
OR IN RESPECT OF ANY OTHER LIABILITY THAT CANNOT BE LIMITED OR
EXCLUDED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER THE ACCREDITOR NOR ATP
SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE ACCREDITEE EITHER IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR BREACH OF DUTY) OR OTHERWISE
FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE OR EXPENSE SUFFERED BY THE ACCREDITEE,
HOWSOEVER CAUSED.
6. MISCELLANEOUS
insert job title]
6.1. The Accreditor nominates [insert title as the representative (the Tournament
Representative) to whom the Accreditee should direct any queries or complaints
in connection with his/her Accreditation or the terms of this Policy.
6.2. The Accreditor may alter this Policy at any time in its sole discretion if it reason-
ably believes that such changes are necessary to protect the legitimate interests

372 373
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT AB - ATP Fantasy Sport and Betting Sponsorship player support team members and officials from inadvertent violations of the TACP:
A. Compliance with the TACP 1) No player/player support team/official activation of any nature, this includes:
● appearances at a Tennis Betting Operator information booth or box;
The TACP currently provides that no Covered Person shall, directly or indirectly, fa-
cilitate any other person to wager on the outcome or any other aspect of any profes- ● wearing or otherwise publicly displaying Tennis Betting Operator logos or
sional tennis event or any other tennis competition. The ITIA has determined that the brand images on or off court;
provision of the following benefits by a tournament to a Tennis Betting Operator would ● attending or participating in events sponsored by or involving only the Ten-
be deemed to be “facilitation” and are therefore prohibited and subject to penalty nis Betting Operator;
under the TACP:
● use by a Tennis Betting Operator of player/player support team names or
1) Direct linking from a tournament digital or social media platform to a Tennis Bet- images (including match and non-match footage); and
ting Operator website where tennis wagers can be placed (i.e., one (1) click 1)
(for the avoidance of doubt indirect linking (i.e., two (2) clicks) from a tournament ● social media posts mentioning a Tennis Betting Operator or linking to a
digital or social media platform to a Tennis Betting Operator website where tennis Betting Operator website or platform by the player/player support team
wagers can be placed is allowed). member/official;

2) Displaying live odds for matches on a tournament digital or social media platform 2) No use of player/player support team member images in tournament advertise-
(including in a match stream shown on such platform); ments/collateral/social media content that includes only the branding of the Ten-
nis Betting Operator;
3) Offering and accepting tennis wagers on behalf of a Tennis Betting Operator on
any tournament digital or social media platform or otherwise; 3) No provision of gear or merchandise with Tennis Betting Operator logos or brand-
ing to players/player support team members/officials for use on or off the court
4) Allowing a Tennis Betting Operator, directly or through a third party, to offer and (e.g., towels, water bottles, tape);
accept in-person tennis wagers at a tournament site or at any official tourna-
ment-related event (e.g., at a booth or party); 4) No provision of hospitality or gifts, free or subsided travel, or any other personal
benefit to a player/player support team member/official from a Tennis Betting Op-
5) In-stadia or on-site tournament or Tennis Betting Operator advertising that en- erator.
courages spectators to place an in-venue tennis wager (e.g., go to website and
place a bet now); B. Protecting the Integrity of the Sport
6) Any of the following activities by tournament owner, operator, director, or employ-
ee in their individual capacity: Any tournament that takes a sponsorship from a Tennis Betting Operator shall com-
ply with the following:
● Serving as a spokesperson / ambassador for a Tennis Betting Operator;
1) No Tennis Betting Operator as title and/or presenting sponsor of a tournament;No
● Writing for a Tennis Betting Operator website or publication (excludes gen- naming rights to player areas;
eral tournament press releases and tournament promotions or announce-
ments); 2) Only betting exchanges that also offer sportsbook betting are permitted as a Ten-
nis Betting Operator;
● Making personal appearances on behalf of a Tennis Betting Operator;
3) Tennis Betting Operator and tournament advertising in and on broadcast (and
● Promoting a Tennis Betting Operator to the general public through posts shoulder programming) must comply with broadcast and local restrictions (i.e.,
or links to the Tennis Betting Operator on the individual’s personal social in the event a territory does not allow the broadcast to be shown due to a ban
media accounts or websites; on sports betting advertising, the tournament shall have the right to opt out of
● Appearing in commercial advertisements that encourage others to bet on such sponsorship agreement); Tennis Betting Operators may only use the ATP
tennis; category stamp in advertisements when using the ATP-Tournament lockup logo,
provided that the lockup logo may not be used with the image of an identifiable
● Wearing or otherwise publicly displaying Tennis Betting Operator logos or tennis player (regardless of whether the individual in the image competes on the
brand images on apparel, personal equipment or stationery; and ATP Tour).
● Accepting hospitality or gifts, free or subsided travel, or any other personal 4) No display of live odds for matches in the tournament venue or at other official
benefit from a Tennis Betting Operator. tournament sites;
In addition, the provision of the following benefits to a Tennis Betting Operator would 5) Tennis Betting Operator on-court signage (Refer to Chart at end of this Exhibit
be deemed to be “facilitation” by an active player (i.e., any player who has not official- AD):
ly retired), player support team member, and/or official and therefore tournaments are o No signage or banners on or in the immediate physical vicinity of the chair
prohibited from providing such sponsorship benefits in order to safeguard players, umpire or line umpire chair;
374 375
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
o No signage or banners on or in the immediate physical vicinity of the player gering, and compensation structure; and
benches; No signage or banners on player entrance arch; and and o Tournament must assist ATP’s due diligence process;
o No ads on videoboards when players are on court warming up or when play-
ing (excluding changeovers and setbreaks); The Tennis Betting Operator 2) Tennis Betting Operator must be registered/licensed by appropriate legal author-
logo may be placed on the shot clock and serve speed box; ity in the territories it offers betting;
o Tennis Betting Operator logo cannot be the only logo/mark on backwall sig-
nage; and 3) Tennis Betting Operator must employ industry standard measures (e.g. geo-gat-
o No more than 40% of total on-court fixed signage (excluding LED) or 40% of ing and age-restrictions) to prevent unauthorized users from engaging in unlawful
total display time sports wagering for the term of the sponsorship.
6) No Tennis Betting Operator logo or brand images on chair umpire or line umpire 4) Tennis Betting Operator shall not be:
clothing;
o entities engaged in the collection, publication or other exploitation of material
7) Tennis Betting Operator logo on media backdrops must be the same size as and that would reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on ten-
appear no more frequently than other logos on the backdrop, and must be dis- nis integrity (as determined by ATP);
persed throughout the backdrop. o currently the subject of an investigation or proceeding for betting-related cor-
ruption or betting-related criminal offense or any other materially significant
8) Credentials for Tennis Betting Operator representatives limited to non-player re-
betting integrity-related investigation brought by the ITIA or any relevant bet-
stricted areas (i.e., no access to player lounge or locker room; access to player
ting-integrity, governmental, regulatory or gaming authority;
restaurant and press conferences permitted if accompanied by tournament staff);
o currently an adverse party in litigation or arbitration involving ATP or any of its
9) Official player hotels shall not offer in-person tennis wagering; events in respect of unofficial data or betting;
10) No provision of Tennis Betting Operator informational or promotional materials to o currently the subject of legal proceedings brought by any tennis governing
players/player support team members/officials/tournament staff; body in respect of any unauthorized in-stadium collection or exploitation of
unofficial data;
11) No targeting minors; o entities that have been convicted of betting-related corruption, betting-related
12) Tennis Betting Operator may have informational booth in vendor area, which may criminal offense by the ITIA or any relevant betting-integrity, governmental,
include information on downloading the sponsor’s app but should not directly en- regulatory or gaming authority within the prior 3 years;
courage to place bets or promote a Tennis Betting Operator website URL; o entities that have a current sanction from any relevant betting-integrity relat-
ed, governmental, regulatory or gaming authority as to a material violation or
13) No tournament shall receive compensation linked to the sponsorship from the series of violations that could reasonably be expected to call the applicable
Tennis Betting Operator based upon revenue or betting volume of their event; entity’s betting-related integrity into question;
14) 10% of the sponsor fee (based on gross revenue) shall be paid to ATP as a con- 5) Tennis Betting Operator must purchase ATP official scores. For Masters 1000
tribution toward the expense of anti-corruption; For combined events 5% shall be and ATP 500 tournaments, the betting sponsor must purchase the fastest official
paid to each Tour toward the expense of anti- corruption; scoring feed (in effect from January 1, 2024).
15) Tournaments may not apply for sport gaming license or become a betting opera- 6) Betting Sponsor must agree to cooperate and coordinate with ATP, ATP’s official
tor with any relationship to wagering on tennis; and data partner, and the ITIA with respect to any suspicious betting patterns or other
integrity related issues, and must make available to the ITIA any betting-related
16) Tournament owner(s), Tournament Director, Tournament Physicians and other information that the ITIA reasonably requests and have an MOU with the ITIA (if
staff who would regularly have direct contact with the players and/or are privy requested);
to non-public information about players must complete the Tennis Integrity Pro-
tection Programme (TIPP). Such staff likely includes, but is not limited to, the 7) Tennis Betting Operator must agree to comply with the provisions set forth in Sec-
Credentials Coordinator, Accommodation Coordinator, IT Coordinator, Head of tion A and Section B above;
Security, Media Director, Player Desk Staff and Massage Therapists. 8) Agreement must include a termination right if (a) the Tennis Betting Operator’s
license in domestic market of tournament is lost or suspended, (b) the Tennis
C. Repute and Integrity of Tennis Betting Operators
Betting Operator is no longer in compliance with applicable laws and regulations
(including advertising), (c) the Tennis Betting Operator violates the provisions set
The following requirements are to provide transparency, assure compliance with Sec-
forth in Section A or, Section B above; (d) the Tennis Betting Operator combines
tions A and B, and assure the quality of the Tennis Betting Operator:
unofficial data with the official data of relevant stakeholder, (e) the Tennis Betting
1) Approval process: Operator fails to reasonably cooperate with any integrity-related ITIA requests
o Tournaments must apply to and secure approval from ATP at least thirty (30) or ITIA investigations, and (f) ATP rules change prohibiting sponsorships in this
days prior to entering into an agreement with a Tennis Betting Operator; category; and
o Application must sufficiently detail all benefits, activations, links to tennis wa-
376 377
X. EXHIBITS X. EXHIBITS
9) Renewal / extension / amendment / early termination of agreement requires noti-
fication to, and approval by, ATP.

378 379
INDEX INDEX
A Beverages 115
Officials 115
Agents, Tier I and Tier II 96
Players 115
Aggravated Behavior 244
Announcing 209 Bonus Pool 9, 12
Anti-Doping 125 Broadcast Quality Standards 283
On-Site Testing Facility 125 Byes - Assignment and Placement 166
Volunteer Observers 125 C
Appeal of Calls 184
Calling of Matches 180
Appeal of Violations of STARS Program 243
Cases & Decisions
Appeals Tribunal 227
Alternate Sign-In Procedures 172
Application Requirements 213
Balls
ATP Fantasy Sport and Sponsorship 214
ATP Player Entry and Commitment To Rules 9 Ball Change Error 112
Broken Ball 112
Attendance Quality Standards 287 New Balls to Wrong Player(s) 112
Audible Obscenity 235 Re-Warm-Up, Balls 112
Automated External Defibrillator (“AED”) 125 Soft Ball 112
Clay Court Cases 189
B Can’t Find Ball Mark 189
Back Fences 108 Doubles Ball Mark Appeal 189
Must Both Players on a Team Stop 190
Back Walls 108 Overrule Then Inspect Ball Mark 190
Bags 229 Correcting an Error in Seeding 151
Ball Abuse 234 Correct When Left Out of Draw 151
Ball Mark Inspection Procedures 188
Default - List Penalties 238
Chair Umpire 188
Don’t Have Eight Seeds 151
Line Umpires 189
Eligible for Lucky Loser 172
Ball Persons
Clothing 105 Extending Closing Times 172

Number 105 Hindrance Cases 187

Balls 110 Corrected Call 187

Early Foot Fault Call 188
ATP Challenger Tour 110 Inadvertent Hindrance 187
ATP Tour Tournaments 110 Opponent Makes Noise 187
Opponent’s Gear Falls On The Court 187
Changes and Number 110
Singles Stick Falls 187
Lost Balls 110 Spectator Noise 188
ATP Challenger Tour 110 Late Transportation 239
ATP Tour Tournaments 111 Main Draw Seed for a Qualifier 151
Practice Balls 110
Main Draw Vacancy Before Qualifying Starts 175
ATP Challenger Tour 110
May I Accept a Challenger Wild Card after losing in an ATP Qualifying 159
ATP Tour Tournaments 110
Banners 108 May I Accept a Wild Card after Withdrawing from an ATP Tour 500 Qualifying 160
Best Efforts 236 May I Play Grand Slam Qualifying After Losing in an ATP Tour tournament? 160
380 381
INDEX INDEX
Medical Cases 200 Remake of Draw 167
Chair Umpire Orders Medical Time-Out 203 Scheduling Priorities 183
Delayed Medical Time-Out 200
Seeds Withdraw or Are Withdrawn 176
Equipment Out of Adjustment (Knee Brace) 201
Exceeding 90 Seconds: Code Violation 201 Special Exempt Awarded if Player Is in Semis? 155
Medical Time-Out and Re-Warm-Up 201
Tennis Law - Cases 185
Medical Time-Out Request Honored? 201
Medical Time-Out Starts When? 201 Appealing for a Let 186
Only 90 Seconds to Re-Tape 202 Appeal of Judgment Calls 185
Penalties After Medical Time-Out 202 Appeal of the “Facts”: Receiver 185
Re-Injury 202 Appeal of the “Facts”: Server 185
Resuming Play After a Medical Time-Out 202 Umpire Blocked on Question of Fact 186
Singles Retirement: Still in Doubles? 203 Time and Equipment Cases 194
Tape Is Not “Equipment Adjustment” 202 Ball Person as Personal Valet 194
Treatment for Fatigue 203 Changing Shoes 195
Treatment: Within 90 Seconds 203 Contact Lens 195
When to Take a Medical Time-Out? 203 Crowd Movement 194
Miscellaneous Officiating Cases 203 No Play After 90 Seconds 196
Ball Hits Net Post Signage 204 Re-Gripping Racque 195
Ball Rolls Onto Court 205 Replacing Shoes 196
Ball Touches Net Pipe Support 205 Shoe Breaks 196
Broken String: First Service Fault 203 Time: Refusal to Play 195
Broken String: First Service Let 204 Time Violation + 25 Seconds = Code 194
Broken String: No Racquets 204 Time Violation, No Play, Results in Code 194
Intimidating Line Umpire 205 Two Explanations are Enough 195
Invasion: Ball in Play 204 Toilet Visit 197
Invasion: No Replay 204
Toilet Visit: When Does Play Resume? 197
Player Hits Net Pipe Support 205
Player Touches Net Outside of Singles Stick 205 Two Chances 158
Receiver Not Ready 204 Unused Wild Cards 159
Service Order 206
Touching Net or Opponent’s Court 205 Use of Both Rankings 163
Moving Indoors at an Outdoor event 184 What Size Draw 151
No Medical? Big Mistake 222 Which Lucky Loser to Insert? 172
No Penalty After Retirement 226 Who Goes In 173
Partner Injured: Who May Replace Him? 174 Who to Seed in singles Qualifying 151
Player Entitled to Minimum Rest 183 Wild Card After ATP Tour 500 Qualifying Withdrawal 158
Player Pulled from ATP 500 Qualifying 152 Wild Card Pulled from Qualifying 158
Players Don’t Call Lines 207 Categories of Tournaments 7
Potential Special Exempt Loses: After 9 p.m. 154 Ceiling Height 108
Potential Special Exempt Playing at 9 p.m. Friday 154 Ceremonies 237
Protected Ranking is for Entry, Not Seeding 164
Chairs 113
Chair Umpire 113
Punctuality 239
Line Umpire 113
Rain Delayed Semifinal, When to Play Final? 184
Net Judge 114
Rain: How Many Matches Per Player? 183
Player 114
382 383
INDEX INDEX
Chair Umpire 98 Credentialing 116
Assignment and Designation Process 98 Credentials 118
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments Crowd Movement 112
Chair Umpires 98 Currency 39
Supplemental Chair Umpires 98
ATP Tour Tournaments 98
D
Fees and Expenses 99 Default 238
Penalties 238
General 99
Responsibilities 99
Default of Prize Money Payments 39
Delay of Game 192
Challenges, number of 190, 316
Doctor 94
Change of Tournament Site 9
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 95, 96
Chief of Umpires 331
ATP Tour Tournaments 94
Assignment and Designation Process 104
Fees and Expenses 104
Doubles Draws 150
Draw 146
General 105
Composition of Draws 146
Responsibilities 105
Minimum Draw Size 146
Clear Mistake 188
Remake of Doubles 167
Clothing Designs 228
Remake of Singles 167
Coaches 237
Coaching 237 Size and Method 150
Code of Conduct 219 Time of Draw 156
Code Violations Not Witnessed By Chair Umpire 233 Main Draw Doubles 156
Combined Event 117, 123 Main Draw Singles 156
Commercial Identification 228 Qualifying Doubles 156
Qualifying Singles 156
Commitment 11 Dress and Equipment 228
Commitment and Membership Obligations 11 Drink Containers 229
Communication Devices 115
Composition of Commitment 39 E
Consent Form 336 Electrolyte 115
Copy machine 115 Drink Container 229
Corrected Call 186
Officials 115
Correction/Verification of Call 188
Players 115
Courts 107
Back Fences, Back Walls, Banners, Signs and Seats 108 Referee Responsibilities 104
Ceiling Height 108 Electronic Insertion 289
Light poles 108 Electronic Review 109, 190, 316
Emergency Situations 134
Preparation of Surface 107
Entry Fees 129
Size, Position and Color of Courts 107
Entry Obligations 219
Surface 107 Entry Protection 252
384 385
INDEX INDEX
Entry Selection 159 Host Locality 32, 34, 37
Direct Acceptances 159 Hotel Accommodations (Rooms) 19
Doubles 162 Other Reservations. 23

Qualifiers 159
I
Special Exempts 159
Ice bath 120
Wild Cards 159
Identification/Visible 228
Entry/Withdrawal Method 136 Inadvertent Hindrance 187
Entry/Withdrawal Offenses 219 Indoor Facilities 115
Equipment Abuse 234 Insurance 40
Equipment & Supplies 113 Internet 115
Placement/Approval 113
Exchange Rate Adjustment Rule 48 J
Exhibition Release 144 Jacket 229
Exhibitions 17
Promotional Fees 18
L
Restrictions 17 Laptop Restrictions 113, 118
Late Payment 49
F Leaving the Court 236
Failure to Complete Match 236 Letter of Credit 41
New/Conditional Tournaments 41
Fee Obligation 39
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 39 Lighting 107
ATP Tour 39 Limits to On-Site Access 119
Line Umpire 101
Late Payments 39
Assignment and Designation Process
Fees/Other Payments 40
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 101
Final Dispute Resolution 248 ATP Tour Tournaments 101
Fines and Penalties 219 Clothing 102
First Aid 125 General 102
Food 122
Responsibilities 102
G Line Umpire Requirement 206
Five (5) Line Umpires 207
Glossary 327
Good Standing 11 Four (4) Line Umpires 207
Guest Passes/Credentials/Tickets 118 Full Complement 206
Hand Signals 207
H
Less than a Full Complement 206
Hat 229
Less Than Four (4) Line Umpires 207
Headband 229
Hindrance 186 Number for Matches 206
Hospitality 19 Seven (7) Line Umpires 206
Host Broadcaster 283 Six (6) Line Umpires 206
386 387
INDEX INDEX
Umpiring Without Line Umpires 207 Round Robin 71
Live Scoring 116 Prize Money and Points 73
Locker Room 120 Singles Elimination Competition 73
Logo Usage 229 Nitto ATP Finals - Singles 67
Lucky Losers 168 Competition Format 67
Selection 168
Entries 67
Substitution 168 Alternate(s) 67
Direct Acceptances 67
M Selection List 67
Withdrawal 67
Main Draw 7 Order of Play 68
Mandatory Player Meeting 14
Round Robin 68
Massage Therapist 94 Prize Money and Points 70
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 94
Single Elimination Competition 70
ATP Tour Tournaments 94
No Show 328
Measuring Devices 114
Media Highlight Rights 18 O
Medical 197 Offenses 234
Bleeding 199
Offices 115
Cases & Decisions 200 On-Court Procedures 184
Evaluation 197 On-Court Requirements 184
Penalty 199 On-Court Timing Devices 108
Physical Incapacity 200
One Tournament Per Week 144
On-Site Access 119
Time-Out 198
On-Site Offenses 228
Vomiting 199 On-Site Prize Money Adjustment 48
Monday Finals 7 On-Site Prize Money Minimums 47
On-Site Procedures 228
N
Order of Play 180
Net 32, 114 Change 180
Net Judge 114
Notes / Reminders 180
Net Posts 114
Notification 180
Net Posts and Net Post Signage 114
Release Deadline 180
New/Conditional Tournaments 41 Other Circuit 213
Nitto ATP Finals - Doubles 70 Overrule 188
Competition Format 70
Entries 70 P
Alternates (s) 71 Payment of Fines 223, 242
Direct Acceptances 70 ATP Tour 242
Selection Lost 70
Withdrawal 70 Procedures for Appeal 242
Order of Play 71
388 389
INDEX INDEX
Physical Abuse 234 Qualifying 8
Physical Exam 14 Seed Placement 166
Physiotherapist 94 Singles
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 95, 96 Entry Deadline 130
ATP Tour Tournaments 94 General 8
Location. 8
Player Compensation & ATP Variable Bonus Pool Rule 63 Surface 8
Player Eligibility 14 Quality/Broadcast 19
Player Entry and Commitment To Rules 9 Questions of Fact 184
Player Introductions 211 Questions of Tennis Law 185
Player Lounge 119
Player Major Offenses 244 R
Player Obligations 22, 24 Racquet 229
Player Passes/Credentials 118 Racquet Abuse 234
Player Publicity and Promotion 15 Rain 180
Player Rights 185 Rankings
Player Treatment Room 124 Definitions 249
Player University 14 Eligibility 249
Playing Another event 223
Referee 103
Play-Up Regulation
Assignment and Designation Process 103
Restrictions 145
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 103
Point Penalty Schedule 233
ATP Tour Tournaments 103
Post-Match Media Availability 241
Practice Courts 109 Fees and Expenses 104
Premier Player Protocol 363 General 104
Privacy Notice (“HIPPA”) 339 Responsibilities 104
Prize Money 41 Waiver of Obligation 103
Charts 326
Release from Financial Commitment 50
General 42
Repeal of Withdrawal Fines/Penalties 223
Prize Money / Fee Payments Rest Periods - Minimums and Guidelines 180
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 48 Between Main Draw and Prior Week’s Tournament(s) 180
ATP Tour Tournaments 48 Between Main Draw and Qualifying 181
Prize Money Formula Rule 64 Between Main Draw Matches 182
Prizes and Non-Cash Awards 49 Between Semi-final and Final 183
PR & Marketing 93
Restrictions 231
Prohibited Promotional Fees 245
General 231
Promotional Activities 224
Punctuality 239 Government 231
Other Tennis event 231
Q Timing 231
Qualifier Reservations 23 Tobacco 231

390 391
INDEX INDEX
Retirement or Withdrawal Penalty (On-Site) 222 Sleeves 230
Retiring from the Professional Tennis Circuit 258 Socks 230
Review Official 98 Special Events - Exhibitions 17
Review of Penalties 226 Special Exempt Non Appearance 154
Re-warm up 193 Special Exempts 152, 329
Eligibility 152
S
Non-Appearance 329
Sawdust 110 Number 153
Scheduling Committee 177
Process 153
Scheduling of Matches 177
Daily Overview 178 Selection 153

Main Draw 177 Spectator seating 108

Considerations and Priorities 177
STARS Program 16
Qualifying 178 Penalties 241

Tournament Week Plan 177 Start of Match 184

Wednesday starts 181
Start of Tournament 184
Stoppage and Postponement of a Match 193
Scoreboards 114
Stringing Service 121
Scoring of Match 208
submersion bath 120
Seating and Attendance 19
Substitutions 168
Seats 108
Supervisor
Security at Tournaments 113 Assignment & Designation 96
Seeds 164
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 95, 96
Definition 164
ATP Tour Tournaments 94
Doubles 164
Fees and Expenses 97
Number 165
General 97
Placement 165
Responsibilities 97
Qualifying 166
Replacement 161, 176 Suspensions and Collection of Fines 247
Selection of Entries 159 Stay of Suspensions Pending Appeal 247
Shirt 229 Suspension for Non-Payment of Fines 247
Shoes 231 Suspension - Weeks/Scope 247
Clay Courts 231
Sweater 229
General 231
Grass Courts 231
T
Shorts 230 Tape Delay/Repeats 283
Shot clock 109 Taxes 49
Signs 108 Notice of Withholdings 49
Singles Draws 150 Withholding From Prize Money 49
Singles Finals Options 8 Temperature 115
Sleeveless 230 Tennis Equipment Manufacturer 228
392 393
INDEX INDEX
Ticketing 116 Verification of Call 188
Tier I and Tier II Agents 96 Video Review (“VR”) 193
Tier l 96 Violations/Fines 232
Tier ll 96 Commercial Identification 232

Time Violations 240 Other Tennis event 232

Toilet Break 196 Tennis Equipment Manufacturer’s logo 232
Tour Manager 93 Unacceptable Attire 232
Appointment 93
Virtual Insertion 289
Responsibilities 93
Tournament Credentialing 116
W
Tournament Director 93 Waiver of Claims 15
Appointment 93 Warm up 193
Responsibilities 93 Web Filtering
Internet 115
Tournament Financial Information 50
Tournament Financial Information Rule for Masters 1000 Tourna- Media Facilities 125
ments 50 Player Lounge 119
Tournament Obligations 19, 213 Wednesday starts 181
ATP Challenger Tour Tournaments 23 Wild Card Non-Appearance 223
Tournament Violations 213 Wild Cards 157
Tournament Week 7 Limitation 158
Towels 114, 229 Regulations 157
Transgender Athlete Participation 129 Restrictions
Transportation 123 Doubles 157
Treatment Room 124 Singles 157
Withdrawals 136
U Emergency Situations 134
United Cup 7, 73, 74, 76, 77, 82, 85, 108, 129, 226, 227, 250, 252, Method 136
253, 254, 255
No Play After Withdrawal 141
Unsatisfied Player Commitment Penalties 14
On-Site 222
Failure To Participate in the Nitto ATP Finals 14
Penalties 141, 222
Review of Penalties for Breach of Commitment 14
Unsportsmanlike Conduct 235 World Championships 67

V
Vacancies 168
Other Vacancy Procedures 176
Prior to Qualifying Competition 175
Qualifying started or finished 176
Ventilation 115
Verbal Abuse 234
394 395